Yamaha 02R96-v2 Owner`s manual

DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
Owner’s Manual
Keep This Manual For Future Reference.
EN
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with
these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may
cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all
installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on
different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in
is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer
authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service
Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig
håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte
batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW :
EARTH
BLUE :
NEUTRAL
BROWN :
LIVE
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd
samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som
rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E
or by the safety earth symbol
or coloured GREEN and YELLOW.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti
asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä
käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE
MUSIC (U.K.) LTD.
NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS
• Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.
• This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.
• Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het
moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur of gelieve
dan contact op te nemen met de vertegenwoordiging van Yamaha in
uw land.
• For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end
of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha representative office in
your country.
• Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.
• Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical
waste.
(lithium disposal)
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The above warning is located on the
side of the unit.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to
the presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
Warnings
3
Important Information
Warnings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connect this unit’s power cord only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this Owner’s Manual or as marked on the unit. Failure to do so is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding connection.
Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.
Do not allow water to enter this unit or allow the unit to become wet. Fire or electrical shock
may result.
Do not place heavy objects, including this unit, on top of the power cord. A damaged power
cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard. In particular, be careful not to place heavy objects
on a power cord covered by a carpet.
Do not place a container with liquid or small metal objects on top of this unit. Liquid or
metal objects inside this unit are a fire and electrical shock hazard.
This unit is equipped with a dedicated ground connection to prevent electrical shock.
Before connecting the power plug to an AC outlet, be sure to ground the unit. If the power
cord has a three-pin plug, it will provide sufficient grounding so long as the AC outlet is
grounded correctly.
Do not scratch, bend, twist, pull, or heat the power cord. A damaged power cord is a fire
and electrical shock hazard.
Do not remove the unit’s cover. You could receive an electrical shock. If you think internal
inspection, maintenance, or repair is necessary, contact your dealer.
Do not modify the unit. Doing so is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
If lightning begins to occur, turn off the power switch of the unit as soon as possible, and
unplug the power cable plug from the electrical outlet.
If there is a possibility of lightning, do not touch the power cable plug if it is still connected.
Doing so may be an electrical shock hazard.
Use only the included power cord for this unit. Using other types may be a fire and electrical
shock hazard.
The 02R96 has four rear-panel slots for installing mini-YGDAI cards. For technical reasons,
certain card combinations are not supported. Before installing any cards, check the Yamaha
web site to if your card is compatible. Installing cards that are not endorsed by Yamaha may
cause electrical shock, fire, or damage to the unit.
If the power cord is damaged (i.e., cut or a bare wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a
replacement. Using the unit with a damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard.
If you notice any abnormality, such as smoke, odor, or noise, or if a foreign object or liquid
gets inside the unit, turn it off immediately. Remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
Consult your dealer for repair. Using the unit in this condition is a fire and electrical shock
hazard.
Should this unit be dropped or the cabinet be damaged, turn the power switch off, remove
the power plug from the AC outlet, and contact your dealer. If you continue using the unit
without heeding this instruction, fire or electrical shock may result.
Cautions
•
Keep this unit away from the following locations:
— Locations exposed to oil splashes or steam, such as near cooking stoves, humidifiers, etc.
— Unstable surfaces, such as a wobbly table or slope.
— Locations exposed to excessive heat, such as inside a car with all the windows closed, or
places that receive direct sunlight.
— Locations subject to excessive humidity or dust accumulation.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
4
Important Information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hold the power cord plug when disconnecting it from an AC outlet. Never pull the cord. A
damaged power cord is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard.
Do not touch the power plug with wet hands. Doing so is a potential electrical shock hazard.
This unit has ventilation holes along the front underside and at the rear to prevent the internal temperature from rising too high. Do not block them. Blocked ventilation holes are a
fire hazard. In particular, do not operate the unit while it’s on its side, is upside down, or
while it’s covered with a cloth or dust sheet.
If you are using the optional MB02R96 Peak Meter Bridge, do not hold only the MB02R96
when moving the 02R96. Otherwise, the meter brackets may be damaged, the main unit
may malfunction, or you may be injured if the unit falls.
This unit is heavy. Use two or more people to carry it.
When you transport or move the 02R96 with the MB02R96 attached, do not permit impact
or stress on the cable connector that connects the MB02R96 to the 02R96. Otherwise, malfunction may occur.
To relocate the unit, turn the power switch off, remove the power plug from the AC outlet,
and remove all connecting cables. Damaged cables may cause fire or electrical shock.
When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible.
If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still
flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long
time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.
If you know you will not use this unit for a long period of time, such as when going on vacation, remove the power plug from the AC outlet. Leaving it connected is a potential fire hazard.
The inside of the unit should be cleaned periodically. Dust accumulation inside the unit
may cause malfunction and is a potential fire hazard. Consult your dealer for information
about cleaning.
To prevent electrical shock when cleaning the unit, remove the power plug from the AC outlet.
Do not apply oil, grease, or contact cleaner to the faders. Doing so may cause problems with
electrical contact or fader motion.
Do not use the headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume
level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.
Operating Notes
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
XLR-type connectors are wired as follows: pin 1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–).
Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows: sleeve–ground, tip–send, and ring–return.
The performance of components with moving contacts, such switches, rotary controls, faders, and connectors, deteriorates over time. The rate of deterioration depends on the operating environment and is unavoidable. Consult your dealer about replacing defective
components.
Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce noise. If noise occurs, use the telephone
away from the unit.
If the message “WARNING Low Battery!” appears when you turn on this unit, contact your
dealer as soon as possible about replacing the internal data backup battery. The unit will still
operate correctly, but data other than the presets will be lost.
Before replacing the batteries, back up your data to a memory card, or another unit by using
MIDI Bulk Dump.
The digital circuits of this unit may induce a slight noise into nearby radios and TVs. If noise
occurs, relocate the affected equipment.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Interference
•
•
5
When connecting D-sub cables, be sure to tighten the screws on both sides of the connector
securely. To disconnect the cable, loosen the screws completely, then remove the cable by
holding the connector part. Do not remove the plug by pulling the cable while the screws
are still attached. Otherwise, the connector may be damaged, leading to malfunction.
When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some
devices may output noise, so turn down your power amps beforehand, otherwise your
speakers may be damaged.
Interference
The 02R96 uses high-frequency digital circuits that may cause interference on radio and
television equipment located nearby. If interference is a problem, relocate the affected
equipment. Using a mobile telephone near the unit may induce noise. In this case use the
telephone away from the unit.
02R96 Exclusion of Certain Responsibility
Manufacturer, importer, or dealer shall not be liable for any incidental damages including
personal injury or any other damages caused by improper use or operation of the 02R96.
Trademarks
ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are registered trademarks of Alesis Corporation. Apogee is a trademark of Apogee Electronics, Inc.
Apple, Mac, and Power Macintosh are registered trademarks and Mac OS is a trademark of
Apple Corporation, Inc. HUI is a trademark of Mackie Designs, Inc. Intel and Pentium are
registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Nuendo is a registered trademark of Steinberg
Media Technologies AG. Pro Tools is a trademark or registered trademark of Digidesign
and/or Avid Technology, Inc. Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and Teac
are registered trademarks of Teac Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Inc. Waves is a trademark of Waves, Inc. Yamaha is a
trademark of Yamaha Corporation. Nuendo and Cubse SX are trademarks of Steinberg
Media Technologies GmbH. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.
Copyright
No part of the 02R96, its software, or this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Corporation.
© 2003 Yamaha Corporation. All rights reserved.
Yamaha Web Site
Further information about the 02R96, related products, and other Yamaha professional
audio equipment is available on the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at:
<http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>.
Package Contents
•
•
•
•
•
02R96 Digital Mixing Console
CD-ROM
Power cord
This manual
Studio Manager Installation Guide
Optional Extras
•
•
•
MB02R96 Peak Meter Bridge
SP02R96 Wooden Side Panels
mini YGDAI I/O cards
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
6
Important Information
About this Owner’s Manual
This Owner’s Manual covers the 02R96 Digital Mixing Console.
All the information you need in order to operate the 02R96 Digital Mixing Console is contained in this manual. Use the table of contents to familiarize yourself with the manual’s
organization and to locate tasks and topics, and use the index to locate specific information.
Before diving in, it’s recommend that you read the “Operating Basics” chapter, starting on
page 43.
Each chapter of this manual discusses a specific section or function of the 02R96. The Input
and Output Channels are explained in the following chapters: “Input Channels,” “Bus
Outs,” “Aux Sends,” and “Stereo Out.” Where possible, these chapters have been organized
in order of signal flow, from input through to output.
Functions such as EQ and Delay are common to all channels. Rather than repeat the same
information over and over, these functions are explained once in the “Common Channel
Functions” chapter, which starts on page 107. The Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends,
and Stereo Out chapters contain cross-references to the relevant sections of the “Common
Channel Functions” chapter.
Conventions Used in this Manual
The 02R96 features two types of button: physical buttons that you can press (e.g., ENTER
and DISPLAY) and buttons that appear on the display pages. References to physical buttons
are enclosed in square brackets, for example, “press the [ENTER] button.” References to display page buttons are not emphasized, for example, “press the ENTER button.”
Display pages can be selected by using the [DISPLAY] buttons or the Left Tab Scroll, Right
Tab Scroll, and F1–4 buttons below the display. In order to simplify explanations, only the
[DISPLAY] button method is mentioned in the procedures. See “Selecting Display Pages”
on page 45 for details on all the ways in which pages can be selected.
Installing the 02R96
The 02R96 should be placed on a strong and stable surface, somewhere that complies with
the warnings and cautions listed in the previous sections.
New Functions in 02R96 Version 2
The following functions have been added to the 02R96 as part of the upgrade of the firmware from version 1.2 to version 2.0.
Control Surface
•
•
Encoder mode now features an assignable function, ALT LAYER, which enables you to control the channel level for all 48 channels without switching between layers. → page 50
There are now 48 assignable Encoder mode parameters. → page 52
Input Channels
•
•
•
•
•
Surround Pan supports 6.1 Surround. → page 85
You can change the bus assigned to each surround pan channel. → page 87
The Fader Group Master function enables you to control the overall level of the Fader group
channels simultaneously while maintaining the relative level balance of each channel.
→ page 80
The Mute Group Master function enables you to mute all channels in a Mute group simultaneously. → page 79
The on/off status of the Follow Pan button is reflected in the pan and Surround Pan settings.
→ page 82
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
New Functions in 02R96 Version 2
7
Aux Sends
•
•
•
•
You can exclude channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus). → page 104
You can copy the channel fader positions to Aux Sends. → page 104
You can set all Send levels to nominal simultaneously. → page 99
If an Aux Send is set to pre-fader, you can set the Pre point before or after the [ON] button.
→ page 99
Common Channel Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
Input and Output Channel Meter pages indicate the gain reduction being applied by the
Gate and Compressor. → page 108
You can select whether the Input Channel’s Pan setting is used when the Input Channel Solo
signal is set to Pre Fader. → page 121
Raising the channel faders for soloed Channels from –∞ can unsolo the Channels.
→ page 121
The AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons enable you to solo or unsolo Aux Sends.
→ page 121
The Fader Group Master function enables you to control the overall level of the Fader group
channels simultaneously while maintaining the relative level balance of each channel.
→ page 127
The Mute Group Master function enables you to mute all channels in a Mute group simultaneously. → page 129
Monitor
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The level of the Surround Monitor can be reset to 85dB SPL. → page 138
A new parameter has been added to Base Management on the Surround Monitor Setup
page. → page 140
Surround Monitor is also available when Surround mode is set to Stereo.
You can simultaneously select BUS and SLOT on the Surround Monitor page.
You can select from Slot Channel 9 through Channel 16 as Surround Monitor signal sources.
You can simultaneously select 2TRD, D2, D3, A1, or A2, and STEREO, ASSIGN1, or
ASSIGN2 as Control Monitor signal sources.
You can select the Talkback mic signal as the Studio Monitor source. → page 142
Internal Effects and Plug-ins
•
You can add optional Add-On Effects to the preset effects. → page 157
Scene Memory
•
•
•
•
You can globally apply the Fade Time setting to all scenes. → page 166
You can globally apply the Recall Safe setting to all scenes. → page 167
Any channel or parameter settings in the current scene can be copied and pasted into other
scenes. → page 168
You can select more parameters for the Recall Safe function. → page 167
Automix
•
•
•
You can insert the current mix parameters in a region specified in the Automix data.
→ page 180
Touching the faders can punch parameter values in and out if the corresponding OVERWRITE button is set to on. → page 171
A parameter related to timecode synchronization has been added. → page 234
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
8
Important Information
Remote Control
•
•
The Joystick or the controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section enable you to control Pro
Tools Surround Pan settings.
The USER DEFINED KEYS enable you to switch windows in the included Studio Manager
application software.
Other Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A user-assignable layer enables you to assign Channels to Remote layer targets. → page 228
You can also select General DAW (for DAW software that supports the Pro Tools protocol)
or Cubase SX as the target for a Remote layer. → page 219
Yamaha’s proprietary Advanced DAW protocol has been added to Nuendo, Cubase SX, and
General DAW. This enables you to control these devices using the 02R96’s SELECTED
CHANNEL section. (Controllable functions vary depending on the DAW software and version you are using.)
You can now assign any of 174 functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS. → page 238
You can assign the selected channels to a Fader or Mute group using the USER DEFINED
KEYS. → page 238
An Operation Lock function prevents unintentional edits and uses a password to restrict
access to panel operation. → page 235
The Oscillator can output sine wave signals with different frequencies to the L and R channels and odd and even buses. → page 234
You can set the Auto Direct Out On check box so that if you change a channel’s Direct Out
destination, the channel Direct Out will automatically be enabled. → page 231
You can set the Routing ST Pair Link check box so that the routing from paired Channels to
the Stereo Bus is linked. → page 231
This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(Perchlorate)
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
Type of Equipment :
Model Name :
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620
714-522-9011
Digital Mixing Console
02R96
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected.
* This applies only to products distributed by
YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
(FCC DoC)
This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material
may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal information in the United States, refer to
the Electronic Industries Alliance web site: www.eiae.org
* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
(mercury)
9
Contents
Contents
1
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2
Control Surface & Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3
Operating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning On & Off the 02R96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Display Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Parameter Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Confirmation Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Title Edit Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Fader Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Encoder Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Analog I/O & the AD Input Section . . . . . . . . . . . 53
AD Input Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Room Monitor Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Studio Monitor Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2TR Analog INs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
53
54
54
54
54
54
Digital I/O & Cascading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Wordclocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2TR Digital Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2TR Digital Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2TR In Sampling Rate Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dithering Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cascading Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
43
43
44
45
45
46
46
46
47
48
49
50
51
55
57
58
58
59
62
62
63
Input & Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Input Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming Input & Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patch Select Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patching with the Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
68
71
71
72
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
10
Contents
7
Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Patching Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metering Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reversing the Signal Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gating Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuating Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQ’ing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Input Channel EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Channel Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compressing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Input Channel Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delaying Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting Input Channels (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Input Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Channel Mute Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Input Channel Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Input Channel Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Master for Input Channel Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panning Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Surround Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning Surround Channels to Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Input Channels to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soloing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pairing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Input Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the MS Stereo Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
73
73
73
74
75
75
76
76
76
77
77
77
78
79
79
79
80
82
83
85
87
90
90
90
90
90
90
91
Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Stereo Out Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patching the Stereo Out to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Input Channels to the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metering the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuating the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQ’ing the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Master EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stereo Out Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compressing the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Master Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting the Stereo Out (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Stereo Out Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Master Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Balancing the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delaying the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Stereo Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
94
94
94
94
11
Contents
9
Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Patching Bus Outs to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Input Channels to Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metering Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuating Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQ’ing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Master EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Out Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compressing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Master Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting Bus Outs (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Bus Out Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Master Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delaying Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soloing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pairing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Bus Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
97
97
97
10 Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Patching Aux Send Masters to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting the Aux Send Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Setting Aux Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Aux Send Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Viewing Aux Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Panning Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Metering Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Monitoring Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Attenuating Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
EQ’ing Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Grouping Master EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Aux Send Master Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Compressing Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Grouping Master Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Muting Aux Send Masters (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Settings Aux Send Master Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Grouping Master Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Delaying Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Soloing Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Pairing Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Viewing Aux Send Master Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Naming Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
12
Contents
11 Common Channel Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuating Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Output Channel EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compressing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Output Channel Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delaying Channel Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soloing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pairing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Output Channel Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Master for the Output Channel Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Channel Mute Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Channel Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Channel Fader Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
110
111
114
115
116
119
120
121
123
126
127
128
129
129
130
134
12 Monitoring & Talkback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Control Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Studio Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surround Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Talkback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
137
138
142
13 Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
About the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Library Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Patch Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Patch Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Effects Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus to Stereo Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gate Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comp Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automix Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surround Monitor Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
143
144
145
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
14 Internal Effects & Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
About the Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patching Effects Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preset Effects & Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Optional Add-On Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
153
153
153
156
157
158
159
160
Contents
13
15 Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
About Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Auto Scene Memory Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Using the Scene Memory Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fading Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Recalling Scenes Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Sorting Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
16 Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
About Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
What’s Recorded in an Automix? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Automix Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Automix Memory Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fader Edit Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Creating a Time Signature Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Recording an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Rerecording Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Parameter Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Punching In & Out Individual Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Playing Back an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Editing Events Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Event Edit Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
17 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
MIDI & the 02R96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
MIDI I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
MIDI Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
MIDI Channel Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Assigning Scenes to Program Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Using Bulk Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
14
Contents
18 Pro Tools Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Configuring Windows Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Macintosh Computers (MacOS 8.6 to 9.2.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Macintosh Computer (MacOS X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the 02R96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Pro Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Channel Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panning Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soloing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Send Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Sends as Pre or Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Muting Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panning Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flip Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bypassing Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting Faders, Sends, & Panpots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating the Edit Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Fine Adjustments to the Selected Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrub & Shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196
196
196
197
197
199
209
209
209
209
210
210
210
210
210
210
211
212
213
214
214
214
215
215
215
216
217
19 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
About the Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
About Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
GPI (General Purpose Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
20 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Using the User Assignable Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the User Defined Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the Battery and the System Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing the 02R96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
228
229
230
234
235
237
237
237
Contents
15
Appendix A: Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
USER DEFINED KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Input Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Initial Input Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Output Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Initial Output Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Initial Input Channel Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Initial Output Channel Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Initial Input Port Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Initial Output Port Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
GPI Trigger Source & Target List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Effects and tempo synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Preset EQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Preset Gate Parameters
(fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Dynamics Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Appendix B: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
General Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Analog Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Analog Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Digital Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Digital Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
I/O Slot Spec (1–4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Control I/O Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Appendix C: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Scene Memory to Program Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Format Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Appendix D: Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
MB02R96 Peak Meter Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
SP02R96 Wooden Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
16
Chapter 1—Welcome
1 Welcome
Thank you for choosing the Yamaha 02R96 Digital Mixing Console.
The 02R96 Digital Mixing Console offers 24-bit/96 kHz digital audio processing without
compromise, comprehensive surround mixing and monitoring, including bass management, and hands-on control of popular DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) systems.
Sonic Spec
•
•
•
•
•
Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling A/D converters
Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling D/A converters
20 Hz–40 kHz (0.5, –1.5 dB) frequency response at 96 kHz sampling rate
105 dB typical dynamic range (AD Input to Stereo Out)
32-bit internal signal processing (58-bit accumulator)
Channel Architecture
•
•
•
•
•
•
56 Input Channels, with Direct Outs
8 Bus Outs, with to Stereo Out routing for subgrouping
8 Aux Sends
Stereo Out
Channels can be named for easy identification
Channel library with 127 user memories
I/O Architecture
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
16 analog mic inputs on balanced XLRs (plus 48 V phantom) 24 analog line inputs on balanced phone jacks
16 analog inserts
32 inputs, 32 outputs via four mini-YGDAI slots and optional I/O cards, which offer a variety of analog and digital I/O options, with support for all the popular digital audio
interconnect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, Tascam TDIF-1, and mLAN.
8 assignable Omni outputs
1 AES/EBU, 2 Coaxial 2-track digital input, with sampling rate converters for connecting
44.1/48 kHz legacy digital audio equipment
1 AES/EBU, 2 Coaxial 2-track digital output
2 analog 2-track inputs
XLR and phono connector stereo outputs
Control room monitor outputs
Dedicated studio monitor outputs
Double channel digital I/O for use with legacy 44.1/48 kHz multitrack recorders
Cascade ports for cascading up to four 02R96s (i.e., 224 Input Channels)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Welcome
17
I/O Patching
•
•
•
•
Any available input port can be patched to the Input Channels, Insert Ins, or Effects inputs
Direct Outs, Insert Outs, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo Out can be patched to any
output port
Input and output ports can be named for easy identification
Patches can be stored in the Input and Output Patch libraries
EQ
•
•
4-band parametric EQ on all Input and Output Channels
EQ library with 40 presets, 160 user memories
Groups & Pairs
•
•
•
•
•
•
Horizontal and vertical pairing of Input Channels
Horizontal pairing of Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Surround Pan
8 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel Fader groups
8 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel Mute groups
4 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel EQ groups
4 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel Compressor groups
Effects
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4 internal effects processors
Effects library with 61 presets, 67 user memories (presets 53–61 are used for optional
Add-On Effects.)
Optional Add-On Effect package includes effects that featuring new algorithms.
Multichannel effects for surround sound processing
Joystick control of early reflections and reverb with the Reverb 5.1 effect
Optional Waves 56K effects plug-in cards
User defined plug-ins for external effects control via MIDI, with Learn function
Dynamics
•
•
•
•
Gates on all 56 Input Channels
Gate library with 4 presets, 124 user memories
Compressors on all Input Channels and Out Channels (74 in total)
Compressor library with 36 presets, 92 user memories
Automation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dynamic automation of virtually all mix parameters, with 1/4-frame accuracy
Automix library with 16 memories
Snapshot style automation with 99 Scene memories, recallable via MIDI or Automix
Individual fade time settings for all Input and Output faders
Scene and library recalls
Punch in/out entire channels with dedicated [AUTO] buttons, or individual parameters
Editing fader moves with Fader Return, Fader Takeover, Absolute/Relative modes
Offline event editing includes, erase, copy, move/merge, trim, duplicate, delete, and insert
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
18
Chapter 1—Welcome
Surround Sound
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-1, 5.1 and 6.1 Surround modes
Joystick control
Bass management
Monitor matrix
Surround monitor speaker alignment functions
Surround monitor library with 32 user memories
Remote Control
•
•
•
•
Control and manage your 02R96 from your Mac or PC by using the bundled Studio Manager software
Remote Layers for external equipment control, including predefined targets for controlling
DAW systems, and user defined targets for controlling MIDI equipment, with Learn function
Comprehensive machine control via MMC, including transport, track arming, jog/shuttle,
and built-in locator with eight Locate memories
Assignable GPI (General Purpose Interface) port for external control and “Recording” light
MIDI
•
•
•
Standard MIDI ports, USB TO HOST port, or SERIAL TO HOST port
USB, and SERIAL offer multiport operation
Scene recall, mix parameter control, Bulk Dump, MTC and MIDI Clock for Automix synchronization, MMC for external machine control
Control Surface
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
25 touch-sensitive 100-mm motorized faders (touch sense used to select channels or punch
faders in/out during Automix recording)
Use the faders to set channel levels or Aux Send levels
Use the 24 Encoders to control Pan, Aux Send levels, or user assigned parameters
Channels arranged into two Input Layers, Master Layer, and Remote Layer
320 x 240 dot LCD display with fluorescent backlight
Complete hands-on control of all channel functions via the SELECTED CHANNEL section
2-digit Scene memory display
4 EQ displays for frequency, gain, and Q
16 user-definable buttons make light work of repetitive tasks
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
EFFECTS/PLUG-INS (p. 24)
FADER MODE (p. 22)
ENCODER MODE (p. 22)
AUX SELECT (p. 21)
DISPLAY ACCESS (p. 23)
AD Input Section (p. 20)
10
AUX 6
SOLO
ON
2
SOLO
ON
1
0
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
2
26
50
SEL
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
2
3
27
51
3
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
PLUG INS
1
SEL
1
25
49
FADER
AUX
ASSIGN 1
AUX 7
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
4
28
52
4
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
3
CHANNEL
INSERTS
EFFECTS / PLUG INS
AUTO
5
AUX
FADER MODE
PAN
ENCODER MODE
AUX 2
AUX 1
AUX 5
INTERNAL
EFFECTS
0
5
GROUP
PAIR
AUX 3
INPUT
PATCH
REMOTE
MIDI
AUX SELECT
METER
DIO
SETUP
OFF
ON
4
OFF
ON
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
2
5
29
53
5
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
4
ASSIGN
AUX 8
AUX 4
OUTPUT
PATCH
VIEW
UTILITY
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
SIGNAL
AUTOMIX
AUTO
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
INSERT
DISPLAY ACCESS
INSERT
3
1
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
2
OFF
ON
-60
SIGNAL
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
SIGNAL
OFF
ON
-60
ON
OFF
PEAK
GAIN
26dB
+ 48V
SIGNAL
-16
26dB
ON
OFF
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
5
6
30
54
6
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
INSERT
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
OFF
ON
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
SIGNAL
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
Channel strips (p. 20)
PAD
+ 48V
6
7
31
55
7
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
INSERT
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
8
10
AUX 2
AUX 1
10
ON
SOLO
SEL
10
34
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
OFF
ON
AUTO
INSERT
9
33
10
5
9
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
OFF
ON
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
SIGNAL
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
9
10
11
35
OFF
ON
AUX 3
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
11
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
SIGNAL
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
10
12
36
12
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
AUX 4
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
INSERT
11
13
37
13
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
14
38
12
10
15
39
15
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUX 7
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
OFF
ON
AUTO
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
SIGNAL
AUX 6
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
14
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
OFF
ON
10
5
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
SIGNAL
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
AUX 5
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
OFF
ON
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
SIGNAL
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
13
10
16
40
OFF
ON
AUX 8
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
16
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
SIGNAL
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
17
41
17
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
DISPLAY
EQ ON
10
15
OFF
ON
DIRECT
8
16
INSERT
125
kHz
Hz
dB
GAIN
LOW
18
42
18
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
9
1
19
43
19
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
11
3
10
20
44
21
45
21
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
14
6
10
22
46
BUS 6
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
22
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
15
7
AUTO
23
47
23
ON
SOLO
SEL
Q
24
48
BUS 8
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
24
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
ON
SEL
AUTO
ENTER
SCRUB
SHUTTLE
STOP
REW
SET
DISPLAY
2TR A1
STEREO
2TR A2
10
SLOT
DIMMER
DEC
PLAY
5
FF
2
6
1
3
REC
7
8
4
INC
TALKBACK
0
10
CONTROL ROOM LEVEL
0
10
SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL
BUS
ASSIGN1
ASSIGN2
SURROUND
2TR D3
2TR D2
2TR D1
CONTROL ROOM
CLEAR
SOLO
AUX8
STEREO
STUDIO
CONTROL
ROOM
AUX7
0
PHONES
LEVEL
STEREO (p. 30)
STEREO
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
MASTER
10
10
PHONES
MONITOR
STUDIO
LEVEL
0
0
TALKBACK LEVEL
MACHINE CONTROL
LOCATE MEMORY
RECALL
kHz
Hz
dB
GAIN
DISPLAY
10.0
REMOTE
STEREO
25 48
1 24
LAYER
STORE
Q
EFFECT
HIGH
GAIN
FREQUENCY
RELEASE
GRAB
HOLD
LINK
DECAY
SCENE MEMORY
kHz
Hz
dB
GAIN
HIGH MID
ATTACK
ATTACK
00
10
34
24
23 24
4.00
5
23
34
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
FREQUENCY
DISPLAY
BUS 7
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
16
8
kHz
Hz
dB
GAIN
LOW MID
1.00
BUS 5
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
13
5
Q
FREQUENCY
RATIO
EVEN
ODD
THRESHOLD
R
R
L
COMP
BUS 4
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
20
ON
21 22
RANGE
SOLO
SEL
DELAY
PAN / SURROUND
PHASE /
INSERT
DISPLAY ACCESS
GAIN
PEAK
+10
GAIN
SIGNAL
34
22
+10
PEAK
GAIN
21
34
SIGNAL
+10
GAIN
THRESHOLD
AUTO
12
4
19 20
34
20
+10
SELECTED CHANNEL
17 18
19
34
LAYER (p. 30)
BUS 3
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
10
2
USER DEFINED KEYS
Q
FREQUENCY
EQUALIZER
GAIN
PEAK
+10
GAIN
SIGNAL
34
18
+10
GATE / COMP
GATE
L
17
34
PEAK
GAIN
GAIN
Data Entry & Transport
(p. 33)
MACHINE CONTROL (p. 32)
SCENE MEMORY (p. 31)
MONITOR Section (p. 34)
Monitor, Phones & Talkback
Section (p. 34)
SELECTED CHANNEL Section (p. 26)
SIGNAL
+10
+10
DISPLAY
OFF
ON
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
SIGNAL
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
GATE ON COMP ON
DYNAMICS
STEREO
7
6
4
3
5
2
1
ROUTING
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
SIGNAL
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
BUS 2
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
BUS 1
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
DISPLAY
OFF
ON
FOLLOW PAN
10
5
14
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
SIGNAL
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
USER DEFINED KEYS (p. 31)
8
32
56
8
ON
SOLO
SEL
7
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
SIGNAL
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
AUTO
OFF
ON
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
SIGNAL
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
Display Section (p. 25)
Control Surface & Rear Panel
19
2 Control Surface & Rear Panel
Control Surface
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
20
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
AD Input Section
AD Input #1 is shown at the top; AD Inputs #17 and #18 below.
+ 48V
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
OFF
A +48V ON/OFF switches (AD 1–16)
These switches turn on and off the +48 V phantom power feed to each INPUT A
(XLR-type connector). Phantom power is typically used to power condenser-type
microphones or direct boxes. See “Phantom Power (AD 1–16)” on page 53 for
more information.
PAD
26dB
-60
-16
GAIN
PEAK
B PAD switches (AD 1–16)
These switches turn on and off the 26 dB pad (attenuator) for each AD Input. See
“Pad (AD 1–16)” on page 53 for more information.
SIGNAL
1
OFF
ON
INSERT
C GAIN controls
These controls adjust the gain of the AD Input Head Amps. They have an input
sensitivity of –16 dB to –60 dB or +10 dB to –34 dB when Pad is on. AD Inputs 17
to 24 have an input sensitivity of +10 dB to –34 dB. See “Gain” on page 53 for
more information.
17
D PEAK indicators
3
+10
34
These indicators light up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping. See
“PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators” on page 53 for more information.
18
+10
4
5
GAIN
GAIN
34
E SIGNAL indicators
PEAK
These indicators light up when the input signal level is 20 dB below nominal. See
“PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators” on page 53 for more information.
SIGNAL
17 18
F INSERT ON/OFF switches (AD 1–16)
These switches are for turning on and off the AD Input inserts. See “AD Inserts
(AD 1–16)” on page 54 for more information.
Channel strips
Channel strip #1 is shown here.
The function of each channel strip depends on the currently selected Layer. See
“Selecting Layers” on page 47 for more information.
1
A Encoders
2
These controls are used to edit Input and Output Channel parameters. Their exact
operation depends on the currently selected Encoder mode and Layer. There are
two preset Encoder modes, Pan and Aux, and two assignable modes, with over 40
parameters to choose from. See “Selecting Encoder Modes” on page 50 for more
information.
The Encoders feature push switches that are used to punch the parameter currently assigned to the Encoders in and out during Automix recording. See
“Punching In & Out Individual Parameters” on page 183 for more information.
AUTO
3
SEL
4
SOLO
5
ON
1
B AUTO buttons
10
6
These buttons are used to set Automix recording and playback for each channel.
Their exact operation depends on the currently selected Layer. Their indicators
light up orange in Record-Ready mode, red while recording, and green during
playback. See “Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons” on page 174 for more information.
5
0
5
10
C SEL buttons
15
20
30
40
50
1
25
49
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
These buttons are used to select Input and Output Channels for editing with the
SELECTED CHANNEL section. Their exact operation depends on the currently
selected Layer. The [SEL] button indicator of the currently selected channel lights
up. See “Selecting Channels” on page 48 for more information. The [SEL] buttons
can also be used to pair channels, and to add and remove channels to and from the
EQ, Comp, Fader, and Mute groups.
Control Surface
21
D SOLO buttons
These buttons are used to solo Channels. The [SOLO] button indicators of channels that
are soloed light up. See “Soloing Channels” on page 121 for more information.
E ON buttons
These buttons are used to mute Input and Output Channels. Their exact operation depends
on the currently selected Layer. The [ON] button indicators of channels that are on light up.
You can also use these buttons along with the AUX SELECT buttons to turn Aux Sends on
and off (Mix Minus) (page 104).
F Channel faders
These 100 mm touch-sensitive motorized faders are used to set the levels of Input Channels,
Bus Outs, and Aux Sends. Their exact operation depends on the currently selected Fader
mode and Layer. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 49 for more information. Faders can
be grouped for simultaneous operation. See “Grouping Input Channel Faders” on page 79
and “Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 126 for more information.
Faders can also be used to select Input and Output Channels. See “Auto Channel Select &
Touch Sense Select” on page 49 for more information. They can also be used to punch channels in and out during Automix recording. See “Punching In & Out Individual Parameters”
on page 183 for more information.
AUX SELECT
1
AUX SELECT
DISPLAY
AUX 1
AUX
2
AUX 3
AUX
4
5
AUX
6
AUX 7
AUX
8
AUX
2
A AUX SELECT DISPLAY button
This button is used to select the following pages: Aux Send, Aux Send Pan, and Input Channel Aux View. See “Aux Sends” on page 98 for more information.
B AUX 1–8 buttons
These buttons are used to select Aux Sends when sending Input Channel signals to Aux
Sends. The button indicator of the currently selected Aux Send lights up. If the currently
selected Aux Send is paired, the indicator of its partner flashes. See “Aux Sends” on page 98
for more information. These buttons can also be used to pair Aux Sends. See “Pairing Channels” on page 123 for more information.
Using these buttons along with the channel [ON] buttons enables you to turn Aux Sends on
and off (Mix Minus) (page 104).
Using these buttons along with the LAYER buttons enables you to copy the corresponding
channel levels to the Aux Send levels.
These buttons are also used to turn the Aux Out Solo function on and off when Aux/Solo
Link is turned on (page 121).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
22
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
ENCODER MODE
1
ENCODER MODE
DISPLAY
PAN
ASSIGN 1
AUX
2 3
ASSIGN
2
4
A ENCODER MODE DISPLAY button
This button is used to select the Encoder Mode Assign page. See “Selecting Encoder Modes”
on page 50 for more information.
B PAN button
This button is used to select the Pan Encoder mode. Its indicator lights up when this mode
is selected. In this mode, the Encoders function as Pan controls while an Input Channel
Layer is selected. While the Master Layer is selected, Encoders 1–8 function as Input Channel 49–56 Pan controls, and Encoders 9–24 are inactive. See “Selecting Encoder Modes” on
page 50 for more information.
C AUX button
This button is used to select the Aux Encoder mode. Its indicator lights up when this mode
is selected. In this mode, the Encoders function as Aux Send level controls when an Input
Channel Layer is selected. While the Master Layer is selected, Encoders 1–8 function as
Input Channel 49–56 Aux Send controls, and Encoders 9–24 are inactive. See “Selecting
Encoder Modes” on page 50.
D ASSIGN 1 & 2 buttons
These buttons are used to select the assignable Encoder modes. The button indicator for the
currently selected mode lights up. When an assignable mode is selected, the function of the
Encoders depends on the assigned parameter. Up to two parameters, from a list of over 40,
can be assigned to these two buttons. See “Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE
Assign Buttons” on page 51 for more information.
FADER MODE
FADER MODE
FADER
AUX
1 2
A FADER button
This button selects Fader mode, in which the faders control Input or Output Channel levels,
depending on the currently selected Layer. Its indicator lights up when this mode is selected.
See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 49 for more information.
B AUX button
This button selects the Aux Fader mode, in which the faders control Aux Send levels. Its
indicator lights up when this mode is selected. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 49 for
more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface
23
DISPLAY ACCESS
1 2 3 4
DISPLAY ACCESS
5
6
AUTOMIX
DIO
SETUP
UTILITY
MIDI
REMOTE
METER
VIEW
PAIR
GROUP
INPUT
PATCH
OUTPUT
PATCH
7
8
9 J K L
A AUTOMIX button
This button is used to select the following Automix pages: Automix Main, Automix Memory, Fader Edit, Event Copy, and Event Edit. See “Automix” on page 170 for more information.
B DIO button
This button is used to select the following pages: Word Clock Select, Dither, Cascade In,
Cascade Out, Sampling Rate Converter, and Higher Sample Rate Data Transfer Format. See
“Digital I/O & Cascading” on page 55 for more information.
C SETUP button
This button is used to select the following pages: Preferences 1, Preferences 2, Preferences 3,
MIDI/TO HOST Setup, GPI Setup, Input Port Name, Output Port Name, Time Reference,
Time Signature, and Surround Bus Setup.
D UTILITY button
This button is used to select the following pages: Oscillator, Channel Status Monitor, Battery Check, and Operation Lock.
E REMOTE button
This button is used to select the Remote page. See “About the Remote Layer” on page 219
for more information.
F MIDI button
This button is used to select the following pages: MIDI Setup, Program Change Assign
Table, Control Change Assign Table, and Bulk Dump. See “MIDI” on page 190 for more
information.
G METER button
This button is used to select the following pages: Input Channel Meter, Master Meter, Effect
1-4 Input/Output Meter, Stereo Meter, and Metering Position. See “Metering” on page 107
for more information.
H VIEW button
This button is used to select the following pages: Parameter View, Fader View, and Channel
Library. See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 129, “Viewing Channel Fader
Settings” on page 130, and “Channel Library” on page 144 for more information.
I PAIR button
This button is used to select the Input and Output Pair pages. See “Pairing Channels” on
page 123 for more information.
J GROUP button
This button is used to select the following pages: Input Channel Fader Group, Input Channel Mute Group, Output Fader Group, Output Mute Group, Input Equalizer Link, Output
Equalizer Link, Input Comp Link, Output Comp Link, Input Fader Group Master, and
Output Fader Group Master.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
24
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
K INPUT PATCH button
This button is used to select the following pages: Input Channel Patch, Input Channel Insert
In Patch, Effect Input/Output Patch, Input Channel Name, and Input Patch Library. See
“Input Patching” on page 66 for more information.
L OUTPUT PATCH button
This button is used to select the following pages: Slot Output Patch, Omni Out Patch, Output Insert In Patch, Input Channel Direct Out Destination, 2TR Out Digital Patch, Output
Channel Name, and Output Patch Library. See “Output Patching” on page 68 for more
information.
EFFECTS/PLUG-INS
2 3 4
1
EFFECTS / PLUG INS
DISPLAY
INTERNAL
EFFECTS
PLUG INS
CHANNEL
INSERTS
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
A EFFECTS/PLUG-INS DISPLAY button
This button is used to select the following pages: Effects Edit, Effects Library, Plug-In Setup,
and Plug-In Edit. See “Internal Effects & Plug-Ins” on page 153 for more information.
B INTERNAL EFFECTS button
This button is used to select the internal effects processors in conjunction with the
EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–4] buttons. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Editing
Effects” on page 156 for more information.
C PLUG-INS button
This button is used to select the Plug-Ins in conjunction with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS
[1–4] buttons. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Editing Plug-Ins” on page 160
for more information.
D CHANNEL INSERTS button
If an internal effects processor or Y56K card effect is inserted in the currently selected channel, the relevant Effects Edit or Plug-In Edit page appears when this button is pressed, and
its indicator lights up. In addition, the corresponding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–4] button
indicator flashes. If it’s a Y56K that is inserted, the [PLUG-INS] button indicator also
flashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button indicator
flashes. A warning message appears if there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected
channel. See “Editing Effects” on page 156 and “Editing Plug-Ins” on page 160 for more
information.
E EFFECTS/PLUG-INS 1–4 buttons
These buttons are used to select the internal effects processors and Plug-Ins in conjunction
with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [INTERNAL EFFECTS] and [PLUG-INS] buttons. The button indicator of the currently selected internal effects processor or Plug-In lights up. While
the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button indicator is lit, all of these buttons
are inactive.
F Parameter Up/Down buttons
These buttons are used to select the rows of internal effects processor and Plug-In parameters for editing with Parameter controls 1–4. The parameters in the currently selected row
appear highlighted. Up to 16 parameters can be displayed at a time. If more are available,
an up or down arrow is displayed. See “Editing Effects” on page 156 and “Editing Plug-Ins”
on page 160 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface
25
G Parameter controls 1–4
These are rotary controls and push switches. The rotary controls are used to edit the parameters of the currently selected internal effects processor or Plug-In. When the Effects Edit
page is selected, they control the currently selected row of parameters, rows being selected
by the Parameter Up/Down buttons. See “Editing Effects” on page 156 and “Editing
Plug-Ins” on page 160 for more information.
The push switches are used to punch the Effects or Plug-In parameters currently being controlled by the rotary controls in and out during Automix recording. See “Punching In & Out
Individual Parameters” on page 183 for more information.
Display Section
1
2
3
4
5
A Display
This 320 x 240 dot display with fluorescent backlight displays pages, information on the
currently selected Scene and channel, the sampling rate, and more. See “About the Display”
on page 44 for more information.
B Contrast control
This control is used to adjust the contrast of the display.
C F1–F4 buttons
These buttons are used to select the pages whose tabs are currently visible. See “Selecting
Display Pages” on page 45 for more information.
D Left Tab Scroll button
This button, which is active only when the left Tab Scroll arrow is displayed, is used to display the tabs of pages available to the left of the currently selected page. See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 45 for more information.
E Right Tab Scroll button
This button, which is active only when the right Tab Scroll arrow is displayed, is used to display the tabs of pages available to the right of the currently selected page. See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 45 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
26
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
SELECTED CHANNEL Section
SELECTED CHANNEL
ROUTING
DISPLAY ACCESS
DISPLAY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
STEREO
DIRECT
PHASE /
INSERT
DELAY
PAN / SURROUND
DISPLAY
FOLLOW PAN
L
R
L
R
ODD
EVEN
LINK
GRAB
EFFECT
DYNAMICS
DISPLAY
GATE ON COMP ON
GATE / COMP
GATE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
ATTACK
DECAY
HOLD
COMP
THRESHOLD
RATIO
ATTACK
RELEASE
GAIN
EQUALIZER
LOW
LOW MID
HIGH MID
HIGH
DISPLAY
FREQUENCY
Q
FREQUENCY
GAIN
Q
125
EQ ON
Q
GAIN
FREQUENCY
GAIN
1.00
4.00
Hz
Hz
kHz
kHz
kHz
Q
GAIN
dB
dB
dB
dB
Hz
FREQUENCY
10.0
Hz
kHz
The subsections of the SELECTED CHANNEL section are explained below.
ROUTING
1
ROUTING
DISPLAY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
STEREO
DIRECT
5
2
FOLLOW PAN
3 4
A ROUTING DISPLAY button
This button is used to select the following pages: Input Channel Routing, Bus to Stereo, and
Bus to Stereo Library. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 82 and “Sending Bus Outs to
the Stereo Out” on page 97 for more information.
B FOLLOW PAN button
This button determines whether or not the currently selected Input Channel’s pan setting,
and Surround pan setting are applied to the Bus Outs. Its indicator lights up when it’s
pressed. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 82 for more information.
C STEREO button
This button is used to route the currently selected Input Channel to the Stereo Out. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 82 for more information.
D DIRECT button
This button is used to route the currently selected Input Channel to its Direct Out. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 82 for more information.
E ROUTING 1–8 buttons
These buttons are used to route the currently selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs. The
button indicators of Bus Outs to which the Input Channel is routed light up. See “Routing
Input Channels” on page 82 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface
27
DISPLAY ACCESS
DISPLAY ACCESS
PHASE /
INSERT
DELAY
1 2
A PHASE/INSERT button
This button is used to select the Input Channel Phase and Insert pages. See “Reversing the
Signal Phase” on page 73 and “Using Inserts” on page 115 for more information.
B DELAY button
This button is used to select the Delay pages. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 120
for more information.
DYNAMICS
2 3
1
4
5
DYNAMICS
DISPLAY
GATE ON COMP ON
GATE / COMP
GATE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
ATTACK
DECAY
HOLD
COMP
THRESHOLD
RATIO
ATTACK
RELEASE
GAIN
6
A DYNAMICS DISPLAY button
This button is used to select the following pages: Gate Edit, Gate Library, Comp Edit, and
Comp Library. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 74 and “Compressing Channels” on
page 116 for more information.
B GATE ON button
This button is used to turn the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate on and off. Its indicator lights up when the Gate is on. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 74 for more information.
C COMP ON button
This button is used to turn the currently selected channel’s Compressor on and off. Its indicator lights up when the Compressor is on. See “Compressing Channels” on page 116 for
more information.
D GATE/COMP button
This button is used to set the rotary controls for either Gate or Compressor operation.
When an Output Channel is selected, Compressor is selected automatically and cannot be
changed. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 74 and “Compressing Channels” on
page 116 for more information.
E THRESHOLD, RANGE, ATTACK, DECAY, HOLD (THRESHOLD, RATIO, ATTACK,
RELEASE, GAIN) controls
When the GATE/COMP button is set to GATE, these controls set the Threshold, Range,
Attack, Decay, and Hold parameters of the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate. When
it’s set to COMP, they set the Threshold, Ratio, Attack, Release, and Gain parameters of the
currently selected channel’s Compressor. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 74 and
“Compressing Channels” on page 116 for more information.
F GATE/COMP indicators
These indicators show whether the rotary controls are set to control a Gate or Compressor.
The GATE indicator lights up when they’re set to control a Gate; the COMP indicator, when
they’re set to control a Compressor. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 74 and “Compressing Channels” on page 116 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
28
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
PAN/SURROUND
8
PAN / SURROUND
1
DISPLAY
L
R
L
R
ODD
EVEN
2
3
LINK
4
GRAB
EFFECT
5 67
A PAN/SURROUND DISPLAY button
This button is used to select the Input Channel Pan pages, the Surround Mode page, and
the Surround Edit pages. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 83 and “Using Surround
Pan” on page 85.
B L & R buttons
These buttons can be used to select horizontally or vertically partnered Input or Output
Channels. They can be used to select the left and right channels when the Stereo Out is
selected. For Input Channels, in Individual Pan mode, the [L] button indicator lights up
when an odd/left channel is selected; the [R] button indicator, when an even/right channel
is selected. In Gang or Inverse Gang Pan mode, the button indicator of the other channel in
the pair flashes while its partner is selected.
C PAN display
This 10-segment display indicates the pan position of the currently selected Input Channel.
When pan is set to center, the center two segments light up. When the Stereo Out is selected,
it displays the balance.
D PAN control
This rotary control is used to pan the currently selected Input Channel. When the Stereo
Out is selected, it is used to set the balance. For Input Channels in Gang or Inverse Gang
Pan mode, horizontally or vertically paired Input Channels are panned simultaneously. See
“Panning Input Channels” on page 83 and “Balancing the Stereo Out” on page 94.
E LINK button
This button, which is enabled only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected, is
used to link the PAN control and the Joystick so that either control can be used for normal
and surround panning. It’s a global setting that applies to all Input Channels. Its indicator
lights up when the PAN control and Joystick are linked. If the Joystick is set to control effects
(i.e., the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit), this button is disabled. See “Panning Input
Channels” on page 83 and “Using Surround Pan” on page 85 for more information.
F GRAB button
This button is used to turn on and off Joystick control for the currently selected Input Channel. Its indicator lights up when Grab is on. When Grab is on, the Joystick can be used to
control the currently selected Input Channel’s surround pan position. When turned off, the
Joystick does not control surround pan. In Stereo mode, it controls the currently-selected
Input Channel’s pan position. If the PAN control and the Joystick are linked (i.e., the
[LINK] button indicator is lit), Grab is turned off if the PAN control is adjusted. If the Joystick is set to control effects (i.e., the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit), this button is disabled.
G EFFECT button
This button is used to select the Joystick for parameter control of the Reverb 5.1 effect. Its
indicator lights up when Reverb 5.1 effect control is on, and the Joystick cannot be used for
surround panning. See “REVERB 5.1” on page 276 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface
29
H Joystick
This control can be used for surround panning, normal panning, or parameter control of
the Reverb 5.1 effect. When the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit, the Joystick controls the
Reverb 5.1 effect. See “REVERB 5.1” on page 276 for more information. When the
[EFFECT] button indicator is off and the [GRAB] button indicator is on, the Joystick controls surround panning of the currently selected Input Channel. When the [EFFECT] button and [GRAB] button indicators are both off, the Joystick can still be used for surround
panning if the Auto Grab preference is on. See “Using Surround Pan” on page 85 for more
information. When the [EFFECT] button indicator is off but the [GRAB] button and
[LINK] button indicators are both on, the Joystick can be used for normal panning in unison with the PAN control. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 83 for more information.
EQUALIZER
2 3
EQUALIZER
1
LOW
LOW MID
HIGH MID
HIGH
DISPLAY
FREQUENCY
Q
FREQUENCY
GAIN
Q
125
kHz
EQ ON
45
Hz
FREQUENCY
GAIN
Q
1.00
Hz
kHz
FREQUENCY
GAIN
Q
GAIN
dB
dB
dB
dB
4.00
Hz
kHz
10.0
Hz
kHz
6
A EQUALIZER DISPLAY button
This button is used to select the following pages: Equalizer Edit, Equalizer Library, Input
Channel Attenuator/Shifter, and Output Attenuator.
B FREQUENCY/Q controls
These are rotary controls and push switches. The push switches are used to select either frequency or Q. The current setting is shown by the FREQUENCY/Q indicators. The rotary
controls are used to set the frequency or Q, as selected by the push switches. See “Using EQ”
on page 111 for more information.
C EQ GAIN controls
These controls are used to set the gain of each EQ band. See “Using EQ” on page 111 for
more information.
D EQ ON button
This button is used to turn the EQ of the currently selected channel on and off. Its indicator
lights up when the EQ is on. See “Using EQ” on page 111 for more information.
E FREQUENCY/Q indicators
These indicators show whether each FREQUENCY/Q control is set to control frequency or
Q. The FREQUENCY indicator lights up when it’s set to control frequency; the Q indicator,
when it’s set to control Q. See “Using EQ” on page 111 for more information.
F EQ displays
Normally these displays show the frequency of each band. When the GAIN is adjusted, the
gain value is displayed. When the Q is adjusted, the Q value is displayed. If the gain or Q is
not adjusted for two seconds, the frequency value reappears. See “Using EQ” on page 111
for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
30
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
LAYER
LAYER
1
2
1 24
REMOTE
25 48
MASTER
3
A 1–24 & 25–48 buttons
These buttons select the Input Channel Layers, which determine which Input Channels are
controlled by the channel strips. The LAYER button indicator for the currently selected
Layer lights up. See “Selecting Layers” on page 47 for more information.
B REMOTE button
This button selects the Remote Layer, which can be used to control external devices, including DAWs. See “About the Remote Layer” on page 219 for more information. Its button
indicator lights up when the Remote Layer is selected. See “Selecting Layers” on page 47 for
more information.
C MASTER button
This button selects the Master Layer, from which the channel strips control Input Channels
49–56, Bus Outs, and Aux Sends. Its indicator lights up when the Master Layer is selected.
See “Selecting Layers” on page 47 for more information.
STEREO
A AUTO button
This button is used exclusively to set Automix recording and playback for the Stereo Out. Its indicator lights up orange in Record-Ready mode, red while recording, and green during playback. See “Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons” on page 174
for more information.
STEREO
1
AUTO
2
SEL
3
ON
4
B SEL button
The Stereo Out [SEL] button is used exclusively to select the Stereo Out for editing
with the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Its indicator lights up when the Stereo
Out is selected. Each time it’s pressed, the selection toggles between the Stereo
Out’s left and right channels. See “Selecting Channels” on page 48 for more information. It can also be used to add and remove the Stereo Out to and from EQ,
Comp, Fader, and Mute groups.
0
5
10
15
20
C ON button
This button is used exclusively to mute the Stereo Out. Its indicator lights up when
the Stereo Out is on. See “Muting the Stereo Out (ON/OFF)” on page 93 for more
information.
30
40
50
60
70
D Fader
STEREO
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
This 100 mm touch-sensitive motorized fader is used exclusively to adjust the level
of the Stereo Out. See “Setting the Stereo Out Level” on page 93 for more information. It can be grouped with other Output Channel faders for simultaneous
operation. See “Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 126 for more information. It can also be used to select the Stereo Out, see “Auto Channel Select &
Touch Sense Select” on page 49, or to punch the Stereo Out in and out during
Automix recording. See “Punching In & Out Individual Parameters” on page 183
for more information.
Control Surface
31
SCENE MEMORY
1
SCENE MEMORY
DISPLAY
00
STORE
RECALL
23 4
5
6
A SCENE MEMORY DISPLAY button
This button is used to select the following pages: Scene Memory, Input Channel Fade Time,
Output Fade Time, Recall Safe, and Scene Memory Sort. See “Scene Memories” on page 162
for more information.
B Scene memory display
This displays the number of the currently selected Scene memory. See “Scene Memories” on
page 162 for more information.
C Edit indicator
This indicates that the current mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was
recalled last. See “Edit Buffer & Edit Indicator” on page 162 for more information.
D STORE button
This button is used to store the current Scene to the selected Scene memory. See “Storing &
Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page 164.
E Scene Up/Down buttons
These buttons are used to select Scene memories. Pressing the Scene Up [ ] button increments the selection; pressing the Scene Down [ ] button decrements the selection. Holding
down a button causes the selection to increment/decrement continuously. See “Storing &
Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page 164.
F RECALL button
This button is used to recall the selected Scene memory. See “Storing & Recalling Scenes
with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page 164.
USER DEFINED KEYS
1
USER DEFINED KEYS
DISPLAY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2
A USER DEFINED KEYS DISPLAY button
This button is used to select the User Defined Key Assign page. See “Using the User Defined
Keys” on page 229 for more information.
B USER DEFINED KEYS 1–16 buttons
Up to 16 functions, from a list of over 172, can be assigned to these buttons. See “Using the
User Defined Keys” on page 229 for more information. These buttons have specific functions when the DAW Remote Layer is selected. See “About the Remote Layer” on page 219
for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
32
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
MACHINE CONTROL
1
2
3
MACHINE CONTROL
LOCATE MEMORY
DISPLAY
SET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
REW
FF
STOP
PLAY
REC
6
7
8
A MACHINE CONTROL DISPLAY button
This button is used to select the Locate Memory and Machine Configuration pages. See
“Setting the Locate Memories” on page 224 and “Configuring Machines” on page 222
respectively for more information.
B LOCATE MEMORY 1–8 buttons
Pressing these buttons transmits Locate commands to the target machine (DAW, MMC) in
order to locate the Locate memory points. Their indicators light up momentarily when
they’re pressed. See “Using the Locator” on page 224 for more information.
C SET button
This button is used when specifying the eight Locate points. Its indicator lights up while it’s
pressed. See “Using the Locator” on page 224 for more information.
D REW button
This button starts rewind on the target machine (DAW, MMC). Its indicator lights up while
rewinding is in progress. See “Transport Buttons” on page 223.
E FF button
This button starts fast forward on the target machine (DAW, MMC). Its indicator lights up
while fast forwarding is in progress. See “Transport Buttons” on page 223.
F STOP button
This button stops the target machine (DAW, MMC). Its indicator lights up momentarily
when it’s pressed. See “Transport Buttons” on page 223.
G PLAY button
This button starts playback on the target machine (DAW, MMC). Its indicator lights up
while playback is in progress. See “Transport Buttons” on page 223.
H REC button
This button is used in conjunction with the [PLAY] button to start recording on the target
machine (DAW, MMC). Its indicator lights up while recording is in progress. See “Transport Buttons” on page 223.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface
33
Data Entry & Transport
5
DEC
1
SHUTTLE
INC
6
2
SCRUB
3
4
ENTER
A SHUTTLE button
This button is used to set the Parameter wheel to Shuttle mode for machine control (DAW,
MMC). Its indicator lights up when Shuttle mode is on. See “Using Shuttle & Scrub” on
page 223 for more information.
B SCRUB button
This button is used to set the Parameter wheel to Scrub mode for machine control (DAW,
MMC). Its indicator lights up when Scrub mode is on. See “Using Shuttle & Scrub” on page
223 for more information.
C Parameter wheel
The Parameter wheel is used to edit parameter values, scroll through Scene and library lists,
and to position the cursor when titling Scenes, Effects, and so on. Its detented action gives
it a positive feel, allowing quick and accurate parameter editing. Turning it clockwise
increases parameter values; turning it counterclockwise decreases them. Turning it fast
allows quick parameter editing.
The Parameter wheel is also used with the Shuttle and Scroll functions. See “Using Shuttle
& Scrub” on page 223 for more information.
D ENTER button
This button is used to select and finalize parameter settings, to set on/off-type parameters,
such as EQ ON/OFF, and to enter characters when titling Scenes, Effects, and so on. When
a Pan control is selected on a Pan display page, pressing this button resets the pan position
to center. For certain parameters, the [ENTER] button supports double clicking (i.e., two
quick presses).
E DEC & INC buttons
These buttons are used to adjust parameter values. Pressing the [INC] button increases the
value of the currently selected parameter by one. Pressing the [DEC] decreases it. Pressing
and holding either button causes the parameter value to change continuously.
These buttons can also be used to set on/off-type parameters, such as EQ ON/OFF. When
such a parameter is selected, pressing the [DEC] button turns the function off, pressing the
[INC] button turns it on.
These buttons can also used to scroll through Scene and library lists.
F Cursor buttons
These buttons are used to move the cursor around the display pages, selecting parameters
and options. The cursor appears as a flashing box, making it easy to see which parameter or
option is currently selected. Holding down a cursor button moves the cursor continuously
in the respective direction.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
34
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
Monitor, Phones & Talkback Section
5
0
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
4
3
PHONES
0
10
0
10
STUDIO
LEVEL
PHONES
LEVEL
1
2
A STUDIO LEVEL control
This control is used to set the level of the STUDIO MONITOR OUT. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 137 for more information.
B PHONES LEVEL control
This control is used to set the level of the PHONES. See “Control Room Monitoring” on
page 136 for more information.
C PHONES jack
1/4" TRS phone plug
This stereo TRS phone jack outputs the
Control room signal for monitoring via a
pair of stereo headphones.
Tip (left)
Ring (right)
Sleeve (ground)
D Talkback mic
This built-in microphone is used for talkback. See “Using Talkback” on page 142 for more
information.
E TALKBACK LEVEL control
This control is used to set the level of the built-in talkback microphone. See “Using Talkback” on page 142 for more information.
MONITOR Section
MONITOR
The various subsections of the MONITOR section are explained below.
DISPLAY
STUDIO
STUDIO
CONTROL
ROOM
STEREO
AUX7
AUX8
1
MONITOR
DISPLAY
SOLO
STUDIO
2
CLEAR
CONTROL ROOM
2TR D1
2TR A1
2TR D2
2TR A2
2TR D3
STEREO
AUX8
5
This button is used to select the following pages: Solo Setting, Control Room
Setup, Talkback Setup, Surround Monitor, Surround Monitor Setup, Surround
Monitor Patch, and Surround Monitor Library. See “Configuring Solo” on
page 121, “Control Room Monitoring” on page 136 “Using Talkback” on
page 142, and “Surround Monitoring” on page 138 respectively for more information.
B CONTROL ROOM button
0
10
CONTROL ROOM LEVEL
DIMMER
AUX7
A MONITOR DISPLAY button
SLOT
0
10
SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL
STEREO
4
ASSIGN1
ASSIGN2
SURROUND
BUS
3
CONTROL
ROOM
TALKBACK
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
This button selects the Control Room Monitor signal as the Studio Monitor signal
source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 137 for more information.
Control Surface
35
C STEREO button
This button selects the Stereo Out signal as the Studio Monitor signal source. Its indicator
lights up when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 137 for more information.
D AUX 7 button
This button selects Aux Send #7 as the Studio Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up
when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 137 for more information.
E AUX 8 button
This button selects Aux Send #8 as the Studio Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up
when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 137 for more information.
SOLO
1
2
SOLO
CLEAR
A SOLO indicator
This indicator flashes when one or more Channels are soloed, indicating that the Solo function is active. See “Soloing Channels” on page 121 for more information.
B CLEAR button
This button can be used to unsolo all soloed Channels. See “Soloing Channels” on page 121
for more information.
CONTROL ROOM
A STEREO 2TR D1 button
CONTROL ROOM
1
2
3
7
2TR D1
2TR A1
2TR D2
2TR A2
2TR D3
STEREO
4
5
6
8
ASSIGN2
ASSIGN1
SURROUND
9
J
BUS
SLOT
This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 as the Control Room
Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See
“Control Room Monitoring” on page 136 for more information.
B STEREO 2TR D2 button
This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 as the Control Room
Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See
“Control Room Monitoring” on page 136 for more information.
C STEREO 2TR D3 button
K
This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 3 as the Control Room
Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See
“Control Room Monitoring” on page 136 for more information.
0
10
SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL
L
0
10
CONTROL ROOM LEVEL
N
M
DIMMER
TALKBACK
D STEREO 2TR A1 button
This button selects the 2TR IN ANALOG 1 as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control
Room Monitoring” on page 136 for more information.
E STEREO 2TR A2 button
This button selects the 2TR IN ANALOG 2 as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its
indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page
136 for more information.
F STEREO button
This button selects the Stereo Out as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its indicator
lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 136 for
more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
36
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
G STEREO ASSIGN 1 button
This button is used to select the assigned Output Channel as the Control Room Monitor
signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Setup”
on page 137 for more information.
H STEREO ASSIGN 2 button
This button is used to select the assigned Output Channel as the Control Room Monitor
signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Setup”
on page 137 for more information.
I SURROUND BUS button
This button is used to select the Bus Outs as the Surround Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Surround Monitoring” on page 138 for
more information.
J SURROUND SLOT button
This button is used to select the assigned Slot’s Inputs as the Surround Monitor signal
source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Surround Monitoring” on
page 138 for more information.
K SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control
This control is used to adjust the level of the Surround Monitor signals. See “Surround
Monitoring” on page 138 for more information.
L CONTROL ROOM LEVEL control
This control is used to adjust the level of the Control Room Monitor signal. See “Control
Room Monitoring” on page 136 for more information.
M DIMMER button
This button is used to dim the Control Room Monitor and Surround Monitor signals. Its
indicator lights up when these signals are dimmed. See “Control Room Monitoring” on
page 136 for more information.
N TALKBACK button
This button is used to turn on the Talkback function, which distributes the Talkback mic
signal to the Studio Monitor Outs, Slot Inputs and Omni Outputs specified on the Talkback
Setup page. See “Using Talkback” on page 142 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Power Section (p. 42)
Analog Master I/O Section (p. 39)
OMNI OUTs, Digital I/O & Control Section (p. 40)
AD Input Section (p. 38)
SLOT Section (p. 42)
Rear Panel
37
Rear Panel
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
38
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
AD Input Section
AD Input #1 is shown at the top; AD Inputs #17 and #18 below
A INPUT A & B (BAL) connectors
AD Inputs 1 through 16 feature balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors and balanced 1/4-inch phone jacks, both with a nominal input range of –60 dB to
+10 dB. Phantom powering (+48 V) is supplied to the XLR-type connectors, with
individual ON/OFF switches on each input. The phone jacks, which can also be
used with unbalanced phone plugs, have priority over the XLR-type connectors,
so when a phone plug is inserted, the XLR-type connector is disconnected. AD
Inputs 17–24 feature balanced 1/4-inch phone jacks. AD Inputs can be patched
individually to the Input Channels or Insert Ins. See “AD Input Section” on page
53 for more information.
1
2
1 (ground)
Male XLR plug
3 (cold)
Tip (hot)
1/4" TRS phone plug
Sleeve (ground)
2 (hot)
1
Ring (cold)
B INSERT I/O +4dB (UNBAL) connectors (AD 1–16)
These unbalanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks are used to insert external signal processors, etc., into AD Inputs 1 through 16. They are wired: sleeve–ground,
ring–return, tip–send. The nominal signal level is +4 dB. Inserts can be turned on
and off individually by using the INSERT ON/OFF switches. See “AD Input Section” on page 53 for more information.
Tip (send)
1/4" phone plug
Tip (send)
Ring (return)
1/4" TRS phone plug
Sleeve (ground)
To processor’s input
Sleeve (ground)
Tip (return)
1/4" phone plug
Connect to INSERT jack
From processor’s output
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Sleeve (ground)
Rear Panel
39
Analog Master I/O Section
1
2
3
4
5
6
A STUDIO MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL)
Tip (hot)
These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks, nominal output
1/4" TRS phone plug
Ring (cold)
level +4 dB, output the analog Studio Monitor signal for
monitoring in the actual studio. The source, which is
Sleeve (ground)
selected by using the STUDIO buttons in the MONITOR
section, can be Aux Send #7, Aux Send #8, the Stereo Out, or Control Room. The output
level is controlled by the STUDIO LEVEL control. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 137 for
more information.
B STEREO OUT +4 dB (BAL)
2 (hot)
These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors, nomiFemale XLR plug
3 (cold)
nal output level +4 dB, output the analog Stereo
Out signal and are typically connected the stereo
1 (ground)
inputs of a 2-track recorder. They are wired pin
1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–). See “Stereo Out Connectors” on page 92.
C 2TR IN ANALOG 1 +4 dB (BAL)
Tip (hot)
These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks, nominal input
1/4" TRS phone plug
Ring (cold)
level +4 dB, are typically used to connect the analog stereo
outputs of a 2-track recorder. Signals connected here can
Sleeve (ground)
be monitored via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR
OUT by pressing the CONTROL ROOM [2TR A1] button. In addition, these inputs can be
patched to Input Channels or Insert Ins. See “2TR Analog INs” on page 54.
D CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL)
These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks, nominal output
level +4 dB, output the analog Control Room Monitor signal and are typically used to feed the control room’s main
monitors. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 136
for more information.
1/4" TRS phone plug
Tip (hot)
Ring (cold)
Sleeve (ground)
E STEREO OUT –10 dBV (UNBAL)
These unbalanced phono connectors, nominal output level
–10 dBV, output the analog Stereo Out signal and are typically
connected to the stereo inputs of a 2-track recorder. See “Stereo
Out Connectors” on page 92.
Phono plug
Tip (hot)
Sleeve (ground)
F 2TR IN ANALOG 2 –10 dBV (UNBAL)
Tip (hot)
Phono plug
These unbalanced phono connectors, nominal input level
–10 dBV, are typically used to connect the analog stereo outputs
Sleeve (ground)
of a 2-track recorder. Signals connected here can be monitored
via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUTs by pressing the
CONTROL ROOM [2TR A2] button. In addition, these inputs can be patched to Input
Channels or Insert Ins. See “2TR Analog INs” on page 54.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
40
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
OMNI OUTs, Digital I/O & Control Section
2
3
4 56
7 8
9
J K
L
1
M
N
O
P
A OMNI OUT +4dB (BAL)
These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks, nominal output
level +4 dB, provide eight analog outputs that can be
patched to the following: Bus Outs, Aux Sends, the Stereo
Out, Insert Outs, Direct Outs, or Surround Monitor Channels. See “Omni Outs” on page 54.
1/4" TRS phone plug
Tip (hot)
Ring (cold)
Sleeve (ground)
B SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT connector
This balanced XLR-3-31-type connector is used to input SMPTE timecode for synchronizing the Automix function. See “Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate” on page 177.
C MTC TIME CODE INPUT connector
This 5-pin DIN connector is used to input MTC for synchronizing the Automix function.
See “Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate” on page 177.
D USB TO HOST port
This USB port is for MIDI communication between the 02R96 and a host computer with a
USB port. See “MIDI I/O” on page 190 for more information.
E SERIAL TO HOST port
This 8-pin mini DIN port is for MIDI communication between the 02R96 and a host computer with a serial port. See “MIDI I/O” on page 190 for more information.
F 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 & 3
These phono connectors output consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio, and are typically connected to the digital stereo inputs of 2-track recorders. The following signals can
be patched to these outputs: Stereo Out, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Direct Outs, Insert Outs, and
Control Room. Dither can be applied for digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems.
See “2TR Digital Outs” on page 57 for more information.
G 2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1
This XLR-3-32-type connector outputs AES/EBU format digital audio, and is typically connected to the digital stereo input of a 2-track recorder. The following signals can be patched
to this output: Stereo Out, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Direct Outs, Insert Outs, and Control
Room. Dither can be applied for digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems. See
“2TR Digital Outs” on page 57 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Rear Panel
41
H 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 & 3
These phono connectors accept consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio, and are typically used to connect the digital stereo outputs of 2-track recorders. Signals connected here
can be monitored via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT by pressing the CONTROL
ROOM [2TR D2] or [2TR D3] button. In addition, these inputs can be patched to Input
Channels or Insert Ins. Unsynchronized digital audio signals can be converted by the internal sampling rate converters. See “2TR Digital Ins” on page 58 for more information.
I 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1
This XLR-3-31-type connector accepts AES/EBU format digital audio, and is typically used
to connect the digital stereo output of a 2-track recorder. Signals connected here can be
monitored via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT by pressing the CONTROL
ROOM [2TR D1] button. In addition, this input can be patched to Input Channels or
Insert Ins. Unsynchronized digital audio signals can be converted by the internal sampling
rate converters. See “2TR Digital Ins” on page 58 for more information.
J WORD CLOCK OUT connector
This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal at the same clock rate as the 02R96. See
“Wordclock Connections” on page 55 for more information.
K WORD CLOCK 75Ω ON/OFF termination switch
This switch applies 75Ω termination to the WORD CLOCK IN. See “Terminating External
Wordclocks” on page 57 for more information.
L WORD CLOCK IN connector
This BNC connector is for connecting an external wordclock signal. See “Selecting the
Wordclock Source” on page 56 for more information.
M CONTROL port
This 25-pin D-sub connector provides access to the GPI (General Purpose Interface)
through which external equipment can be triggered when specified 02R96 faders or USER
DEFINE KEYS are operated. It can also be used to control a “RECORDING” light outside
of a studio, to trigger the Solo function of an 02R Digital Recording Console, or to turn on
Talkback from an external device. See “GPI (General Purpose Interface)” on page 225 for
more information.
N METER port
This 15-pin D-sub connector is for connecting the optional MB02R96 Peak Meter Bridge.
O MIDI IN, OUT & THRU ports
These standard MIDI IN, OUT, and THRU ports are used to connect the 02R96 to other
MIDI equipment. Supported MIDI messages include Program Changes for Scene recall,
Control Changes and Parameter Changes for real-time parameter control, Bulk Dump for
data storage, MIDI Clock, MTC, and MMC. See “MIDI I/O” on page 190 for more information.
P CASCADE IN & OUT ports
These 64-pin connectors can be used to cascade up to four 02R96s to create a multiple-unit
mixing system. The 02R96 can also be cascaded with an 02R Digital Recording Console. See
“Cascading Consoles” on page 63 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
42
Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel
Power Section
1
4
2
3
A POWER ON/OFF switch
This switch is used to turn on the power to the 02R96. See “Turning On & Off the 02R96”
on page 43 for more information.
B Grounding screw
For electrical safety reasons, and correct operation of the touch-sensitive faders, it’s important that the 02R96 is grounded properly. The supplied power cord has a three-pin plug,
and if the ground terminal of the AC outlet is grounded, then the unit will be grounded sufficiently through the power cord. If the AC outlet does not provide a suitable ground, this
screw must be connected to a suitable ground point. Grounding is also an effective method
for eliminating hum, interference, and other noise.
C AC IN connector
This connector is used to connect the 02R96 to an AC outlet via the supplied power cord.
See “Connecting the Power Cord” on page 43 for more information.
D Cooling fan
The cooling fan expels air out through this outlet. If the airflow is restricted, the 02R96 may
overheat, so make sure this outlet is not blocked.
SLOT Section
1
A SLOT 1–4
These four slots are for use with optional mini YGDAI cards, which offer a variety of analog
and digital I/O options. See “Slot I/O” on page 59 for more information. Slot inputs can be
patched to Input Channels or Insert Ins. See “Input Patching” on page 66 for more information. The following signals can be patched to the Slot Outputs: Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Stereo Out, Insert Outs, Direct Outs, and Surround Monitor Channels. See “Output Patching”
on page 68 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Operating Basics
43
3 Operating Basics
Connecting the Power Cord
Warning: Turn off all equipment connected to the 02R96 before making any power connections.
Connect the socket-end of the supplied power cord to the AC IN
on the rear panel of the 02R96. Connect the plug-end to a suitable
AC wall outlet, one that conforms to the power supply requirements stated on the 02R96’s rear panel.
Turning On & Off the 02R96
To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers, turn on your
audio equipment in the following order (reverse this order when turning off)—sound sources, multitrack and master recorders, 02R96,
monitoring power amplifiers.
1
To turn on the 02R96, press the [POWER] switch.
The startup page appears for a while, and then the last selected display page appears.
2
To turn off the 02R96, press the [POWER] switch again.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
44
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
About the Display
All 02R96 mix parameters can be edited on the various display pages.
EDIT indicator
MIDI indicator
Current Scene
Sampling rate/Surround mode
Selected
DISPLAY
Page title
Page #
Selected channel
Channel name
Page area
Page tab scroll arrows
Page tabs
Current Scene: The number and title of the currently selected Scene memory are displayed here. See “Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page
164 for more information. If the selected Scene is write-protected, a padlock icon appears.
See “Using the Scene Memory Page” on page 165 for more information.
MIDI indicator: This indicator appears when the 02R96 is receiving MIDI data via the
MIDI IN port, USB TO HOST port, or SERIAL TO HOST port.
EDIT indicator: This indicator appears when the current mix settings no longer match
those of the Scene that was recalled last. It works in unison with the Edit indicator dot on
the SCENE MEMORY display. See “Edit Buffer & Edit Indicator” on page 162 for more
information.
Selected DISPLAY: This indicates the currently selected display page group, for example,
AUX, EQ, or AUTOMIX. Display page groups are selected by using the [DISPLAY] buttons.
Sampling rate/Surround mode: This indicates the current sampling rate—44.1 kHz
(44k), 48 kHz (48k), 88.2 kHz (88k), or 96 kHz (96k), and surround mode—6.1, 5.1, 3-1,
and ST.
Selected channel: The Input or Output Channel currently selected by the [SEL] buttons
is indicated here. See “Selecting Channels” on page 48. The first four characters are the
Channel ID (e.g., CH1–CH56, BUS1–BUS8, AUX1–AUX8, ST-L, ST-R. The second four,
are the channel’s Short name. See “Naming Channels” on page 134. If the Channel ID preference is on, only the Channel ID is displayed. See “Channel ID” on page 232 for more
information.
Channel name: Depending on the currently selected page, this is the Long name of
either the currently selected channel or the channel selected by the cursor buttons. On some
pages, the Aux Send pages, for example, it’s possible to edit Aux Send levels without having
to select each Input Channel. Instead, Input Channel Aux Sends can be selected by using the
cursor buttons. In this case, the name displayed here is different to the name displayed in
the upper-right corner of the display.
Page title: This is the title of the currently selected page.
Page #: Depending on the group of pages currently selected, page numbers are displayed
here. For example, although you can view only one Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page at
a time, there are in fact eight Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send pages, one for each of the eight
Aux Sends. Page numbers are also displayed when the Effects page group is selected.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Selecting Display Pages
45
Page area: This area of the display is where the various display pages appear.
Page tabs: These tabs are used when selecting pages. Up to four tabs are visible at a time.
See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 45 for more information.
Page tab scroll arrows: These arrows indicate that there are more pages available. See
“Selecting Display Pages” on page 45 for more information.
Selecting Display Pages
•
•
•
•
Display pages are grouped by function, and each group of pages can be selected by
using the following [DISPLAY] buttons: AUX SELECT, ENCODER MODE,
DISPLAY
EFFECTS/PLUG-INS, ROUTING, DYNAMICS, PAN/SURROUND, EQUALIZER, SCENE MEMORY, USER DEFINED KEYS, MACHINE CONTROL, MONITOR. Further page groups can be selected by using the DISPLAY ACCESS buttons.
The next page in the group can be selected by pressing the [DISPLAY] button.
Previous pages can be selected by pressing and holding down the [DISPLAY] button.
The first page in the group can be selected by double-clicking the [DISPLAY] button.
Pages whose tabs are currently displayed can be
selected by using the F1–F4 buttons.
F1
F2
F3
F4
If there are more pages available than the four whose
tabs are currently displayed, depending on whether they
are located to the left or right, either the left or right Tab
Tab scroll buttons
Scroll arrow appears. Pressing either the Left or Right
Tab Scroll button displays the tabs of these pages, which
can then be selected by using the F1–F4 buttons.
When parameters are divided among several pages, for example, the Input Channel Attenuators, which are divided among three pages, the page containing the parameter for the currently selected channel is selected automatically when channels on different Layers are
selected. For example, if the Input Channel 1–24 Attenuator page is currently selected, and
then you select, say, Input Channel #25 by using the LAYER [25–48] button and [SEL] button #1, the Input Channel 25–48 Attenuator page is selected automatically.
The currently selected page in a group, and the parameter selected on that page, are remembered when you select another group of pages, so when you return to that group, by pressing its [DISPLAY] button, that page is displayed with the same parameter selected.
The Auto Display preferences can be set so that certain pages appear automatically when a
corresponding control is adjusted. For example, if the “Auto EQUALIZER Display” preference is on, the EQ page appears automatically when a SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER control is operated. See page 230 for information on the Auto Display preferences.
Tab Scroll arrows
Display Parameter Boxes
Operation of the various buttons, rotary controls, and faders that
appear on the display pages is straightforward. The only items that
require a special mention are the parameter boxes, such as the
INSERT POSITION, OUT, and IN parameter boxes shown here.
Operation of these boxes consists of two steps. First you select a value,
typically by using the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons. Second
you confirm your selection, while the value is flashing, by pressing the
[ENTER] button. If you select another parameter while the value is
still flashing, it remains unchanged.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
46
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
Parameter Windows
When a rotary control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section is operated, if the
corresponding parameter does not appear on the currently selected page, a
parameter window like the one shown here is displayed while the control is
adjusted. If the control is not adjusted for awhile, the window closes automatically. If the Auto Display preference for the adjusted parameter is on, the page containing
that parameter appears instead of this parameter window.
Confirmation Messages
For certain functions, the 02R96 prompts you for
confirmation before executing them, as shown here.
Press YES to execute the function, or press NO to cancel. If no action is taken for awhile, the confirmation
window closes automatically and the function is not
executed.
Title Edit Window
The Title Edit window is used to enter titles for Scene and library memories, automixes, and
so on. Depending on the item being titled, the number of characters that can be entered is
either 4, 12, or 16. The following screen shots show the available characters. The one on the
left shows uppercase characters and various punctuation marks. That on the right, lowercase characters and numbers.
Use the cursor buttons to select characters, and the [ENTER] button to enter them into the
title. The cursor moves to the right automatically as each character is entered. The Parameter wheel or the arrow buttons can be used to move the cursor within the title.
Use the SHIFT LOCK button to select uppercase and lowercase characters, and use the SPC
button to enter a space. To insert a space at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the right, press the INS button. To delete the character at the cursor position, press
the DEL button.
When you’ve finished, press the OK button to enter the title, or press CANCEL to cancel
title entry.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Selecting Layers
47
Selecting Layers
Input and Output Channels are arranged into Layers, as illustrated below. There are four
Layers altogether: two Input Channel Layers, a Master Layer (or Output Layer), and a
Remote Layer.
Input Channels [1–24]
Input Channels [25–48]
Input Channels 49–56, Aux Sends, Bus Outs [MASTER]
[REMOTE]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
To select Input and Output Channels for editing with the channel strip
LAYER
controls, you use the LAYER buttons to select a Layer.
The LAYER button indicator for the currently selected Layer lights up.
1 24
REMOTE
The currently selected Layer determines the function of the channel
strip Encoders, [AUTO] buttons, [SEL] buttons, [SOLO] buttons,
25 48
MASTER
[ON] buttons, and faders. For example, when Layer 1–24 is selected,
[SEL] button #1 controls Input Channel #1. When Layer 25–48 is
selected, it controls Input Channel #25. And when the Master Layer is
selected, it controls Input Channel #49.
The following table shows which Input and Output Channels are controlled by the channel
strips on each Layer.
Layers
Channel Strips
1–8
1–24
REMOTE
17–24
Input Channels 1–24
25–48
MASTER
9–16
Input Channels 25–48
Input Channels 49–56
Aux Send masters 1–8
Bus Out masters 1–8
Operation depends on the selected target.
See “About the Remote Layer” on page 219 for more information.
The exact function of each channel strip fader and Encoder also depends on the currently
selected Fader mode and Encoder mode respectively. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on
page 49 and “Selecting Encoder Modes” on page 50 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
48
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
Selecting Channels
To select Input and Output Channels for editing with the SELECTED CHANNEL controls,
you use the LAYER buttons to select a Layer, and the [SEL] buttons to select a channel on
that Layer.
1
Select a Layer, as explained on page 47.
2
Use the [SEL] buttons to select an Input or Output Channel.
The [SEL] button indicator for the currently selected channel lights up. In addiSEL
tion, the Channel’s ID and Short name appear in the upper right corner of the display (see page 44).
The exact channel selected by each [SEL] button depends on the currently selected Layer.
For example, when Layer 1–24 is selected, [SEL] button #1 selects Input Channel #1. When
Layer 25–48 is selected, it selects Input Channel #25. And when the Master Layer is selected,
it selects Input Channel #49, as shown in the following table.
Layer
[SEL] Button
1–8
9–16
1–24
Input Channels 1–24
25–48
Input Channels 25–48
MASTER
REMOTE
Input Channels 49–56
Aux Sends 1–8
17–24
Bus Outs 1–8
Operation depends on the selected target.
See “About the Remote Layer” on page 219 for more information.
For paired Input or Output channels, the channel whose [SEL] button you press is selected,
and its indicator lights up. The [SEL] button indicator of the other channel flashes.
Vertical and horizontal Input and Output channel partners can also be selected by using the
SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [L] and [R] buttons, which can also be used to
select left and right channels when the Stereo Out is selected.
If the currently displayed page contains a relevant parameter, when a channel’s [SEL] button is pressed, the cursor moves to that parameter automatically. If the currently displayed
page contains no such parameter, the page that does contain such a parameter is selected
automatically. For example, if a Delay page for the Output Channels is selected when an
Input Channel [SEL] button is pressed, the Delay page showing the relevant Input Channel
Delay parameter is selected automatically.
Stereo Out [SEL] Button
The Stereo Out [SEL] button is used exclusively to select the Stereo Out for editing with the
SELECTED CHANNEL controls. Its indicator lights up when the Stereo Out is selected.
Each time it’s pressed, the selection toggles between the Stereo Out’s left and right channels.
The SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [L] and [R] buttons can also be used to
select the left and right channels.
If the currently displayed page contains a Stereo Out parameter, that parameter is selected
automatically when the Stereo Out [SEL] button is pressed. If the currently selected page
contain no such parameter, the page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically. For example, if a Delay page for the Input Channels is currently selected when the
Stereo Out [SEL] button is pressed, the Delay page showing the Stereo Out Delay parameter
is selected automatically.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Selecting Fader Modes
49
Auto Channel Select & Touch Sense Select
While the Auto Channel Select preference is on (see page 230), channels can be selected by
moving the corresponding fader or Encoder, or by turning on the corresponding [AUTO],
[SOLO], or [ON] button. Note that you can use the [AUTO] buttons to select channels only
during Automix recording or in Automix record ready mode.
While the Fader Touch Sense SELECT preference is on (see page 232), channels can be
selected simply by touching the fader knobs.
Selecting Fader Modes
The exact function of each fader depends on the selected Layer and Fader mode.
1
Select a Layer, as explained on page 47.
2
Use the FADER MODE buttons to select a Fader mode.
FADER MODE
FADER
AUX
[FADER]: Channel faders control Input Channel levels or Output Channel master levels,
depending on the selected Layer.
[AUX]: Channel faders control Aux Send levels, depending on the selected Layer.
The indicator of the currently selected FADER MODE button lights up.
The following table shows the channel fader functions for each Layer and Fader mode.
Layer
1–24
25–48
Fader
Mode
1–8
9–16
Fader
Aux
Aux
Input Channels 1–24 level
Input Channels 25–48 level
Input Channels 25–48 Aux Send level
Fader
Input Channels 49–56
level
Aux
Input Channels 49–56
Aux Send level
Fader
Aux
17–24
Input Channels 1–24 Aux Send level
Fader
Master
Remote
Fader
Aux Sends 1–8 master
level
Bus Outs 1–8 master
level
No operation: faders fixed at –∞
Operation depends on the selected target.
See “About the Remote Layer” on page 219 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
50
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
Selecting Encoder Modes
The exact function of each Encoder depends on the selected Layer and Encoder
mode. There are two preset Encoder modes, Pan and Aux, and two assignable
modes, for which you can choose from over 40 parameters.
1
Select a Layer, as explained in page 47.
2
Use the ENCODER MODE buttons to select an Encoder mode.
ENCODER MODE
DISPLAY
PAN
AUX
ASSIGN 1
ASSIGN
2
[PAN]: Encoders function as Pan controls.
[AUX]: Encoders control Aux Send levels, depending on the selected Layer.
[ASSIGN 1/2]: Encoders control the parameters assigned to the ASSIGN buttons. See
“Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons” on page 51 for more
information.
The indicator of the currently selected ENCODER MODE button lights up.
The following table shows the exact Encoder functions for each Layer and Encoder mode.
Layer
Encoder
Mode
Encoder
1–8
9–16
Pan
1–24
Aux
Assign 1/2
25–48
Input Channels 1–24 Aux Send level
Input Channels 1–24 assigned parameter1
Pan
Input Channels 25–48 pan
Aux
Input Channels 25–48 Aux Send level
Assign 1/2
Master
17–24
Input Channels 1–24 pan
Input Channels 25–48 assigned parameter1
Pan
Input Channels 49–56
pan
No operation
Aux
Input Channels 49–56
Aux Send level
No operation
Assign 1/2
Input Channels 49–56
assigned parameter
Aux Sends 1–8
assigned parameter
Bus Outs 1–8 assigned
parameter
Pan
Remote
Aux
Operation depends on the selected target.
See “About the Remote Layer” on page 219 for more information.
Assign 1/2
1. When Alt Layer is assigned, the Encoders enable you to control a parameter that is assigned to the corresponding channel fader in the partner layer. (A partner layer would be the layer of channels 25-48
if the layer of channels 1-24 is currently selected.)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons
51
Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons
Up to two parameters can be assigned to the two ENCODER MODE ASSIGN buttons.
Initially, the following parameters are assigned to the ASSIGN buttons:
[ASSIGN 1]: Input Patch
[ASSIGN 2]: Direct Out
1
Use the ENCODER MODE [DISPLAY] button to select the Encoder Mode
Assign page.
The names of the parameters currently assigned to each ASSIGN button are displayed in the
left-hand box. The parameter currently assigned to the selected ASSIGN button appears
highlighted in the right-hand box.
2
Press an ASSIGN button, or use the Up/Down cursor buttons, to select an
ASSIGN button.
3
Use the Parameter wheel, or the INC/DEC buttons to select a parameter.
A parameter is selected when it appears inside the dotted box.
See the “Assignable Encoder Mode Parameter List” on page 52 for a complete list of assignable parameters.
4
Press the [ENTER] button to assign your choice.
Once assigned, the selected parameter appears highlighted in the right-hand box.
When channels that do not feature the currently assigned parameter are selected, the
Encoders are inactive. For example, if the assigned Encoder parameter is “Phase,” and the
Master Layer is selected, Encoders 9–24 are inactive, because the Aux Sends and Bus Outs
do not feature Phase parameters.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
52
Chapter 3—Operating Basics
Assignable Encoder Mode Parameter List
#
Parameter
Encoder Operation
1
No Assign
2
Attenuator
Attenuator
—
Push Switch Operation
—
—
3
Input Patch
Input Channel patch
4
Insert In Patch
Insert In patch
Confirm or execute patch selection.
Confirm or execute patch selection.
5
Insert Out Patch
Insert Out patch
Confirm or execute patch selection.
Confirm or execute patch selection.
6
Direct Out
Direct Out patch
7
Phase
Phase: normal/reverse
—
8
Insert On
Insert on/off
—
9
Aux pre/post
Aux pre/post
—
10
Delay On
Delay on/off
—
11
Delay Time
Delay Time
—
12
Delay FB.Gain
Delay FB.Gain
—
13
Delay Mix
Delay Mix
—
—
14
EQ On
EQ on/off
15
EQ Type
EQ Type
—
16
EQ Low Q
EQ Low Q
—
—
17
EQ Low F
EQ Low Frequency
18
EQ Low G
EQ Low Gain
—
19
EQ Low-Mid Q
EQ Low-Mid Q
—
20
EQ Low-Mid F
EQ Low-Mid Frequency
—
21
EQ Low-Mid G
EQ Low-Mid Gain
—
22
EQ High-Mid Q
EQ High-Mid Q
—
23
EQ High-Mid F
EQ High-Mid Frequency
—
—
24
EQ High-Mid G
EQ High-Mid Gain
25
EQ High Q
EQ High Q
—
26
EQ High F
EQ High Frequency
—
—
27
EQ High G
EQ High Gain
28
Gate On
Gate on/off
—
29
Gate Threshold
Gate Threshold
—
—
30
Gate Range
Gate Range
31
Gate Attack
Gate Attack
—
32
Gate Decay
Gate Decay
—
33
Gate Hold
Gate Hold
—
34
Comp On
Comp on/off
—
—
35
Comp Threshold
Comp Threshold
36
Comp Ratio
Comp Ratio
—
37
Comp Attack
Comp Attack
—
38
Comp Release
Comp Release
—
39
Comp Out Gain
Comp Out Gain
—
—
40
Comp Knee/Width
Comp Knee/Width
41
Surr L/R Pan
Surround L/R Pan
—
42
Surr F/R Pan
Surround F/R Pan
—
43
Surr Front DIV
Surround Front DIV
—
44
Surr Rear DIV
Surround Rear DIV
—
45
Surr. LFE Level
Surround LFE level
—
46
Surr. Pan Wheel
Surround Pan Wheel
—
47
Scene Fade Time
Scene Fade Time
—
48
Alt Layer
Alt Layer
—
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Analog I/O & the AD Input Section
53
4 Analog I/O & the AD Input Section
AD Input Section
The 02R96 features 24 AD Inputs for connecting microphone and line-level sources.
AD Inputs can be patched to Input Channels or Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 66).
They can also be patched to Output Channel Insert Ins (see page 69).
AD Input Connectors (AD 1–16)
AD Inputs 1 through 16 feature balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors and balanced 1/4-inch phone jacks, both with a nominal input range of –60 dB to
+10 dB. The phone jacks, which can also be used with unbalanced phone
plugs, have priority over the XLR-type connectors, so when a phone plug is
inserted, the XLR-type connector is disconnected.
AD Input Connectors (AD 17–24)
AD Inputs 17 through 24 feature balanced 1/4-inch phone jacks, with a nominal input range of –34 dB to +10 dB. They can also be used with unbalanced
phone plugs.
Phantom Power (AD 1–16)
+ 48V
ON
OFF
AD Inputs 1 through 16 feature switchable +48 V phantom powering for use
with condenser-type microphones and direct boxes. Phantom power is supplied to the balanced XLR-3-31-type connector, and can be switched individually for each AD Input.
Pad (AD 1–16)
AD Inputs 1 through 16 feature pad switches, which attenuate input signals by
26 dB, allowing the Head Amps to work with high-level signals. Pad is typically used to attenuate “hot” signals from bass or snare drum microphones, or
“hot” line-level signals.
26dB
Gain
-60
-16
GAIN
AD Inputs 1–16
+10
GAIN
34
AD Inputs 17–24
AD Inputs feature detented rotary gain controls with an input sensitivity of
–16 dB to –60 dB, or +10 dB to –34 dB when the Pad is on (+10 dB to –34 dB
for AD Inputs 17–24). The GAIN controls adjust the gain of the Head Amps,
allowing you to optimize input signal levels for the best signal-to-noise performance. Ideally, the GAIN control should be set so that the signal level is relatively high, and it’s okay for the PEAK indicator to light up occasionally. If the
PEAK indicator lights up often, however, you should back off the GAIN control a little, otherwise, signal clipping may occur. If the GAIN is set too low, the
signal-to-noise performance will suffer.
PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators
PEAK
SIGNAL
These indicators are used in conjunction with the GAIN controls and PAD
switches to optimize signal levels. The SIGNAL indicator lights up when the
input signal level is 20 dB below the rated level. The PEAK indicator lights up
when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
54
Chapter 4—Analog I/O & the AD Input Section
AD Inserts (AD 1–16)
AD Inputs 1 through 16 feature switchable analog inserts on 1/4-inch TRS
phone jacks for the send and return signals. They are wired: sleeve–ground,
ring–return, tip–send. The rated level for both connectors is +4 dB.
OFF
ON
INSERT
AD Input inserts can be turned on and off individually by using the INSERT
ON/OFF switches, so you don’t have to disconnect your external equipment in
order to remove an insert.
Stereo Out
See page 92 for information on the Stereo Out outputs.
Control Room Monitor Out
See page 136 for information on the Control Room Monitor output.
Studio Monitor Out
See page 137 for information on the Studio Monitor output.
Omni Outs
The 02R96 features assignable Omni Outs on balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks. Omni
Outs can be patched to Bus Outs, Aux Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel
Insert Outs, or Surround Monitor Channels (see page 69). In addition, Input Channel
Direct Outs can be patched to the Omni Outs (see page 70).
The maximum output level of each OMNI OUT can be set internally to either +4 dB
(–10 dB operating level) or +18 dB (+4 dB operating level). Contact your dealer for further
details.
2TR Analog INs
The 02R96 features two sets of 2-track analog inputs: 2TR IN ANALOG 1
+4 dB (BAL) uses balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks. 2TR IN ANALOG 2
–10 dBV (UNBAL) uses unbalanced phono connectors. These inputs can be
monitored via the Control Room monitors by pressing the CONTROL
ROOM [2TR A1] and [2TR A2] buttons. They can be patched to Input
Channels (see page 66), Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 67), or Output
Channel Insert Ins (see page 69).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Digital I/O & Cascading
55
5 Digital I/O & Cascading
Wordclocks
Unlike analog audio equipment, digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio signals are transferred from one device to another, otherwise, signals may not be
received correctly and audible noise, glitches, or clicks may occur. Synchronization is
achieved using what’s called a wordclock, which is a clock signal for synchronizing all the
digital audio signals in a system. Note that wordclocks are not the same as SMPTE/EBU or
MTC timecode, which is typically used to synchronize tape machines, MIDI sequencers,
and so on. Wordclock synchronization refers to the synchronization of the digital audio
processing circuits inside each digital audio device.
In a typical digital audio system, one device operates as the wordclock master, and the other
devices operate as wordclock slaves, synchronizing to the wordclock master. Wordclock signals can be distributed via dedicated cables, typically BNC cables, or derived from digital
audio connections, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam formats.
If you’re connecting to the 02R96 using only analog inputs and outputs, no special wordclock settings are required, and the 02R96 can be set to use its own internally generated
wordclock. If you’re connecting other equipment digitally, however, you must decide which
device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves.
The 02R96 can be used as the wordclock master running at either 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,
88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz, or slaved to an external wordclock source. External wordclock signals
can be received via the Slot Inputs, 2TR Digital Inputs, the CASCADE IN port, or the dedicated BNC WORD CLOCK IN connector.
In a system where all devices share a common wordclock, it’s important that all devices be
turned on even if they’re not being used. Turn on the wordclock master first, and then the
slaves. When shutting down the system, turn off the slaves first, and then the master. Before
use, make sure that the wordclock slaves are correctly locked to the wordclock master. Most
devices have front panel indicators to indicate this. Refer to the relevant owner’s manuals
for more information.
Wordclock Connections
The 02R96 features a BNC wordclock input and a BNC wordclock
output. External wordclock signals can be connected to the WORD
CLOCK IN connector, and terminated by using the 75Ω ON/OFF
switch (see page 57). The WORD CLOCK OUT outputs a wordclock signal at the same clock rate as the 02R96.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
56
Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading
Selecting the Wordclock Source
The wordclock source can be selected as follows.
Note: When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some
devices may output noise, so turn down your power amps beforehand, otherwise your speakers
may be damaged.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Word Clock Select page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the sources, and press [ENTER] to set.
The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O Cards. The IN and OUT
columns indicate the number of inputs and outputs available for each installed I/O Card.
The FS box in the lower-left corner displays the current wordclock status: 44.1kHz, 48kHz,
88.2kHz, 96kHz, or Unlock.
The following are possible wordclock sources:
SLOT1–4 (1/2–15/16): These buttons select the Slot Inputs as the wordclock source.
Inputs are selected in pairs, the number of pairs depending on the type of I/O Card
installed.
WC IN: This button selects the WORDCLOCK IN connector as the wordclock source.
CAS. IN: This button selects the CASCADE IN port as the wordclock source.
2TRD1, 2TRD2, 2TRD3: These buttons select the 2TR Digital Inputs as the wordclock
source.
INT44.1k, INT48k, INT88.2k, INT96k: These buttons select the internal wordclock
generator as the wordclock source.
The source select buttons have the following indications:
A usable wordclock signal is present at this input.
No wordclock signal is present at this input.
A wordclock signal is present, but it’s out of sync with the current 02R96 clock.
This is the currently selected wordclock source.
This input was selected as the wordclock source, but no usable signal was received.
This cannot be selected as the wordclock source because a wordclock signal cannot be
sourced from this input on this type of I/O Card, or no I/O Card is installed.
If an external wordclock source fails for some reason, the 02R96 automatically switches to
its internal wordclock generator at the closest frequency.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
2TR Digital Outs
57
Terminating External Wordclocks
Wordclock signals distributed via BNC cables must be terminated correctly, otherwise, jitter
and synchronization errors may result. Ideally, you should make a separate wordclock connection to each device and terminate it. The following examples show two ways in which
wordclock signals can be distributed and how termination should be applied in each case.
Normally the WORD CLOCK 75Ω ON/OFF switch should be set to ON. The OFF setting
provides support for wordclock source devices with special specifications.
Star Distribution
In this example a dedicated wordclock distribution box is used to supply wordclock signals
to each device individually. Termination is applied at each device.
WC OUT
(BNC)
Wordclock
master
WC IN (BNC)
Wordclock
distribution box
WC IN (BNC)
WC IN (BNC)
WC IN (BNC)
Device-A
Device-B
Device-C
Device-D
Termination = ON
Wordclock slave
Termination = ON
Wordclock slave
Termination = ON
Wordclock slave
Termination = ON
Wordclock slave
Daisy Chain Distribution
In this example the wordclock signal is distributed in a “daisy-chain” fashion, with each
device feeding the wordclock signal on to the next. This method of distribution is not recommended for larger systems.
Wordclock
master
WC OUT (BNC)
WC IN
(BNC)
WC OUT
(BNC)
WC IN
(BNC)
WC OUT
(BNC)
WC IN
(BNC)
Device-A
Device-B
Device-C
Termination = ON
Wordclock slave
Termination = ON
Wordclock slave
Termination = ON
Wordclock slave
2TR Digital Outs
The 02R96 features three sets of 2-track digital outputs: 2TR OUT
DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 uses an XLR-3-32-type connector and outputs
AES/EBU format digital audio. 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 and 3
use phono connectors and output consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. These outputs can be patched to the Bus Outs, Aux Sends,
the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs, or the Control Room signal (see
page 70). They can also be patched to Direct Outs (see page 70). Digital output signals can
be dithered for transfer to lower-resolution systems (see page 62).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
58
Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading
2TR Digital Ins
The 02R96 features three sets of 2-track digital inputs: 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 uses an XLR-3-31-type connector and accepts
AES/EBU format digital audio. 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 and 3
use phono connectors and accept consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. These inputs can be monitored via the Control Room monitors by using the CONTROL ROOM [2TR D1], [2TR D2], and [2TR D3] buttons. They
can be patched to Input Channels (see page 66), Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 67), or
Output Channel Insert Ins (see page 69). Digital audio signals received at sampling rates
other than the current 02R96 rate can be converted by the internal sampling rate converters
(see page 58). You can monitor the Channel Status of digital signals present at these inputs
on the Channel Status Monitor page (see page 62).
2TR In Sampling Rate Conversion
The 02R96’s 2TR Digital Inputs feature sampling rate converters so you can easily connect
your legacy 44.1/48 kHz digital audio equipment.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Sampling Rate Converter page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them.
The FS box in the lower-left corner displays the current wordclock status: 44.1kHz, 48kHz,
88.2kHz, 96kHz, or Unlock.
2TR IN D1–3: These buttons are used to turn on and off the sampling rate converter for
each 2TR Digital Input. When on, the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the 02R96’s current sampling rate. The original sampling rate is displayed.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Slot I/O
59
Slot I/O
The 02R96 features four Slots for installing optional mini-YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital
Audio Interface) I/O Cards, which offer various analog I/O options and digital I/O interfaces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and
Tascam.
Slot Inputs can be assigned to Input Channels or Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 66), or
to Output Channel Insert Ins (see page 69). Slot Outputs can be assigned to Bus Outs, Aux
Sends, the Stereo Out, Insert Outs, or the Surround Monitor Channels (see page 68), or
Direct Outs (see page 70).
Slot outputs can be dithered for digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems (see
page 62).
Available Cards
The following mini-YGDAI I/O Cards are currently available. See the Yamaha Professional
Audio Web site at the following URL for up-to-date news on I/O Cards:
<http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>.
Card
Format
In
Out
MY8-AD
MY8-AD241
MY4-AD
Connectors
20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
8
Analog in
Phone jack (balanced) x8
—
24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
4
MY8-AD96
XLR-3-31 type (balanced) x4
8
MY4-DA
MY8-DA96
Resolution/Sampling Rate
Analog out
—
24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz D-sub 25-pin
4
20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
XLR-3-32 type (balanced) x4
8
D-sub 25-pin
24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz
Analog
MY8-ADDA96
in/out
8
8
MY8-AE2
8
8
MY16-AE2
16
16
8
8
8
8
8
8
Optical x2
16
16
Optical x4
8
8
MY8-AEB
AES/EBU I/O
Euroblock x4
D-sub 25-pin
24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
BNC connector x8
MY8-AE96
MY8-AE96S3
MY8-AT2
MY16-AT2
ADAT I/O
MY8-TD2
Tascam
MY16-TD2
MY8-mLAN2
MY16-mLAN2
D-sub 25-pin
BNC wordclock output
24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
16
16
8
8
16
16
8
8
D-sub 25-pin
IEEE1394
6-pin 1394 connector x2
WAVES Y56K
WAVES Y96K
24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz D-sub 25-pin
ADAT
24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz
24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz
Optical x2
1. This card is a substitution for a 20-bit MY8-AD card.
2. These cards support 24-bit/96 kHz in Double Channel mode. (Separate 96 kHz wordclock required.)
3. This card is identical to the MY8-AE96, except that it features a sampling rate converter.
02R96 Version 2
Owner’s Manual
60
Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading
Installing I/O Cards
For technical reasons, certain card combinations are not supported. Before
installing any cards, check the Yamaha web site (see page 5) to see whether your
card is compatible.
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Also check the total number of cards that can be installed in the unit. Installing cards that are
not endorsed by Yamaha may cause electrical shock, fire, or damage to the unit.
This section explains how to install I/O Cards.
1
Turn off the 02R96.
2
Undo the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover, as shown below.
Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use.
3
Insert the card between the guide rails and slide it all the way into the slot,
as shown below. You may have to push firmly to plug the card into the internal connector.
4
Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews. Do not leave them loose,
as the card will not be grounded correctly, which may cause the 02R96 to
malfunction.
You can check which I/O Cards are installed on the Word Clock Select page (see page 56).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Slot I/O
61
Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates
The data transfer format for the higher sampling rates can be set as follows.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Higher Sample Rate Data
Transfer Format page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them.
The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O Cards.
IN/OUT: These parameters are used to set the input and output data transfer format of I/O
Cards when running at the higher sampling rates (i.e., 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) to either Double
Channel, Double Speed or Single. In Double Speed mode, digital audio data is received and
transmitted at the current higher sampling rate (i.e., 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz). In Double Channel mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is exactly half
the current higher sampling rate and data is handled by two channels, thereby reducing the
total number of inputs or outputs for an eight channel I/O Card to four. In Double Channel
mode, the even-numbered channels are disabled. Double Channel mode allows you to
record 96 kHz audio to legacy 44.1/48 kHz digital multitrack recorders. In Single mode,
digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is exactly half the current higher sampling rate. This is useful for digital MTR recording and playback situations.
The IN and OUT parameters are only available when a higher sampling rate (i.e., 88.2 kHz
or 96 kHz) is selected. When the sampling rate is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, all parameters on this
page are unavailable. As are individual parameters for Slots with analog I/O Cards installed,
or no I/O Card installed. When a digital I/O card that does not support 88.2/96 kHz is
installed, such as the MY8-AE, MY8-AT, or MY8-TD, its IN and OUT formats cannot be
set to Double Speed mode.
SRC: These parameters are used to turn on and off the sampling rate converter for each
pair of Slot Inputs. When on, the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to
the 02R96’s current sampling rate. The original sampling rate is displayed. These parameters are available only when an I/O Card with onboard sampling rate converters is installed,
such as the MY8-AE96S.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
62
Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading
Dithering Digital Outputs
For digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems, the 2TR Digital Outputs and Slot
Outputs can be dithered to 16-bit, 20-bit, or 24-bit.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Dither page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the Dither parameters, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them.
The SLOT column displays the names of any installed I/O Cards.
You can copy the currently selected setting to all Dither parameters by double-clicking the
[ENTER] button.
Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status
You can monitor the Channel Status of digital audio signals connected to the 2TR Digital
Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows.
02R96 Version 2
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button to locate the Channel Status Monitor page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the SLOT 1–4 and 2TR IN buttons, and the
press [ENTER].
Displayed Channel Status information includes sampling rate (FS), emphasis, category, and
copy protection.
However, if a mini-YGDAI I/O card other than AES/EBU format is installed, Channel Status
information will be grayed out.
Owner’s Manual
Cascading Consoles
3
63
If you select the SLOT button for a slot that has an
MY16-AE card installed, use the 01–08 and 09–16 buttons located in the lower-right corner of the screen
to select a channel group you wish to display.
Cascading Consoles
Total four 02R96s or DM2000s can be cascaded, offering a maximum of 224 Input Channels. Several functions are linked between all cascaded consoles, including Solo, Scene
Recall and Store, so that all consoles work just like one big console. A single Yamaha 02R
Digital Recording Console can be included in the cascade system.
The CASCADE IN and CASCADE OUT
ports are used to transmit and receive
Cascade and control signals. Only use
the optional dedicated Cascade cables for
connecting.
Linked Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The following 02R96 functions are linked via the cascade ports:
AUX SELECT (Not linked with DM2000’s Aux 9–12.)
Display page selection (Not linked with the DM2000.)
Solo function
FADER MODE
ENCODER MODE
Metering position setting
Peak Hold On/Off
Meter Fast Fall on/off
Scene Store, Recall, and Title Edit
When a Scene is recalled on the master console, that scene is recalled on all cascaded consoles.
The following Automix functions: Make New Automix, Store, Recall, Title Edit, Transport
(AutoREC, REC, PLAY, STOP, ABORT).
The following Automix parameters: Automix Enable/Disable, Internal Start Time, Offset
Time, Frame Rate, Overwrite (FADER, ON, PAN, SURR, AUX, AUX ON, EQ), Motor
ON/OFF, Edit Out Mode OFF/RETURN/TAKEOVER, Return Time, Update To End
On/Off, ABSOLUTE/RELATIVE Fader Edit Mode, Touch Sense Edit In On/Off, Touch
Sense Edit Out On/Off, Touch Sense Edit Off/Touch/Latch.
Function and parameter linking can be turned on or off by using the Cascade COMM Link
preference (see page 231). The Solo function is always linked regardless of this preference.
Note: When the Cascade COMM Link preference is on, do not make any MIDI connections
between cascaded 02R96/DM2000s. If two 02R96/DM2000s are cascaded and connected via
MIDI, and the Cascade COMM Link preference is on, when a store operation is performed
on the master console, a loop will be created, causing both consoles to execute endless store operations.
When the 02R96 is cascaded with a Yamaha DM2000 Digital Production Console, display
page selection is not linked, and Matrix Send select actions, and Aux Send 9–12 select
actions performed on the DM2000 are ignored by the 02R96.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
64
Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading
Cascade Hookup Examples
Cascading Two 02R96s
Master: Off
Bi-directional: –
Master: On
Bi-directional: On
CASCADE OUT
CASCADE IN
02R96 #1
02R96 #2
CASCADE IN
CASCADE OUT
Final signals can be output by
the Slot Outputs or Omni Outs.
Final signals can be output by
the Slot Outputs or Omni Outs.
Cascading Three or More 02R96s
Master: Off
Bi-directional: –
Master: Off
Bi-directional: –
CASCADE OUT
CASCADE OUT
CASCADE IN
02R96 #1
Master: On
Bi-directional: On
02R96 #2/3
CASCADE OUT
CASCADE IN
02R96 #4
CASCADE IN
Final signals can be output by
the Slot Outputs or Omni Outs.
Final signals can be output by
the Slot Outputs or Omni Outs.
Cascading an 02R Digital Recording Console
Master: Off
Bi-directional: –
Cascade In from: 02R
CASCADE OUT
02R
CASCADE IN
Master: On
Bi-directional: Off
CASCADE OUT
02R96 #1/2
CASCADE IN
02R96 #3
Final signals can be output by
the Slot Outputs or Omni Outs.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Cascading Consoles
65
Attenuating Cascade Inputs
Cascade Inputs can be attenuated, and the Cascade mode and Cascade source can be specified on the Cascade In page.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Cascade In page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them.
CASCADE MODE: When you want to output the same signals from two 02R96s, turn on
the BI-DIRECTIONAL button. In this case, the Cascade connections are looped. Turn on
the CASCADE MASTER option on the last 02R96 to make it the master console. When the
BI-DIRECTIONAL button is off, the last 02R96 in the cascade is automatically configured
as the master console and it output the final signals.
CASCADE IN FROM: This is used to specify the type of device connected to the CASCADE IN port, either 02R96 or 02R. When a 02R96 or DM2000 is connected to the CASCADE IN port, 02R96 is specified automatically.
CASCADE IN ATTENUATOR: These controls are used to attenuate Cascade Input signals. The AUX9–AUX12 controls attenuate the corresponding signals only when the 02R96
is cascaded between two Yamaha DM2000 Digital Production Consoles, they have no effect
on the 02R96 itself. You can copy the currently selected setting to all Attenuator parameters
by double-clicking the [ENTER] button.
Turning On & Off Cascade Outputs
Individual Cascade Outputs can be turned on or off as follows.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Cascade Out page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the ON/OFF buttons, and use the [ENTER]
button to set them.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
66
Chapter 6—Input & Output Patching
6 Input & Output Patching
Input Patching
Input and Output signals for the Input Channels, Input Channel Insert Ins, and internal
effects processors are selected on the Input Patch pages, which are selected by using the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button. Use the cursor buttons to select the patch parameters, use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a source, and press [ENTER]
to set.
Patch parameters display Short Port names. The Long Port name of the currently selected
patch parameter is displayed in the upper-right corner of each page.
Patching can also be done by using the Patch Select Window (see page 71). Input Channel
Inputs, Insert Ins, and Insert Outs can also be patched by using the Encoders (see page 72).
See page 241 for a complete list of input patch sources. See page 244 for a list of initial input
patches.
Input Patch settings can be stored in the Input Patch library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See “Input Patch Library” on page 145 for more information.
Patching Input Channels
AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects processor outputs, Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs,
Bus Outs, or Aux Sends can be patched to the Input Channel Inputs.
The Input Channel Patch parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided between two
pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Patch page is shown below. The layout of the other page is
the same. When Vertical Input Channel pairing mode is selected, patch parameters for vertical partners are displayed, for example, CH1, CH25, CH2, CH26, and so on.
In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the
LAYER and [SEL] buttons.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Input Patching
67
Patching Input Channel Insert Ins
AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects processor outputs, Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs can
be patched to the Input Channel Insert Ins.
The Input Channel Insert In Patch parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided
between two pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Insert In Patch page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same. When Vertical Input Channel pairing mode is selected,
patch parameters for vertical partners are displayed, for example, CH1, CH25, CH2, CH26,
and so on.
In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the
LAYER and [SEL] buttons.
Patching Effects Inputs and Outputs
Aux Sends, internal effects processor outputs (OUT1 and OUT2 only), or Output Channel
Insert Outs can be patched to the internal effects processor inputs.
Input Channels, or Insert Ins can be patched to the internal effects processor outputs. Internal effects processor inputs can be also patched to the internal effects processor outputs
(OUT1 and OUT2 only).
FOLLOW SURROUND: When surround effects are recalled to Effects processor 1, this
button sorts the effect inputs and outputs displayed in the list in the order specified on the
Surround Bus Setup page (see page 87). If the recalled surround effects are compatible with
5.1 Channel systems, the surround bus setting for 5.1 surround mode will be used.
: Press this button repeatedly until an Effect Edit (1–4) page for the effects processor you
wish to edit appears.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
68
Chapter 6—Input & Output Patching
Output Patching
Signal sources for the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, Output Channel Inserts Ins, Direct Outs,
and 2TR Digital Outputs are selected on the Output Patch pages, which are selected by
using the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button. Use the cursor buttons to select
the patch parameters, use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a source, and
press [ENTER] to set.
Depending on the patch page, patch parameters display either Short Channel or Short Port
names. The Long Channel or Port name of the currently selected patch parameter is displayed in the upper-right corner of each page.
Signal sources can also be selected by using the Patch Select Window (see page 71). Insert
Ins, Insert Outs, and Direct Outs can also be patched by using the Encoders (see page 72).
See page 245 for a complete list of output patch sources. See page 249 for a list of initial output patches.
Output Patch settings can be stored in the Output Patch library, which contains 1 preset
memory and 32 user memories. See “Output Patch Library” on page 145 for more information.
Patching Slot Outputs
Bus Outs, Aux Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs, or Surround
Monitor Channels can be patched to the Slot Outputs. Slot Outputs can be patched to
Direct Outs on the Direct Out Destination pages (see page 70).
The Slot Output Patch parameters for the four Slots are arranged into two pages. The Slot
1–2 Output Patch page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same.
When a Slot Output is patched to a Direct Out (see page 70), and that Direct Out is assigned
on an Input Channel Routing page, the Slot Output patch cannot be changed here. If the
higher sampling rate (88.2 kHz/96 kHz) data format is set to Double Channel mode, the
Slot’s even channel patch is disabled and cannot be changed.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Output Patching
69
Patching Omni Outs
Bus Outs, Aux Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs, or Surround
Monitor Channels can be patched to the Omni Outs. Omni Outs can be patched to Direct
Outs on the Direct Out Destination pages (see page 70).
When an Omni Out is patched to a Direct out (see page 70), and that Direct Out is assigned
on an Input Channel Routing page, the Omni Out patch cannot be changed here.
Output Channel Inserts Ins
AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects processor outputs, or Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs
can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins. The left and right channels of the Stereo
Out can be patched individually.
In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the
[SEL] buttons.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
70
Chapter 6—Input & Output Patching
Patching Direct Outs
Direct Outs can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or 2TR Digital Outputs.
The Direct Out Destination parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided between two
pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Direct Out Destination page is shown below. The layout of
the other page is the same.
In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the
LAYER and [SEL] buttons.
Patching the 2TR Digital Outputs
Bus Outs, Aux Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs, or the Control
Room signal can be patched to the 2TR Digital Outputs. 2TR Digital Outputs can be
patched to Direct Outs on the Direct Out Destination pages (see page 70). The left and right
channels of each Digital Output can be patched individually.
When a 2TR Digital Output is patched to a Direct out (see page 70), and that Direct Out is
assigned on an Input Channel Routing page, the 2TR Digital Output patch cannot be
changed here.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Naming Input & Output Ports
71
Naming Input & Output Ports
You can specify Long and Short names for the Input and Output Ports as follows. These
names appear on the Input and Output Patch pages.
See page 251 for a list of the initial Input Port names; page 252 for Output Port names.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Input Port or Output
Port Name page.
2
Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the ports.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the Long or Short name, and then press
[ENTER].
When the Title Edit window appears, edit the port name, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 46 for more information.
When the Name Input Auto Copy option is on, the first four characters of a newly entered
Long name are automatically copied to the Short name and vice versa.
You can reset all port names back to their initial values by pressing the INITIALIZE button.
Patch Select Window
Input and Output patches can be made by using the Patch Select window, shown below,
which appears when the [ENTER] button is pressed while a patch parameter is selected.
Available input and output sources and destinations are displayed in a hierarchical format
in three panes. The existing source or destination is displayed in the upper-right corner of
the window. Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the pane on the left, and use the
Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the top level item. Then move the cursor to
the center pane, and select an item at the next level. Select an item in the right pane, if available, and then select the YES button and press [ENTER].
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
72
Chapter 6—Input & Output Patching
Patching with the Encoders
The following patches can be made by using the Encoders: Input Channel Inputs, Insert
Outs, Insert Ins, and Direct Outs.
1
Assign one of the above parameters to an Encoder ASSIGN button, as
explained on page 51.
2
Press the ASSIGN button to which you assigned the patch parameter.
3
Use the Encoders to select ports, and press the Encoder push switches to set
them.
The coresponding Patch page appears when an Encoder is operated. If you operate another
Encoder, the selection is cancelled and the patch is left unchanged.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Input Channels
73
7 Input Channels
Patching Input Channels
AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects processor outputs, Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs,
Bus Outs, or Aux Sends can be patched to the Input Channel Inputs. See “Patching Input
Channels” on page 66 for more information.
Metering Input Channels
Input Channel signal levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 107
for more information.
Reversing the Signal Phase
The signal phase of each Input Channel can be reversed as follows.
1
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DISPLAY ACCESS [PHASE/INSERT] button to
select the Phase pages.
The Phase parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The Input
Channel 1–48 Phase page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same.
2
Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the NOR/REV buttons,
and the [ENTER] button and INC/DEC buttons to set them.
The NOR/REV buttons can also be selected by using the [SEL] buttons.
GLOBAL NOR/REV: These buttons allow you to set the phase of all Input Channels
simultaneously.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
74
Chapter 7—Input Channels
Gating Input Channels
Each Input Channel features a noise Gate for automatically shutting out unwanted noise.
Gate settings can be stored in the Gate library, which contains 4 preset memories and 124
user memories. See “Gate Library” on page 148 for more information.
Preset Gates & Types
The following table lists the preset Gates and types. See page 283 for detailed parameter
information.
#
Preset Name
Type
Description
1
Gate
GATE
Gate template
2
Ducking
DUCKING
Ducking template
3
A. Dr. BD
GATE
Gate preset for use with acoustic bass drums
4
A. Dr. SN
GATE
Gate preset for use with acoustic snare drums
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS Controls
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select
Input Channels.
2
Use the [GATE ON] button to turn the currently selected Input Channel’s
Gate on or off.
DYNAMICS
DISPLAY
GATE ON COMP ON
3
GATE / COMP
GATE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
ATTACK
DECAY
HOLD
COMP
THRESHOLD
RATIO
ATTACK
RELEASE
GAIN
Use the [GATE/COMP] button to set the DYNAMICS controls to GATE (GATE
indicator lit), and use the THRESHOLD, RANGE, ATTACK, DECAY, and HOLD
controls to set the Gate.
Gate Edit Page
Gate settings can be viewed and set on the Gate Edit page. If the Auto DYNAMICS Display
preference is on, this page appears automatically when a gate control in the SELECTED
CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is operated.
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select
Input Channels.
2
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the
Gate Library page, and then recall a Gate preset that contains the gate type
that you want.
See “Gate Library” on page 148 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Attenuating Input Channels
75
3
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the
Gate Edit page.
4
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
KEYIN SOURCE: This determines the trigger source for the currently selected Input
Channel’s Gate. Trigger sources include SELF (the Gate’s own input signal), CHANNEL
(another Input Channel), or AUX (an Aux Send from 1–8). Input Channel trigger sources
are selectable in blocks of 12 channels. For example, if Input Channel #1 is currently
selected, an Input Channel from 1–12 can be selected as the trigger source. However, if
Input Channel #13 is currently selected, an Input Channel from 13–24 can be selected.
STEREO LINK: This allows you to pair Gates for stereo operation even when Input Channels are not paired. Input Channel Gates are paired either horizontally or vertically depending on the Pair mode setting for the currently selected Input Channel. See “Pairing
Channels” on page 123 for more information on horizontal and vertical pairing. When
Input Channels are paired, this parameter is turned on automatically and cannot be
changed.
CURVE: This displays the gate curve (i.e., input level vs. output level).
TYPE: This is the gate type used by the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate.
Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its
horizontal or vertical partner. The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being
applied by the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate.
ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate on and off. It works in
unison with the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [GATE ON] button.
PARAMETER: These controls are used to set the Threshold, Range, Attack, Decay, and
Hold parameters.
Attenuating Input Channels
Input Channels signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 110 for
more information.
EQ’ing Input Channels
Each Input Channel features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 111 for more
information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
76
Chapter 7—Input Channels
Grouping Input Channel EQs
Input Channel EQs can be grouped, allowing you to control the EQ of several Input Channels simultaneously. There are four Input Channel EQ groups: a, b, c, and d.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Equalizer Link
page.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers.
The corresponding group row is selected as each Layer is selected.
3
Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select EQ groups a–d.
The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box.
4
Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Input Channels to and from the
selected group.
The EQ settings of the first Input Channel added to the group are applied to all subsequently added Input Channels.
When an Input Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.
Input Channel Inserts
Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Input
Channels by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 115 for more information.
Compressing Input Channels
Each Input Channel features a Compressor. See “Compressing Channels” on page 116 for
more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Grouping Input Channel Compressors
77
Grouping Input Channel Compressors
Input Channel Compressors can be grouped, allowing you to control the compression of
several Input Channels simultaneously by operating any Compressor control in the group.
There are four Input Channel Compressor groups: i, j, k, and l.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Comp Link
page.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers.
The corresponding group row is selected as each Layer is selected.
3
Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Comp groups i–l.
The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box.
4
Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Input Channels to and from the
selected group.
The Compressor settings of the first Input Channel added to the group are applied to all
subsequently added Input Channels.
When an Input Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.
Delaying Input Channels
Each Input Channel features a Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 120
for more information.
Muting Input Channels (ON/OFF)
Input Channels can be muted as follows.
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers.
2
Use the [ON] buttons to mute the Input Channels.
The [ON] button indicators of channels that are on are lit.
ON
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
78
Chapter 7—Input Channels
Grouping Input Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)
Input Channel Mutes can be grouped, allowing you to mute several Input Channels simultaneously. There are eight Input Channel Mute groups: I, J, K, L, M, N, O, and P.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Channel Mute
Group pages.
The Mute group parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The
Input Channel 1–48 Mute Group page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the
same.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers.
The corresponding Mute Group page and group row is selected as each Layer is selected.
3
Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Mute groups I–P.
The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box.
4
Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove mutes to and from the selected
group.
When an Input Channel is added to a Mute group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.
ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups.
INPUT MUTE MASTER: When this check box is checked, clicking a MASTER MUTE
button mutes or unmutes all channels in the corresponding Mute group. When this check
box is unchecked, the Input Channel [ON] button status links to the mute on/off status of
the channels in the group.
MASTER MUTE: When the Input Mute Master check box is checked, use this button to
mute or unmute all channels in the corresponding Mute group.
When the Input Mute Master check box is unchecked, pressing the Input Channel [ON]
button mutes or unmutes the channels in the corresponding Mute group (Mute On channels turn off and Mute Off channels turn on).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
79
Input Channel Mute Master
Input Channel Mute Master
The 02R96 features a Mute Master function that enables you to mute all channels in the
Mute group using the MASTER button, much like a Mute group on an analog mixing console. When the Mute Group Master function is enabled, the channel [ON] button status
does not link to the corresponding Mute group.
1
Follow Steps 1–4 as described in the “Grouping Input Channel Mutes
(ON/OFF)” section on the previous page, select the Input Mute Master check
box, then press the [ENTER] button to check or uncheck the Input Mute
Group Master check box.
2
When the Input Mute Master check box is checked, the MASTER MUTE button for each Mute group turns mute on or off for the channels in the corresponding Mute group.
If the channels are muted by the Mute Master function, the corresponding channel [ON]
button indicators flash. You can assign the MASTER MUTE button function to one of the
USER DEFINED KEYS for convenient operation.
Setting Input Channel Levels
10
5
Input Channel levels can be set as follows.
0
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers.
2
Press the FADER MODE [FADER] button to select Fader mode.
3
Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels.
Refer to the legend on the left side of the faders when setting Input Channel levels.
Fader positions can be viewed on the Fader View pages. See “Viewing Channel
Fader Settings” on page 130 for more information.
5
10
15
Grouping Input Channel Faders
20
30
40
50
1
25
49
Input Channel faders can be grouped, allowing you to control the level of several Input
Channels simultaneously. There are eight Input Channel Fader groups: A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
and H.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Channel Fader
Group pages.
The Fader Group parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The
Input Channel 1–48 Fader Group page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the
same.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
80
Chapter 7—Input Channels
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers.
The corresponding Fader Group page and group row is selected as each Layer is selected.
3
Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Fader groups A–H.
The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box.
4
Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove faders to and from the selected
group.
When an Input Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.
ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups.
INPUT FADER MASTER: When this check box is unchecked, the Input Channel fader
positions link to the fader levels for the channels in the corresponding Fader group. When
this check box is checked, you can set the master level for the corresponding Input Channel
Fader group in the Master column. The resultant Input Channel level equals the corresponding Input Channel fader level plus the Group Master level. See “Group Master for
Input Channel Faders” on page 80.
When the Input Fader Master check box is not checked, operating the channel faders will
affect the input levels for the corresponding Fader group. Pressing and holding down the
[SEL] button while operating the fader of an Input Channel will temporarily cancel the corresponding Fader group, which is convenient if you want to adjust the relative balance
between channels.
Fader groups are active only in Fader mode (i.e., when the FADER MODE [FADER] button
indicator is on). See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 49 for more information.
Group Master for Input Channel Faders
The 02R96 features a Fader Group Master function that enables you to control the level of
all channels using the Group Master level while maintaining the relative balance between
channels, much like a VCA group on an analog mixing console. While this function is
enabled, channel fader operation does not affect channel levels in the corresponding Fader
group.
1
Follow Steps 1–4 as described in the “Grouping Input Channel Faders” section on the previous page, select the Input Fader Master check box, then
press the [ENTER] button to check or uncheck the Input Fader Master check
box.
2
When the Input Fader Master check box is checked, you can set channel levels of the Fader groups in the Master column.
When the Master column is selected, repeatedly pressing the [ENTER] button turns the
Input Fader group on and off.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Group Master for Input Channel Faders
81
You can also make these settings in the Input Fader Group Master page, as shown below.
3
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Fader Group
Master page.
4
Use the cursor buttons to select parameters, then use the Parameter wheel,
INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set the parameters.
INPUT FADER MASTER: When this check box is checked, you can set the master levels
for the Input Fader groups. The resultant Input Channel level equals the corresponding
Input Channel fader level plus the Group Master level.
ALL NOMINAL: This button resets the master levels for all Input Fader groups to nominal.
ON/OFF: This turns each Input Fader group on or off. This function works like a VCA
mute on an analog mixing console.
Faders: These faders adjust the master levels of the Fader groups. Fader knobs are highlighted when faders are set to 0.0 dB. Press the [ENTER] button to set the currently-selected
fader to 0.0 dB.
You can also control the parameters from the channel strips on the control surface as
described below by using the User Assignable Layer of the Remote Layers. See page 228 for
information on the User Assignable Layer.
Encoders: The Encoders are not available.
[AUTO] buttons: These buttons are used to control the Fader Group Master On/Off and
the master level during Automix.
[SEL] buttons: These buttons move the cursor on the Input Fader Group Master page.
[SOLO] buttons: These buttons turn the Solo function of each Fader group on and off.
You can monitor all the channels in each Fader group.
Channel Faders: The channel faders enable you to set the master level for each Fader
group.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
82
Chapter 7—Input Channels
Routing Input Channels
Each Input Channel can be routed to the Bus Outs, Stereo Out, or its own Direct Out.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING Controls
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers, and use the
[SEL] buttons to select the Input Channels.
ROUTING
DISPLAY
1
2
2
Use the [1–8], [STEREO], and [DIRECT] buttons to route the
currently selected Input Channel.
[1–8]: These buttons route the currently selected Input Channel to the
Bus Outs.
[STEREO]: This button routes the currently selected Input Channel to
the Stereo Out.
DIRECT: This button routes the currently selected Input Channel to its Direct Out.
[FOLLOW PAN]: This determines whether the Input Channel’s Pan control setting is
applied to the Bus Outs. When off, the levels of the signals fed to the odd and even Bus Outs
is the same. When on, the levels of the signals fed to the odd and even Bus Outs follows the
Pan control.
In Surround mode, when this button is turned off, the surround pan setting does not affect
signals fed to the Bus Outs. You can enable the surround pan setting when the input source
is monaural, and patch the surround sources or surround effects directly to the Surround
Buses.
FOLLOW PAN
3
4
5
6
7
8
STEREO
DIRECT
Routing Pages
Input Channel routing settings can be viewed and set on the Routing pages. If the Auto
ROUTING Display preference is on, these pages appear automatically when a button in the
SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING section is pressed. See “Auto ROUTING Display” on
page 230.
1
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button to select the Routing pages.
The Routing parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided among three pages. The
Input Channel 1–24 Routing page is shown below. The layout of the other two pages is the
same.
2
Use the cursor buttons and Parameter wheel to select the parameters, and
use the [ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons to set them.
Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER buttons and [SEL] buttons.
ALL STEREO: This button assigns all Input Channels that are currently displayed to the
Stereo Out.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
83
Panning Input Channels
ALL BUS: This button assigns all Input Channels that are currently displayed to all Bus
Outs
ALL CLEAR: This button clears all routing assignments that are currently displayed.
The currently selected Surround mode is displayed in the lower-left corner. When Stereo
mode is selected, the Bus Out routing buttons display numbers from 1 through 8. When a
Surround Pan mode is selected, they display abbreviations of the Surround Channel names,
as shown in the following table. See “Using Surround Pan” on page 85 for more information.
Surround Mode
Bus Outs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Stereo
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3-1
L
R
C
S
5
6
7
8
7
8
E
8
5.1
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
E1
6.1
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
Bs
1. Short for LFE (Low frequency Effects).
This table shows the default assignments. The actual assignments may vary depending on
the settings on the Surround Bus Setup page. See “Assigning Surround Channels to Buses”
on page 87 for more information.
Panning Input Channels
Input Channels can be panned between the left and right channels of the Stereo Out.
Using the Encoders
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers.
2
Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button to select the Pan Encoder
mode.
3
Use the Encoders to pan the input channels.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND Controls
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to
select the Input Channels.
PAN / SURROUND
DISPLAY
L
2
R
L
R
ODD
EVEN
LINK
GRAB
EFFECT
Use the Pan control to pan the currently selected Input Channel.
The pan display indicates the pan position of the currently selected Input Channel. When
pan is set to center, the center two segments light up. You can use the [L] and [R] buttons
to select horizontal or vertical Input Channel partners.
The [LINK] button, which is enabled only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is
selected, is used to link the Pan control and the Joystick so that either control can be used
for panning. This setting applies only to Input Channels that are currently selected. For this
to work, the [EFFECT] button indicator must be off and the [GRAB] and [LINK] button
indicators must be on.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
84
Chapter 7—Input Channels
Pan Pages
Pan settings can be viewed and set on the Pan pages. If the Auto PAN/SURROUND Display
preference is on, these pages appear automatically when a control in the SELECTED
CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND section is operated.
1
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select
the Input Channel Pan pages.
The Pan parameters for the 56 Input Channels are arranged into three pages. The Input
Channel 1–24 Pan page is shown below. The layout of the other two pages is the same.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the Pan controls, and use the Parameter
wheel and INC/DEC buttons to set them.
Pan parameters can also be selected by using the LAYER buttons and [SEL] buttons.
The currently selected Pan control can be set to center by pressing [ENTER].
MODE: There are three Pan modes that determine how horizontally and vertically paired
Input Channels are panned: Individual, Gang, and Inverse Gang. This is a global setting that
applies to all paired Input Channels.
In individual mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate independently.
In Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison.
In Inverse Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison but
move in opposite directions.
Aux Send Pan controls can be linked to Input Channel Pan controls so that operating an
Input Channel Pan control also operates the corresponding Aux Send Pan control, and vice
versa (see page 103). While linked, the Pan mode can be set on the Aux Pan page or the
Input Channel Pan page.
Note: While the PAN/SURROUND [LINK] button is turned on, the Pan mode is automatically set to Individual. When the Pan mode is switched from Gang mode to Inverse Gang mode,
the [LINK] button is turned off.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
85
Using Surround Pan
Using Surround Pan
The 02R96 supports 3-1, 5.1 and 6.1 Surround modes. Surround pan is independent of normal panning. Normal panning determines how the Input Channel signal is panned
between the left and right channels of the Stereo out. Whereas surround panning determines how the Input Channel signal is panned among the Surround channels (i.e., the Bus
Outs).
If Input Channel Follow Pan is off, you can patch signals to the corresponding Bus Outs
without being affected by the surround pan setting. This is useful when you want to assign
the surround source or surround effect return to Bus Outs.
When the Nominal Pan preference is on (see page 231), signals will be at nominal level
when panned hard left or hard right, and at +3 dB when the preference is turned off.
Note: If you have saved a scene with the Follow Pan function turned off on a 02R96 that is
older than Version 2.0, the surround setting may not be reproduced
The following table shows how Surround channels are handled by the Bus Outs.
The table may vary depending on the settings on the Surround Bus Setup page (see
page 87).
Surround
Mode
3-1
5.1
6.1
Bus Outs
1
2
3
4
L
R
C
S
Front left
Front right
Center
Surround
5
6
7
—
—
—
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
LFE
Front left
Front right
Rear left
Rear right
Center
Subwoofer
—
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
Bs
LFE
Front left
Front right
Rear left
Rear right
Center
Rear center
Subwoofer
Selecting Surround Pan Modes
The Surround mode can be selected as follows.
1
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select
the Surround Mode page.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
86
Chapter 7—Input Channels
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the surround mode buttons, and press
[ENTER] to activate the selected mode.
The diagram on each page shows the typical sound image placement and the Surround
channel to Bus Out configuration.
3-1 Surround
5.1 Surround
6.1 Surround
Select the SURR/BUS SETUP button, then press the [ENTER] button to display the Surround Bus Setup page, which enables you to change the Surround Channel to Bus Out
assignment. See “Assigning Surround Channels to Buses” on page 87 for more information
on the Surround Bus Setup page.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Surround Channels to Buses
87
Assigning Surround Channels to Buses
You can modify the Surround Channel to Bus assignment.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Surround Bus Setup
page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the bus for which you want to change the
surround channel assignment, then use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC
buttons to select a surround channel.
INIT: These buttons reset the channel assignment to the default setting.
Using the Joystick
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to
select the Input Channels.
PAN / SURROUND
DISPLAY
L
2
R
L
R
ODD
EVEN
LINK
GRAB
EFFECT
Press the [GRAB] button to grab the current Joystick position, and then use
the Joystick to set the surround pan.
This is used to turn on and off Joystick surround pan control for the currently selected Input
Channel. While Grab is on, the Joystick can be used to set the surround pan position of the
currently selected Input Channel. If the Joystick is set to control effects (i.e., the [EFFECT]
button indicator is lit), the [GRAB] button is disabled.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
88
Chapter 7—Input Channels
Selected Channel Surround Edit Page
Surround pan settings can be viewed and set on the Input Channel Surround Edit page. If
the Auto PAN/SURROUND Display preference is on, and a Surround Pan mode other than
Stereo is selected, this page appears automatically when a PAN/SURROUND control other
than the [EFFECT] button is operated. See “Auto PAN/SURROUND Display” on page 230.
1
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select
the Surround Edit page.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to
select the Input Channels.
The Surround Edit page displays surround pan parameters for the currently selected Input
Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner. The current surround pan position of each
Input Channel is indicated by a small circle. It’s also indicated numerically next to each
Input Channel number, for example, “CH1 (L9, R10).”
The graph of the currently selected Input Channel displays a small square, which indicates
the current position of the Joystick. If the Auto Grab preference is on (see page 231), when
the Joystick is moved to the current surround pan position, the Joystick kicks in as surround
pan control and the small square disappears.
The number of speaker icons and meters around the surround graph depends on the currently selected Surround mode. The meters indicate Bus Out signal levels.
You can move the surround pan directly to one of the speaker icons, including the box icons
without speakers, by selecting its icon, and then pressing [ENTER].
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
Patterns: These buttons are used to select the seven patterns that determine how the surround pan moves by the Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons.
FAST: This sets the speed of surround pan control when using the Parameter wheel and
INC/DEC buttons.
WIDTH: This sets the left-to-right width of the selected pattern.
DEPTH: This sets the front-to-rear depth of the selected pattern.
WIDTH OFFSET: This can be used to offset the left-to-right direction of the selected pattern.
DEPTH OFFSET: This can be used to offset the front-to-rear direction of the selected pattern.
LFE: This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel (5.1 and 6.1 mode
only).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Surround Channels to Buses
89
DIV (divergence): This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and
Center channels. When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels
(i.e., Phantom Center). When set to 50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right,
and Center channels. When set to 100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center)
(3-1 and 5.1 mode only).
DIV F/R: The F parameter control determines how the Front Center signal is fed to the Left
and Right channels. The R parameter control determines how the rear surround signal is
fed to the Left and Right surround channels (only for 6.1 surround).
DIV LINK: When DIV LINK is on, the F and R parameter controls are set to the same value
and linked to each other (only for 6.1 Surround).
ST LINK: This can be used to link the surround pan parameters of the currently selected
Input Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner regardless of whether they are paired.
PATTERN: When Input Channels are linked, the eight patterns selectable here determine
how the linked surround pan moves by the Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons.
Input Channel Surround Pages
Surround pan positions can be viewed and set on the Surround pages.
1
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select
the Input Channel Surround pages.
The Surround parameters for the 56 Input Channels are arranged into three pages. The
Input Channel 1–24 Surround page is shown below. The layout of the other two pages is the
same.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the Surround parameters, and use the
Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons to set them.
Input Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER buttons and [SEL] buttons. The
graph for the currently selected Input Channel displays a small square, which indicates the
current position of the Joystick.
L/R: These parameters are used to set the left/right surround position. While selected, they
can quickly be set to center by pressing [ENTER].
F/R: These parameters are used to set the front/rear surround position. While selected, they
can quickly be set to center by pressing [ENTER].
You can jump to the more detailed Surround Edit page by pressing [ENTER] while an Input
Channel’s surround graph is selected.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
90
Chapter 7—Input Channels
Sending Input Channels to Aux Sends
Input Channel signals can be sent to Aux Sends 1–8. See “Setting Aux Send Levels” on
page 99 and “Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Aux Sends” on page 98.
Soloing Input Channels
Input Channels can be soloed. See page 121 for more information.
Direct Outs
Each Input Channel features a Direct Out, which can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni
Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. Direct Out signals can be sourced pre-EQ, pre-fader, or
post-fader. See “Patching Direct Outs” on page 70 and “Routing Input Channels” on
page 82 for more information.
Pairing Input Channels
Horizontal or vertical Input Channel partners can be paired for stereo operation. See “Pairing Channels” on page 123 for more information.
Viewing Input Channel Settings
Parameter and fader settings for each Input Channel can be viewed on the View pages. See
“Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 129 and “Viewing Channel Fader Settings”
on page 130 for more information.
Naming Input Channels
Input Channels can be named for easy identification. See “Naming Channels” on page 134
for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Using the MS Stereo Microphone
91
Using the MS Stereo Microphone
The MS system is a type of stereo recording that uses two microphones: mono-directional
M (Middle) and bi-directional S (Side) microphones. An M microphone picks up main signals, and an S microphone picks up directional signals. These two signals are decoded by
calculating a sum (M plus S) and a difference (M minus S), and are recorded to L and R
channels.
An MS microphone is usually a stereo microphone that features both M and S functions.
To use an MS microphone, do the following:
1
Connect the L connector of an MS microphone to an odd channel input jack,
and the R connector to an even channel input jack.
Signals from the MS microphone are
MS microphone
input from the L and R connectors. To
use an MS microphone with the
02R96, connect the L connector to the
input jack of an odd Input Channel,
and connect the R connector to the
input jack of the partner channel.
R connector
L connector
2
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR] button to locate the Pair pages.
3
Turn on the MS button for the channels to which the MS microphone is connected.
The two channels are automatically paired and MS Decoding is turned on. With MS Decoding turned on, the faders and Encoders (Pan parameters) function as follows:
• Odd-channel faders.................M level (Controls the volume level.)
• Odd-channel Encoders ...........ML/MR balance
• Even-channel faders ................S level (Controls the left and right directional spread.)
• Even-channel Encoders ..........SL/SR balance
4
Use the faders and Encoders to adjust the MS microphone level and balance.
When the signals are routed to paired Buses or the Stereo Bus, a sum of signals (ML plus
SL) is sent to the odd-numbered Bus, and a difference of signals (ML minus SL) is sent to
the even-numbered Bus.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
92
Chapter 8—Stereo Out
8 Stereo Out
Stereo Out Connectors
The Stereo Out is output by the STEREO OUT +4 dB (BAL) balanced
XLR-3-32-type connectors and the STEREO OUT –10 dBV (UNBAL)
unbalanced phono connectors.
Patching the Stereo Out to Outputs
The left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni
Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. See “Output Patching” on page 68 for more information.
Routing Input Channels to the Stereo Out
Input Channels can be routed and panned to the Stereo Out. See “Routing Input Channels”
on page 82 for more information.
Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out
Bus Out signals can be sent to the Stereo Out. See “Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out” on
page 97 for more information.
Metering the Stereo Out
Stereo Out signal levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 107 for
more information.
Monitoring the Stereo Out
The Stereo Out can be monitored via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUTs and the
PHONES (see page 136) or the STUDIO MONITOR OUT (see page 137).
Attenuating the Stereo Out
Stereo Out signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 110 for
more information.
EQ’ing the Stereo Out
The Stereo Out features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 111 for more information.
Grouping Master EQs
The Stereo Out EQ can be grouped with the EQs of other Output Channels. See “Grouping
Output Channel EQs” on page 114 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
93
Stereo Out Inserts
Stereo Out Inserts
Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Stereo Out
by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 115 for more information.
Compressing the Stereo Out
Signal dynamics can be controlled by using the Stereo Out Compressor. See “Compressing
Channels” on page 116 for more information.
Grouping Master Compressors
The Stereo Out Compressor can be grouped with the Compressors of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Compressors” on page 119 for more information.
Muting the Stereo Out (ON/OFF)
ON
The Stereo Out can be muted by using the STEREO [ON] button, which is used
exclusively for this task and is not affected by the Layers. Its indicator lights up
when the Stereo Out is on.
Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF)
The Stereo Out Mute can be grouped with the Mutes of other Output Channels. See
“Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)” on page 128 for more information.
Setting the Stereo Out Level
The Stereo Out level is set by using the STEREO fader, which is used exclusively for this task and is not affected by the Layers or Fader modes.
0
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
STEREO
Grouping Master Faders
The Stereo Out fader can be grouped with the faders of other Output Channels. See
“Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 126 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
94
Chapter 8—Stereo Out
Balancing the Stereo Out
The left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be balanced as follows.
1
Press the STEREO [SEL] button to select the Stereo Out.
PAN / SURROUND
DISPLAY
L
2
R
L
R
ODD
EVEN
Use the Pan control to set the balance.
The pan display indicates the balance. When the balance is set to center, the center two segments light up.
The Stereo Out balance can also be set on the Stereo Fader View page. See “Viewing Channel
Fader Settings” on page 130 for more information.
Delaying the Stereo Out
The left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be delayed independently by using the Stereo Out Delay. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 120 for more information.
Viewing Stereo Out Settings
Parameter and fader settings for the Stereo Out can be viewed and set on the View pages.
See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 129 and “Viewing Channel Fader Settings” on page 130 for more information.
Naming the Stereo Out
The Stereo Out can be named for easy identification. See “Naming Channels” on page 134
for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Bus Outs
95
9 Bus Outs
Patching Bus Outs to Outputs
Bus Outs can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. See
“Output Patching” on page 68 for more information.
Routing Input Channels to Bus Outs
Input Channels can be routed to the Bus Outs. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 82
for more information.
Metering Bus Outs
Bus Out signal levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 107 for
more information.
Monitoring Bus Outs
Bus Outs can be assigned to the CONTROL ROOM [ASSIGN 1] or [ASSIGN 2] button for
monitoring. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 136 for more information.
Attenuating Bus Outs
Bus Out signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 110 for more
information.
EQ’ing Bus Outs
Each Bus Out features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 111 for more information.
Grouping Master EQs
Bus Out EQs can be grouped with the EQs of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel EQs” on page 114 for more information.
Bus Out Inserts
Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Bus Outs
by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 115 for more information.
Compressing Bus Outs
Signal dynamics can be controlled by using the Bus Out Compressors. See “Compressing
Channels” on page 116 for more information.
Grouping Master Compressors
Bus Out Compressors can be grouped with the Compressors of other Output Channels. See
“Grouping Output Channel Compressors” on page 119 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
96
Chapter 9—Bus Outs
Muting Bus Outs (ON/OFF)
Bus Outs can be muted by using the channel strip [ON] buttons.
1
Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.
2
Use channel strip [ON] buttons 17–24 to mute the Bus Outs.
The [ON] button indicators of Bus Outs that are on light up.
ON
Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF)
Bus Out Mutes can be grouped with the Mutes of other Output Channels. See “Grouping
Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)” on page 128 for more information.
Setting Bus Out Levels
Bus Out levels can be set as follows.
1
Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.
2
Press the FADER MODE [FADER] button to select Fader mode.
3
Use faders 17–24 to set the Bus Out levels.
Refer to the legend on the right side of the faders when setting Bus Out levels.
10
5
0
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
17
41
Grouping Master Faders
BUS 1
Bus Out faders can be grouped with the faders of other Output Channels. See “Grouping
Output Channel Faders” on page 126 for more information.
Delaying Bus Outs
Each Bus Out features a Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 120 for
more information.
Soloing Bus Outs
Bus Outs can be soloed. See page 121 for more information.
Pairing Bus Outs
Bus Outs can be paired for stereo operation. See “Pairing Channels” on page 123 for more
information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out
97
Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out
Bus Outs can be routed to the Stereo Out buses as follows. Bus Out to Stereo Out settings
can be stored in the Bus to Stereo library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user
memories. See “Bus to Stereo Library” on page 147 for more information.
1
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button to locate the Bus
to Stereo page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
PAN: These controls are used to pan the Bus Out signals between the left and right Stereo
Out buses. The currently selected Pan control can be set to center by pressing [ENTER].
ON/OFF: These buttons are used to turn on and off the Bus Out to Stereo Out routing.
Faders: These faders are used to set the Bus Out to Stereo Out levels. Fader knobs appear
highlighted when faders are set to 0.0 dB.
Press the [ENTER] button to set the currently-selected fader to 0.0 dB. You can copy the
currently-selected fader position to other faders by double-clicking the [ENTER] button.
Viewing Bus Out Settings
Parameter and fader settings for each Bus Out can be viewed and set on the View pages. See
“Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 129 and “Viewing Channel Fader Settings”
on page 130 for more information.
Naming Bus Outs
Bus Outs can be named for easy identification. See “Naming Channels” on page 134 for
more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
98
Chapter 10—Aux Sends
10 Aux Sends
Patching Aux Send Masters to Outputs
Aux Send Masters can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. See “Output Patching” on page 68 for more information.
Setting the Aux Send Mode
Aux Sends have two operating modes—Variable and Fixed—which can be set individually
for each of the eight Aux Sends. In Variable mode, Aux Send levels are variable and the signal
source point can be either pre-fader or post-fader. In Fixed mode, Aux Send levels are fixed
at nominal and the signal source point is fixed to post-fader.
1
Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Send pages.
The Aux Send parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided among three pages. The
Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page is shown below: Variable mode on the left, Fixed mode
on the right. The layout of the other two pages is the same.
On the Fixed mode page, “GLOBAL POST” is displayed in the lower-right corner, indicating that the Aux Send Pre/Post parameter is fixed at Post.
2
Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–8.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the FIXED and VARIABLE buttons, and press
[ENTER] to select a mode.
When the Aux mode is changed, the parameters of the selected Aux Send are set as follows.
Parameters
Level
Change from Variable to Fixed
Change from Fixed to Variable
All set to nominal
All set to –∞
Pre/Post
On/Off
All set to Post
All turned off
All turned on
Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Aux Sends
Aux Sends can be configured individually as either pre-fader or post-fader on the Aux Send
pages (see page 99) or the Aux View pages (see page 102). If Aux Sends are configured as
pre-fader, you can position the send points before or after the [ON] buttons.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
99
Setting Aux Send Levels
Setting Aux Send Levels
Aux Send levels can be set by using the faders or Encoders.
Using the Faders
10
5
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers.
2
Press the FADER MODE [AUX] button to select the Aux Fader mode.
3
Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select Aux Sends
1–8.
0
5
10
15
20
4
Use the faders to set the Aux Send levels.
Refer to the legend on the left side of the faders when setting Aux Send levels.
30
40
50
1
25
49
Using the Encoders
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers.
2
Press the ENCODER MODE [AUX] button to select the Aux Encoder mode.
3
Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–8.
4
Use the Encoders to set the Aux Send levels.
Aux Send Pages
You can view and set the Aux Send parameters of all Input Channels on the Aux Send pages.
Operation of the Aux Send pages in Variable and Fixed mode is explained separately.
Variable Mode
See page 98 for information on how to select Variable Aux mode.
1
Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Send pages.
The Aux Send parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided among three pages. The
Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page in Variable mode is shown below. The layout of the
other two pages is the same.
2
Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–8.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the Input Channel Aux Send controls.
Input Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER buttons and [SEL] buttons.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
100
Chapter 10—Aux Sends
4
To turn Aux Sends on and off, select the rotary controls, and press [ENTER].
The rotary controls of Aux Sends that are turned off, appear gray, and “OFF” appears in
place of the level value. Aux Send levels can still be changed even when they’re off.
5
To set Aux Send levels, select the rotary controls, and use the Parameter
wheel or INC/DEC buttons.
To set Aux Send levels for all Input Channels to nominal, select the ALL NOMINAL button.
6
To set the Pre Fader and Post Fader parameters, select the PRE/POST buttons, and use the [ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons.
7
To set all Input Channels for the selected Aux Send to pre-fader or post-fader
simultaneously, select the GLOBAL PRE or POST button, and then press
[ENTER].
The PRE or POST button is highlighted, and remains highlighted as long as all Input Channel pre or post settings remain unchanged, so you can quickly see if all Input Channels are
set to either pre-fader or post-fader.
8
If you selected pre-fader, turn on the PRE ON button or POST ON button to
set the Pre point before or after each channel’s [ON] button.
Fixed Mode
See page 98 for information on how to select Fixed Aux mode.
1
Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Send pages.
The Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page in Fixed mode is shown below. The layout of the
other two Aux Send pages in Fixed mode is the same.
2
Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–8.
3
Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the Aux Send buttons.
Input Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER buttons and [SEL] buttons.
4
Use the [ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons to turn Aux Sends on and off.
If the Fader mode is set to Aux, the faders provide a visual indication of the On/Off status
of each Input Channel for the currently selected Aux Send. For Aux Sends that are on, faders
move to the nominal position. Aux Sends that are off, they move to the –∞ position. On/Off
settings cannot be changed by using the faders.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Viewing Aux Send Settings
101
Viewing Aux Send Settings
You can view and set settings of all Aux Sends on the Aux View pages. Level and Pre/Post
parameters are displayed separately.
Level Parameters
In Level mode, the Aux View pages display Aux Send Level and On/Off parameters. Fixed
mode Aux Sends can be turned on and off only.
1
Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux View pages.
2
Select the DISPLAY LEVEL button, and press [ENTER].
The Aux View parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided among three pages. The
Input Channel 1–24 Aux View page is shown below in Level mode. The layout of the other
two pages is the same.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the Input Channel Aux Sends.
Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL]
buttons. Aux Sends can also be selected by using the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons.
4
Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set the Aux Send levels.
5
Use the [ENTER] button to turn on and off the selected Aux Send.
The various Aux View page indicators are as follows:
Send level set to –∞, or Fixed mode Aux Send set to off.
Send level bar.
Send set to off.
Send level set to nominal.
Send off, level set to nominal.
Fixed mode Aux Send set to on.
In Variable Aux mode, the Level and On/Off parameter values for the selected Aux Send are
displayed in the lower-right corner of the page, for example, “LEVEL: –2.0 dB ON/OFF:
ON.”
In Fixed Aux mode, the On/Off parameter values for the selected Aux Send are displayed in
the lower-right corner of the page, for example, “LEVEL: FIXED ON/OFF: ON.”
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
102
Chapter 10—Aux Sends
Pre/Post Parameters
In Pre/Post mode, the Aux View pages display Aux Send Pre/Post parameters. Fixed mode
Aux Sends can be turned on and off only.
1
Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux View pages.
2
Select the DISPLAY PRE/POST button, and press [ENTER].
The Input Channel 1–24 Aux View page is shown below in Pre/Post mode. The layout of the
other two Aux View pages in Pre/Post mode is the same.
3
Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the Input Channel Aux
Sends.
Input Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER buttons and [SEL] buttons. Aux
Sends can also be selected by using the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons.
4
Use the [ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons to set the selected Aux Send to
either pre-fader or post-fader.
The various Aux View page indicators are as follows:
Aux Send configured pre-fader.
Aux Send configured post-fader.
Fixed mode Aux Send.
Fixed mode Aux Sends can be turned on and off by using the [ENTER] or INC/DEC buttons.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Panning Aux Sends
103
Panning Aux Sends
When Aux Sends are paired, Aux Sends can be panned between the paired Aux buses. See
“Pairing Channels” on page 123 for more information. If the selected Aux Send is not
paired, the message “AUXx–x are not paired” appears.
If the currently selected pair of Aux Send Masters is set to Follow Surround on the Output
Pair page, Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan settings and cannot be set
here, in which case the message “Now AUXx-x PAN Following Surround” appears. See
“Pairing Aux Sends” on page 106 for more information.
1
Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Pan pages.
The Aux Pan parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided among three pages. The
Input Channel 1–24 Aux Pan page is shown below. The layout of the other two pages is the
same.
2
Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the Aux Sends 1–8.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select Input Channel Aux Send pan controls, and
use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them.
Input Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER buttons and [SEL] buttons.
The currently selected Pan control can be set to center by pressing [ENTER].
MODE: There are three Pan modes that determine how paired Aux Sends are panned:
Individual, Gang, and Inverse Gang. This is an individual setting that applies to each send
in a pair of Aux Sends.
In individual mode, Aux Send pan controls operate independently.
In Gang mode, the Aux Send pan controls of paired Input Channels operate in
unison.
In Inverse Gang mode, the Aux Send pan controls of paired Input Channels
operate in unison but move in opposite directions.
INPUT PAN LINK: This is used to link Aux Send Pan controls to Input Channel Pan controls so that operating an Input Channel Pan control also operates the corresponding Aux
Send Pan control, and vice versa. This can be set individually for each pair of Aux Send Masters. When a link is established, the pan positions and Pan mode of the Input Channels are
copied to the Aux Sends. While linked, the Pan mode can be set from either the Aux Pan
page or the Input Channel Pan page (see page 84). The Pan mode setting for Aux Sends is
linked to the Pan mode setting for Input Channels.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
104
Chapter 10—Aux Sends
Excluding Certain Channels from Aux Sends (Mix Minus)
You can quickly exclude certain channel signals from Aux Sends by using the controls on
the top panel. This operation is called “Mix Minus.”
For example, when Aux Sends are being used as monitors for the musicians or a narrator,
you can turn off the audio signals of the musicians or narrator, excluding them from the
monitor sound.
1
Press and hold down the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons of the desired
Aux Sends.
The [ON] button indicators in the channel strip remain lit while you hold down the button.
This means that signals routed from channels with a lit [ON] button indicator to the Aux
Send are turned on.
Note: If you release the AUX SELECT button before you proceed to Step 2, you will be unable
to complete the Mix Minus operation.
2
Press the [ON] buttons of the Input Channels you wish to exclude from the
Aux Send. You can select multiple channels.
The selected channels’ [ON] button indicators turn off, and signals routed from those
channels to the corresponding Aux Send are turned off. “MIX MINUS FOR AUX * ”
appears at the bottom of the screen. (The asterisk represents an Aux number.)
Tip: At this time, the Send Level controls on the Aux Send page are grayed out.
3
To reset the setting, while pressing and holding down the AUX SELECT
[AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons you pressed in Step 1, press the [ON] buttons you
pressed in Step 2.
The corresponding [ON] button indicators light up.
Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends
While Aux Sends are in Variable mode, you can copy all Input Channel fader positions on
one layer to the corresponding Aux Sends.
This is convenient when you wish to send to the musicians monitor signals that have the
same balance setting as the Stereo Out signals.
1
Locate the copy source layer button from the Input Channel Layer buttons,
then press and hold down the button.
Note: If you release the button in the LAYER section before you proceed to Step 2, you will be
unable to complete the Copy operation.
2
Press one of the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons to select the desired
Aux Send copy destination.
The confirmation message appears.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Metering Aux Send Masters
3
105
To execute the Copy operation, move the cursor to the [YES] button, then
press [ENTER].
To cancel the Copy operation, move the cursor to the [NO] button, then press [ENTER].
Tip: If the copy destination Input Channel has been paired with a vertical partner in another
Layer, the fader position will be copied to the partner’s Aux Send.
Metering Aux Send Masters
Aux Send Master levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 107 for
more information.
Monitoring Aux Send Masters
Aux Send Masters can be assigned to the CONTROL ROOM [ASSIGN 1] or [ASSIGN 2]
button for monitoring. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 136 for more information. Aux 7 and Aux 8 can be monitored via the STUDIO MONITOR OUT (see page 137).
Attenuating Aux Send Masters
Aux Send Master signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 110
for more information.
EQ’ing Aux Send Masters
Each Aux Send Master features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 111 for
more information.
Grouping Master EQs
Aux Send Master EQs can be grouped with the EQs of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel EQs” on page 114 for more information.
Aux Send Master Inserts
Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Aux Send
Masters by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 115 for more information.
Compressing Aux Send Masters
Signal dynamics can be controlled by using the Aux Send Master Compressors. See “Compressing Channels” on page 116 for more information.
Grouping Master Compressors
Aux Send Master Compressors can be grouped with the Compressors of other Output
Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Compressors” on page 119 for more information.
Muting Aux Send Masters (ON/OFF)
Aux Send Masters can be muted as follows.
1
Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.
2
Use channel strip [ON] buttons 9–16 to mute the Aux Send Masters.
The [ON] button indicators of Aux Send Masters that are on light up.
ON
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
106
Chapter 10—Aux Sends
Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF)
Aux Send Master Mutes can be grouped with the Mutes of other Output Channels. See
“Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)” on page 128 for more information.
Settings Aux Send Master Levels
Aux Send Master levels can be set as follows.
1
Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.
2
Press the FADER MODE [FADER] button to select the Fader mode.
3
Use faders 9–16 to set the Aux Send Master levels.
Refer to the legend on the right side of the faders when setting Aux Send Master
levels.
10
5
0
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
9
33
AUX 1
Grouping Master Faders
Aux Send Master faders can be grouped with the faders of other Output Channels. See
“Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 126 for more information.
Delaying Aux Send Masters
Each Aux Send Master features a Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page
120 for more information.
Soloing Aux Sends
Aux Sends can be soloed. See page 121 for more information.
Pairing Aux Sends
Aux Sends can be paired for stereo operation. See “Pairing Channels” on page 123 for more
information.
Viewing Aux Send Master Settings
Parameter and fader settings for each Aux Send Master can be viewed and set on the View
pages. See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 129 and “Viewing Channel Fader
Settings” on page 130 for more information.
Naming Aux Send Masters
Aux Send Masters can be named for easy identification. See “Naming Channels” on page
134 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Common Channel Functions
107
11 Common Channel Functions
Metering
Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, the Stereo Out, and the effects processors can be
metered on the various Meter pages, which are located by using the DISPLAY ACCESS
[METER] button.
Input and Output Channel Meter pages also display fader positions numerically. The Peak
Hold function, which applies to all level meters, can be turned on or off on any of the Meter
pages.
Setting the Metering Position
Input and Output Channels can be metered pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. This setting,
which can be set independently for the Input and Output Channels, can be set on the
Metering Position page shown below, or any of the Input and Output Channel Meter pages.
PRE EQ: Channels are metered pre-EQ.
PRE FADER: Channels are metered pre-fader.
POST FADER: Channels are metered post-fader.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
108
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
Metering Input Channels
There are two types of Input Channel Meter page: 24-channel and 48-channel.
There are three 24-channel Meter pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Meter page is shown
below. The layout of the other two pages is the same. These pages feature two level meters
for each Input Channel. When Input Channels are vertically paired, both meters operate.
When Input Channels are horizontally paired, only the left-hand meter operates.
GATE GR: The meters indicate the gain reduction being applied by the Gate.
COMP GR: The meters indicate the gain reduction being applied by the Compressor.
There are two 48-channel Meter pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Meter page is shown below.
The layout of the other page is the same.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Metering
109
Metering Output Channels
Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo Out can all be metered on the Master Meter page.
Metering Effects
Effects inputs and outputs are metered on the Effect 1–4 page. There are eight input and
output meters for effect #1, and 2 input and output meters for effects 2 through 4.
Metering the Stereo out
The Stereo Out can be metered on the Stereo Meter page. Peak signal levels for the left and
right channels are displayed numerically.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
110
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
Attenuating Signals
Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature pre-EQ attenuation,
which is useful for attenuating “hot” signals before EQ’ing.
1
Use the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button to select the Attenuator pages.
The Attenuator parameters for the 56 Input Channels are arranged into three pages. The
Input Channel 1–24 Attenuator/Shifter page is shown below. The layout of the other two
pages is the same.
The attenuator parameters for the Output Channels appear on the Output Attenuator page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the channels, and use the Parameter wheel
or INC/DEC buttons to set the amount of attenuation.
Input and Output Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER and [SEL] buttons.
You can copy the currently selected Input or Output Channel attenuation setting to all
Input or Output Channels respectively by double-clicking the [ENTER] button.
For Input Channels, you can also set the amount of attenuation in bits from +2 bits to –24
bits. Use the cursor buttons to select the bit shift parameters, and use the Parameter wheel
or INC/DEC buttons to set them. The rotary attenuators and the bit shift parameters can
be set independently.
You can set the attenuator parameters for individual Input and Output Channels on the
Input Attenuator and Output Attenuator pages, regardless of paired channels. The changes
made on the Attenuator pages, along with the level balance between channels, will be
reflected in the settings in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, in the EQUALIZER [ATT]
controls, and on the EQ Edit page.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Using EQ
111
Using EQ
Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature 4-band parametric EQ.
The LOW-MID and HIGH-MID bands are peaking type. The LOW and HIGH bands can
be set to shelving, peaking, or HPF and LPF respectively. EQ settings can be stored in the
EQ library, which contains 40 preset memories and 160 user memories. See “EQ Library”
on page 150 for more information.
Preset EQs
The following table lists the preset EQs. See page 282 for detailed parameter information.
#
Preset Name
Description
Bass Drum 1
Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the attack created by the beater.
2
Bass Drum 2
Creates a peak around 80 Hz, producing a tight, stiff sound.
3
Snare Drum 1
Emphasizes “snappy” and rimshot sounds.
4
Snare Drum 2
Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock snare drum sound.
5
Tom-tom 1
Emphasizes the attack of tom-toms, and creates a long, “leathery” decay.
6
Cymbal
Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals, extending the “sparkling” decay.
7
High Hat
Use on a tight high-hat, emphasizing the mid to high range.
8
Percussion
Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high-range of instruments, such as
shakers, cabasas, and congas.
9
E. Bass 1
Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies.
1
10 E. Bass 2
Unlike preset 9, this preset emphasizes the low range of an electric bass.
11 Syn. Bass 1
Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range.
12 Syn. Bass 2
Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass.
13 Piano 1
Makes pianos sound brighter.
14 Piano 2
Used in conjunction with a compressor, this preset emphasizes the attack and
low range of pianos.
15 E. G. Clean
Use for line-level recording of an electric or semi-acoustic guitar to get a slightly
harder sound.
16 E. G. Crunch 1
Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound.
17 E. G. Crunch 2
A variation on preset 16.
18 E. G. Dist. 1
Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer.
19 E. G. Dist. 2
A variation on preset 18.
20 A. G. Stroke 1
Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars.
21 A. G. Stroke 2
A variation on preset 20. You can also use it with gutsy guitar sounds.
22 A. G. Arpeg. 1
Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars.
23 A. G. Arpeg. 2
A variation on preset 22.
24 Brass Sec.
Use with trumpets, trombones, or saxes. When used with a single instrument,
try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID frequency.
25 Male Vocal 1
An EQ template for male vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID parameters according to the voice quality.
26 Male Vocal 2
A variation on preset 25.
27 Female Vo. 1
An EQ template for female vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID parameters according to the voice quality.
28 Female Vo. 2
A variation on preset 27.
29 Chorus&Harmo
An EQ template for brightening choruses.
30 Total EQ 1
Use on a stereo mix during mixdown. Sounds even better when used with a
compressor.
31 Total EQ 2
A variation on preset 30.
32 Total EQ 3
A variation on preset 30. Can also be used with paired Input or Output Channels.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
112
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
#
Preset Name
Description
33 Bass Drum 3
A variation on preset 1, with low and mid range reduced.
34 Snare Drum 3
A variation on preset 3, creating a thicker sound.
35 Tom-tom 2
A variation on preset 5, emphasizing the mid and high ranges.
36 Piano 3
A variation on preset 13.
37 Piano Low
Emphasizes the low range of pianos recorded in stereo.
38 Piano High
Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in stereo.
39 Fine-EQ Cass
Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape.
40 Narrator
Ideal for recording narration.
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER Controls
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
EQUALIZER
LOW
LOW MID
HIGH MID
HIGH
DISPLAY
FREQUENCY
Q
FREQUENCY
GAIN
Q
FREQUENCY
125
1.00
Hz
Q
GAIN
dB
kHz
EQ ON
FREQUENCY
Q
GAIN
dB
GAIN
dB
4.00
Hz
kHz
dB
10.0
Hz
kHz
Hz
kHz
2
Use the [EQ ON] button to turn the EQ on or off.
3
Use the GAIN controls to set the gain of each band.
When a GAIN control is adjusted, the gain in dB is displayed on the corresponding EQ display. If the GAIN control is not adjusted for two seconds, the EQ display returns to displaying the frequency.
4
To set the frequency, press a FREQUENCY/Q control so that the FREQUENCY
indicator lights up, and use the FREQUENCY/Q control to set the frequency.
The frequency is displayed by the corresponding EQ display.
5
To set the Q, press a FREQUENCY/Q control so that the Q indicator lights
up, and use the FREQUENCY/Q control to set the Q.
The Q value is displayed by the corresponding EQ display. If the Q control is not adjusted
for two seconds, the EQ display returns to displaying the frequency.
To reset an individual gain control, hold down the corresponding FREQUENCY/Q control.
To reset all gain controls, press the LOW and HIGH FREQUENCY/Q controls.
The EQ parameter ranges are as follows.
Parameter
LOW
Gain
HIGH-MID
–18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.1 dB
Frequency
Q
LOW-MID
HIGH
steps)1
21.2 Hz to 20.0 kHz (120 steps per 1/12 octave)
HPF, 10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps),
L.SHELF
10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps)
LPF, 10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps),
H.SHELF
1. The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on/off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF respectively.
The initial EQ parameter settings are as follows.
Parameter
LOW
LOW-MID
Gain
HIGH
4.00 kHz
10.0 kHz
0 dB
Frequency
125 Hz
Q
L.SHELF
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
HIGH-MID
1.00 kHz
0.70
H.SHELF
Using EQ
113
EQ Edit Pages
EQ parameters can also be set on the EQ Edit page. If the Auto EQUALIZER Display preference is on, this page appears automatically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL
EQUALIZER section is operated. See “Auto EQUALIZER Display” on page 230.
1
Use the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button to select the EQ Edit page.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel and INC/DEC buttons to set them.
EQ ON: This turns the EQ on and off. While this page is selected, the [ENTER] button can
be used to turn the EQ on and off so long as any parameter other than TYPE is selected.
TYPE: This selects the type of EQ: TYPE I (the EQ type used on legacy Yamaha digital mixing consoles) or TYPE II (a newly developed algorithm).
ATT: This can be used to attenuate signals pre-EQ. It’s the same Attenuator parameter that
appears on the Attenuator pages. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 110 for more information.
CURVE: This displays the EQ curve of the currently selected Input Channel.
Level meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel
and its horizontal or vertical partner.
LOW, L-MID, H-MID, HIGH: These are the Q, Frequency (F), and Gain (G) parameters
for the four bands. The parameter (F or Q) you selected using the FREQUENCY/Q control
is highlighted.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
114
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
Grouping Output Channel EQs
The Bus Out, Aux Send, and Stereo Out EQs can be grouped, allowing you to control the
EQ of several Output Channels simultaneously. There are four Output Channel EQ groups:
e, f, g, and h.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Equalizer
Link page.
2
Press the LAYER [MASTER] button.
3
Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select EQ groups e–h.
The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box.
4
Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channels to and from the
selected group.
The EQ settings of the first Output Channel added to the group are applied to all subsequently added Output Channels.
When an Output Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Using Inserts
115
Using Inserts
Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature assignable Inserts.
1
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DISPLAY ACCESS [PHASE/INSERT] button to
select the Insert page.
The Insert page for Input Channels is shown below.
The Insert page for Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo out is shown below.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
POSITION: This determines the position of the Insert and Compressor within the channel, and can be set to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. Click the desired [COMP] and
[INSERT] buttons in the POSITION block diagram to select the Compressor and Insert
positions.
INSERT ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected channel’s Insert on and off.
INSERT OUT: This selects the destination for the Insert Out, which can be a Slot Output,
Omni Out, 2TR Digital Output, or the input to an internal effects processor. See page 241
and page 245 for Input and Output patch parameter lists. The Port ID of the currently
selected destination is displayed below the currently selected channel’s Long name in the
upper-right corner of the page. The destination port can also be selected by using the Patch
Select window (see page 71), which is accessed by pressing [ENTER] while this parameter
is selected. Insert Outs can also be patched on the Output Patch pages. See “Output Patching” on page 68 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
116
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
INSERT IN: This selects the source for the Insert In, which can be an AD Input, Slot Input,
2TR Digital or Analog Input, or the output of an internal effects processor. See page 241 for
a list of Input Channel Insert In sources; page 245 for a list of Output Channel Insert In
sources. The Port ID of the currently selected source is displayed below the currently
selected channel’s Long name in the upper-right corner of the page. The source port can
also be selected by using the Patch Select window (see page 71), which is accessed by pressing [ENTER] while this parameter is selected. Insert Ins can also be patched on the Input
Channel Insert In Patch pages. See “Patching Input Channel Insert Ins” on page 67 for more
information.
COMP ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected channel’s Compressor on and off. It
works in unison with the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [COMP ON] button, and
the ON/OFF button on the Comp Edit page. See “Compressing Channels” on page 116 for
more information.
COMP ORDER: If the Insert and Compressor are set to the same position in the channel
(i.e., INSERT POSITION and COMP POSITION are the same), you can use this parameter
to set the order of the Insert and Compressor to either Comp->Ins or Ins->Comp.
When a Y56K card effect, or an internal effects processor is inserted in the currently selected
channel, when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button is pressed, the corresponding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–4] button indicator flashes, and the corresponding
Effects, or Plug-In edit page appears. If it’s a Y56K card that’s inserted, the [PLUG-INS] button indicator also flashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS]
button indicator also flashes. This applies only to effects that are inserted into channels. If
there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected channel, a message appears.
Compressing Channels
Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature a Compressor. Settings
can be stored in the Comp library, which contains 36 preset memories and 92 user memories. See “Comp Library” on page 149 for more information.
Preset Comps & Types
The following table lists the preset Comps and types. See page 284 for detailed parameter
information.
#
Preset Name
Type
Description
1
Comp
COMP
Compressor intended to reduce the overall volume level. Use
it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired Input
or Output Channels.
2
Expand
EXPAND
Expander template.
3
Compander (H)
COMPAND-H
Hard-kneed compressor template.
4
Compander (S)
COMPAND-S
Soft-kneed compressor template.
5
A. Dr. BD
COMP
Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum.
6
A. Dr. BD
COMPAND-H
Hard-kneed compander for use with acoustic bass drum.
7
A. Dr. SN
COMP
Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum.
8
A. Dr. SN
EXPAND
Expander for use with acoustic snare drum.
9
A. Dr. SN
COMPAND-S
Soft-kneed compander for use with acoustic snare drum.
10
A. Dr. Tom
EXPAND
Expander for use with acoustic tom toms, which automatically reduces the volume when the tom toms are not played,
improving mic separation.
11
A. Dr. OverTop
COMPAND-S
Soft-kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead mics. It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played,
improving mic separation.
12
E. B. Finger
COMP
Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a finger-picked electric bass guitar.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Compressing Channels
#
Preset Name
Type
117
Description
13
E. B. Slap
COMP
Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a slapped
electric bass guitar.
14
Syn. Bass
COMP
Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of a
synth bass.
15
Piano1
COMP
Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano.
16
Piano2
COMP
A variation on preset 15, using a deep threshold to change
the overall attack and level.
17
E. Guitar
COMP
Compressor for electric guitar “cutting” or arpeggio-style
backing. The sound color can be varied by playing different
styles.
18
A. Guitar
COMP
Compressor for acoustic guitar “stroke” or arpeggio-style
backing.
19
Strings1
COMP
Compressor for use with strings.
20
Strings2
COMP
A variation on preset 19, intended for violas or cellos.
21
Strings3
COMP
A variation on preset 20, intended for string instruments with
a very low range, such as cellos or contrabass.
22
BrassSection
COMP
Compressor for brass sounds with a fast and strong attack.
23
Syn. Pad
COMP
Compressor for synth pad, intended to prevent diffusion of
the sound.
24
SamplingPerc
COMPAND-S
Compressor for making sampled percussion sound like real
acoustic percussion.
25
Sampling BD
COMP
A variation on preset 24, intended for sampled bass drum
sounds.
26
Sampling SN
COMP
A variation on preset 25, intended for sampled snare drum
sounds.
27
Hip Comp
COMPAND-S
A variation on preset 26, intended for sampled loops and
phrases.
28
Solo Vocal1
COMP
Compressor for use with main vocals.
29
Solo Vocal2
COMP
A variation on preset 28.
30
Chorus
COMP
A variation on preset 28, intended for choruses.
31
Click Erase
EXPAND
Expander for removing a click track that may bleed through
from a musicians headphones.
32
Announcer
COMPAND-H
Hard-kneed compander for reducing the level of the music
when an announcer speaks.
33
Limiter1
COMPAND-S
A soft-kneed compander with a slow release.
34
Limiter2
COMP
A “peak-stop” compressor.
35
Total Comp1
COMP
Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use it on
the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired Input or
Output Channels.
36
Total Comp2
COMP
A variation on preset 35, but with more compression.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
118
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
Using the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS Controls
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
2
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [COMP ON] button to turn the currently selected channel’s Compressor on or off.
DYNAMICS
DISPLAY
GATE ON COMP ON
3
GATE / COMP
GATE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
ATTACK
DECAY
HOLD
COMP
THRESHOLD
RATIO
ATTACK
RELEASE
GAIN
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [GATE/COMP] button to set the
DYNAMICS controls to COMP (COMP indicator lit), and use the THRESHOLD, RATIO, ATTACK, RELEASE, and GAIN controls to set the Compressor.
While an output Channel is selected, the [GATE/COMP] button is fixed at COMP.
Comp Edit Page
Compressor settings can be viewed and set on the Comp Edit page. If the Auto DYNAMICS
Display preference is on, this page appears automatically when a Compressor control in the
SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is operated. See “Auto DYNAMICS Display”
on page 230.
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
2
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the
Comp Library page, and recall a preset Compressor that contains the comp
type that you want.
See “Comp Library” on page 149 for more information.
3
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the
Comp Edit page.
4
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
POSITION: This determines the position of the Compressor within the channel, and can
be set to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. It works in unison with the COMP POSITION
parameter on the Insert page. See “Using Inserts” on page 115 for more information.
STEREO LINK: This allows you to pair Comps for stereo operation even when channels
are not paired. Input Channel Comps are paired either horizontally or vertically depending
on the Pair mode setting for the currently selected Input Channel. See “Pairing Channels”
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Grouping Output Channel Compressors
119
on page 123 for more information on horizontal and vertical pairing. When channels are
paired, this parameter is turned on automatically and cannot be changed.
CURVE: This displays the Compressor curve (i.e., input level vs. output level).
TYPE: This is the comp type used by the currently selected channel’s Compressor.
Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its
horizontal or vertical partner. The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being
applied by the currently selected channel’s Compressor.
ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected channel’s Compressor on and off. It works in
unison with the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [COMP ON] button.
PARAMETER: These controls are used to set the Threshold, Ratio, Attack, Release, Out
Gain, and Knee (Width) parameters.
Grouping Output Channel Compressors
The Bus Out, Aux Send, and Stereo Out Compressors can be grouped, allowing you to control the compression of several Output Channels simultaneously. There are four Output
Channel Compressor groups: m, n, o, and p.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Comp Link
page.
2
Press the LAYER [MASTER] button.
3
Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Comp groups m–p.
The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box.
4
Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channels to and from the
selected group.
The Compressor settings of the first Output Channel added to the group are applied to all
subsequently added Output Channels.
When an Output Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
120
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
Delaying Channel Signals
Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature independent Delay
functions. Input Channel Delays feature feedback, with independent Mix and Gain parameters.
1
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DISPLAY ACCESS [DELAY] button to select the
Delay pages.
The Delay parameters for the 56 Input Channels are arranged into three pages. The Input
Channel 1–24 Delay page is shown below. The layout of the other two pages is the same.
The Delay parameters for the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo Out appear on the Output Delay page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the Delay parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
Input and Output Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER and [SEL] buttons.
DELAY SCALE: These buttons determine the units of the delay value shown below the
msec value. Units can be set to meters, feet, samples, beats, or timecode frames.
GANG: When this option is turned on, the delay time for paired channels can be set simultaneously. Ganging is relative, so any delay time difference between the two channels is
maintained when this is turned on.
ON/OFF: These buttons turn the individual Delay functions on and off. The [ENTER]
button can be used to turn a Delay on and off regardless of which parameter is selected.
msec: This sets the delay time in milliseconds. The delay time can also be set by using the
parameter below, which is the delay time in the units selected by the DELAY SCALE buttons. You can copy the currently selected Input or Output Channel delay setting to all Input
or Output Channels respectively by double-clicking the [ENTER] button.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
121
Soloing Channels
MIX: This parameter, available only on the Input Channel Delay pages, sets the mix of dry
and wet signals.
FB.GAIN: This parameter, available only on the Input Channel Delay pages, sets the
amount of feedback.
Soloing Channels
Input Channels, Bus Outs, and Aux Sends can be soloed as follows.
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers if you want to solo
Input Channels, or select the Master Layer if you want to solo Output Channels.
Input and Output Channels cannot be soloed simultaneously. Soled Input Channels will be
unsoled when an Output Channel is soloed, and vice versa.
2
Use the [SOLO] buttons to solo the channels on the selected Layer.
The [SOLO] button indicators of channels that are soloed light up.
SOLO
The SOLO indicator in the MONITOR section flashes when the Solo
function is active. You can unsolo all soloed channels by pressing the
SOLO [CLEAR] button.
SOLO
CLEAR
Configuring Solo
The Solo function is configured on the Solo Setup page. If the Auto SOLO Display preference is on, this page appears automatically when a channel is soloed. See “Auto SOLO Display” on page 230.
1
Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Solo Setup page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
SOLO: This is used to enable and disable the Solo function.
STATUS: This determines the Solo mode: Recording or Mixdown. It affects only Input
Channels.
In Recording Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Solo bus and output
via the Control Room Outputs. Other buses are unaffected by this mode. If the Listen
parameter is set to AFTER PAN, the signal source for Input Channels that are off, is pre
fader.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
122
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
In Mixdown Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Stereo bus and output
via the Stereo Out and Control Room Outputs. Unsoloed Input Channels are muted and
their [ON] button indicators flash (unless they are Solo Safe enabled). Only Input Channels
that are routed to the Stereo Out can be soloed in this mode. Input Channels that are off are
temporarily turned on when they are soloed.
SEL MODE: This determines the Solo Select mode: Mix Solo or Last Solo. In Mix Solo
mode, any number of channels can be soloed simultaneously. In Last Solo mode, only one
channel can be soloed at a time.
LISTEN: This determines the source of the Input Channel Solo signal: Pre Fader or After
Pan. It does not affect Mixdown Solo mode. Output Channels are fixed at After Pan. If you
select Pre Fader, turning on the PAN button below it enables you to solo the channel with
the Pan setting still applied.
SOLO TRIM: This is used to trim the level of the Solo signal. This parameter does not
affect Mixdown Solo mode.
SOLO SAFE CHANNEL: For Mixdown Solo mode, Input Channels can be configured
individually so that they are not muted when other Input Channels are soloed. Use the
[SEL] buttons, cursor buttons, or Parameter wheel to select the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL
buttons. Use the [ENTER] or INC/DEC buttons to set Solo Safe for each Input Channel.
These settings do not affect Recording Solo mode. You can clear all Solo Safe settings by
selecting the ALL CLEAR button and pressing [ENTER].
AUX/SOLO LINK: When this check box is checked, you can solo or unsolo the Aux Sends
using the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons without changing the Master layer. This
is convenient when you want to solo or unsolo Aux Outs while controlling the Aux Sends
from the Input Channels. Press the AUX SELECT key for the AUX send that you want to
solo, making it light. Then press that key once again to solo only the selected AUX send.
When Aux Sends are soloed, the corresponding AUX SELECT button indicators flash.
FADER/SOLO RELEASE: When you check this check box, raising the channel faders of
soloed Channels from –∞ will unsolo the Channels. If the channel fader position is higher
than –∞, you cannot solo the corresponding channel.
This function is disabled in Mixdown Solo mode and for the Output Channels.
Note: When the AUX/SOLO LINK or FADER/SOLO RELEASE check box is checked, the solo
setting is cancelled.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Pairing Channels
123
Pairing Channels
Input Channels, Bus Outs, and Aux Sends can be paired for stereo operation. Input Channels can be paired either horizontally, that is, adjacent odd-even channels on the same Layer
(e.g., 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, etc) or vertically, that is, counterpart channels on adjacent Layers (e.g.,
1-25, 2-26, 49-73, 50-74, etc). Bus Outs and Aux Sends can be paired only horizontally.
Pairing Channels by Using the [SEL] Buttons
Only horizontal pairing can be set by using the [SEL] buttons.
1
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layer containing the channels that you
want to pair.
2
While holding down the [SEL] button of the first channel, press the [SEL] button of the second channel.
The settings of the first channel are copied to the second channel and the channels are
paired. The [SEL] button indicator of the currently selected channel lights up, while the
[SEL] button indicator of the other channel flashes.
To cancel a pair, while holding down the [SEL] button of the first channel, press the [SEL]
button of the second channel.
The following channel parameters are copied, and controlled together, when channels are
paired: Fader, On/Off, Insert On/Off, Aux On/Off, Aux Send Mode, Aux Send Level, Aux
Pre/Post, Aux Pre Point, Gate parameters, Compressor parameters, EQ parameters, Fader
group, Mute group, EQ group, Comp group, Solo, Solo Safe, [AUTO] button, Fade Time,
Recall Safe, Bus to Stereo On/Off, Bus to Stereo Level.
The following channel parameters are not copied, or controlled together, when channels are
paired: Input Patch, Insert Patch, Output Patch, Comp Position, Phase, Delay On/Off,
Delay Time, Delay Feedback, Delay Mix, Routing, Pan, Follow Pan, Surround Pan, Bus to
Stereo Pan, Aux Send Pan, Balance.
When channels are paired, the Attenuator value is copied, but the changes made in the
Attenuator page are not reflected in the pair partner. However, if you change the values in
the EQ Edit page, Parameter view page, or on the control surface, the changes will be
reflected in the pair partner while maintaining the relative level difference.
When Aux Send Mode is set to Fixed, Aux Send On/Off is not controlled together.
Check the Routing ST Pair Link check box to link the routing from the paired channels to
the Stereo Bus. See “Setting Preferences” on page 230 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
124
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
Pairing Channels by Using the Pair Pages
Both horizontal and vertical pairing can be set on the Pair pages.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR] button to locate the Pair pages.
The Pair parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The Input
Channel 1–48 Pair page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same.
2
To set the pair mode, select the PAIR MODE HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL buttons, and press [ENTER].
The Pair mode can be set independently for Input Channels 1–48 and Input Channels
49–56. The Input Channel 1–48 Pair page in Vertical mode is shown below.
Pair parameters for the Bus Outs and Aux Sends appear on the Output Pair page.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Pairing Channels
3
125
Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the channel pair buttons, and press [ENTER] to make or break pairs.
Input and Output Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER and [SEL] buttons.
A dialog box appears with options for copying the settings of the first channel to the second
channel, the second channel to the first channel, and for resetting both channels to their initial settings. Choose the option required, and then press [ENTER].
On other display pages, paired channels have a heart icon, or a dash between their channel
numbers.
When Input Channels are paired, MS Decoding can be used to decode signals from microphones arranged as MS pairs. MS Decoding is set on the Input Channel Pair pages. This can
be turned on and off for each pair of channels by using the MS buttons.
The Output Pair page displays the currently selected Surround mode (i.e., Stereo, 3-1, 5.1,
or 6.1), which can be set on the Surround Mode page (see page 85). When a Surround mode
other than Stereo is selected, the names of the Surround channels are shown below the Bus
Out and Aux Send pair buttons, as shown in the following table.
Surround Mode
Bus Out/Aux Send
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3-1
L
R
C
S
—
—
—
—
5.1
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
LFE
—
—
6.1
L
R
Ls
Rs
C
Bs
LFE
—
This table shows the default assignment. The assignment may vary depending on the settings in the Surround Bus Setup page (see page 87).
When a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected, Aux Sends can be set to follow the
same Input Channel Surround Pan that applies to the Bus Outs, which is useful for feeding
Surround channel signals to external effects processors. This is turned on and off by using
the F.S buttons that appear below the Aux Send Pair buttons. When a pair of Aux Sends are
set to follow Surround Pan, their Aux Send Pair button is unavailable, and their Aux Pan
parameters (see page 103) are unavailable.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
126
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
Grouping Output Channel Faders
The Bus Out, Aux Send, and Stereo Out faders can be grouped, allowing you to control the
level of several Output Channels simultaneously. There are four Output Channel Fader
groups: Q, R, S, and T.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Fader Group
page.
2
Press the LAYER [MASTER] button.
3
Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Fader groups Q–T.
The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box.
4
Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channel faders to and from
the selected group.
When an Output Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.
ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups.
OUTPUT FADER MASTER: When this check box is not checked, the Output Channel
fader positions determine the fader levels in the Output Channel Fader groups. When this
check box is checked, you can set the master level for the corresponding Output Channel
Fader group in the Master column. The resultant Output Channel level equals the corresponding Output Channel fader level plus the Group master level. See “Group Master for
the Output Channel Faders” on page 127 for more information.
When the Output Fader Master check box is not checked, operating the channel faders will
affect the Output Channel levels in the corresponding Fader group. Pressing and holding
down the [SEL] button while operating the fader of an Output Channel will temporarily
cancel the corresponding Fader group, which is convenient if you want to adjust the relative
balance between channels.
When the Output Fader Master check box is not checked, fader groups are active only in
Fader mode. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 49 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Group Master for the Output Channel Faders
127
Group Master for the Output Channel Faders
The 02R96 also features a Fader Group Master function that enables you to control the level
of all channels using the Group Master level while maintaining the balance between the
channels, much like a VCA Group on an analog mixing console. While this function is
enabled, channel fader operation will not affect the channel levels of the corresponding
Fader group.
1
Follow Steps 1–4 as described in the “Grouping Output Channel Faders” section on the previous page, select the Output Fader Master check box, then
press the [ENTER] button to check or uncheck the Output Fader Master check
box.
2
When the Output Fader Master check box is checked, you can set the channel
levels of the Fader groups in the Master column.
When the Master column is selected, repeatedly pressing the [ENTER] button turns the
Output Fader Group on and off.
You can also make these settings in the Output Fader Group Master page, as shown below.
3
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Fader Group
Master page.
4
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, then use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to set them.
OUTPUT FADER MASTER: When this check box is checked, you can set the master levels for the Output Fader groups. The resultant Output Channel level equals the corresponding Output Channel fader level plus the Group master level.
ALL NOMINAL: This button resets the master levels for all Output Fader groups to nominal.
ON/OFF: This turns each Output Fader group on or off, like a VCA mute on an analog
mixing console.
Faders: These faders adjust the master levels of the Fader groups. Fader knobs appear
highlighted when faders are set to 0.0 dB. Press the [ENTER] button to set the currently-selected fader to 0.0 dB.
You can also control the Fader Master function from the channel strips on the control surface as described below by using the User Assignable Layer of the Remote Layers. See
page 228 for information on the User Assignable Layer.
Encoders: The Encoders are not available.
[AUTO] buttons: These buttons are used to control the Fader Group Master On/Off and
the master level during Automix.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
128
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
[SEL] buttons: These buttons move the cursor on the Output Fader Group Master page.
[SOLO] buttons: These buttons turn the Solo function of each Fader group on and off,
enabling you to monitor every channel in each Fader group.
Channel Faders: The Channel Faders enable you to set the master level for each Fader
group.
Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)
The Bus Out, Aux Send, and Stereo Out mutes can be grouped, allowing you to mute several
Output Channels simultaneously. There are four Output Channel Mute groups: U, V, W,
and X.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Mute Group
page.
2
Press the LAYER [MASTER] button.
3
Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Mute groups U–X.
The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box.
4
Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channels to and from the
selected group.
When an Output Channel is added to a Mute group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.
ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups.
OUTPUT MUTE MASTER: When this check box is checked, pressing the MASTER
MUTE button turns mute on or off for all channels in the corresponding Mute group.
When this check box is unchecked, the Output Channel [ON] button status mutes or
unmutes the channels in the group.
MASTER MUTE: When the Output Mute Master check box is checked, use this button to
mute or unmute all channels in the corresponding Mute group.
When the Output Mute Master check box is unchecked, pressing the Output Channel [ON]
button mutes or unmutes the channel in the corresponding Mute group (Mute On channels
are turned off and Mute Off channels are turned on).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Output Channel Mute Master
129
Output Channel Mute Master
The 02R96 features a Mute Group Master function that enables you to mute all channels in
the Mute group using the MASTER button, much like a Mute group on an analog mixing
console. When this function is enabled, the channel [ON] buttons do not control the channels in the group collectively.
1
Follow Steps 1–4 described in the “Grouping Output Channel Mutes
(ON/OFF)” section on the previous page, select the Output Mute Master
check box, then press the [ENTER] button to check or uncheck the Output
Mute Master check box.
2
When the Output Mute Master check box is checked, the MASTER MUTE button in each group mutes or unmutes the channels in the corresponding group.
If the channels are muted by the Mute Master function, the corresponding channel [ON]
button indicators flash. You can assign the MASTER MUTE button function to one of the
USER DEFINED KEYS for convenient operation.
Viewing Channel Parameter Settings
The parameter setting of the currently selected Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send, or the
Stereo Out can be viewed and set on the Parameter View pages.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button to select the Parameter View page.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] buttons to set them.
Input Channels
This is the Parameter View page for the Input Channels.
GATE: The following Gate parameters for the currently selected Input Channel can be set:
Gate On/Off, Threshold, Range, Attack, Decay, and Hold. The GR meter indicates the
amount of gain reduction being applied by the Gate. Also displayed are the gate curve and
gate type. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 74 for more information.
COMP: The following Compressor parameters for the currently selected channel can be
set: Comp On/Off, Threshold, Ratio, Attack, Release, Gain, and Knee. The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being applied by the Compressor. Also displayed are the
comp curve and comp type. See “Compressing Channels” on page 116 for more information.
INSERT: The currently selected channel’s Insert can be turned on and off and patched. See
“Using Inserts” on page 115 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
130
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
EQ: The currently selected channel’s EQ and Attenuator can be set. Also displayed is the EQ
curve of the currently selected Input Channel. See “Using EQ” on page 111 for more information.
Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected channel and its horizontal or vertical partner.
Phase: The signal phase of the currently selected Input Channel can be reversed. See
“Reversing the Signal Phase” on page 73 for more information.
DELAY: The currently selected channel’s Delay function can be set. See “Delaying Channel
Signals” on page 120 for more information.
PAIR: This heart icon indicates whether or not channels are paired. See “Pairing Channels”
on page 123 for more information.
Output Channels
This is the Parameter View page for the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo Out. Parameters are the same as for the Input Channel Parameter View page, minus the GATE and Phase
sections and the DELAY MIX and FB GAIN parameters. The parameter settings of the left
and right channels of the Stereo Out can be viewed individually. Use the [SEL] buttons to
toggle between the left and right channels.
Viewing Channel Fader Settings
The fader-related settings of the currently selected Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send, or
the Stereo Out can be viewed and set on the Fader View pages.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button to select the Fader View page.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select
channels.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] buttons to set them.
Pan and Balance controls can be set to center by pressing [ENTER] while they’re selected.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Viewing Channel Fader Settings
131
Input Channels
This is the Fader View page for the Input Channels.
PAN: This is the currently selected Input Channel’s Pan parameter. Select this parameter
using the cursor buttons, then press the [ENTER] button to set the Pan parameter to Center. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 83 for more information.
ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the currently selected Input Channel. See “Muting Input Channels (ON/OFF)” on page 77 for more information.
Fader: This indicates the fader position of the currently selected Input Channel. The fader
knob appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed
numerically below the fader. See “Setting Input Channel Levels” on page 79 for more information.
SURROUND PAN: The Surround pan parameters for the currently selected Input Channel are displayed only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected. See “Using Surround Pan” on page 85 for more information.
BUS ROUTING: This section contains Routing and Follow Pan buttons for the currently
selected Input Channel. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 82 for more information.
The Direct Out output patch can also be set. See “Patching Direct Outs” on page 70 for more
information.
AUX: These are the currently selected Input Channel’s Aux Send Level, On/Off, and
Pre/Post parameters. While a rotary control is selected, the Aux Send can be turned on and
off by pressing [ENTER]. See “Aux Sends” on page 98 for more information.
Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its
horizontal or vertical partner. The metering position is displayed below them.
GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the currently selected Input Channel is in.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
132
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
Bus Outs
This is the Fader View page for the Bus Outs.
ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the currently selected Bus Out. See “Muting Bus
Outs (ON/OFF)” on page 96 for more information.
Fader: This indicates the fader position of the currently selected Bus Out. The fader knob
appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numerically below the fader. See “Setting Bus Out Levels” on page 96 for more information.
TO ST PAN, ON/OFF & Fader: These are the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan, On/Off, and
Fader parameters for the currently selected Bus Out. The fader knob appears highlighted
when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numerically below the fader.
See “Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out” on page 97 for more information.
Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Bus Out and its partner.
The metering position is displayed below them.
GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the currently selected Bus Out is in.
Aux Sends
Below is the Fader View page for the Aux Sends.
ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the currently selected Aux Send. See “Aux Send
Pages” on page 99 for more information.
Fader: This indicates the fader position of the currently selected Aux Send. The fader knob
appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numerically below the fader. See “Settings Aux Send Master Levels” on page 106.
Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Aux Send and its partner.
The metering position is displayed below them.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Viewing Channel Fader Settings
133
GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the currently selected Aux Send is in.
Stereo Out
Below is the Fader View page for the Stereo Out. The settings of the left and right channels
of the Stereo Out can be viewed individually. Use the STEREO [SEL] button to toggle
between the left and right channels.
BAL: This is the Balance parameter for the Stereo Out. Select this parameter using the cursor buttons, then press the [ENTER] button to set the parameter to Center. See “Balancing
the Stereo Out” on page 94 for more information.
ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the Stereo Out. See “Muting the Stereo Out
(ON/OFF)” on page 93 for more information.
Fader: This indicates the fader position of the Stereo Out. The fader knob appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numerically below the
fader. See “Setting the Stereo Out Level” on page 93 for more information.
Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the Stereo Out. The metering position is displayed below them.
GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the Stereo
Out is in.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
134
Chapter 11—Common Channel Functions
Naming Channels
You can specify Long and Short names for the Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and
the Stereo Out as follows.
See page 250 for a list of initial Input Channel names; page 250 for Output Channel names.
Input Channels
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button to locate the Input Channel
Name page.
2
Use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or the LAYER and [SEL] buttons
to select the Input Channels.
When Vertical Input Channel pairing mode is selected, Input Channels are listed in order
of vertical partners, for example, CH1, CH25, CH2, CH26, and so on.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the Input Channel’s Long or Short name,
and then press [ENTER].
When the Title Edit window appears, edit the Input Channel name, and press OK when
you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 46 for more information.
You can reset all Input Channel names back to their initial values by pressing the INITIALIZE button.
If the Name Input Auto Copy check box in the upper right corner is checked, the first four
characters of the name entered in the LONG column are automatically copied to the
SHORT column. Also, a name entered in the SHORT column is automatically copied to the
LONG column.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Naming Channels
135
Output Channels
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button to locate the Output
Channel Name page
2
Use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or the Master Layer and [SEL]
buttons to select the Output Channels.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the Output Channel’s Long or Short name,
and then press [ENTER].
When the Title Edit window appears, edit the Output Channel name, and press OK when
you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 46 for more information.
You can reset all Output Channel names back to their initial values by pressing the INITIALIZE button.
If the Name Input Auto Copy check box in the upper right corner is checked, the first four
characters of the name entered in the LONG column are automatically copied to the
SHORT column. Also, a name entered in the SHORT column is automatically copied to the
LONG column.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
136
Chapter 12—Monitoring & Talkback
12 Monitoring & Talkback
Control Room Monitoring
The CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT uses balanced 1/4-inch
phone jacks, nominal level +4 dB. Typically it’s used to feed the control
room’s main monitors.
The Control Room Monitor signal source is selected by using the CONCONTROL ROOM
TROL ROOM buttons.
[2TR D1]: Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1.
[2TR D2]: Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2.
[2TR D3]: Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 3.
[2TR A1]: Selects the 2TR IN ANALOG 1.
[2TR A2]: Selects the 2TR IN ANALOG 2.
[STEREO]: Selects the Stereo Out.
[ASSIGN 1]: Selects the Output Channel assigned to this button on the Control Room
Setup page. See “Control Room Setup” on page 137.
[ASSIGN 2]: Selects the Output Channel assigned to this button on the Control Room
Setup page. See “Control Room Setup” on page 137.
The level of the Control Room Monitor signal can be set by using the
CONTROL ROOM LEVEL control. The [DIMMER] button activates
the Dimmer function, which dims the Control Room Monitor and Surround Monitor signals by the amount specified on the Control Room
Setup page (page 137). The Dimmer function is activated automatically
when the Talkback or Oscillator function is active.
2TR D1
2TR A1
2TR D2
2TR A2
2TR D3
STEREO
ASSIGN1
ASSIGN2
0
10
CONTROL ROOM LEVEL
DIMMER
TALKBACK
The Control Room Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack, the level of
which is set by using the PHONES LEVEL control.
PHONES
0
10
PHONES
LEVEL
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Studio Monitoring
137
Control Room Setup
Control room monitoring is configured on the Control Room Setup page.
1
Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Control Room Setup page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the ASSIGN buttons in the left-hand box,
and use the Parameter wheel to select an Output Channel in the right-hand
box.
Bus Outs or Aux Sends can be assigned to the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons.
3
Press [ENTER] to assign the selected Output Channel.
Once assigned, the selected Output Channel appears highlighted in the right-hand box.
The other parameters on this page are as follows.
CONTROL ROOM DIMMER LEVEL: This determines the amount of attenuation
applied to the Control Room Monitor and Surround Monitor signals by the Dimmer function. Use the cursor buttons to select it, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons
to set it from.
MONO: This button is be used to switch the Control Room Monitor signal into mono.
Studio Monitoring
The STUDIO MONITOR OUT uses balanced 1/4-inch phone jacks,
nominal level +4 dB. Typically it’s used to feed monitoring systems in the
actual studio.
STUDIO
0
CONTROL
ROOM
STEREO
AUX7
AUX8
10
The Studio Monitor signal source is selected by using the STUDIO buttons.
[CONTROL ROOM]: Selects the Control Room Monitor.
[STEREO]: Selects the Stereo Out.
[AUX 7]: Selects Aux Send #7.
[AUX 8]: Selects Aux Send #8.
The level of the Studio Monitor signal can be set by using the STUDIO LEVEL
control.
STUDIO
LEVEL
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
138
Chapter 12—Monitoring & Talkback
Surround Monitoring
The 02R96 features comprehensive surround monitoring functions, including a pink noise
generator for speaker setup, Bass Management, and down mixing.
The Surround Monitor signal source is selected by using the SURROUND buttons. The [BUS] button selects the Bus Outs as the source.
The [SLOT] button selects the Inputs of the Slots specified on the Surround Monitor page as the source. Surround mixes from up to four multitrack recorders can be monitored by patching Slot Inputs to Surround
Monitor Channels (see page 141) and selecting with the [SLOT] button.
The level of the Surround Monitor can be set by using the SURROUND
MONITOR LEVEL control.
Surround monitor speakers can be aligned by using the individual Attenuator and Delay
parameters on each Surround Monitor Channel. In addition to the standard Ls and Rs
speakers, the 02R96 supports Ls2 and Rs2 speakers, with independent Attenuator and Delay
parameters, for a more diffused surround monitoring environment. See “Configuring Surround Monitoring” on page 139 for more information.
Surround Monitor Channels can be patched to Slot Outputs or Omni Outputs. See “Output
Patching” on page 68 for more information.
Surround Monitor settings can be stored in the Surround Monitor library, which contains
1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See “Surround Monitor Library” on page 152 for
more information.
General surround monitoring is performed on the Surround Monitor page.
SURROUND
BUS
SLOT
0
10
SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL
1
Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Surround Monitor page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
The number of speaker icons and meters shown on the Surround Monitor page depends on
the currently selected Surround mode. The meters indicate Bus Out signal levels.
MUTE/SOLO: These parameters are used to mute and solo Surround Channels. A Surround Channel is on when its speaker icon is highlighted. Speaker icons can be selected by
using the cursor buttons. When SOLO is on, Surround Channels can be soloed by selecting
speaker icons and pressing [ENTER].
SETTING: These buttons are used to select which Slot’s Inputs are monitored when the
SURROUND [SLOT] button is pressed. Up to four Slots can be assigned, and the signals
from each Slot are mixed. Individual Slot Inputs can be patched to Surround Monitor
Channels on the Surround Monitor Patch page (see page 141).
When the MONITOR L/R to C-R button is on, the Left and Right Surround Monitor Channels are fed to the Control Room Monitors. This is useful when you want to use the same
speakers for Left and Right Surround Monitors and Control Room Monitors.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Surround Monitoring
139
STATUS: SURROUND MODE indicates the currently selected Surround mode, which is
set on the Surround Mode page (see page 85). MONITOR LEVEL indicates the volume setting of the SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control, which can be calibrated to 85 dB SPL,
the cinema standard for setting up Surround Channel Monitor speakers. To do this, output
pink noise from the built-in Oscillator (see page 139), set the SURROUND MONITOR
LEVEL control and the level controls on the Surround Monitor speaker amps so that the
total output is 85 dB SPL, then press the SET SPL85 button. The MONITOR LEVEL indication will then display the volume setting relative to 85 dB SPL. Press the SET SPL85 button again to return to the normal volume indication. Press the SNAP TO SPL85 button to
reset the SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control to 85 dB SPL.
Configuring Surround Monitoring
Surround monitoring, including speaker setup, monitor matrix, Bass Management, and
monitor alignment, is configured on the Surround Monitor Setup page.
1
Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Surround Monitor Setup
page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
SPEAKER SETUP: These parameters are for setting the volume balance of the surround
monitor speakers. Select the OSC (Oscillator) parameter and choose from PINK NOISE,
500-2K (pink noise through a 500 Hz to 2 kHz BPF), 1K (1 kHz sinewave), or 50 Hz (50 Hz
sinewave). Use the ON/OFF button to turn the Oscillator on and off. When on, the Oscillator outputs a signal at –20 dB to the Surround Channels whose icons are highlighted. You
can turn on and off Oscillator output for speakers individually. Speaker icons can be
selected by using the cursor buttons or the Bus Out [SEL] buttons on the Master Layer. The
signal phase of the LFE Channel can be reversed by using the SW Phase button. When
ROTATE is on, the Oscillator signal is output by each speaker in turn in a clockwise direction (3 second signal, 2 second pause).
SURR. MODE: This indicates the currently selected Surround mode, which is set on the
Surround Mode page (see page 85).
MONITOR MATRIX: This is used to select the Surround Monitor Matrix. In 6.1 Surround mode, you can select 6.1, 5.1, 3-1, or ST. In 5.1 Surround mode, you can select 5.1,
3-1, or ST. In 3-1 Surround mode, you can select 3-1 or ST.
When a down mix Monitor Matrix is selected, you can attenuate signals by using the ATT
parameters.
You can use the Surround Monitor settings in Stereo mode, but Monitor Matrix is fixed to
ST.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
140
Chapter 12—Monitoring & Talkback
The following screen shows an example in 6.1 Surround mode and 3-1 Monitor Matrix
mode.
BASS MANAGEMENT: You can set the filter and
attenuator settings for each Surround Monitor Channel using five preset Bass Management modes.
The following presets are available:
Presets
No.
Title
Parameters
HPF 1, 2, 3
LPF1
LPF2
ATT 1 & 2
AMP
1
DVD Mix w/BS
80–12
80–24
80–24
0
10
2
DVD Author w/BS
80–12
120–42
80–24
0
10
3
Film Mix w/BS
80–12
80–24
80–24
–3
10
4
Film Author w/BS
80–12
120–42
80–24
–3
10
5
Bypass
THRU
THRU
MUTE
0
0
ATT1: Adjusts the level difference between LR and LsRs.
ATT2: Adjusts the level difference between C and Bs.
AMP: Corrects the LFE channel level.
HPF1–3: Cut the low range so that the speakers’ supporting frequency ranges will not interfere with the
subwoofer signals.
HPF1–2: Cut the high range so that the subwoofer’s supporting frequency ranges will not interfere with
other speakers’ signals.
Tip: If you select 3-1 Monitor Matrix mode, use Presets 1 or 2 to establish an appropriate monitoring environment.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Surround Monitoring
141
You can set the Bass Management parameters in the following ranges:
Parameters
Range
HPF 1, 2, 3
THRU, 80-12, 80-12L, 80-24, 80-24L
LPF1
THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, 120-42
LPF2
THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, MUTE
ATT 1 & 2
0 to –12 dB (1 dB steps)
AMP
0 to +12 dB (1 dB steps)
The HPF 1, 2, 3, and LPF 1 & 2 values indicate a cut-off frequency and a filter response. For example,
“80-12” means a cutoff frequency of 80 Hz and a filter response of –12 dB/octave.
“L” means Linkwitz filter. Other filters are Butterworth.
MONITOR ALIGNMENT ATT & DLY ON/OFF:
These buttons are used to turn on and off the Monitor
Alignment Attenuator and Delay parameters of all Surround speakers. The MONITOR ALIGNMENT diagram
and Surround Channel Attenuator and Delay parameters,
which are displayed when either of these buttons are
selected, allow you to align the surround monitor speakers by attenuating and delaying Surround Channels as
necessary. The Attenuator parameters can be set –∞,
–12 dB to +12 dB in 0.1 dB steps. The Delay parameters
can be set from 0 to 30 msec in 0.02 msec steps.
Patching Slot Inputs to Surround Channels
Individual Slot Inputs can be patched to Surround Monitor Channels as follows.
1
Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Surround Monitor Patch
page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
SLOT/CH: This patching matrix is used to patch Inputs 1–16 from each of the four Slots
to the Surround Monitor Channels. Each Slot Input can be patched to only one Surround
Monitor Channel.
LEVEL: These parameters are used to set the monitor level of each Slot.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
142
Chapter 12—Monitoring & Talkback
Using Talkback
The Talkback function distributes the Talkback mic signal to the Studio Monitor Outs and
any Slot or Omni Outputs specified on the Talkback Setup page.
The TALKBACK LEVEL control sets the level of the built-in talkback microphone.
0
10
TALKBACK LEVEL
TALKBACK
The [TALKBACK] button has two modes of operation: If it’s pressed once (i.e.,
for less than 300 ms), the Talkback function is turned on and remains on when
the button is released. This is Latched mode (this mode can be disabled on the
Talkback Setup page). If it’s pressed and held for longer, the Talkback function is
turned on, but turns off when the button is released. This is Unlatched mode.
The [TALKBACK] button indicator flashes while the Talkback function is active.
Talkback Setup
1
Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Talkback Setup page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
OUTPUT ASSIGN: These buttons are used to assign the Talkback mic signal to Slot and
Omni Outputs.
STUDIO MONITOR: This allows you to select the Talkback mic signal as the Studio
Monitor source.
TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL: When the Talkback function is active, this determines the
amount of attenuation applied to sound sources assigned to the Studio Monitors and
selected for Talkback.
USE AD IN x AS TALKBACK: This allows you to select an AD Input as the Talkback signal source. Use the check box to turn this option on and off, and use the number parameter
to specify the number of the AD Input. The signal from the specified AD Input is mixed
with the Talkback mic signal. Turn down the TALKBACK LEVEL if you do not want to use
the Talkback mic.
NEVER LATCH TALKBACK: This options allows you to disable latching for the Talkback
function.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Libraries
143
13 Libraries
About the Libraries
The 02R96 features 10 libraries for storing Automix, Effects, Channel, Input Patch, Output
Patch, Bus to Stereo, Gate, Comp, EQ, and Surround Monitor data.
Library data can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using
MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 195).
General Library Operation
Since most library functions are the same for each library, rather than explain them several
times, they’re explained only here for conciseness.
1
Locate the various library pages as explained in the following sections.
The Input Patch Library page shown below is used here for explanation purposes.
2
Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the memories.
A memory is selected when it appears inside the dotted box.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the following page buttons.
TITLE EDIT: To edit the title of the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER]. When
the Title Edit window appears, edit the title, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title
Edit Window” on page 46 for more information.
RECALL: To recall the contents of the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER]. If
the Recall Confirmation preference is on, a confirmation window appears before the contents are recalled.
STORE: To store settings to the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER]. When the
Title Edit window appears, enter a title, and press OK. See “Title Edit Window” on page 46
for more information. You can stop the Title Edit window from appearing by turning off
the Store Confirmation preference on page 230.
CLEAR: To delete the contents and title of the selected memory, select this and press
[ENTER]. A confirmation window appears before the memory is cleared.
Read-only preset memories have an “R” icon next to their name. You cannot store, clear, or
edit the title of these memories. Empty memories have the title “No Data!” Memory #0 is a
read-only memory that you can recall to reset settings to their initial values.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
144
Chapter 13—Libraries
Memory #U is a special read-only memory that allows you to undo and redo memory recall
and store operations. After recalling a memory, you can revert to the previously recalled
memory by recalling memory #U. After storing a memory, you can revert it to its previous
contents by recalling memory #U. You can redo either of these undo operations by recalling
memory #U again.
Channel Library
Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send, and Stereo Out channel settings can be stored in the
Channel library, which contains 2 preset memories and 127 user memories. Preset memories are read-only. User memories enable you to store custom settings.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button to select the Channel Library page.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
When storing, the settings of the currently selected channel are stored to the selected memory. When recalling, the settings in the selected memory are applied to the currently selected
channel.
Only memories whose contents correspond to the currently selected channel can be
recalled. For example, you can recall Input Channel settings to Input Channels, but not to
Aux Sends. When the selected memory and currently selected channel don’t correspond, a
warning triangle and the word “CONFLICT” appear in the STORED FROM box.
Preset memory #0, “Reset(–∞dB),” resets all parameters of the currently selected channel to
their initial values and sets the channel level to –∞ dB. Preset memory #1, “Reset (0dB),”
also resets all parameters, but sets the channel level to 0 dB (i.e., nominal).
SEL CH: This indicates the currently selected channel.
CURRENT CONFIGURATION: If the currently selected channel is an Input Channel,
Surround mode and Aux configuration information is displayed here.
Level meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel
and its horizontal or vertical partner.
STORED FROM: This indicates the channel whose settings were originally stored in the
selected memory. If the currently selected channel is an Input channel, Pan mode and Aux
pairing information is also displayed.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 143.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Input Patch Library
145
Input Patch Library
Input Patch settings can be stored in the Input Patch library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user memories. The preset memory is read-only. User memories enable you to
store custom settings. See page 66 for information on Input Patch settings.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button to select the Input Patch
Library page.
When storing, the current Input Patch settings are stored to the selected memory.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 143.
Output Patch Library
Output Patch settings can be stored in the Output Patch library, which contains 1 preset
memory and 32 user memories.The preset memory is read-only. User memories enable you
to store custom settings. See page 68 for information on Output Patch settings.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button to select the Output Patch
Library page.
When storing, the current Output Patch settings are stored to the selected memory.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 143.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
146
Chapter 13—Libraries
Effects Library
Effects settings can be stored in the Effects library, which contains 61 preset memories and
67 user memories. Preset memories are read-only. User memories enable you to store custom settings. See page 153 for information on using the Effects.
1
Use the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [DISPLAY] button to select the Effect Library
page.
2
Press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button, and use the
EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–4] buttons to select the internal effects processors.
When storing, the settings of the currently selected internal effects processor, indicated in
the upper-left corner, are stored to the selected memory.
EFFECT NAME: This is the name of the previously recalled Effects memory.
TYPE: This is the effects type used in the previously recalled Effects memory. Its I/O configuration is shown below this.
EDIT: Pressing this button, then the [ENTER] button, displays the Effects Edit page, which
enables you to adjust the Effects parameters. See “Editing Effects” on page 156 for more
information.
PATCH: Pressing this button, then the [ENTER] button, displays the Effects Input Patch
page, which enables you to patch internal Effects processor inputs and outputs. See “Patching Effects Inputs and Outputs” on page 67 for more information.
Level meters: These meters indicate the input and output levels of the currently selected
Effects processor. Use the IN and OUT buttons to switch between input level and output
level. There are eight meters for Effects processors #1, and two meters for Effects processors
#2 through #4.
EFFECT TYPE: This is the effects type in the selected memory. Its I/O configuration is
shown below this.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 143.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Bus to Stereo Library
147
Bus to Stereo Library
Bus to Stereo settings can be stored in the Bus to Stereo library, which contains 1 preset
memory and 32 user memories. The preset memory is read-only. User memories enable
you to store custom settings. See page 97 for information on Bus to Stereo routing.
1
Use the ROUTING [DISPLAY] button to select the Bus to Stereo Library page.
When storing, the current Bus Out to Stereo Out settings are stored to the selected memory.
CURRENT CONFIGURATION: Bus Out pairing information for the current configuration is displayed here.
LIBRARY CONFIGURATION: Bus Out pairing information for the configuration stored
in the currently selected memory is displayed here.
If the Bus Out pairing configuration does not match the current configuration, the word
“CONFLICT” will appear in the LIBRARY CONFIGURATION box. In this case, if you
recall such a memory, the 02R96 will apply the current Bus Out pairing configuration and
related parameter settings to the recalled memory settings.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 143.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
148
Chapter 13—Libraries
Gate Library
Input Channel Gate settings can be stored in the Gate library, which contains 4 preset memories and 124 user memories. Preset memories are read-only. User memories enable you to
store custom settings. See page 74 for information on gating Input Channels.
1
Use the DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to select the Gate Library page.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layers, and the [SEL] buttons to select
Input Channels.
When storing, the Gate settings of the currently selected Input Channel, indicated in the
upper-right corner, are stored to the selected memory. When recalling, the Gate settings in
the selected memory are applied to the currently selected Input Channel.
CURRENT TYPE: This indicates the current Gate type of the currently selected channel.
CURRENT CURVE: This is the Gate curve of the currently selected channel.
GR meters: These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the
Gate, and the levels of the currently selected channel and its adjacent channel. If Pair mode
for the currently selected channel is set to Vertical, the level of its counterpart on the adjacent Layer is displayed.
TYPE/CURVE: The type (Gate or Ducking) and curve of the currently selected memory is
displayed to the right of the memory list.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 143.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Comp Library
149
Comp Library
Comp settings can be stored in the Comp library, which contains 36 preset memories and
92 user memories. Preset memories are read-only. User memories enable you to store custom settings. See page 116 for information on the Comps.
1
Use the DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to select the Comp Library page.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
When storing, the Comp settings of the currently selected channel, indicated in the
upper-right corner, are stored to the selected memory. When recalling, the Comp settings
in the selected memory are applied to the currently selected channel.
CURRENT TYPE: This indicates the current Comp type of the currently selected channel.
CURRENT CURVE: This is the Comp curve of the currently selected channel.
GR meters: These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the
Comp, and the levels of the currently selected channel and its adjacent channel. If Pair mode
for the currently selected channel is set to Vertical, the level of its counterpart on the adjacent Layer is displayed.
TYPE/CURVE: The type (Comp, Expand, Comp Hard, Comp Soft) and curve of the currently selected memory is displayed to the right of the memory list.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 143.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
150
Chapter 13—Libraries
EQ Library
Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send, and Stereo Out EQ settings can be stored in the EQ
library, which contains 40 preset memories and 160 user memories. Preset memories are
read-only. User memories enable you to store custom settings. See page 111 for information
on EQ’ing.
1
Use the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button to select the EQ Library page.
2
Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
When storing, the EQ settings of the currently selected channel, indicated in the upper-left
and right corners, are stored to the selected memory. When recalling, the EQ settings in the
selected memory are applied to the currently selected channel.
CURRENT TYPE: This indicates the current EQ type (TYPE I or TYPE II) for the currently selected channel.
CURRENT CURVE: This is the EQ curve of the currently selected channel.
Level meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel
and its horizontal or vertical partner.
CURVE: This displays the EQ curve in the currently selected memory.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 143.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Automix Library
151
Automix Library
Up to 16 Automixes can be stored in the Automix library. See page 170 for information on
using Automix.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button to select the Automix Memory
page.
When storing, the current Automix is stored to the selected memory.
TITLE: This is the title of the current Automix.
CURRENT: This is the size of the current Automix.
UNDO: This is the size of the Automix data in the current Undo buffer.
FREE: This is the amount of free memory for storing the current Automix.
MEMORY: This is the size of the selected Automix memory.
PROTECT: To protect the contents of the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER].
A padlock icon appears next to the titles of memories that are write-protected. Automixes
cannot be stored to write-protected memories.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 143.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
152
Chapter 13—Libraries
Surround Monitor Library
Surround Monitor settings can be stored in the Surround Monitor library, which contains
1 preset memory and 32 user memories. The preset memory is read-only. User memories
enable you to store custom settings. See page 138 for information on Surround Monitoring.
1
Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to select the Surround Monitor Library
page.
When storing, the current Surround Monitor settings are stored to the selected memory.
For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 143.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Internal Effects & Plug-Ins
153
14 Internal Effects & Plug-Ins
About the Effects
The 02R96 features four internal multi-effects processors, offering a whole host of effects
types, including reverbs, delays, modulation-based effects, combination effects, and multichannel effects designed especially for use with surround sound.
Effects processors 2–4 feature assignable stereo inputs and outputs. Processor #1, which is
intended for use with the multichannel surround effects, features eight assignable inputs
and outputs. Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various sources, including the
inputs and outputs of other effects processors, allowing you to chain processors together in
series. (The only outputs available for patching in series are effects processor outputs OUT1
and OUT2.)
The input and output signal levels of the currently selected Effects processor can be metered
on the Effects Edit page and the Effects Library page. The input and output signal levels of
all effects processors can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 107 for
more information.
Effects settings can be stored in the Effects library, which contains 61 preset memories and
67 user memories. See “Effects Library” on page 146 for more information.
Patching Effects Processors
Effects processor inputs can be fed from the Aux Sends, Input and Output Channel Insert
Outs, or the outputs of another effects processor. See “Patching Effects Inputs and Outputs”
on page 67 for more information.
Effects processor outputs can be patched to the Input Channels, Input and Output Channel
Insert Ins, or the inputs of another effects processor. See “Output Patching” on page 68 for
more information.
Preset Effects & Types
The following tables list the preset effects and types. See page 259 for detailed parameter
information.
Reverbs
#
Preset Name
Type
Description
1
Reverb Hall
REVERB HALL
Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate
2
Reverb Room
REVERB ROOM
Room reverberation simulation with gate
3
Reverb Stage
REVERB STAGE
Reverb designed for vocals, with gate
4
Reverb Plate
REVERB PLATE
Plate reverb simulation with gate
5
Early Ref.
EARLY REF.
Early reflections without the subsequent reverb
6
Gate Reverb
GATE REVERB
Gated early reflections
7
Reverse Gate
REVERSE GATE
Gated reverse early reflections
Delays
#
Preset Name
Type
Description
8
Mono Delay
MONO DELAY
Simple mono delay
9
Stereo Delay
STEREO DELAY
Simple stereo delay
10 Mod.delay
MOD.DELAY
Simple repeat delay with modulation
11 Delay LCR
DELAY LCR
3-tap (left, center, right) delay
12 Echo
ECHO
Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
154
Chapter 14—Internal Effects & Plug-Ins
Modulation-based Effects
#
Preset Name
Type
Description
13 Chorus
CHORUS
Chorus
14 Flange
FLANGE
Flanger
15 Symphonic
SYMPHONIC
Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more
complex modulation than normal chorus
16 Phaser
PHASER
16-stage stereo phase shifter
17 Auto Pan
AUTO PAN
Auto-panner
18 Tremolo
TREMOLO
Tremolo
19 HQ.Pitch
HQ.PITCH
Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results
20 Dual Pitch
DUAL PITCH
Stereo pitch shifter
21 Rotary
ROTARY
Rotary speaker simulation
22 Ring Mod.
RING MOD.
Ring modulator
23 Mod.Filter
MOD.FILTER
Modulated filter
Guitar Effects
#
Preset Name
Type
Description
24 Distortion
DISTORTION
Distortion
25 Amp Simulate
AMP SIMULATE
Guitar amp simulation
Dynamic Effects
#
Preset Name
Type
Description
26 Dyna.Filter
DYNA.FILTER
Dynamically controlled filter
27 Dyna.Flange
DYNA.FLANGE
Dynamically controlled flanger
28 Dyna.Phaser
DYNA.PHASER
Dynamically controlled phase shifter
Combination Effects
#
Preset Name
Type
Description
29 Rev+Chorus
REV+CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in parallel
30 Rev->Chorus
REV->CHORUS
Reverb and chorus in series
31 Rev+Flange
REV+FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in parallel
32 Rev->Flange
REV->FLANGE
Reverb and flanger in series
33 Rev+Sympho.
REV+SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in parallel
34 Rev->Sympho.
REV->SYMPHO.
Reverb and symphonic in series
35 Rev->Pan
REV->PAN
Reverb and auto-pan in series
36 Delay+ER.
DELAY+ER.
Delay and early reflections in parallel
37 Delay->ER.
DELAY->ER.
Delay and early reflections in series
38 Delay+Rev
DELAY+REV
Delay and reverb in parallel
39 Delay->Rev
DELAY->REV
Delay and reverb in series
40 Dist->Delay
DIST->DELAY
Distortion and delay in series
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Preset Effects & Types
155
Others
#
Preset Name
Type
Description
41
Multi.Filter
MULTI.FILTER
3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave)
42
Freeze
FREEZE
Simple sampler
43
Stereo Reverb
ST REVERB
441
Reverb 5.1
Stereo reverb
5.12
6-channel reverb for 5.1 surround
REVERB2
8-channel reverb for 7.1 surround
REVERB
451
Octa Reverb
OCTA
461
Auto Pan 5.1
AUTO PAN 5.1
6-channel auto pan for 5.1 surround
471
Chorus 5.1
CHORUS 5.1
6-channel chorus for 5.1 surround
481
Flange 5.1
FLANGE 5.1
6-channel flanger for 5.1 surround
491 Sympho. 5.1
SYMPHO. 5.1
6-channel symphonic effect for 5.1 surround
50
M. BAND DYNA.
Multi-band dynamics processor
COMP 5.12
Multi-band compressor for 5.1 surround
M. Band Dyna.
511 Comp 5.1
521
Compand 5.1
533
Comp276
—
—
543
Comp276S
—
—
553
Comp260
—
—
563
Comp260S
—
—
573
Equalizer601
—
—
583
OpenDeck
—
—
593
REV-X Hall
—
—
603
REV-X Room
—
—
613
REV-X Plate
—
—
COMPAND
5.12
Multi-band compander for 5.1 surround
1. These effects can be recalled only to effects processor #1.
2. Since these effects types require four DSPs, the total number of effects processors is reduced by three
when one of these types is used. For example, if REVERB 5.1 is used with effects processor #1, processors 2–4 are unavailable.
3. Preset numbers are reserved for Add-On Effects. Effects that are not installed appear in gray and are
unavailable for use. See “Adding Optional Add-On Effects” on page 157 for more information on
Add-On Effects.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
156
Chapter 14—Internal Effects & Plug-Ins
Editing Effects
The internal effects processors can be edited as follows.
1
Press the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button.
2
Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [1–4] buttons to select the internal effects processors.
3
Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Effects Library
page, and recall a preset effects memory that contains the effects type that
you want.
See “Effects Library” on page 146 for more information.
4
Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Effects Edit page.
The available effects parameters depends on the effects type currently selected. See page 153
for detailed parameter information.
5
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them.
EFFECT NAME: This is the name of the currently-recalled Effects memory.
TYPE: This is the effects type used in the currently-recalled Effects memory. Its I/O configuration is shown below this.
LIBRARY: Select the LIBRARY button, then press [ENTER] to display the Library page for
the selected effects processor. See “Effects Library” on page 146 for more information.
PATCH: Select the PATCH button, then press [ENTER] to display the Effects Input/Output Patch page, which enables you to patch internal Effects processor inputs and outputs.
See “Patching Effects Inputs and Outputs” on page 67 for more information.
MIX BALANCE: This is used to set the balance between the wet and dry signals. When set
to 0%, only the dry signal is heard. When set to 100%, only the wet signal is heard.
BYPASS: This button is used to bypass the currently selected effects processor.
TEMPO: The TEMPO section displays TEMPO parameters for delay and modulation-based effects. These TEMPO parameters calculate and set the delay time for delay
effects, or the modulation frequency for modulation effects, relative to the specified tempo
and note duration. Use these parameters along with the SYNC and NOTE parameters.
When you turn on the SYNC parameter, the 02R96 recalculates the delay time or modulation frequency based on the TEMPO parameter value (tempo) and the NOTE parameter
value (note). For example, if the TEMPO parameter is set to 120BPM and the NOTE
parameter is set to an eighth note, turning on the SYNC parameter sets the delay time to
250msec and the modulation frequency to 0.25Hz.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
157
Adding Optional Add-On Effects
Tip:
• If you turn on the SYNC parameter and edit the TEMPO or NOTE parameter, the 02R96
recalculates the delay time or modulation frequency.
• If you turn on the SYNC parameter and edit the delay time or modulation frequency, the
NOTE parameter value changes based on the TEMPO parameter setting.
• See “Effects and tempo synchronization” on page 281 for more information on the tempo
sync parameters.
Level meters: The Level meters indicate the input and output levels of the currently
selected Effects processor. Select the IN or OUT button to display input or output levels
respectively. There are eight output meters for Effects processors 1, and two output meters
for Effects processors 2 through 4.
Effects parameters can also be adjusted by using Parameter controls 1–4. Use the Parameter
Up/Down buttons to select the rows of parameters. The parameters in the currently selected
row appear highlighted. Up to 16 parameters can be displayed at a time, and if more are
available, an up or down arrow is displayed.
Parameter Up/Down
1
2
3
4
Parameter controls 1–4
When a Y56K card effect, or an internal effects processor is inserted in the currently selected
channel, when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button is pressed, the corresponding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–4] button indicator flashes, and the corresponding
Effects, or Plug-In edit page appears. If it’s a Y56K card that’s inserted, the [PLUG-INS] button indicator also flashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS]
button indicator also flashes. This applies only to effects that are inserted into channels. If
there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected channel, a message appears.
Adding Optional Add-On Effects
Installing an optional Add-On Effect package enables you to expand the internal Effects
processors. You can use installed Add-On Effects as preset effects #53 and up. Edited settings
can be stored in user memories #68 and up. Refer to the installation guide included in your
Add-On Effect package for information on installing the effects.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
158
Chapter 14—Internal Effects & Plug-Ins
•
•
•
As of January 2004, the following Add-On Effect packages are available:
AE011 Channel Strip Package
AE021 Master Strip Package
AE031 Reverb Package
Additional packages will be released in the future. Visit the Yamaha web site for the latest
information:
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
About Plug-Ins
There are two types of Plug-Ins: Waves Plug-Ins and User Defined Plug-Ins. Waves Plug-Ins
are available on Y56K cards, which need to be installed in the 02R96’s mini YGDAI Slots
(Slots 3 and 4 only). See your Yamaha dealer for details. User Defined Plug-Ins can be used
to control up to 32 user definable parameters via MIDI Control Change or Parameter
Change messages on an external MIDI device, such as an external effects processor. Plug-In
parameters can be controlled by using the four Parameter controls below the display.
Plug-In parameter settings are stored in Scenes, for snapshot-style automation.
When installing Y56K cards, mini YGDAI Slots 3 and 4 correspond to Plug-Ins 3 and 4, so
if you install, for example, a Y56K card in Slot #4, it’s automatically configured as Plug-In
#4. 02R96 signals are patched through to the Y56K card’s effect chains just like any other signal is patched through to a Slot Input or Output. Slot Outputs (i.e., effect chain inputs) can
be fed from the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Stereo Out, or the Input and Output Channel Insert
Outs. Slot Inputs (i.e., effect chain outputs) can be fed to the Input Channels, or the Input
and Output Channel Insert Ins. See “Input & Output Patching” on page 66.
Settings for Y56K cards are stored in memory on the card when you store a Scene, and
recalled automatically during Scene recall. Please note, however, that these settings cannot
be stored in 02R96 Scenes. Therefore, the cards do not support Scene memory global paste,
sort, sort, and other scene related functions.
Note: Y56K cards use Scenes #1–#96. If you store or recall Scenes #97 and up, the Y56K card
settings will not reflect the Scenes. (A warning message will appear.)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Configuring Plug-Ins
159
Configuring Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins can be configured as follows.
If you’ve installed a Y56K card into one of the Slots, the 02R96 configures itself automatically and no further configuration settings are required.
1
Press the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [PLUG-INS] button.
2
Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Plug-In Setup
page.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
TARGET: These are used to assign a target to each of the four Plug-Ins. Parameters for the
specified target appear on the Plug-In Edit page when that Plug-In is selected by using the
EFFECTS PLUG-INS [1–4] buttons. In addition to using the cursor buttons, Plug-Ins can
also be selected on this page by using the EFFECTS PLUG-INS [1–4] buttons.
TITLE: If a Y56K card is installed, its name is displayed here. If the target is set to USER
DEFINED, the specified title of the bank currently selected on the Plug-In Edit page is displayed.
PORT: If a Y56K card is installed, its Slot number is displayed here. If the target is set to
USER DEFINED, you can specify the Plug-Ins MIDI port as MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8,
or SLOT1 1–8. Plug-In MIDI Ports can also be set on the MIDI/To Host Setup page. See
“MIDI I/O” on page 190 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
160
Chapter 14—Internal Effects & Plug-Ins
Editing Plug-Ins
Plug-Ins can be edited as follows. The settings of Waves Plug-Ins and User Defined Plug-In
banks can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI
Bulk Dump (see page 195).
If you’ve installed a Y56K card into one of the Slots, display pages especially for the Waves
card are displayed when the corresponding Plug-In is selected. See the Waves documentation for more information. The following explanation applies only to User Defined
Plug-Ins.
1
Press the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [PLUG-INS] button.
2
Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [1–4] buttons to select the Plug-Ins.
3
Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Plug-In Edit page.
4
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
TRANSMIT: This enables and disables MIDI data transmission for the currently selected
Plug-In.
INITIALIZE: This initializes the settings of the currently selected bank.
BANK: These buttons are used to select the parameter banks of the currently selected
Plug-In. Up to four parameter settings can be stored in each bank, making a total of 32
parameters per Plug-In.
TITLE: This is used to enter a title (up to 16 characters long) for each bank. To enter a title
for the currently selected bank, select this and press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window
appears, enter a title, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page
46 for more information.
PARAMETER ID/NAME: This is used to select the four rotary controls at the bottom of
the Plug-In Edit page for editing, and to enter a name (up to 16 characters long) for each
control. Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a Parameter ID from 1–4,
and then press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a title, and press OK
when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 46 for more information.
DATA: This is used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be transmitted when
each parameter control is adjusted. Use the PARAMETER ID/NAME parameter to select a
Parameter ID from 1–4, and then edit as necessary. Data values can be set in hex from 00 to
FF. The VAL setting is the value of the parameter control. The END setting specifies the end
of the data. NOP means no data is transmitted.
LEARN: This button is used to turn on and off the Learn function, which can be used to
learn what MIDI messages are transmitted by external MIDI devices when their controls or
parameters are adjusted. When on, received MIDI messages are displayed by the DATA
parameter. Only the first 16 bytes of data, starting with a Status bit, are displayed.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Editing Plug-Ins
161
MIN/MAX: These parameters determine the minimum and maximum values of the
MIDI data transmitted when each parameter control is adjusted. Use the PARAMETER
ID/NAME parameter to select a Parameter ID from 1–4, and then edit as necessary.
VAL: This is used to select the format for converting parameter control values to the DATA
parameter’s VAL setting. It applies to the currently selected bank. The available options are
listed in the following table.
VAL
Description
VAL count
One byte
Transmit the lower 7 bits of the parameter value as 1 word
Up to one VAL
MSB/LSB
Transmit the lower 14 bits of the parameter value in 7-bit units
starting from the upper byte
Up to two VAL’s
LSB/MSB
Transmit the lower 14 bits of the parameter value in 7-bit units
starting from the lower byte
Up to two VAL’s
2 Nibbles M
Transmit the lower 8 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units,
consecutively from the highest data
Up to two VAL’s
3 Nibbles M
Transmit the lower 12 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units,
consecutively from the highest data
Up to three VAL’s
4 Nibbles M
Transmit the parameter value in 16 bit units, consecutively from
the highest data
Up to four VAL’s
2 Nibbles L
Transmit the lower 8 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units,
consecutively from the lowest data
Up to two VAL’s
3 Nibbles L
Transmit the lower 12 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units,
consecutively from the lowest data
Up to three VAL’s
4 Nibbles L
Transmit the parameter value in 16-bit units, consecutively from
the lowest data
Up to four VAL’s
When the controls at the bottom of the Plug-In Edit page are operated, the specified MIDI
data, along with the value of the parameter control, is transmitted.
Plug-In parameters can also be adjusted by using Parameter controls 1–4, which correspond to the four parameters shown at the bottom of the Plug-In Edit page.
1
2
3
4
Parameter controls 1–4
When a Y56K card effect, or an internal effects processor is inserted in the currently selected
channel, when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button is pressed, the corresponding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–4] button indicator flashes, and the corresponding
Effects, or Plug-In edit page appears. If it’s a Y56K card that’s inserted, the [PLUG-INS] button indicator also flashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS]
button indicator also flashes. This applies only to effects that are inserted into channels. If
there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected channel, a message appears.
The parameter settings, and the target and bank for each Plug-In are stored in Scenes. When
a Scene is recalled, if the Plug-In’s Target is the same as when the Scene was stored, the
parameters are set accordingly and the corresponding MIDI data is transmitted (so long as
the REMOTE parameter is set to ENABLED). If the Target is not the same, the parameters
are set accordingly but no MIDI data is transmitted.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
162
Chapter 15—Scene Memories
15 Scene Memories
About Scene Memories
Scene memories allow you to store a snapshot of virtually every 02R96 mix setting in a
Scene. There are 99 Scene memories, and they can be titled for easy identification. Scenes
can be linked to Input and Output Patch library memories, so that input and output
patches are recalled along with Scenes. A fade time of up to 30 seconds can be set individually for each Input and Output Channel fader. Recall Safe can be used to exclude individual
Input and Output Channels and certain parameters from Scene recalls. Stored Scenes can
be sorted as necessary.
Scenes can be stored and recalled by using the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] and [RECALL]
buttons, or by using the Scene Memory page. Scenes can be assigned MIDI Program
Change numbers and recalled remotely. See “Assigning Scenes to Program Changes” on
page 193 for more information. When a Scene is recalled on the 02R96, the Program
Change number assigned to that Scene is transmitted, which can be used to recall programs,
effects, etc., on other MIDI equipment. In addition, manual Scene recalls can be recorded
on-the-fly in an Automix. When that Automix is replayed, the Scenes are recalled automatically. See “Automix” on page 170 for more information.
Scene memories can be stored to external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using
MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 195).
What’s Stored in a Scene?
The following items are stored in Scenes: Input and Output Channel settings, Effects settings, Group and Pair settings, Fade Time settings, and Scene title.
Edit Buffer & Edit Indicator
The Edit Buffer is where the current mix settings (i.e., the current Scene) are stored. When
a Scene is stored, the mix settings in the Edit Buffer are written to the selected Scene memory. When a Scene is recalled, the contents of the selected Scene memory are copied to the
Edit Buffer, making them the current mix settings.
When a parameter is adjusted after a Scene has been recalled, the Edit indicators—the dot
on the SCENE MEMORY display and “EDIT” on the display—appear, indicating that the
current mix settings (i.e., those in the Edit Buffer) no longer match those of the Scene that
was recalled last, as illustrated below.
02
SCENE MEMORY display
02
Display
Scene #2 has just been recalled, so
the contents of the Edit Buffer
match those of Scene #2 and the
Edit indicators are off.
A parameter has been adjusted since
Scene #2 was recalled, so the Edit
indicators appear, indicating that the
contents of the Edit Buffer no longer
match those of Scene #2.
The contents of the Edit Buffer are retained while the 02R96 is turned off.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Auto Scene Memory Update
163
Scene Memories #0 & #U
Scene memory #0 is a special read-only memory that contains the initial settings of all mix
parameters. It can be recalled, but not stored. When you want to reset all mix parameters to
their initial, or default values, recall Scene memory #0. Input Channel faders are set to either
–∞dB or nominal, depending on the Initial Data Nominal preference (see page 231).
Scene memory #U is a special read-only memory that allows you to undo and redo Scene
memory recall and store operations. After recalling a Scene memory, you can revert to the
previously recalled Scene memory by recalling Scene memory #U. After storing a Scene
memory, you can revert it to its previous contents by recalling Scene memory #U. You can
redo either of these undo operations by recalling Scene memory #U again.
Auto Scene Memory Update
Normally, when a Scene is recalled and then edited, that Scene must be stored again in order
to save the edits. If the Scene MEM Auto Update preference on page 231 is on, however,
those edits are stored automatically in a Shadow memory. There’s one Shadow memory for
each Original Scene memory. The contents of the Original and Shadow memories can be
recalled alternately, which is useful for doing A/B comparisons.
When a Scene is recalled, the current mix settings are automatically stored in the Shadow
memory of the Scene memory that was recalled last. When you return to that Scene, you
can recall the Shadow or Original memory alternately.
While the Scene MEM Auto Update preference is on, Shadow memories, not Original
memories are recalled initially. To recall an Original memory, recall its Shadow memory
first, and while the Edit indicators are both off, recall again. This time the Original memory
is recalled.
When recalling Original and Shadow memories, you can easily tell which is currently active
by the Edit indicators, which are off when an Original memory is active, and on when a
Shadow memory is active. Note that when a Scene is stored, the contents of the Original and
Shadow memories will be the same and the Edit indicators will be off regardless of which
memory is active.
When recalling Scenes in an Automix, only the Original memories can be recalled. When
recalling Scenes via MIDI Program Change messages, Original and Shadow memories can
be recalled, and operation is the same as for recalling Scenes by using the 02R96’s SCENE
MEMORY buttons or the Scene Memory page.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
164
Chapter 15—Scene Memories
Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons
As each Scene memory is selected, its number flashes on the SCENE MEMORY display, and
its number and title flash in the Scene memory section of the display. These stop flashing
when the selected Scene memory is either stored or recalled. Empty Scene memories have
the title “No Data!” and cannot be recalled. You cannot store to Scene memories that are
write-protected.
Warning: When storing Scenes, make sure that there are no settings in the Edit Buffer that
you do not want to store. Perhaps some settings have been adjusted accidentally, or by someone
else. If you are not sure of the Edit Buffer’s exact contents, recall the last Scene, make the adjustments that you really want, and then store the Scene. You may want to store the current Scene
to an unused Scene memory just in case.
Storing Scenes
1
Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the Scene
memories.
2
Press the [STORE] button.
The Title Edit window appears. This window can be disabled by the Store Confirmation
preference on page 230.
3
Enter a title.
See “Title Edit Window” on page 46 for more information.
4
Press OK on the Title Edit window.
The current Scene is stored to the selected Scene memory.
You can undo Scene stores, reverting to the previous mix settings, by recalling Scene memory #U (“Ud” on the SCENE MEMORY display).
Recalling Scenes
1
Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the Scene
memories.
2
Press the [RECALL] button.
The contents of the selected Scene memory are recalled and all mix parameters are set
accordingly. If the Recall Confirmation preference is on, a confirmation window appears
before a Scene is recalled.
You can undo Scene recalls, reverting to the previous mix settings, by recalling Scene memory #U (“Ud” on the SCENE MEMORY display).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Using the Scene Memory Page
165
Using the Scene Memory Page
On the Scene Memory page you can store, recall, write-protect, delete, and edit the titles of
Scenes.
1
Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate the Scene Memory
page.
2
Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the Scene memories.
A Scene memory is selected when it appears inside the dotted box.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the following buttons.
TITLE EDIT: To edit the title of the selected Scene memory, select this and press [ENTER].
When the Title Edit window appears, edit the title, and press OK when you’ve finished. See
“Title Edit Window” on page 46 for more information.
RECALL: To recall the contents of the selected Scene memory, select this and press
[ENTER]. The contents of the selected Scene memory are recalled, all parameters are set
accordingly, the Scene memory’s number and title stop flashing, and the Edit indicators go
off. If the Recall Confirmation preference is on, a confirmation window appears before a
Scene is recalled.
STORE: To store the current Scene to the selected Scene memory, select this and press
[ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a title, and press OK. See “Title Edit
Window” on page 46 for more information. When a Scene is stored, the Scene memory’s
number and title stop flashing, and the Edit indicators go off. You can stop the Title Edit
window from appearing by turning off the Store Confirmation preference on page 230. The
“Free: 100%” value indicates the amount of free memory available for storing Scenes.
CLEAR: To delete the contents and title of the selected Scene memory, select this, press
[ENTER], and the press YES when the confirmation window appears.
PROTECT: To protect the contents of the selected Scene memory, select this and press
[ENTER]. A padlock icon appears next to the titles of Scene memories that are write-protected. Scenes cannot be stored to write-protected Scene memories. While the PROTECT
button is selected, the selected Scene memory can be protected and unprotected by using
the INC/DEC buttons.
PATCH LINK: This indicates the Input/Output Patch library number that is linked to each
scene. When you store a scene, the number of the input/output patch that was most recently
recalled or stored will automatically be linked with that scene. When you recall that scene,
this library number will also be automatically recalled. You can also move the cursor to the
parameter boxes and change the library numbers.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
166
Chapter 15—Scene Memories
Fading Scenes
Fade times can be specified for individual Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Stereo Out,
and the Group Master. The fade time determines the time it takes the Input and Output
Channel faders to move to their new positions when a Scene is recalled. Fade time settings
can be specified for each Scene individually.
1
Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate a Fade Time page.
The Fade Time parameters for the 56 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The
Input Channel 1–48 Fade time page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the
same.
The Fade Time parameters for the Output Channels appear on the Output Fade Time page.
2
Use the cursor buttons or [SEL] buttons to select the individual Fade Time
parameters, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them.
You can copy the currently selected Input or Output Channel Fade Time setting to all Input
or Output Channels respectively by double-clicking the [ENTER] button. If the Input or
Output Group Master is selected, you can copy the setting to all Input or Output Channel
Group Master channels.
The Long name of the channel whose Fade Time parameter is currently selected appears in
the upper-right corner of the page. When a channel is selected by using the [SEL] buttons,
its Long name also appears in the upper-right corner of the display.
The Fade Time can be set from 0 to 30 seconds in 0.1 second steps.
You can reset all Input Channel Fade Time parameters to zero by selecting the ALL INPUT
CLEAR buttons, then pressing the [ENTER] button. You can reset all Output Channel Fade
Time parameters to zero by selecting the [ALL CLEAR] buttons, then pressing the [ENTER]
button.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Recalling Scenes Safely
167
Global Fade Time: When this check box is checked, a Scene is recalled using the Fade
Time that is applied globally to all Scenes. (The Fade Time setting stored in the recalled
Scene is temporarily ignored.)
Recalling Scenes Safely
When a Scene is recalled, all mix parameters are set accordingly. In some situations, you
may want to retain the settings of certain parameters on certain channels, and this can be
achieved by using the Recall Safe function. Recall Safe can be set individually for Input/Output Channels, Group Master, Internal Effect Processor, and the Remote Layer, etc.
1
Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate the Recall Safe page.
2
Select the SAFE ENABLED/DISABLED button, and use the [ENTER] button or
the INC/DEC buttons to enable or disable the Recall Safe function.
3
Use the cursor buttons, [SEL] buttons, or Parameter wheel to select channels,
and use the [ENTER] button or the INC/DEC buttons to set them as Safe channels.
When a channel is Safe, its number appears highlighted.
GROUP MASTER/OTHERS: Recall Safe can be set individually not only for Input/Output Channels, but also Group Master, Internal Effect Processors, User Defined Remote
Layer, and Plug-ins.
4
Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the MODE parameters,
and the [ENTER] button to set them.
The MODE buttons determine which Safe channel parameters are unaffected by Scene
recalls. ALL (all parameters. This option is mutually exclusive with the following options),
FADER (faders), ON (On/Off parameters), PAN (Pan parameters), EQ (EQ parameters),
COMP (Comp parameters), GATE (Gate parameters), AUX (Aux Send levels), AUX ON
(Aux Send On/Off parameters), DELAY (Delay parameters), ROUTING (Routing parameters).
GLOBAL RECALL SAFE: When this check box is checked, a Scene is recalled using the
settings that are applied globally to all Scenes. The settings stored in the recalled Scene are
temporarily ignored.
Recall Safe settings are stored in Scene memories.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
168
Chapter 15—Scene Memories
Sorting Scenes
Scene can be sorted by using the Scene Memory Sort function.
1
Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate the Scene Memory Sort
page.
2
Use the cursor button to the select the SOURCE list, and use the Parameter
wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to select the Scene memory you want to
move.
3
Use the cursor button to the select the DESTINATION list, and use the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to select the position to which you want
to move the source Scene memory.
4
Press [ENTER] to move the source Scene memory to the specified destination.
The [ENTER] button executes the Sort function regardless of its position.
Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste)
Any channel or parameter settings for the current scene can be copied and pasted into other
scenes. This function is useful when you want to apply edited parameter settings in the current scene to other scenes.
1
Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate the Global Paste Source
CH Select page.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste)
169
2
Use the cursor buttons, [SEL] buttons, or Parameter wheel to select the channel category, then use the [ENTER] button or the INC/DEC buttons to select
the copy source channel.
The number of the source channel is highlighted.
GROUP MASTER/OTHERS: You can select as the copy source each Group Master, internal Effects processos, User Defined Remote layer, or user Defined plug-in, as well as each
channel.
3
Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the copy source parameter, then press the [ENTER] button.
4
Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the destination channels, then press the [ENTER] button.
5
Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate the Global Paste Destination Scene page.
6
Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the destination
scene(s).
Scenes specified between FROM and TO (inclusive) become the paste destination. You can
paste up to 10 scenes at a time.
7
Use the cursor buttons to select the PASTE button, then use the [ENTER] button to paste the settings.
You cannot paste the settings to write-protected scenes.
UNDO: This button restores the settings used prior to the paste operation. However, if the
settings in the scene are changed after the paste operation (such as by saving, clearing, or
sorting the scene, or receiving scene data via MIDI Bulk Dump), the UNDO function is disabled.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
170
Chapter 16—Automix
16 Automix
About Automix
The 02R96’s Automix function allows dynamic automation of virtually all mix parameters,
including Levels, Mutes, Pan, Surround Pan, Aux Sends, Aux Send Mutes, EQ, effects, and
Plug-Ins. You can specify which of these parameters will be recorded, and punch channels
in and out of recording on-the-fly. User Defined Remote Layer operations, and scene and
library recall operations can also be automated, combining snap shot and dynamic mix
automation. Events are recorded in real time and can be edited either offline, with 1/4 frame
accuracy, or by rerecording with punch in/out. Automix can be synchronized to an external
timecode source or to the internal timecode generator.
Up to 16 Automixes can be stored in the Automix library. See “Automix Library” on page
151 for more information. They can also be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a
MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 195).
What’s Recorded in an Automix?
The following parameters can be recorded in an Automix.
Parameter
Input
Channels
Bus Out
Masters
Aux Send
Masters
Stereo
Out
Channel Levels (faders)
O
O
O
O
Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)
O
O
O
O
Pan
O
—
—
—
Surround Pan
O
—
—
—
EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off)
O
O
O
O
Aux Send 1–8 levels
O
—
—
—
Aux Send 1–8 mutes
O
—
—
—
Feder Group Master
(Level, On/Off)
—
Scene recalls
—
EQ, Gate, Comp, Effects, Channel library recalls
—
Effect parameters (certain parameters)
—
User Defined Plug-Ins (parameters 1–4)
—
User Defined Remote Layers (faders, [ON],
Encoders)
—
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Automix Main Page
171
Automix Main Page
This section explains the Automix Main page.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button to locate the Automix Main
page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
TITLE: This is the title of the current Automix.
TIME CODE: This counter displays the current timecode position.
FREE: The amount of free Automix memory remaining is displayed here in kilobytes, percent, and graphically by a bargraph.
SIZE: The size of the current Automix and the size of any Automix data in the undo buffer
are displayed here in kilobytes.
TIME REFERENCE: This section displays the current timecode source and frame rate. If
you select this item and then press the [ENTER] button, you can jump directly to the Time
Reference page (see page 177).
INT START TIME: This parameter is used to set the start time of the internal timecode
generator in hours, minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Press the [ENTER] button to
reset the currently selected digits to “00.” The internal timecode generator is selected on the
Time Reference page (see page 177).
OFFSET: This parameter can be used to specify an offset relative to the external timecode
source in hours, minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Specify a “+” value to move
events forward relative to the incoming timecode. Specify a “–” value to move events backwards relative to the incoming timecode. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently
selected digits to “00.” If the Timecode Display Relative preference is turned on (see
page 233), the indicated timecode is offset.
UPDATE: This button determines the fate of events that exist beyond the point at which
rerecording is stopped. When TO END is on, all events that exist beyond the point at which
rerecording is stopped for parameters that have been edited during the current pass are
erased. This function is useful when you want parameters to remain the same right through
to the end of the Automix. Events are erased only when the current pass is actually stopped,
not when a punch out occurs. When TO END is off, existing events are left as they are.
When TO END is on, the way in which Fader events are processed depends on the currently
selected Fader Edit mode and Edit Out mode. In the following table, the Fader Edit mode
is set to Absolute. If the Fader Edit mode is set to Relative, and the Edit Out mode is set to
either Takeover or Off, the fader will remain at a position relative to the position at which
recording is stopped.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
172
Chapter 16—Automix
Return
Takeover or Off
At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader
returns to the position specified by the existing fader
data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter on
the Fader Edit pages.
At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader
remains at the same position until the next Fader
event in the existing data occurs.
Existing data
Existing data
Return time
TO END is OFF
Fader edit
Fader edit
Punch in
Time
Time
Stop recording
Punch in
At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader
returns to the position specified by the existing fader
data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter,
and all subsequent events are erased so that the fader
remains at that position right through to the end of
the Automix.
Stop recording
At the point at which recording is stopped, all subsequent events are erased so that the fader remains at
that position right through to the end of the Automix.
Existing data
Existing data
Return time
TO END is ON
Fader edit
Punch in
Fader edit
Time
Stop recording
Time
Punch in
Stop recording
EDIT OUT: These buttons are used to set the Edit Out mode: Off, Takeover, or Return. The
Edit Out mode determines how rerecorded fader moves align with existing fader data at the
punch out point. Fader data includes Input Channel levels, Bus Out master levels, Aux Send
master levels, the Stereo Out level, User Defined Remote Layer faders, and Group master
levels. The Edit Out modes are explained in the following table. The Return Time is specified on the Fader Edit page (see page 176).
Off
At the punch out point, the fader
remains at the same position until the
next Fader event in the existing data
occurs.
Return
Takeover
At the punch out point, the fader returns
to the position specified by the existing
fader data, at the speed specified by the
Time parameter on the Fader Edit pages.
At the punch out point, recording continues until the fader position intersects
the existing fader data. If you are still
touching the fader knob at the actual
punch out point, the fader is disabled
until you release it.
Existing data
Existing data
Existing data
Return time
Fader edit
Time
Punch in
Punch out
Fader edit
Fader edit
Time
Punch in
Punch out
Punch in
Time
Punch out
Actual punch out
In this example, punch out was performed by pressing the [AUTO] button,
and the fader was moved manually
between the punch out and actual
punch out points.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
173
Automix Main Page
FADER EDIT: These buttons are used to set the Fader Edit mode: Absolute or Relative. The
Fader Edit mode determines how fader moves are rerecorded. It has no effect during the
first recording pass. In Absolute mode, fader moves are rerecorded as absolute values and
existing fader data is erased. In Relative mode, fader moves are rerecorded relative to the
existing fader data.
Fader data includes Input Channel levels, Bus Out master levels, Aux Send master levels,
Stereo Out level, User Defined Remote Layer faders, and Group master levels.
The following table explains Fader Edit mode operation (TO END: off. Edit Out: off)
Absolute
Relative
Fader edits are recorded as absolute values and
existing fader data between the punch in and out
points is erased.
Fader edits are rerecorded relative to the existing
fader data.
Existing data
Existing data
Fader edit
Fader edit
Time
Punch in
Punch out
Time
Punch in
Punch out
TOUCH SENSE: When the TOUCH button is selected, the Touch Sense function enables
you to touch the faders to punch parameter values in and out. The corresponding parameters’ OVERWRITE button must be set to on. When the LATCH button is selected, only
punch in operations are available (the punch out function is disabled).
OVERWRITE: These buttons determine which parameters can be recorded on the first
pass, and rerecorded (i.e., overwritten) on subsequent passes. They can be set while recording is in progress. Parameters for which the corresponding OVERWRITE button is not set,
cannot be edited while recording is in progress.
Parameter button
Description
FADER
Channel faders (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Send masters, the Stereo Out, Group master levels, and User Defined Layer faders)
ON
Channel Mutes (ON/OFF), User Defined Layer [ON] buttons, and Group master
ON
PAN
Input Channel Pan, User Defined Layer Encoders
SURR
Input Channel Surround pan, LFE level, DIV parameter, and RDIV parameter
AUX
Aux Send 1–8 levels
AUX ON
Aux Send 1–8 mutes
EQ
EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off)
Scene and library recalls, and internal effects processors and Plug-Ins parameters can be
recorded regardless of the OVERWRITE settings.
AUTOMIX: This button is used to enable and disable the Automix function. It works in
unison with the AUTOMIX [ENABLE] button.
NEW: This button is used to create a new Automix. When a new Automix is created, a
Scene recall event to recall the current Scene (i.e., the last Scene recalled) is automatically
inserted at the start of the Automix. You can edit this event so that another Scene is recalled.
This initial Scene is important because it sets all the mix parameters how you’d like them at
the beginning of the Automix. Without it, mix parameters would remain the same as when
Automix playback was stopped.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
174
Chapter 16—Automix
UNDO: This button is used to undo various Automix operations. During each recording
pass, when a new Automix is created, when an Automix is recalled, when an offline edit is
performed, or when the Undo function is used, the current Automix data is copied to the
Undo buffer, from which it can be retrieved by pressing UNDO while Automix is stopped.
The Undo buffer is cleared when the 02R96 is turned off. If you want to save the contents
of the Undo buffer, perform the undo, and then store the Automix (see page 151).
INSERT: The INSERT button inserts the current Scene into the current Automix data. This
is useful when you want to quickly swap out a specified range of the Automix data, such as
a line of dialog. See “Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix” on page 180 for more information.
AUTO REC: This button works the same as the REC button except that it remains on when
Automix recording is stopped. It appears highlighted while Auto Record mode is on.
REC: This button is used to engage Record-Ready mode, in which Automix recording starts
automatically as soon as the specified timecode source starts. Unlike the AUTO REC button,
however, it’s turned off when recording is stopped. It flashes in Record-Ready mode, and is
highlighted during recording. This button can also be used to engage Automix recording
during playback. To do this, while the PLAY button is highlighted (i.e., during playback),
press the REC button (it flashes in Record-Ready mode). Then press the PLAY button to
start recording.
PLAY: This button is used to start Automix recording and playback when the timecode
source is set to internal. When an external timecode source is selected, while the external
timecode is being received, recording and playback are started, and this button is turned on
automatically. If Automix is stopped by pressing the STOP or ABORT button, recording or
playback can be restarted by pressing this button so long as timecode is still being received.
This button can also be used in conjunction with the REC button to punch in recording
during Automix playback.
STOP: This button is used to stop Automix playback and recording. It appears highlighted
while Automix is stopped.
ABORT: This button is used to abort the current recording and inserting without updating
the existing Automix data.
Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons
•
•
•
•
•
•
The channel strip [AUTO] buttons are used to arm channels in Record-Ready
mode, and to punch channels in and out during recording.
AUTO
The [AUTO] button indicators operate as follows:
Off: Automix playback disabled
Green: Automix stopped or playing
Orange: Record-Ready mode
Red: Recording (even for individual parameters, see page 183)
Flashing red: Takeover in progress
Flashing green: indicates that a fader is inactive, for example, when you continue touching
a fader after actual punch out has occurred when using the Takeover Edit Out mode.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Automix Memory Page
175
Automix Memory Page
Automixes can be stored and recalled on the Automix Memory page. The lower half of this
page is identical to the Automix Main page.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button to locate the Automix Memory
page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
The Automix library functions are explained in “Automix Library” on page 151. The
remaining items are the same as on the Main page and are explained on page 171.
Fader Edit Pages
During playback, fader positions are displayed graphically as black bars on the Fader Edit
page, of which there are three. The Fader Edit 1 page displays Faders positions for Input
Channel 1 through 56, the Bus Outs, and Stereo Out. The Fader Edit 2 page displays faders
positions for Input Channel 1 through 56, the Bus Outs, and Aux Sends. The Fader Edit 3
page displays fader positions for the Input Group Master Levels and Output Group Master
Levels. When the Fader mode is set to Fader, Input and Output Channel levels are displayed.
When it’s set to Aux mode, Aux Send levels are displayed.
During rerecording, arrows are displayed next to each fader bar. A
downward arrow indicates that the current fader position is higher
than that specified by the existing fader data. An upward arrow indicates that the current fader position is lower than that specified by
the existing fader data.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button to locate the Fader Edit pages.
The Fader Edit 1 page is shown here.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
176
Chapter 16—Automix
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
The counter in the upper-left corner displays the current timecode position.
Edit Safe buttons: The numbered buttons below each fader bar are Channel Safe buttons, which can be used to prohibit automix recording on certain channels. A channel is set
to safe when its button appears highlighted.
You can make all channels safe by selecting one “non-safe” button and double-clicking the
[ENTER] button. A confirmation message appears.
You can cancel all safe channels by selecting one “safe” button and double-clicking the
[ENTER] button. A confirmation message appears.
During recording, events cannot be recorded, or rerecorded on safe channels, although
existing events are played back and faders, Encoders, [ON] buttons, and so on can still be
used, which is useful for rehearsing mix moves. Channel safe settings cannot be changed
during recording.
ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE: These buttons are the same as those on the Main and Memory
pages. See “Automix Main Page” on page 171 for more information.
MOTOR: This button is used to turn the fader motors are on and off for Automix playback. The button appears highlighted when the motors are on. The motors cannot be
turned off during recording, and are automatically turned on when recording starts.
TOUCH SENSE: This button is the same as the TOUCH SENSE button on the Automix
Main page (see page 173).
UPDATE: This button is the same as that on the Main and Memory pages. See “Automix
Main Page” on page 171 for more information.
EDIT OUT: The TAKEOVER and RETURN buttons are the same as those on the Main and
Memory pages. See “Automix Main Page” on page 171 for more information. The TIME
parameter determines the time it takes faders to return to levels specified by the existing
Automix data when the Edit Out mode is set to Return. It can be set from 0.0 to 30.0 seconds
in 0.1 second steps.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate
177
Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate
The timecode source and frame rate for Automix can be set as follows.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the Time Reference page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
TIME REFERENCE: The following timecode sources can be selected.
Source
Description
INTERNAL
Internally generated timecode
SMPTE
SMPTE timecode received via the SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT
MIDI CLOCK
MIDI Clock received via the MIDI IN port
MTC
MTC received via the MTC TIME CODE INPUT
USB
MTC received via the USB TO HOST port
SERIAL
MTC received via the SERIAL TO HOST port
SLOT1
MTC received via Slot #1 (for use with an optional mLAN I/O Card installed in Slot #1)
MIDI
MTC received via the MIDI IN port
For the USB and SERIAL sources, you must specify a port from 1–8.
FRAMES: The frame rate can be set to: 30, 30D, 29.97, 29.97D, 25, or 24. An Automix will
playback correctly even if the frame rate is different to that which was used when the Automix was originally recorded.
The MIDI CLOCK source supports Song position Pointers, F8 TIMING CLOCK (timing
info), FA START (starts Automix from beginning), FB CONTINUE (starts Automix from
current position), and FC STOP (stops Automix).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
178
Chapter 16—Automix
Creating a Time Signature Map
When using the MIDI CLOCK timecode source, you’ll also need to specify the initial time
signature and any time signature changes that follow.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the Time Signature page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel or INC/DEC buttons to specify the measure and time signature.
To insert a time signature change, use the cursor buttons to select the next available entry,
and press [ENTER], or turn the Parameter wheel.
To delete a time signature change, select it, and then press [ENTER]. The initial time signature entry at measure #1 cannot be deleted.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Recording an Automix
179
Recording an Automix
This section provides a general procedure for Automix recording.
1
Connect a timecode source.
2
Select the timecode source and frame rate.
See “Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate” on page 177 for more information.
3
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button to locate the Automix Main
page.
4
On the Automix Main page, use the ENABLED/DISABLED button to enable
the Automix function.
5
On the Automix Main page, use the OVERWRITE buttons to select which
parameters you want to record.
The corresponding OVERWRITE buttons pages appear highlighted.
6
On the Automix Main page, press the REC button.
The REC button flashes.
Alternatively, you could press the AUTO REC button so that Automix recording starts automatically when timecode is received. The main difference between REC and AUTO REC is
that the AUTO REC functions remains on when recording is stopped, whereas REC must
be pressed each and every time you want to start recording. Initially however, REC may be
the safer option.
7
Use the [AUTO] buttons to arm channels for Automix recording.
The [AUTO] button indicators of armed channels light up orange.
8
Start the timecode source.
The REC and PLAY buttons appear highlighted.
9
Adjust the faders and other controls as necessary.
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the currently selected channel. Channels are
selected automatically when the [AUTO] buttons are pressed. You can punch channels out
of recording by using the [AUTO] buttons.
10 To stop Automix recording, stop the timecode source, or press the STOP but-
ton on the Automix Main or Memory page.
When the Mix Update Confirmation preference is on (see page 233), a confirmation message appears asking if you want to update the existing Automix data (i.e., keep the edits just
recorded).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
180
Chapter 16—Automix
Inserting Mix Parameters into Automix
You can insert the static mix parameter settings into the range specified by the IN and OUT
parameters in the current Automix data. This is useful when you want to quickly insert
static EQ settings into a specified range of the Automix data.
Before Insert
Event
No event
After Insert
Event
Event erased
Value prior to Insert
Inserted
parameter value
Time
IN
OUT
Time
1
Follow Steps 1–4 as described in the “Recording an Automix” section on the
previous page, then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button to display
the Automix Main page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the INSERT button, then press [ENTER].
A confirmation message appears.
3
Use the IN and OUT parameters to specify the region to be inserted.
The default IN and OUT parameter values use the Locate memories specified by the Insert
Time Link preference (see page 234). If you change the Locate points for the corresponding
Locate memories while the confirmation message is displayed, the IN and OUT parameter
values will be updated accordingly.
If MIDI clock is selected as a timecode source, these parameters indicate the position in
bar:beats:clocks and use the IN and OUT parameter values in the TIME SETTING section
on the Event Job page. In this case, the Insert Time Link preference is disabled.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Rerecording Events
181
4
Use the cursor buttons to select YES, then press [ENTER].
The 02R96 enters Insert mode, and the INSERT button is highlighted.
The fader positions, mute function and other parameters are updated to the settings specified for the time value of the IN parameter.
5
Select the parameter you wish to insert using the AUTOMIX OVERWRITE buttons.
To select effect or plug-in parameters, locate the Effect Edit or Plug-in Edit page, then move
the cursor to the desired parameter and press [ENTER].
6
Select the insert destination channel by pressing the corresponding [AUTO]
button.
The selected [AUTO] button indicator lights up red.
7
Edit a parameter you wish to insert.
8
Use the cursor buttons to select the INSERT button, then press [ENTER].
A confirmation message appears.
9
Use the cursor buttons to select YES, then press [ENTER] to insert the data.
Once the data is inserted, Insert mode is cancelled and the INSERT button is unhighlighted.
Rerecording Events
Events can be rerecorded as many times as you like. Remember, however, that unlike the
first pass, on subsequent passes existing events for the currently punched in parameter are
overwritten, so use the OVERWRITE buttons and [AUTO] buttons with care. Instead of
using the [AUTO] buttons to punch in an entire channel, you can reduce the risk of overwriting important data by punching in and out individual parameters (see page 183). Use
the Update To End option to determine how existing events are handled when rerecording
is stopped (see page 171). Use the Edit Out (see page 172) and Fader Edit (see page 173)
options to determine how Fader events are rerecorded.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
182
Chapter 16—Automix
Parameter Recording
The following table summarizes parameter recording operation for each parameter. Parameter adjustments made on the respective display pages are also recorded.
Parameter
Channel
OVERWRITE
Channel Mutes
(ON/OFF)
Pair/Group
Set Layer to input, Fader mode to
Fader, use faders
Input
Channel Levels
(faders)
Operation
Bus Out, Aux Send
FADER
Set Layer to Master, Fader mode to
Fader, use faders
Stereo Out
Use Stereo Out fader
Group Master levels
Use faders assigned to Group Master
in the User Assignable Layer.
Input
Set Layer to input, use [ON] buttons
Bus Out, Aux Send
Set Layer to Master, use [ON] buttons
Stereo Out
ON
Group Master
On/Off
Use Stereo Out [ON] button
Use [ON] buttons assigned to Group
Master in the User Assignable Layer.
Faders of paired channels and
grouped faders are recorded
together
[ON] buttons of paired channels and grouped mutes are
recorded together
Pan
Input
PAN
Set Layer to input, Encoder mode to
Pan, use Encoders.
If Pan mode is Gang or
Inverse-Gang, paired channels are recorded together.
Surround Pan
Input
SURR
Use Joystick (If a surround parameter
is assigned to the Encoders, also use
Encoders)
If ST LINK button on Surround
Edit page is on, adjacent
channels are recorded
together.
EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off)
Input, Bus Out,
Aux Send, Stereo
Out
EQ
Use SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER
section (If EQ parameter assigned to
an Encoder, also use Encoders)
EQ of paired channels, and
grouped EQs recorded
together
AUX
If Fader mode is Aux, use faders. If
Encoder mode is Aux, use Encoders
(also use Aux Send or Aux view
pages)
Aux send levels of paired
channels recorded together.
(If the selected Aux Send is
paired, the send level to both
Aux Sends is recorded.)
AUX
ON
Use Aux Send or Aux view pages
Aux send mutes of paired
channels recorded together
(If the selected Aux Send is
paired, mutes for both Aux
Sends recorded.)
—
Use SCENE MEMORY section or
Scene Memory page
—
Aux send 1–8 levels
Aux send 1–8 mutes
Input
Input
Scene recalls
—
Library recalls
EQ, Gate, Comp,
Effects, Channel
—
Use corresponding library page
—
Effect parameters
(certain parameters)
Effects processors
1–4
—
Use Parameter controls 1–4 (push to
punch in/out). Select the desired
parameter on the Effect Edit page,
then press [ENTER]
—
—
Use Parameter controls 1–4 (push to
punch in/out). Select the desired
parameter on the Plug-in Edit page,
then press [ENTER]
—
FADER
Select User Defined Remote Layer,
use faders
—
[ON] buttons
ON
Select User Defined Remote Layer,
use [ON] buttons
—
Encoders
PAN
Select User Defined Remote Layer,
use Encoder
—
User Defined Plug-Ins
(parameters 1–4)
Plug-Ins 1–4
Faders
User Defined Remote
Layers
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Punching In & Out Individual Parameters
183
Punching In & Out Individual Parameters
During Automix rerecording, channels can be punched in and out by pressing the channel
strip [AUTO] buttons. Individual parameters can be punched in and out as follows.
Parameter
Channel Levels
(faders)
Channel
OVERWRITE
Operation
Punch In
Punch Out
Input
Set Layer to input, Fader mode to
Fader
Bus Out, Aux
Send
Set Layer to Master, Fader mode
to fader
Touch fader knob
Release fader
Stereo Out fader
and adjust1
knob2
Stereo Out
FADER
Set the Fader mode to Fader; Set
the Group Master in the User
Assignable Layer.
Group Master
faders
Pan
Input
PAN
Set Layer to input, Encoder mode
to Pan.
Press Encoder
and adjust
Press Encoder
Surround Pan
Input
SURR
Select Input Layer and assign Surround LFE Level or Surround Pan
Wheel to the Encoders
Press Encoder
and adjust
Press Encoder
Adjust control
Press [AUTO] button
EQ
Turn on Auto EQ Edit In preference (see page 233). Use
SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER
section (If EQ parameter assigned
to an Encoder, also use Encoders)
Press EQ [ON]
button
Press [AUTO] button
Set Layer to input, Fader mode to
Aux
Touch fader knob
Release fader
and adjust1
knob2
Set Layer to input, Encoder mode
to Aux
Press Encoder
and adjust
Press Encoder
Select internal effects processors
Push Parameter
1–4 control, or
select the parameters on the Effect
Edit page, then
press [ENTER]
Push Parameter
1–4 control, or
select the parameters on the Effect
Edit page, then
press [ENTER]
Select Plug-Ins
Push Parameter
1–4 control.
Select the desired
parameter on the
Plug-in Edit page,
then press
[ENTER]
Push Parameter
1–4 control Select
the desired
parameter on the
Plug-in Edit page,
then press
[ENTER]
Touch fader knob
Release fader
and adjust1
knob2
Press Encoder
and adjust
Press Encoder
EQ (F, Q, G)
All channels
EQ On/Off
Aux send 1–8 levels
Effect parameters
(certain parameters)
User Defined Plug-Ins
(parameters 1–4)
User Defined Remote
Layers
Input
Effects processors 1–4
Plug-Ins 1–4
Faders
Encoders
AUX
—
—
FADER
Select User Defined Remote Layer
PAN
Select User Defined Remote Layer
1. TOUCH SENSE on Fader Edit page must be TOUCH or LATCH.
2. TOUCH SENSE on Fader Edit page must be TOUCH.
If during Automix recording you punch in an individual parameter by using the controls
listed in the above table, even if some OVERWRITE buttons are on, only the existing data
of that particular parameter will be overwritten. Likewise, when you punch out an individual parameter by using the controls listed above, only that particular parameter will be
punched out.
If during Automix recording you press an [AUTO] button to punch in a channel, the existing data of all parameters for which the corresponding OVERWRITE buttons are on will be
overwritten. When you press the [AUTO] button to punch out of recording, all of those
parameters will be punched out.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
184
Chapter 16—Automix
When faders are grouped with the Fader Group Master function turned off, if the OVERWRITE FADER button is on, pressing an [AUTO] button, or touching the fader knob of any
fader in the group (if TOUCH SENSE on the Fader Edit page is on) puts all the corresponding channels into Record mode and all the [AUTO] button indicators light up red. The same
applies to Mute (OVERWRITE ON button) and EQ (OVERWRITE EQ button) groups.
Playing Back an Automix
So long as the Automix function is enabled, the Automix function will chase the incoming
timecode and play and stop the current Automix accordingly. Playback stops automatically
when the end of the Automix data is reached. Playback can be stopped manually by pressing
the STOP or ABORT button on the Automix Main or Memory page. Playback will stop
automatically if no timecode is received for a while, for example, if the timecode source is
disconnected or turned off.
If the timecode source is set to internal, use the PLAY button on the Automix Main or Memory page to start Automix playback, and the STOP button to stop it.
You can disable Automix playback on individual channels by using the channel strip
[AUTO] buttons. During playback, the [AUTO] button indicators appear green. When
Automix playback for an individual channel is disabled, its [AUTO] button indicator goes
out.
During playback, faders move in accordance with recorded Fader events (so long as the corresponding Layer and Fader mode is selected). Fader movement can be disabled by turning
off the fader motors (see page 175). Fader events can be viewed on the Fader Edit pages (see
page 175).
Other events are displayed by the display pages and button indicators. Recorded events of
the currently selected channel are displayed by the SELECTED CHANNEL section controls
and displays.
Warning: If the effects type is different to that which was used when the effects parameter edits
were recorded, the parameter edits will not be played back. However, they are not deleted.
When you rerecord effects parameter edits, it’s recommended that you delete the existing effects
events offline. See “Editing Events Offline” on page 185 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Editing Events Offline
185
Editing Events Offline
Automix events can be edited offline on the Event Job and Event Edit pages. Offline editing
can be performed only while the Automix function is stopped.
Event Job Page
On the Event Job page, specified events on specified channels between specified in and out
points can be erased, copied, moved/merged, or trimmed.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button to locate the Event Job page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the channels to edit, then press [ENTER] to
set them.
You can select multiple Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Outs, Stereo Out, and the Fader
Group Master. When you select a channel, its button is highlighted. (You can select multiple
channels.)
ALL SELECT: The ALL SELECT button selects all channels.
ALL CLEAR: The ALL CLEAR button de-selects all channels.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the IN and OUT parameters, then use the
Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to specify the edit
range.
TIME SETTING: The IN and OUT parameters are used to specify the region of Automix
data to be erased, copied, moved/merged, or trimmed. The IN and OUT points can be set
on-the-fly by pressing the [ENTER] button while the IN or OUT button is selected. The
captured timecode values can be edited by using the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently selected digits to “00.” Up to eight IN
and OUT timecode values can be captured and stored in the eight Capture memories. Use
the cursor buttons to select the Capture memory number, and use the Parameter wheel or
the INC/DEC buttons to select the Capture memories.
4
Use the cursor buttons to select a Job, then press [ENTER].
The following Jobs are available. Certain Jobs feature an additional parameter below the
TIME SETTING section.
ERASE: The ERASE button erases specified Automix data.
COPY: The COPY button copies specified Automix data. This Job features a SOURCE section and COPY TO section (below the TIME SETTING section).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
186
Chapter 16—Automix
The SOURCE section enables you to select the copy source Automix. You can select CURRENT (the current Automix) or MEM (any Automix from 1 to 16).
The TIME parameter determines the point to which the specified data is copied. The number in parentheses on the right indicates the end point of the copy destination. You can set
the TIME parameter on-the-fly by selecting the TIME button, then pressing [ENTER]. You
can edit the captured timecode value using the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons. Press
[ENTER] to reset the currently-selected digit to “00.”
The CH parameter specifies the channel to which the specified data will be copied. The
number of destination channels depends on the specified number of copy source channels.
For example, if Input Channels 1 though 8 are specified as the source, then the number of
destination channels will be eight (8). Destination channels are contiguous and only the
first channel in the range can be specified. The number in parentheses on the right indicates
the last channel in the copy destination.
You cannot copy from Input Channels to Output Channels. Also, even within Output
Channels, you cannot copy between Aux and Bus channels.
TRIM: The TRIM button trims the specified Automix data. This Job includes a TRIM
EDIT section below the TIME SETTING section.
The IN parameter determines the amount of time required for the faders to achieve the
specified trim amount. The OUT parameter determines the amount of time required for
the faders to return to the previous levels. The LEVEL parameter specifies the fader trim
amount in the range of –96 dB to +96 dB.
Existing data
Trim: –x dB
Trimmed data
TRIM IN
IN
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
TRIM OUT
OUT
Time
Editing Events Offline
187
MOVE/MERGE: This Job features a SOURCE section and a MOVE TO (MERGE TO)
section below the TIME SETTING section. The function of this button changes depending
on the SOURCE section setting. If you select CURRENT (current Automix) in the
SOURCE section, this button becomes the MOVE button, which enables you to move the
specified range of Automix data to another position. If you select MEM (Automix memories 1–16) in the SOURCE section, this button becomes the MERGE button, which enables
you to merge the specified range of Automix data with other Automix data.
The SOURCE section enables you to select the move/merge source Automix. You can select
CURRENT (the current Automix) or MEM (any Automix from 1 to 16).
The TIME parameter determines the point to which the specified data is moved or merged.
The number in parentheses on the right indicates the end point of the move/merge destination. You can set the TIME parameter on-the-fly by selecting the TIME button, then
pressing [ENTER]. You can edit the captured timecode value using the Parameter wheel or
the INC/DEC buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently-selected digit to
“00.”
The CH parameter specifies the channel to which the specified data will be moved or
merged. The number of destination channels depends on the number of move/merge
source channels specified. For example, if Input Channels 1 though 8 are specified as the
source, then the number of destination channels will be eight (8). Destination channels are
contiguous and only the first channel in the range can be specified. The number in parentheses on the right indicates the last channel of the move/merge destination.
You cannot move or merge from Input Channels to Output Channels. Also, even within
Output Channels, you cannot move or merge between Aux and Bus channels.
5
Use the cursor buttons to select the EXEC button, then press [ENTER].
The PARAMETERS window appears, which enables you to select the parameters to be
edited, and to perform the selected Job.
When you select a parameter, its button is highlighted. You can specify multiple parameters.
Double-clicking a non-highlighted parameter button will display a message confirming
that you wish to highlight all parameter buttons. Double-clicking a highlighted parameter
button will display a message that you wish to unhighlight all parameter buttons.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
188
Chapter 16—Automix
These buttons correspond to the following parameters:
Button
FADER
Channel Fader events (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Send masters,
Group master levels, and the Stereo Out)
ON
Channel Mute events, Group master ON
PAN
Input Channel pan events
SURR
Input Channel surround pan, LFE level, DIV parameter events, and RDIV parameter events
EQ
Channel EQ events
LIB
6
Events
CH
Channel library recall events
GATE
Gate library recall events
COMP
Comp library recall events
EQ
EQ library recall events
SCENE
Scene recall events
FX LIB
1–4
Effects library recall events of each internal effects processor
AUX
1–8
Level events of each Aux Send
ON
1–8
Mute events of each Aux Send
REMOTE
1
User Defined Remote Layer events
EFFECT
1–4
Parameter events for each internal effects processor
PLUG-IN
1–4
Parameter events for each Plug-In
Use the cursor buttons to select the EXEC button, then press [ENTER].
When the confirmation message appears, select YES to execute the Job.
BACK: Select this button to return to the previous page without executing the Job.
Event Edit Page
On the Event Edit page, you can edit, duplicate, delete, and insert new events.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [AUTOMIX] button to locate the Event Edit page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
Event list: Automix events are listed in chronological order. The type of events listed
depends on the Event select buttons. Use the cursor buttons to select event parameters.
While the cursor is on the SYNC, DUPLICATE, DELETE, SELECTED CH, or Event select
buttons, you can use the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to scroll the list. While
the cursor is inside the event list, you can use these controls to edit event parameters. The
triangular cursor at the left side of the list indicates the currently selected event. When an
event’s timecode value is edited, the list is resorted automatically.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Event Edit Page
189
SYNC button: This button is used to synchronize the list to the current timecode position. When pressed, events closest to the current timecode position are displayed. This
function can be used during Automix playback.
DUPLICATE button: This button is used to duplicate events. Use the Parameter wheel to
select an event, select the DUPLICATE button, and then press [ENTER]. A duplicate event
is inserted below the currently selected event. If there are no events in the list, you can use
this button to insert a new event of the type specified by the Event select buttons.
DELETE button: This button is used to delete events. Use the Parameter wheel to select
an event, select the DELETE button, and then press [ENTER].
SELECTED CH: When this option is on, only events of the currently selected channel are
displayed. All Scene recall and effects library recall events are displayed regardless of this
option. For paired channels, only events of the currently selected channel are displayed.
Event select buttons: These buttons are used to select the type of events to be displayed
in the event list.
Button
Events Listed
List Format
SCENE/LIB
Library and Scene recall events
TIME CODE, CH, SCENE/LIB
FADER
Channel faders (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters,
Aux Send masters, Group master levels, and the Stereo Out)
TIME CODE, CH, dB, SEC
ON
Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)
TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF
PAN
Pan
TIME CODE, CH, L-C-R
SURR-PAN
Surround pan
TIME CODE, CH, SURR
SURR-LFE
Surround LFE
TIME CODE, CH, dB
SURR-DIV
Surround DIV
TIME CODE, CH, DIV
SURR-RDIV
Surround RDIV
TIME CODE, CH, DIV
EQ-ON
EQ ON/OFF
TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF
EQ-FREQ
EQ Frequency
TIME CODE, CH, BAND/Hz
EQ-Q
EQ Q
TIME CODE, CH, BAND/Q
EQ-GAIN
EQ Gain
TIME CODE, CH, BAND/dB
AUX
Aux Send 1–8 levels
TIME CODE, CH, AUX, dB
AUX ON
Aux Send 1–8 mutes
TIME CODE, CH, AUX, ON/OFF
INSERT button: This button is used to insert new events. Use the Event select buttons to
select the type of event that you want to insert. Use the Captured timecode counter to specify the point at which you want to insert the new event. Select the INSERT button, and then
press [ENTER].
LOCATE button: This button is used to locate events at the Capture memory display
position.
Capture memory display: This displays the captured timecode position. The captured
timecode values can be edited by using the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons. Press
the [ENTER] button to reset the currently selected digits to “00.”
CAPTURE button: This button is used to capture the current timecode position. Up to
eight timecode values can be captured and stored in the eight Capture memories. Use the
cursor buttons to select the Capture memory number, and use the Parameter wheel or the
INC/DEC buttons to select the Capture memories. Capture memories can be selected even
while the CAPTURE, LOCATE, or INSERT button is selected.
If the Auto Inc TC capture preference is on (see page 233), Capture memories increment
automatically each time a timecode position is captured.
If the Link Capture & Locate Memory preference is on (see page 233), the eight Capture
memories are linked to the eight Locate memories so that, for example, edits made to Capture memory #1 are reflected on Locate memory #1, and vice versa.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
190
Chapter 17—MIDI
17 MIDI
MIDI & the 02R96
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The 02R96 supports the following MIDI messages:
Program Changes for recalling Scenes (see page 193)
Control Changes for real-time parameter control (see page 194)
System Exclusive Parameter Changes for real-time parameter control (see page 194)
MIDI Note On/Off for Freeze effect etc. (see page 275)
Bulk Dump for transmitting Scene, library, and setup data (see page 195)
MTC and MIDI Clock for Automix synchronization (see page 177)
MMC for external machine control (see page 222)
User Defined Plug-Ins transmit user-specified MIDI data when Parameter controls 1–4 are
operated (see page 158)
User Defined Remote Layer transmits user-specified MIDI data when the channel strip faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are operated (see page 219)
Predefined Remote Layers for controlling popular DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations),
including Pro Tools (see page 196)
MIDI I/O
•
•
•
•
The 02R96 features four types of interface for transmitting and receiving MIDI data:
Standard MIDI ports
TO HOST USB port
TO HOST SERIAL port
SLOT1 (for use with an optional mLAN I/O Card installed in Slot #1)
TO HOST SERIAL and TO HOST USB are multiport interfaces, with eight ports each.
When the 02R96 receives MIDI data via any of these interfaces, the MIDI indicator appears
on the display (see page 44).
If you are connecting a Windows computer to the TO HOST USB or TO HOST SERIAL
port, you must install and use the YAMAHA CBX Driver for Windows and the YAMAHA
USB Driver for Windows, which are included on the supplied CD-ROM.
If you plan to connect a Macintosh computer to the TO HOST USB port, you must install
and use the YAMAHA USB Driver for Macintosh, or the YAMAHA USB Driver for MacOS
X. If you are using MacOS 8.6–9.2.2, you must install OMS 2.3.3 in the Macintosh.
If you plan to connect a Macintosh computer running MacOS 8.6–9.2.2 to the TO HOST
SERIAL port on the 02R96, you must install OMS 2.3.3 in the Macintosh.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
MIDI Port Setup
191
MIDI Port Setup
MIDI ports are configured as follows.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the MIDI/TO HOST Setup
page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
TO HOST SERIAL: These buttons are used to configure the TO HOST SERIAL port for
use with either a Mac or PC.
Caution: When a PC is connected to the TO HOST SERIAL port, do not set this to Mac
because your PC may crash.
GENERAL: These parameters are used to select ports for general MIDI data transmission
and reception, including Program Changes for recalling Scenes, Control Changes for
real-time parameter control, and Note On/Off for use with the Freeze effect. Available ports
include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1.
MIDI THRU: These parameters allow you to route the incoming MIDI data from one port
through to another port. Available ports include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1.
REMOTE1: This parameter is used to select a port for the Remote Layer. Available ports
include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1. If Pro Tools is selected as the target for a
Remote Layer, “Pro Tools” is displayed here and no settings can be made.
Studio Manager: These parameters are used to select a port for use with the Studio
Manager software and to assign the 02R96 an ID from 1 to 8. Available ports include: MIDI,
SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1. See the Studio Manager documentation for more information.
DAW: These parameters are used to select ports for use with DAWs. Since four ports are
required to control DAWs, ports are selected in groups of four, as follows: 1–4, 2–5, 3–6,
4–7, 5–8. Available ports include: SERIAL, USB, and SLOT1.
PLUG-IN1–4: These parameters are used to select ports for use with the Plug-Ins. If a
Waves Plug-In card is installed in a Slot, the number of that Slot is displayed and no settings
can be made. If the Plug-In target is set to USER DEFINED, you can select a port from
MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, or SLOT1. Ports for User Defined Plug-Ins can also be set on
the Plug-In Setup page (see page 159).
Note: Some functions cannot share ports. If you try to assign a port that’s already assigned to
such a function, the message “Change Port?” appears. If you select YES, the port will be assigned
to the selected function and the previously assigned function will be set to “NO ASSIGN.”
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
192
Chapter 17—MIDI
MIDI Channel Setup
MIDI Channels for reception and transmission are specified as follows.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the MIDI Setup page.
2
Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the parameters, and use
the INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to set them.
Select MIDI channels for transmission and reception in the CHANNEL row, and turn the
transmission and reception of each MIDI message on or off using the buttons in the parameter rows from PROGRAM CHANGE to OTHER COMMANDS.
CHANNEL
This parameter row enables you to specify MIDI Channels for MIDI message transmission
and reception. The following parameters are available in this row:
Tx: This parameter box specifies a MIDI Transmit Channel.
Rx: This parameter box specifies a MIDI Receive Channel.
PROGRAM CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Program Changes.
Tx ON/OFF: Transmission of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled.
Rx ON/OFF: Reception of Program Change messages is enabled or disabled.
OMNI ON/OFF: When this button is turned on, Program Changes on all MIDI Channels
are received regardless of the CHANNEL row settings.
ECHO ON/OFF: This button determines whether Program Change messages received at
the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port.
CONTROL CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Control Changes.
Tx ON/OFF: Transmission of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled.
Rx ON/OFF: Reception of Control Change messages is enabled or disabled.
ECHO ON/OFF: This button determines whether Control Change messages received at
the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port.
PARAMETER CHANGE
This parameter row enables or disables transmission and reception of Parameter Changes.
Tx ON/OFF: Transmission of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled.
Rx ON/OFF: Reception of Parameter Change messages is enabled or disabled.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Assigning Scenes to Program Changes
193
ECHO ON/OFF: This button determines whether Parameter Change messages received
at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port.
BULK
This parameter row enables or disables reception of Bulk Dump data.
Rx ON/OFF: Reception of Bulk Dump data is enabled or disabled.
OTHER COMMANDS
ECHO ON/OFF: This button determines whether other MIDI messages received at the
MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port.
Fader Resolution
HIGH/LOW: This parameter specifies the resolution of the value output when you operate the 02R96’s faders. To transfer fader value data between two cascaded 02R96s, or to
record the 02R96 operation to or play it back from a sequencer, select the HIGH button.
When the LOW button is selected, the fader resolution switches to 256 steps.
Assigning Scenes to Program Changes
02R96 Scenes can be assigned to MIDI Program Changes for remote recall. When a Scene
is recalled on the 02R96, the assigned Program Change number is transmitted. If that Scene
is assigned to more than one Program Change, the lowest Program Change is transmitted.
Likewise, when a Program Change message is received, the assigned Scene is recalled. You
must set the MIDI Setup parameters in order to transmit and receive Program Change messages (see page 192).
Initially, Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1 through
99. Scene #0 is assigned to Program Changes #100. A Scene to Program Change assignment table, listing initial assignments and with space to note user assignments, is provided
on page 302. This table can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer,
by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 195).
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the Program Change
Assign Table page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the PGM CHG. column, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the Program Changes.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the SCENE No/TITLE column, and use the
Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select Scenes.
You can initialize the Scene to Program Change assignment table by selecting the INITIALIZE button, and then pressing [ENTER].
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
194
Chapter 17—MIDI
Assigning Parameters to Control Changes
02R96 parameters can be assigned to MIDI Control Changes for real-time control. When a
parameter is adjusted on the 02R96, the assigned Control Change message is transmitted.
Likewise, when a Control Change message is received, the assigned 02R96 parameter is set.
You must set the MIDI Setup parameters in order to transmit and receive Control Change
messages (see page 192).
A Parameter to Control Change assignment table, listing the initial assignments, is provided
on page 303. This table can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer,
by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 195).
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the Control Change Assign
Table page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the MODE TABLE button, and press [ENTER].
In TABLE mode, when 02R96 parameters are adjusted, MIDI Control Change messages are
transmitted in accordance with the assignments on this page. In NRPN mode, when 02R96
parameters are adjusted, predefined NRPNs (Non Registered Parameter Number) are
transmitted.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select the No. (CH) column, and use the Parameter
wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the Control Changes.
4
Use the cursor buttons to select the three PARAMETER columns, and use the
Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the parameters.
Parameters with more than 128 steps require two or more Control Change messages for
MIDI transmission and reception. Certain Delay parameters and the faders are divided into
L and H parameters. Delay Time parameters are divided into LOW, MID, and HIGH
parameters. For accurate transmission, all parameters (e.g., both L and H for faders) must
be assigned to individual Control Changes.
You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change assignment table by selecting the INITIALIZE button, and then pressing [ENTER].
Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes
02R96 parameters can be controlled in real time by using Parameter Change messages,
which are System Exclusive messages. When a parameter is adjusted on the 02R96, a Parameter Change message is transmitted. Likewise, when a Parameter Change message is
received, a 02R96 parameter is adjusted. See “MIDI Data Format” on page 319 for detailed
information. You must set the MIDI Setup parameters in order to transmit and receive
Parameter Change messages (see page 192).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Using Bulk Dump
195
Using Bulk Dump
02R96 data can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using
MIDI Bulk Dump.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the Bulk Dump page.
2
To transmit data, use the CATEGORY parameters to select the type of data
you want to transmit, select the TRANSMIT button, and then press [ENTER].
The INTERVAL parameter sets the interval between data packets during transmission.
The CATEGORY parameters can be set as follows:
ALL: All data.
SCENE MEM: ALL Scenes, individual Scenes, or current (i.e., the Edit buffer).
AUTOMIX: ALL Automixes, individual Automixes, or the current Automix.
LIBRARY: The following libraries: EQ, Gate, Comp, Channel, Effects, Bus to Stereo, Input
Patch, Output Patch, Surround Monitor. For each library you can specify ALL user memories, individual user memories, and for the Bus to Stereo, Input Patch, Output Patch, Surround Monitor libraries you can also specify the current settings.
BANK: User Defined Remote Layer banks (RMT UDEF), User Defined Plug-Ins banks
(PLUG UDEF), User Defined Keys banks (KEYS UDEF), or the USER ASSIGNABLE
LAYER banks (USR LAYER). For each item you can specify ALL or individual banks.
SETUP MEM: 02R96 setup data (i.e., system settings).
PGM TABLE: Scene to MIDI Program Change table. See “Assigning Scenes to Program
Changes” on page 193.
CTL TABLE: Parameter to MIDI Control Change table. See “Assigning Parameters to Control Changes” on page 194.
PLUG-IN: The settings of any installed Y56K cards. You can specify ALL Slots or Slot 3 or 4.
3
You can also transmit 02R96 data via a MIDI cable. To receive data, use the
CATEGORY parameters to select the type of data you want to receive, select
the REQUEST button, then press [ENTER].
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
196
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
18 Pro Tools Remote Layer
The 02R96 features a Remote Layer target especially designed for controlling Pro Tools.
If an optional MB02R96 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, Pro Tools channel levels are displayed on its meters.
Configuring Windows Computers
1
Connect your PC.
The 02R96 can be connected to your Windows PC by connecting the TO HOST SERIAL
port to a suitable RS232 serial port on your PC, or by connecting the TO HOST USB port
to a USB port on your PC. If you use the TO HOST SERIAL port, make sure that the TO
HOST SERIAL parameter on the MIDI/TO HOST Setup page is set to PC-2 (see page 191).
2
Install the necessary drivers.
Once your PC is connected, you’ll need to install the TO HOST SERIAL or TO HOST USB
drivers included on the 02R96 CD-ROM.
Configuring Macintosh Computers (MacOS 8.6 to 9.2.2)
1
Connect your Mac.
The 02R96 can be connected to your Mac by connecting the TO HOST SERIAL port to
either the Printer or Modem port on your Mac, or by connecting the TO HOST USB port
to a USB port on your Mac. If you use the TO HOST SERIAL port, make sure that the TO
HOST SERIAL parameter on the MIDI/TO HOST Setup page is set to Mac (see page 191).
2
Install OMS.
The 02R96 communicates with Pro Tools via OMS (Open Music System) software. If you
already have OMS installed on your Mac, there’s no need to install it again and you can
move on to the next section. If you don’t already have OMS installed, it’s included on the
02R96 CD-ROM. Refer to the OMS documentation included on the 02R96 CD-ROM for
more information on installing.
3
Install Yamaha USB MIDI driver 1.04 or later.
If you are using the TO HOST USB port, you must also install the Yamaha USB MIDI driver
included on the 02R96 CD-ROM. See the included documentation for more information.
Configuring Macintosh Computer (MacOS X)
1
Connect the 02R96 TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your Mac.
2
Install the Yamaha USB MIDI Driver for MacOS X on the computer.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Configuring the 02R96
197
Configuring the 02R96
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the MIDI/TO HOST Setup
page, and use the DAW parameter to specify the port to which Pro Tools is
connected.
See “MIDI Port Setup” on page 191 for more information.
2
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate the Remote page, and
set the target to Pro Tools.
See “Assigning a Target to the Remote Layer” on page 219 for more information.
3
Use the LAYER [REMOTE] button to select the Remote Layer.
When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, the 02R96’s control surface controls Pro
Tools, not the 02R96. In order to control the 02R96, you need to select an Input Channel
Layer or the Master Layer. Audio mixing on the other Layers and Automix continues while
the Pro Tools Layer is selected.
Configuring Pro Tools
Pro Tools needs to be configured as follows. For more information, see your Pro Tools documentation.
1
Launch Pro Tools.
2
If you are using MacOS 8.6 - 9.2.2, choose OMS Studio Setup from the Setups
menu, and configure OMS as necessary.
This screen shot shows the Yamaha USB MIDI driver with eight ports. An OMS-compatible
device profile for the 02R96 is included on the 02R96 CD-ROM. See the included documentation for more information.
3
Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
198
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
4
When the Peripherals window appears, click the MIDI Controllers button.
5
Select HUI as the Type of controller for #1–#3, and select MCS PANNER for
#4 to enable use of the Joystick.
6
Select the Receive From and Send To ports, and then click OK.
The 02R96 can emulate up to three typical 8-channel Pro Tools MIDI controllers. A single
MIDI port is required for every eight channels. So, you must configure MIDI Controller #1
to use channels 1 through 8, MIDI Controller #2 to use channels 9 through 16, and MIDI
Controller #3 to use channels 17 through 24.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer
199
Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer
This section explains the operation of the 02R96 control surface when the Pro Tools Remote
Layer is selected. 02R96 buttons and controls are referred to by the names printed on the
02R96 with the name of the corresponding Pro Tools function in parenthesis. For example,
“Press the AUX SELECT [AUX 1] (SEND A) button.”
Display
This is the Pro Tools Remote Layer page, the various sections of which are explained below.
•
•
•
F2 (INSERT), F3 (CHANNEL), F4 (METER) buttons
These buttons are used to select the following display modes:
[F2]—Insert Assign/Edit Display mode (see page 200)
[F3]—Channel Display mode (see page 200)
[F4]—Meter Display mode (see page 201)
TARGET
This parameter cannot be changed here. To change the target for this Layer, you must first
select another Layer, and then press the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button. See “Assigning a Target to the Remote Layer” on page 219 for more information.
COUNTER
This counter works in unison with the timecode counter
in Pro Tools. The display format is specified in Pro Tools.
The three check boxes indicate the currently selected format, as follows:
TIME CODE: Pro Tools timecode format set to “Time Code.”
FEET: Pro Tools timecode format set to “Feet:Frames.”
BEATS: Pro Tools timecode format set to “Bars:Beats.”
When the Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Minutes:Seconds” or “Samples,” no check
boxes are selected.
CURSOR MODE
The currently selected Cursor mode is displayed here: NAVIGATION, ZOOM, or SELECT. Cursor modes are selected by using the
[INC] (CURSOR MODE) button.
SELECT ASSIGN
This indicates the current function of the Encoders. For example,
Pan (PanR), SndA, SndB, SndC, SndD, or SndE.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
200
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT Display Mode
Press the [F2] button to select this mode.
ASSIGN: This indicator flashes when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1] (ASSIGN) button is
pressed. See “Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins” on page 212 for more information.
COMPARE: This indicator appears highlighted when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [2]
(COMPARE) button is pressed. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 213 for more information.
BYPASS: This indicator appears highlighted when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [3]
(BYPASS) button is pressed. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 213 and “Bypassing Plug-ins”
on page 214 for more information.
INSERT: This indicator appears highlighted when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [4]
(INSERT/ASSIGN) button is pressed. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 213 for more information.
INSERT/PARAM Display
This section displays mainly insert and plug-in-related information, although other messages are also displayed here.
Encoder Display
This section displays information about the Parameter controls 1–4. The SEL indicators
show the on/off status of the Parameter control push-switches. The rotary control indicators show the positions of the Parameter controls. The “O” symbol below each Parameter
control shows the automation status for each Parameter control.
Channel Display Mode
Press the [F3] button to select this display mode.
In this display mode, controls for the parameters currently assigned to the Encoders are displayed (e.g., pan or aux send). When displaying panpots, the small circles inside the
Encoder icons are highlighted when pan is at center. The name of each channel is displayed
below the Encoder icons. Automation mode settings, aux send destinations, and aux send
pre/post settings can also be displayed here. See “Viewing the Automation Mode” on
page 216, “Viewing Send Destinations” on page 210, and “Configuring Sends as Pre or
Post” on page 210 respectively for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer
201
Meter Display Mode
Press the [F4] button to select this display mode.
In this display mode, stereo meters for each channel are displayed. The name of each channel is displayed below the meters. Automation mode settings, aux send destinations, and
aux send pre/post settings can also be displayed here. See “Viewing the Automation Mode”
on page 216, “Viewing Send Destinations” on page 210, and “Configuring Sends as Pre or
Post” on page 210 respectively for more information.
Channel Strips
AUTO
SEL
02R96 channel strips correspond to Pro Tools channels from left to right, with the
leftmost Pro Tools channel being handled by 02R96 channel strip #1. You can
change the order of channel strips by dragging the channel select buttons in Pro
Tools, in which case the 02R96 automatically reorders its channel strips. By using
the USER DEFINED KEYS, Pro Tools channels can be scrolled in banks of 24 (see
page 206).
SOLO
ON
Encoders & Push-Switches
The Encoders are used to set pan and send levels. The Encoder push-switches are used to
reset send levels and panpots and to set sends to pre or post fader. Their exact operation
depends on the currently selected Encoder mode, as shown in the following table.
Encoder Mode
[PAN]
[SEND LEVEL]
Encoder
Push-switches
Pan (see page 209)
Reset pan (see page 214)
Send levels (see page 210)
Send pre/post (see page 210)
Reset send levels (see page 214)
[AUTO] buttons
These buttons are used in conjunction with USER DEFINED KEYS [3–8] to set the Automation mode of each channel. See “Setting the Automation Mode” on page 216 for more
information.
[SEL] buttons
These buttons are used to select channels (see page 209) and to select inserts (see page 213).
[SOLO] buttons
These buttons are used to solo channels. See “Soloing Channels” on page 210 for more
information.
[ON] buttons
These buttons are used to mute channels. See “Muting Channels” on page 209 for more
information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
202
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
Faders
The faders are used to set channel levels (see page 209), or to set send levels in Flip
mode (see page 211).
10
5
0
5
10
15
20
30
40
50
AUX SELECT Section
AUX SELECT
DISPLAY
AUX 1
(SEND A)
AUX 2
(SEND B)
AUX 3
(SEND C)
AUX 4
(SEND D)
AUX 5
(SEND E)
AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] buttons are used to select sends A–E. The button indicator
of the currently selected send lights up.
ENCODER MODE Section
ENCODER MODE
DISPLAY
PAN
AUX
PAN
SEND LEVEL
[PAN] (PAN) button
When this button is pressed, the Encoders work as channel panpots. Its indicator lights up
when it’s pressed. See “Panning Channels” on page 209 for more information.
[AUX] (SEND LEVEL) button
When this button is pressed, the Encoders work as send level controls. Its indicator lights
up when it’s pressed, and send A is selected automatically. If the Encoders are currently set
to control pan, its indicator lights automatically when one of the AUX SELECT
[AUX 1]–[AUX 5] (SEND A–E) buttons is pressed.
FADER MODE Section
FADER MODE
FADER
AUX
[FADER] & [AUX] buttons
These buttons are used to select Flip mode, in which faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons
can be used to control sends. See “Flip Mode” on page 211 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer
203
EFFECTS/PLUG-INS Section
EFFECTS / PLUG INS
( SCROLL)
DISPLAY
(SHOW
INSERT)
PLUG INS
(DEFAULT)
CHANNEL
INSERTS
1
2
3
4
(ASSIGN)
(COMPARE)
(BYPASS)
(INSERT/PARAM)
(SCROLL )
[DISPLAY] (SHOW INSERT) button
This button is used to open and close plug-in windows.
[PLUG-INS] (DEFAULT) button
This button is used in conjunction with other controls to reset faders, panpots, and sends
to their default values. See “Resetting Faders, Sends, & Panpots” on page 214 for more information.
[CHANNEL INSERTS]
This button determines the operation of the [SEL] buttons. When its indicator is off (Channel Select mode), [SEL] buttons select channels (see page 209). When its indicator is on
(Insert Select mode), they select inserts/plug-ins (see page 213).
[1] (ASSIGN) button
This button is used in conjunction with other controls to assign inserts/plug-ins to channels. See “Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins” on page 212 for more information.
[2] (COMPARE) button
This button is used to compare plug-in edits before and after. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page
213 for more information.
[3] (BYPASS) button
This button is used to bypass plug-ins. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 213 and “Bypassing
Plug-ins” on page 214 for more information.
[4] (INSERT/PARAM) button
This button is used in conjunction with other controls when editing plug-ins. See “Editing
Plug-ins” on page 213 for more information.
Parameter Up ( SCROLL) & Parameter Down (SCROLL ) buttons
These buttons are used to scroll parameters when assigning inserts and editing plug-ins. See
“Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins” on page 212 and “Editing Plug-ins” on page 213 for more
information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
204
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
SELECTED CHANNEL Section
■ ROUTING
ROUTING
DISPLAY
FOLLOW PAN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
STEREO
DIRECT
[1] button
Selects the previous track to be controlled by the Joystick.
[2] button
Selects the next track to be controlled by the Joystick.
[3] button
Functions the same as the [OPTION] key on a computer keyboard.
[4] button
Switches between L and R of the selected track. The [4] button indicator lights up when the
R channel is selected.
[5] button
Selects Main, or Send (in this order) for the selected track.
[6] button
Switches the mode of the knob controls for the panner. The [6] button indicator lights up
or turns off.
[7] button
Selects Send, or Main (in this order) for the selected track.
[8] button
Mutes or unmutes the selected track. The [8] button indicator lights up while the track is
muted.
[DIRECT] button
Functions the same as the [SHIFT] key on the computer keyboard.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer
205
■ DYNAMICS
DYNAMICS
DISPLAY
GATE ON COMP ON
GATE / COMP
GATE
THRESHOLD
RANGE
ATTACK
DECAY
HOLD
COMP
THRESHOLD
RATIO
ATTACK
RELEASE
GAIN
[THRESHOLD] control
If the ROUTING [6] button indicator is off, the [THRESHOLD] control adjusts the front
position. If the ROUTING [6] button indicator is lit, the control adjusts the front divergence.
[RANGE/RATIO] control
If the ROUTING [6] button indicator is off, the [RANGE/RATIO] control adjusts the rear
position. If the ROUTING [6] button indicator is lit, the control adjusts the rear divergence.
[ATTACK] control
If the ROUTING [6] button indicator is off, the [ATTACK] control adjusts the F/R
(front/rear) position. If the ROUTING [6] button indicator is lit, the control adjusts the F/R
(front/rear) divergence.
[DECAY/RELEASE] control
If the ROUTING [6] button indicator is off, the [DECAY/RELEASE] control adjusts the
LFE level. If the ROUTING [6] button indicator is lit, this control adjusts the center percentage.
[HOLD/GAIN] control
Adjusts the channel volume.
■ PAN/SURROUND
PAN / SURROUND
DISPLAY
L
R
L
R
ODD
EVEN
LINK
GRAB
EFFECT
[GRAB] button
Press this button, turning on the button indicator, then operate the Joystick to quickly set
the pan position.
Joystick
Operating the Joystick while the [GRAB] button indicator is turned on enables you to
quickly set the pan position.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
206
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
USER DEFINED KEYS Section
USER DEFINED KEYS
DISPLAY
(AUTO
STATUS)
1
2
3
(MIX/EDIT) (SUSPEND) (WRITE)
9
10
( BANK) (BANK )
4
5
6
7
8
(TOUCH)
(LATCH)
(READ)
(TRIM)
(OFF)
14
15
16
11
12
13
(FADER)
(MUTE)
(PAN)
(SEND) (SEND MUTE) (PLUG-IN)
[DISPLAY] (AUTO STATUS) button
This button is used to display the Automation mode settings of all channels. See “Viewing
the Automation Mode” on page 216 for more information.
[1] (MIX/EDIT)
This button is used to toggle between the Mix and Edit windows.
[2] (SUSPEND) button
This button is used to temporarily suspend all automation recording and playback. Its indicator flashes while automation is suspended.
[3] (WRITE), [4] (TOUCH), [5] (LATCH), [6] (READ), [7] (TRIM), [8] (OFF)
buttons
These buttons are used in conjunction with the channel strip [AUTO] buttons to set the
Automation mode of each channel strip. See “Setting the Automation Mode” on page 216
for more information.
[9] ( BANK) & [10] (BANK ) buttons
These buttons are used to swap channel banks 24 channels at a time.
[11] (FADER), [12] (MUTE), [13] (PAN), [14] (SEND), [15] (SEND MUTE),
[16] (PLUG-IN) buttons
These buttons are used to select parameters for automation recording and playback. See
“Arming Parameters for Automation” on page 217 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer
207
MACHINE CONTROL Section
MACHINE CONTROL
LOCATE MEMORY
DISPLAY
(MEM-LOC)
SET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REW
FF
STOP
PLAY
REC
[DISPLAY] (MEM-LOC) button
This button is used to open and close the Memory Locations window.
LOCATE MEMORY [1–8] buttons
These buttons perform the same transport-related functions as the 1–8 number keys on a
Macintosh keyboard. If you set the Numeric keypad Mode in Pro Tools to “Classic” (Setups
menu, Preferences), these buttons can be used to directly locate markers 1–8.
[REW] button
This button rewinds from the current cursor position (it’s non-latching).
[FF] button
This button fast forwards from the current cursor position (it’s non-latching).
[STOP] button
This button stops playback and recording.
[PLAY] button
This button starts playback from the current cursor position.
[REC] button
This button arms Pro Tools for recording ([REC] button indicator flashing), recording is
started by pressing the [PLAY] button ([REC] button indicator lit continuously).
The MACHINE CONTROL section enables you to control Pro Tools only while the DAW
CONTROL option is turned on either on the Locate Memory page (see page 224) or on the
Machine Configuration page (see page 222), regardless of which layer is currently selected.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
208
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
Data Entry Section
DEC
(ESC)
INC
(CURSOR MODE)
SHUTTLE
SCRUB
ENTER
Parameter Wheel
The Parameter wheel is used for shuttling and scrubbing (see page 215). It’s also used for
making fine adjustments to the selected region (see page 215).
[SHUTTLE] & [SCRUB] buttons
These buttons are used to select the Shuttle and Scrub modes. See “Scrub & Shuttle” on page
215 for more information. These buttons are mutually exclusive with the [QUICK
PUNCH] and [LOOP] buttons. Also, the cursor in the window on the computer monitor
disappears.
[ENTER] button
This button works the same as the Enter key on your computer keyboard. Pressing it opens
the New Memory Location dialog box. While a dialog box is open, pressing it performs the
same action as clicking the OK button.
[DEC] (ESC) button
For the most part, this button works the same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard.
While a dialog box is open, pressing it performs the same action as clicking the Cancel button.
[INC] (CURSOR MODE) button
This button is used to select the following cursor modes: Navigation (see page 214), Zoom
(see page 215), and Select (see page 215).
Cursor buttons
These buttons can be used to navigate the Edit window (see page 214), zoom waveforms
(see page 215), and to make fine adjustments to the selected region (see page 215). Their
exact operation depends on the currently selected cursor mode.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Selecting Channels
209
Selecting Channels
Channels can be selected as follows.
(Make sure the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button indicator is not lit
before proceeding.)
1
Use the [SEL] buttons to select channels.
The [SEL] button indicators of selected channels light up.
2
To select multiple channels in each eight-channel block (e.g., 1–8, 9–16, or
17–24), while holding down one [SEL] button, use the [SEL] buttons of the
other channels in the same block to add and remove channels.
Setting Channel Levels
Channel levels can be set as follows.
(Make sure the FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX] button indicators are not flashing
before proceeding.)
1
Use the faders to set channels levels.
Faders in a mix group are controlled together.
Muting Channels
Channels can be muted as follows.
1
Use the [ON] buttons to mute channels.
The [ON] button indicators of muted channels go out.
2
Press the [ON] buttons again to unmute channels.
The [ON] button indicators of unmuted channels are lit.
Grouped channels are muted together.
Panning Channels
Channels can be panned as follows.
1
Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button.
Its indicator lights up.
2
Use the Encoders to pan the channels.
Pan positions are displayed in Channel Display mode. See “Channel Display Mode” on page
200 for more information.
For stereo aux input channels (i.e., channels with two panpots), use the ENCODER MODE
[PAN] (PAN) button to toggle between the left and right panpots, and pan with the
Encoder. When the left panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button indicator is lit continuously and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “Pan.” When
the right panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button indicator flashes
and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “PanR.”
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
210
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
Soloing Channels
Channels can be soloed as follows.
1
Use the [SOLO] buttons to solo channels.
The [SOLO] button indicators of soloed channels light up and the [ON] button indicators
of unsoloed channels flash.
2
Press the [SOLO] buttons again to unsolo channels.
Grouped channels are soloed together.
Viewing Send Destinations
Send destinations can be viewed in Channel Display mode [F3] or Meter Display mode [F4]
(see page 200) by pressing the holding the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] (SEND A–E)
buttons.
Configuring Sends as Pre or Post
Sends can be configured as either pre or post as follows.
(Make sure the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button indicator is not lit before proceeding.)
1
Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the
sends.
The ENCODER MODE [AUX] (SEND LEVEL) button indicator lights up, as does the button indicator of the selected send.
2
Use the Encoder push-switches to toggle between pre and post.
Sends can also be set as pre or post fader by using the Encoder push-switches in Flip mode.
See “Flip Mode” on page 211 for more information.
Send pre/post status can be viewed in Channel Display mode [F3] or Meter Display mode
[F4] (see page 200) by pressing the holding the Encoder push-switches.
Setting Send Levels
Send levels can be set as follows.
1
Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the
sends.
The ENCODER MODE [AUX] (SEND LEVEL) button indicator lights up, as does the button indicator of the selected send.
The levels for the selected send are displayed in Channel Display mode. See “Channel Display Mode” on page 200 for more information.
2
Use the Encoders to set the send levels.
Send levels can also be set by using the faders in Flip mode. See “Flip Mode” on page 211 for
more information.
Muting Sends
Sends can be muted by using the [ON] buttons in Flip mode. See “Flip Mode” on page 211
for more information.
Panning Sends
Only sends assigned to stereo destinations can be panned. Sends can be panned by using the
Encoders in Flip mode. See “Flip Mode” on page 211 for more information.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Flip Mode
211
Flip Mode
In Flip mode, the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons can be used to control sends, as
shown in the following table.
Control
Normal mode
Flip mode
Fader
Channel level
Send level
Encoder
Channel pan/send level
Send pan
Encoder push-switches
Encoder mode is Pan, inactive
Encoder mode is Send level, Send pre/post
Send pre/post
[ON] button
Channel mute
Send mute
1
Press the FADER MODE [FADER] or [AUX] button.
The FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX] button indicators flash alternately, and both the
ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) and [AUX] (SEND LEVEL) button indicators light up.
The SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “FLIP.”
2
Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the
sends.
The button indicator of the selected send lights up.
3
Use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the currently selected
send.
For stereo aux input channels (i.e., channels with two send panpots), use the ENCODER
MODE [PAN] (PAN) button to toggle between the left and right panpots, and pan with the
Encoder. When the left panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button indicator is lit continuously. When the right panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN]
(PAN) button indicator flashes.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
212
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins
Inserts can be assigned to channels as follows. The Pro Tools transport must be stopped in
order to make these assignments.
1
Press the EFFECTS PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button.
Its indicator lights up and the [SEL] buttons are set to Insert Select mode.
2
Use the [SEL] buttons to select channels for insert assignment.
The name of the selected channel appears in the INSERT/PARAM section of the display.
The border of the corresponding channel name in the Pro Tools Mix window is highlighted
red.
3
Press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1] (ASSIGN) button.
Its indicator flashes, as does the ASSIGN indicator on the display.
4
Use Parameter controls 1–4 to select inserts/plug-ins.
The names of the inserts/plug-ins appear on the display in abbreviated form. When you
select an insert/plug-in other than the current, the corresponding SEL button flashes on the
display.
5
To confirm your selection, press the relevant Parameter control’s
push-switch.
The SEL button stops flashing.
While the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1] (ASSIGN) button indicator is still flashing, you can
assign more inserts/plug-ins to the same channel. To set insert #5, press the Parameter
Down (SCROLL >) button. Press the Parameter Up (< SCROLL) button to view inserts 1–4
again.
To assign inserts/plug-ins to other channels, use the [SEL] buttons to select them. You’ll
need to press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1] (ASSIGN) button each time you select another
channel.
You can cancel this function by pressing the [DEC] (ESC) button.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Editing Plug-ins
213
Editing Plug-ins
Plug-ins can be edited as follows.
1
Press the EFFECTS PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button.
Its indicator lights up and the [SEL] buttons are set to Insert Select mode.
2
Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel whose plug-in you want to edit.
That channel’s [SEL] button indicator lights up, and the border of the corresponding channel name in the Pro Tools Mix window is highlighted red. The names of the Plug-ins
inserted in the channel are displayed in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section of the display.
3
Use the Parameter control 1–4 push-switches to select the plug-in that you
want to edit.
Plug-in Edit mode is set and the plug-in’s parameters are displayed in the INSERT
ASSIGN/EDIT section of the display. The EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [4] (INSERT/PARAM)
button indicator lights up and the PARAM indicator on the display appears highlighted.
4
Use Parameter controls 1–4 and their push-switches to edit the displayed
parameters.
Parameters displayed on the top row can be edited by using the push-switches. Parameters
displayed on the bottom row can be edited by using the Parameter controls.
5
Use the Parameter Down (SCROLL >) button and Parameter Up (< SCROLL)
button to select the parameter pages.
When a parameter page is first selected, the number of the current parameter page and the
total number of parameter pages is displayed momentarily. For example, “1/2” indicates
that the first page of two is currently selected. While “3/4” indicates that the third page of
four is currently selected. The title of the plug-in is also displayed.
While editing a plug-in you can bypass it by pressing the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [3]
(BYPASS) button. In which case, the BYPASS indicator on the display appears highlighted.
As soon as you begin editing a plug-in, the COMPARE indicator on the display appears
highlighted. You can compare your edits with the original settings by pressing the
EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [2] (COMPARE) button. The COMPARE indicator on the display
appears highlighted while the original settings are active, and unhighlighted while your
edits are active.
6
To edit another plug-in, press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [4] (INSERT/PARAM)
button (its indicator goes out), use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel
(same as step #2), and use the Parameter control 1–4 push-switches to select
the plug-in (same as step #3).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
214
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
Bypassing Plug-ins
Plug-ins can be bypassed as follows.
(Make sure the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [4] (INSERT/PARAM) button indicator is not lit
before proceeding.)
1
Press the EFFECTS PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button.
Its indicator lights up and the [SEL] buttons are set to Insert Select mode.
2
Use the [SEL] buttons to select plug-ins.
3
While holding down the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [3] (BYPASS) button, use
Parameter control 1–4 push switches to bypass the plug-ins.
To bypass plug-in #5, press the Parameter Down (SCROLL >) button, and then perform
step 3. Press the Parameter Up (< SCROLL) button to view plug-ins 1–4 again.
The titles of bypassed plug-ins are displayed in uppercase characters. For example, the title
of the plug in “D-Verb” appears as “d-verb” when it’s not bypassed, and appears as
“D-VERB” when it is bypassed.
Resetting Faders, Sends, & Panpots
Faders, panpots, and sends can be reset to their default values as follows. For faders and send
controls, this is “0.” For panpots, it’s center.
Make sure that the EFFECTS PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button indicator is off
before proceeding with these shortcuts.
To do this...
Do this!
Reset a channel fader
EFFECTS PLUG-INS [PLUG-INS]+[SEL]
Reset a channel panpot
[PAN], EFFECTS PLUG-INS [PLUG-INS]+[ENCODER push]
Reset a channel send level
AUX SELECT [AUX 1]–[AUX 5], EFFECTS PLUG-INS
[PLUG-INS]+[ENCODER push]
While the EFFECTS PLUG-INS [PLUG-INS] (DEFAULT) button is being pressed, its indicator flashes and “DFLT” appears in the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display.
Grouped channels are reset together.
Navigating the Edit Window
The cursor buttons can be used to navigate the Edit window as follows.
1
Use the [INC] (CURSOR MODE) button to select Navigation cursor mode.
The CURSOR MODE section of the display shows “NAVIGATION.”
2
To move the edit cursor to the previous region boundary, or to the previous
marker, press the Left cursor button.
3
To move the edit cursor to the next region boundary, or to the next marker,
press the Right cursor button.
4
To select the track above, press the Up cursor button.
5
To select the track below, press the Down cursor button.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Zooming
215
Zooming
The cursor buttons can be used to zoom the Edit window as follows.
1
•
•
•
•
Use the [INC] (CURSOR MODE) button to select Zoom cursor mode.
The CURSOR MODE section of the display shows “ZOOM.”
In Zoom cursor mode, the cursor buttons work as follows:
Left cursor button: Zoom out horizontally.
Right cursor button: Zoom in horizontally.
Up cursor button: Zoom in vertically.
Down cursor button: Zoom out vertically.
Making Fine Adjustments to the Selected Region
The cursor buttons can be used in conjunction with the Parameter wheel to make fine
adjustments to the selected region.
1
Use the [INC] (CURSOR MODE) button to select Select cursor mode.
The CURSOR MODE section of the display shows “SELECT.”
2
While holding down the left cursor button, turn the Parameter wheel to
make fine adjustments to the in point of the selected region.
3
While holding down the right cursor button, turn the Parameter wheel to
make fine adjustments to the out point of the selected region.
4
To select the track above, press the Up cursor button.
5
To select the track below, press the Down cursor button.
6
To move the cursor to the in point of the selected region, double-click the
Left cursor button.
7
To move the cursor to the out point of the selected region, double-click the
Right cursor button.
Scrub & Shuttle
The Parameter wheel can be used to scrub and shuttle as follows.
1
Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped.
2
Press the [SCRUB] button if you want to scrub, press the [SHUTTLE] button
if you want to shuttle.
The corresponding button indicator lights up. The [REW] and [FF] button indicators also
light up, and the cursor mode is set to Navigation (the CURSOR MODE section of the display shows “NAVIGATION”).
3
Turn the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub/shuttle forwards. Turn it counterclockwise to scrub/shuttle backwards.
Scrub/shuttle starts at the in point of the selected region. If no region is selected, the edit
cursor position is used. Note that if the Edit Insertion Follows Scrub/Shuttle preference is
turned on in Pro Tools (Setups menu, Preferences command, Operation page), the currently selected region will be cancelled when the [SCRUB] or [SHUTTLE] button is
pressed.
Press the left cursor button to move to the in point. Press the right cursor button, to move
to the out point.
You can toggle between scrub and shuttle by pressing the [SCRUB] and [SHUTTLE] buttons, in which case scrub or shuttle continues from the current position.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
216
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
4
To stop scrub/shuttle, press the [SCRUB] or [SHUTTLE] button again, or press
the [STOP] button.
If you press the [REW], [FF], or [PLAY] button, scrub/shuttle operation is stopped before
rewind, fast forward, or playback commences.
While scrub/ shuttle is active, only the following Pro Tools/02R96 controls can be used:
[SCRUB] and [SHUTTLE] buttons, Parameter wheel, transport buttons, faders, [ON] buttons, and [SOLO] buttons. The current position can be stored as a marker by pressing the
[ENTER] button.
The scrub resolution depends on the current zoom setting, the more zoomed in you are, the
higher the resolution.
Automation
Viewing the Automation Mode
The Automation mode setting of each channel can be viewed as follows.
1
Press either the [F3] or [F4] button.
Channel Display mode or Meter Display mode is selected.
2
Press and hold a channel’s [AUTO] button.
The channel’s Automation mode is displayed while the [AUTO] button is pressed.
Pro Tools
Display
Auto write
Wrt
Auto touch
Tch
Auto latch
Ltch
Auto read
Read
Auto off
Off
[AUTO] Button Indicators
Flashing red (Record Ready)
Red (Recording)
Green
Off
For MIDI tracks, “—” appears on the display.
The Automation mode settings of all channels can be viewed as follows.
3
Press and hold the USER DEFINED [DISPLAY] (AUTO STATUS) button.
The Automation modes of all channels are displayed while the USER DEFINED [DISPLAY]
(AUTO STATUS) button is pressed.
Setting the Automation Mode
The Automation mode can be set as follows.
1
While holding down a channel’s [AUTO] button, press the USER DEFINED [3]
(WRITE), [4] (TOUCH), [5] (LATCH), [6] (READ), [7] (TRIM), or [8] (OFF) button.
If Channel Display mode or Meter Display mode is currently selected, the channel’s Automation mode is displayed while the [AUTO] button is pressed.
Grouped channels are set together.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Panner
217
Trim Mode
Trim mode can be set as follows.
1
While holding down a channel’s [AUTO] button, press the USER DEFINED
KEYS [7] (TRIM) button.
If channel Display mode [F3] or Meter Display mode [F4] is currently selected, the channel’s Automation mode is displayed while its [AUTO] button is pressed.
Pro Tools
Display
Auto trim/write
TWrt
Auto trim/touch
TTch
Auto trim/latch
TLch
Auto trim/read
TRd
[AUTO] Button Indicators
Flashing red/orange (Record Ready)
Orange (Recording)
Flashing green/orange
You can display the Automation mode settings of all channels by pressing and holding the
USER DEFINED KEYS [DISPLAY] (AUTO STATUS) button.
Grouped channels are set together.
Arming Parameters for Automation
Parameters can be selected for automation recording as follows.
1
Use the following USER DEFINED KEYS to arm parameters.
USER DEFINED KEYS
Pro Tools
[11] (FADER)
Volume
[12] (MUTE)
Mute
[13] (PAN)
Pan
[14] (SEND)
Send level
[15] (SEND MUTE)
Send mute
[16] (PLUG-IN)
Plug-in
The button indicators for armed parameters light up.
Panner
Selecting a Track
Use the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING buttons to manipulate the following track
operations.
To do this...
Use these buttons:
Selecting the previous track
ROUTING [1] button
Selecting the next track
ROUTING [2] button
Selecting the top track
ROUTING [3] + [1] buttons
Selecting the last track
ROUTING [3] + [2] buttons
Selecting the main output of the selected track
ROUTING [3] + [5] buttons
Selecting Send 5 of the selected track
ROUTING [3] + [7] buttons
Selecting the output/send of the selected track
ROUTING [5] + [7] buttons
Stereo Track Link
You can control the panner for the L and R channels of stereo tracks simultaneously or individually, depending on the stereo link status.
To cancel the stereo panner link, press and hold down the [Control] key on the keyboard
and move the Joystick.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
218
Chapter 18—Pro Tools Remote Layer
Panner Operation via the Joystick
1
Select the track you wish to pan.
2
Press the [GRAB] button, turning on the [GRAB] button indicator.
3
While the [GRAB] button indicator is lit, operate the Joystick.
If you move the Joystick for direct panning while the [GRAB] button indicator is lit, the pan
position is specified as an absolute value, which may cause the pan position to jump drastically.
You can also restrict the trajectory direction of the Joystick. To limit movement to the L and
R directions, press and hold down the [DIRECT] button and move the Joystick. To limit
movement to the up and down (front and rear) directions, select 3 Knob mode in the Pro
Tools Panner window.
Panner Operation via Knob Controls
You can control the following parameters using the DYNAMICS controls.
Controls
ROUTING [6] indicator is off
ROUTING [6] indicator is on
THRESHOLD
Front position
Front divergence
RANGE/RATIO
Rear position
Rear divergence
ATTACK
F/R position
F/R divergence
DECAY/RELEASE
LFE level
Center percentage
HOLD/GAIN
Channel volume
1
Select the track and output, if desired.
2
Press the ROUTING [6] button to select the knob control mode that is appropriate for the parameter you wish to control.
3
Use the appropriate control to adjust the parameter.
Pressing and holding down the [Command] key on the keyboard and rotating the controls
reduces the change in the parameter values.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Remote Control
219
19 Remote Control
About the Remote Layer
The 02R96’s Remote Layer allows you to control external MIDI equipment directly from
the 02R96. The type of device to be controlled (i.e., the target) can be specified for each
Remote Layer. There are six types of target: User Defined, Pro Tools, Nuendo, Cubase SX,
General DAW, and User Assignable Layer. User Defined targets allow you to specify the
MIDI data that will be transmitted when the 24 channel strip faders, Encoders, and [ON]
buttons are operated. These settings are stored in Scenes, for snapshot-style automation.
The Pro Tools, Nuendo, Cubase SX, and General DAW targets have been especially designed
to control Pro Tools, Nuendo, Cubase SX, and other DAW software that uses the Pro Tools
protocol.
The User Assignable Layer target enables you to combine 02R96 channels to create a custom
layer. See page 228 for more information on the User Assignable Layer.
Assigning a Target to the Remote Layer
Targets are assigned to the Remote Layer as follows.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate the Remote 1–4 pages.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the TARGET parameter, use the Parameter
wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a target, and then press [ENTER].
TARGET: This can be set to NO ASSIGN, USER DEFINED, Pro Tools, Nuendo, Cubase
SX, General DAW, or User Assignable Layer. See page 220 for more information on the User
Defined target. See page 196 for more information on the Pro Tools target. See page 228 for
more information on the User Assignable Layer.
To conrol Nuendo or Cubase SX remotely, make the following settings in addition to the
TARGET parameter.
3
Select the desired port for the DAW parameter on the MIDI/To Host Setup
page (see page 191).
4
Select an appropriate device in the Device menu of Nuendo or Cubase SX
and specify the 02R96 as a controller.
For more information on the necessary settings, refer to the Owner’s Manual that came
with Nuendo or Cubase SX.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
220
Chapter 19—Remote Control
Configuring the User Defined Remote Layer
The User Defined Remote Layer can be configured as follows.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate the Remote page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
TARGET: This is used to select the target (only the User Defined target is explained in this
section).
TRANSMIT: This enables and disables MIDI data transmission for the Remote Layer.
INITIALIZE: This initializes the settings of the currently selected bank.
BANK: These buttons are used to select banks 1, 2, 3, and 4. Each bank can contain MIDI
settings for the 24 faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons. Banks can be stored to an external
MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 195). See “User
Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings” on page 255 for a list of initial bank settings.
ID/SHORT/LONG: On the Remote Layer, channel strips 1–24 are identified by the fixed
IDs RM01–RM24. You can enter a Short and Long name for each Remote channel strip. To
enter a name, use the cursor buttons to select the SHORT or LONG name, use the [SEL]
buttons, Parameter wheel, or INC/DEC buttons to select the channel strips, and then press
[ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a name, and press OK when you’ve
finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 46 for more information.
ON: These parameters are used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be transmitted when an [ON] button is pressed. Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel strips,
and then edit as necessary. When a value from 00 to FF is specified, that value is transmitted
when an [ON] button is pressed. For the SW setting, data value 7F is transmitted when an
[ON] button is turned on, and data value 00 is transmitted when an [ON] button is turned
off. The END setting specifies the end of the data. “–” means no data is transmitted.
UNLATCH/LATCH: This parameter determines the operation of the [ON] buttons:
Latching or Non-latching. When set to UNLATCH, an ON value is transmitted when an
buttons is pressed, and an OFF value is transmitted when it’s released. When set to LATCH,
an ON value is transmitted when the button is pressed and that value is maintained when
the button is released. The next time you press that button, the OFF value is transmitted.
LEARN: This button is used to turn on and off the Learn function, which can be used to
learn what MIDI messages are being transmitted by external MIDI devices when their controls or parameters are adjusted. When on, received MIDI messages are displayed in the
DATA area. Only the first 16 bytes of data, starting with a Status bit, are displayed.
ENCODER: These parameters are used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be
transmitted when an Encoder is operated. Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel strips,
and then edit as necessary. When a value from 00 to FF is specified, that value is transmitted
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
About the Remote Layer
221
when an Encoder is adjusted. For the ENC setting, the Encoder’s current value from 0–127
is transmitted when it’s adjusted. The END setting specifies the end of the data. “–” means
no data is transmitted.
LEARN: This works the same as the [ON] button Learn function above, except the received
MIDI messages are displayed in the ENCODER DATA area. Only one Learn function can
be used at a time.
FADER: These parameters are used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be
transmitted when a fader is operated. Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel strips, and
then edit as necessary. When a value from 00 to FF is specified, that value is transmitted
when a fader is adjusted. For the FAD setting, a fader’s current value from 0–127 is transmitted when it’s adjusted. The END setting specifies the end of the data. “–” means no data
is transmitted.
LEARN: This works the same as the [ON] button Learn function above, except the received
MIDI messages are displayed in the FADER DATA area. Only one Learn function can be
used at a time.
Using the User Defined Remote Layer
Once configured, the User Defined Remote Layer can be used as follows.
1
Use the LAYER [REMOTE] button to select the User Defined Remote Layer.
While the User Defined Remote Layer is selected, operating the channel strip faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons causes the specified MIDI data to be transmitted.
When the User Defined Remote Layer is selected, the Remote page appears. Since this is the
same page as that selected by the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, the User Defined
Remote Layer can be configured here as well, even the target can be changed.
The settings of the channel strip faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons, and the current target
and bank setting for the Remote Layer are stored in Scenes. When a Scene is recalled, if the
Remote Layer’s target is the same as when the Scene was stored, the faders, Encoders, and
[ON] buttons are set accordingly and the corresponding MIDI data is transmitted (so long
as the TRANSMIT parameter is set to ENABLED). If the target is not the same, the faders,
Encoders, and [ON] buttons are set accordingly, but no MIDI data is transmitted.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
222
Chapter 19—Remote Control
About Machine Control
The 02R96 can control the transport and locate functions of up to eight external recording
machines that support MMC (MIDI Machine Control).
Machines that support MMC can be controlled by connecting them to the 02R96’s MIDI,
SERIAL, USB, or SLOT1 (with optional mLAN I/O Card installed in Slot #1).
MMC support varies from machine to machine. Some machines may not operate exactly
as explained in this section.
Configuring Machines
Up to eight machines can be configured as follows.
1
Use the MACHINE CONTROL [DISPLAY] button to locate the Machine Configuration page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
MACHINE CONTROL/DAW CONTROL: When the MACHINE CONTROL option is
on, the MACHINE CONTROL section controls external MMC machines, regardless of the
layer selection. When the DAW CONTROL option is on, the MACHINE CONTROL section controls DAWs, regardless of the layer selection.
TYPE: This is used to specify the type of machine: MMC or NONE.
PORT: When the machine TYPE is MMC, use this parameter to specify the port for MMC
communications. Available ports include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1.
DEVICE ID: When the machine TYPE is MMC, use this parameter to specify the device ID
from 1 to 127 or ALL. The target machine must be set to the same ID. The same ID cannot
be assigned to more than one SERIAL, USB, or SLOT1 port.
TRANSPORT CONTROL: This parameter determines which machine is controlled by
the 02R96’s transport buttons. Only one machine can be controlled at a time.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
About Machine Control
223
Transport Buttons
The 02R96’s transport can be used to control external machines. The machine that is to be
controlled can be selected on the Machine Configuration page (see page 222).
REW
FF
STOP
PLAY
REC
[REW] button
This button starts rewind on the external machines.
[FF] button
This button starts fast forward on the external machines.
[STOP] button
This button stops the external machines.
[PLAY] button
This button starts playback on the external machines. It’s also used to punch out of recording.
[REC] button
This button is used in conjunction with the [PLAY] button to start recording on the external
machines.
Using Shuttle & Scrub
The Parameter wheel can be used to shuttle and scrub the external machines.
SHUTTLE
SCRUB
When the [SHUTTLE] button indicator is lit, the Parameter wheel can be used to shuttle.
When the [SCRUB] button indicator is lit, the Parameter wheel can be used to scrub. Turn
the Parameter wheel clockwise to shuttle/scrub forwards. Turn it counterclockwise to shuttle/scrub backwards.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
224
Chapter 19—Remote Control
Using the Locator
MACHINE CONTROL
LOCATE MEMORY
DISPLAY
(MEM-LOC)
SET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LOCATE MEMORY [1–8] buttons
These buttons are used to set and to locate to the eight Locate memories. Locate memories
can be set on the Locate Memory page (see page 224). To set a locate memory on-the-fly,
while holding down the [SET] button, press a LOCATE MEMORY [1–8] button. The
02R96 must be receiving timecode in order to do this. Once set, the stored position can be
located by pressing the corresponding button. If the button is pressed while the machine is
stopped, the stored position is located. If the button is pressed while the machine is playing,
the stored position is located and then playback continues from that position.
[SET] button
This button is used in conjunction with the LOCATE MEMORY [1–8], [IN], [OUT], and
[RETURN TO ZERO] buttons to set the locate points.
Setting the Locate Memories
The locate points can be set as follows.
1
Use the MACHINE CONTROL [DISPLAY] button to locate the Locate Memory
page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.
MACHINE CONTROL/DAW CONTROL: When the MACHINE CONTROL option is
on, the MACHINE CONTROL section controls external MMC machines, regardless of the
layer selection. When the DAW CONTROL option is on, the MACHINE CONTROL section controls DAWs, regardless of the layer selection.
LOCATE MEMORY 1–8: These time values determine the points that will be located
when the LOCATe MEMORY [1–8] buttons are pressed. They can only be set while the
MACHINE CONTROL option is on. Locate points can be specified in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames, the frame range being dependent on the frame rate setting on the Time
Reference page (see page 177).
FRAMES: This parameter selects the timecode frame rate.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
GPI (General Purpose Interface)
225
GPI (General Purpose Interface)
The 02R96’s CONTROL port (25-pin D-sub connector) provides a
GPI (General Purpose Interface). You can configure the GPI so that it
will output 8-channel trigger signals when you operate the faders or
User Defined Keys, or receive 2-channel trigger signals to control
02R96 parameters.
You can assign any function to these trigger signals. In this way, for example, you can control a “RECORDING” warning light outside a studio from the 02R96, or you can control
the 02R96’s Talkback function or Dimmer function using an outside switch.
See page 300 for more information on pin assignment.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
1
2
3
This is an example of the external circuit that operates GPI.
In this example, a trigger signal causes the LEDs to light up
when the
button is selected as the trigger signal polarity
in the OUTPUT section. A trigger signal causes the LEDs to
turn off when the
button is selected as the trigger signal
polarity.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
GPO0
13
9
GPO1
1
21
GPO4
9
14
9
GPO5
3
21
GPI0
22
GPO2
GPO3
2
21
GPO6
16
9
15
GPO7
4
21
17
GPI1
5
10
6
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the GPI Setup page.
2
To assign functions to incoming trigger signals, use the cursor buttons to
select INPUT 1 or 2.
3
Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a parameter, then
press [ENTER].
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
226
Chapter 19—Remote Control
4
Select one of two buttons located to the right of trigger signal parameters
INPUT 1 & 2 to specify how the incoming trigger signals will be detected.
: When the switch is grounded (Low), the trigger signal is active and the selected parameter changes.
: When the GPI Input goes High (open), the trigger signal is active and the selected
parameter changes.
You can execute functions assigned to the MONITOR section buttons and User Defined
Keys, and turn channels on and off. See “GPI Trigger Source & Target List” on page 253 for
a complete list of assignable functions.
Note: “xxx UNLATCH” means that the assigned function is enabled only while the incoming
trigger signal is active. For example, if CH1 ON is selected, the channel on/off status changes
each time the trigger signal is detected. If CH1 ON UNLATCH is selected, Channel 1 turns
on only while the trigger signal is active.
Trigger =
Input signals from
the CONTROL connector
Executes the function.
Executes the function.
Trigger =
Input signals from
the CONTROL connector
Executes the function.
Executes the function.
At this point, when the 02R96 receives the trigger signal at the CONTROL connector, the
selected parameter changes.
Tip: Refer to the page 253 for a complete list of assignable parameters.
TALKBACK - SMALL: Functions the same as the MONITOR section buttons.
SR xxx: Functions the same as the SURROUND buttons in the MONITOR section.
CR xxx: Functions the same as the CONTROL ROOM buttons in the MONITOR section.
SM xxx: Functions the same as the STUDIO buttons in the MONITOR section.
xxx UNLATCH: The assigned function is enabled only while the incoming trigger signal
is active.
xxx ON: The corresponding channels turn on or off each time the incoming trigger signal
becomes active.
xxx ON UNLATCH: The corresponding channels turn on only while the incoming trigger signal is active.
UDEFxxx: Functions the same as the USER DEFINED KEYS.
5
To select parameters or controls as trigger signal sources, use the cursor buttons to select an output from OUTPUT 1–8, then select trigger signal parameters as you would for the INPUT section.
See “GPI Trigger Source & Target List” on page 253 for a complete list of assignable parameters.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
GPI (General Purpose Interface)
6
227
Use the buttons located to the right of the OUTPUT (1–8) parameters to
switch the polarity of the trigger signals that are output when you control
the trigger sources.
: The GPI Output goes High (open) when the trigger signal source is active.
: The GPI Output goes Low (ground) when the trigger signal source is active.
Trigger signal polarity =
Output signals from the
CONTROL connector
Trigger signal polarity =
Output signals from the
CONTROL connector
At this time, the trigger signal is output from the CONTROL connector when you operate
the assigned parameters or controls.
Tip: Refer to page 253 for a complete list of assignable parameters and controls.
xxx FADER ON: A trigger signal of 250 ms is transmitted when you raise a fader from –∞.
xxx FADER OFF: A trigger signal of 250 ms is transmitted when you lower a fader to –∞.
xxx FADER TALLY: The trigger signal becomes active when the fader is set to any level
other than –∞, and the trigger signal turns off when the fader is set to –∞.
UDEFxx LATCH: Pressing the corresponding button in the USER DEFINED KEYS section activates the trigger signal, and pressing the button again turns it off.
UDEF xx UNLATCH: A trigger signal of 250 ms is transmitted each time you press the
corresponding button in the USER DEFINED KEYS section.
REC LAMP: This source can be used to control a “RECORDING” warning light outside a
studio. The trigger signal is active while the [REC] button indicator is lit.
POWER ON: The trigger signal is active while the power to the 02R96 is on.
Important note: GPI outputs are open collector outputs. GPI inputs have an internal pull-up
to 5 V.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
228
Chapter 20—Other Functions
20 Other Functions
Using the User Assignable Layers
If you set the Remote layer target to “USER ASSIGNABLE,” you can create a custom layer
by combining any 02R96 channels (excluding the Stereo Out).
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate Remote page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the TARGET parameter, use the Parameter
wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select USER ASSIGNABLE LAYER, then press
[ENTER].
A confirmation message appears. Select the YES button and press [ENTER].
3
Use the cursor buttons to select parameter 1–24, use the Parameter wheel
or INC/DEC buttons to select a channel you want to assign, then press
[ENTER].
You can store up to four 24-channel setups in four banks by switching Banks 1–4 via the
BANK 1–4 buttons.
Pressing the [ENTER] button prior to selecting assigned channels enables you to select a
channel in the User CH Select window.
4
Select a Remote layer using the LAYER [REMOTE] button.
You can use the faders, Encoders, [ON] buttons, [AUTO] buttons, and [SOLO] buttons to
control assigned channels. If you connected an optional MB02R96 Meter Bridge, its meters
indicate the level of the channels currently-assigned to layer channels 1–24.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
229
Using the User Defined Keys
Using the User Defined Keys
Up to 16 functions from a list of over 170 can be
assigned to the USER DEFINED KEYS, and up to
eight assignment setups can be stored in banks A to
H. See page 238 for a list of initial bank assignments.
USER DEFINED KEYS
DISPLAY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
Use the USER DEFINED KEYS [DISPLAY] button to locate the User Defined
Key Assign page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the BANK buttons, A to H, and press [ENTER]
to select a bank.
The TITLE parameter box displays the name of the selected bank. Select the TITLE parameter box, then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit window appears, enabling you to enter a
name.
3
Use the cursor buttons to select from 1–16, then press [ENTER].
The following User Define Select window opens.
4
Move the cursor to the left column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press
the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the function you wish to assign.
5
Select options in the center and right columns in the same way.
The items displayed in the center and right columns vary depending on the function
assigned in Step 4.
6
Use the cursor buttons to select YES, then press [ENTER].
When the window closes, the specified function is assigned to the selected User Defined
button.
When you select a function that recalls a specific Scene or library memory, you need to specify the number of the memory that you want recalled when the USER DEFINED KEY is
pressed. To do this, in the left-hand box, select the number parameter next to the Assign
button, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to specify the number.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
230
Chapter 20—Other Functions
You can initialize the assignments of the currently selected bank by selecting the INITIALIZE button, and pressing [ENTER].
User Defined Keys banks can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer,
by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 195).
Setting Preferences
You can customize the operation of the 02R96 by using the preferences pages.
Preferences 1
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Preferences 1 page.
2
Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the preferences, and
use the INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to set them.
Auto ROUTING Display: When this preference is on, the Routing pages appear automatically when a button in the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING section is pressed (see
page 82).
Auto DYNAMICS Display: When this preference is on, the Gate Edit page appears automatically when a gate control in the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is operated (see page 74), and the Comp Edit page appears automatically when a Compressor
control in the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is operated (see page 116).
Auto PAN/SURROUND Display: When this preference is on and Input Channels have
been selected, the Pan pages appears automatically when a control in the SELECTED
CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND section is operated (see page 84). Similarly, when a Surround Pan mode other than Stereo is selected, the Input Channel Surround Edit page
appears automatically when the Joystick is operated (see page 88). Also, when Stereo is
selected, the Fader View page appears automatically when the Pan controls are operated.
Auto EQUALIZER Display: When this preference is on, the EQ Edit page appears automatically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER section is operated
(see page 113).
Auto SOLO Display: When this option is on, the Solo Setup page appears automatically
when an channel is soloed (see page 121).
Auto WORD CLOCK Display: When this preference is on, the Word Clock Select page
appears automatically if the currently selected external wordclock source fails (see page 56).
Auto Channel Select: When this preference is on, channels can be selected by moving
the corresponding fader or Encoder, or by turning on the corresponding [AUTO], [SOLO],
or [ON] button.
Store Confirmation: When this preference is on, the Title Edit window appears when
you store a Scene (page 164) or library memory (page 143).
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Setting Preferences
231
Recall Confirmation: When this preference is on, a confirmation message appears when
you recall a Scene (page 164) or library memory (page 143).
Patch Confirmation: When this preference is on, a confirmation message appears when
you edit the Input and Output Patches (see page 66).
Pair Confirmation: When this preference is on, a confirmation message appears when
you pair channels using the [SEL] buttons.
Nominal Pan: When this preference is on, left/odd and right/even signals will be at nominal level when Input Channel, or Bus to Stereo signals are panned hard left or hard right,
and at –3 dB when panned center. When this preference is off, signals panned hard left or
hard right will be at 3 dB, and at nominal level when panned center. In Surround mode, this
preference setting is used for the signal of any Surround Pan channel that is fully panned.
Fast Meter Fall Time: When this preference is on, the level meters fall quicker.
TC Drop Warning: When this preference is on, a warning message appears if a dropout
is detected in the incoming timecode.
DIO Warning: When this preference is on, a warning message appears if any errors are
detected in digital audio signals received by the Slot Inputs or 2TR Digital Inputs.
MIDI Warning: When this preference is on, a warning message appears if any errors are
detected in the incoming MIDI messages.
Initial Data Nominal: When this preference is on, Input Channel faders are set to nominal when Scene #0 is recalled.
Meter Follow Layer: When this preference is on, the optional MB02R96 Peak Meter
Bridge automatically follows the Layer selection on the 02R96.
Scene MEM Auto Update: When this preference is on, the Shadow Scene memories
can be used (see page 163).
Joystick Auto Grab: When this preference is on, the Joystick automatically kicks in as the
surround pan control when it’s moved to the current surround pan position (see page 88).
Cascade COMM Link: When this preference is on, various functions are linked between
cascaded 02R96s (see page 63). When this preference is off, only digital audio signals are
distributed among the cascaded 02R96s.
Solo Bus to Studio Out: When this preference is on and all STUDIO buttons ([CONTROL ROOM], [STEREO], [AUX 7], [AUX 8]) in the MONITOR section are turned off,
soloed Input Channel signals are output via the STUDIO MONITOR OUT.
Auto Direct Out On: When this preference is on and you change the channel Direct Out
destination from “–” to any other output, the channel Direct Out is automatically enabled.
If you change the channel Direct Out destination from an output to “–,” the channel Direct
Out is automatically disabled.
Routing ST Pair Link: When this preference is on, routing from paired channels to the
Stereo Bus is linked.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
232
Chapter 20—Other Functions
Preferences 2
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Preferences 2 page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the preferences, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them.
Channel ID: The corresponding Channel ID is indicated in the upper right corner of the
display.
Channel Short Name: The corresponding Channel Short Name is indicated in the
upper right corner of the display.
Port ID: The Port ID is indicated in the upper right corner of the display.
Port Short Name: The Port Short Name is indicated in the upper right corner of the display.
Channel Copy Parameter: These buttons allow you to choose which channel parameters are copied by the Channel Copy function: ALL parameters, or any combination of
FADER, ON, PAN, SURR, AUX, AUX ON, and EQ.
Fader Touch Sense: These parameters control the Touch Sense function. If the CONTROL button is turned on and the touch sensors are not triggered, fader operation is
ignored. During Automix recording, you can “cut-in” by touching a fader. When this button
is off, the 02R96 always recognizes fader movements. If the SELECT button is on, you can
select channels using the Touch Sense function.
The Sensitivity parameter adjusts touch sensitivity. If you’re having trouble selecting channels because the fader knobs are insufficiently sensitive, try increasing this value. If they are
too sensitive, try reducing it. It’s important that the 02R96 is grounded properly for Touch
Select to work correctly. See “Grounding screw” on page 42 for more information.
Display Brightness: This preference is used to set the brightness of the LED displays and
indicators.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Setting Preferences
233
Preferences 3
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Preferences 3 page.
2
Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the preferences, and
use the INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to set them.
Mix Update Confirmation: When this preference is on, a confirmation message asking
if you want to update the current Automix with the latest edits appears when Automix
recording is stopped.
Auto EQ Edit In: When this preference is on, EQ is automatically punched into Automix
recording when an EQ control is adjusted.
Copy Initial Fader: When this preference is on, when Fader events are copied or moved
on the Automix Event Copy page, the fader value at the specified IN point is copied to the
specified TO point. This eliminates fader position matching problems when no fader event
exists at the specified TO point.
Auto Inc TC Capture: When this preference is on, the Timecode Capture memory is
incremented automatically each time a timecode address is captured on the Automix Event
Edit page (see page 185).
Link Capture & Locate Memory: When this preference is on, the eight Capture memories on the Automix Event Edit page are linked to the eight Locate memories so that, for
example, edits made to Capture memory #1 are reflected on Locate memory #1, and vice
versa.
Clear Edit Channel after REC: When this preference is on, when using Auto Rec,
channels are automatically unarmed (i.e., [AUTO] buttons are turned off) when Automix
recording stops. When this preference is off, channels remain armed when recording stops.
Timecode Display Relative: When this preference is on, the indicated timecode is offset as specified by the OFFSET parameter on the Automix Main page.
Receive Full Frame Message: When this preference is on, MTC full frame messages
are recognized and Automix follows them.
Touch Sense Edit In All: When this preference is on, using the faders’ Touch Sense
function enables you to punch in and out all parameters for which the corresponding
OVERWRITE buttons are turned on. When this preference is off, you can punch in and out
only these faders selected in Fader mode.
Show Compact Size: Automix data, except that in the Undo buffer, is compressed while
recording. When this preference is on, the compressed size of the Automix is displayed on
the Automix Main and Memory pages. When this preference is off, the uncompressed size
is displayed.
Automix Store Undo: When this preference is on, Automix Store operations can be
undone by using the Undo function.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
234
Chapter 20—Other Functions
Drop Out Time: This parameter sets an interval (in frames) between the interruption of
incoming timecode and the stoppage of Automix recording or playback.
Lock Time: This parameter sets the interval (in frames) allowed until the Automix locks
to incoming timecode messages. If the sync operation is unstable, set this value higher.
Frame Jump Error: This parameter sets the time interval (in frames) required by the
02R96 to recognize an error after incoming timecode messages jump. If the actual interval
is shorter than the value specified by this parameter, the 02R96 continues the sync operation. If the frame jump causes the recording or playback to stop during the MTC and SMPT
sync operation, set the parameter value higher than the number of frames indicated in the
error message.
If you set the parameter to a higher value, adjust the Drop Out Time parameter value, if necessary.
Fader REC Accuracy: This parameter sets the accuracy of recording faders over time to
“Little,” “Some,” “More,” or “Most.” If you set the parameter to lower values, you will save
Automix memory space.
Insert Time Link: This parameter enables you to select the locate memory used for the
IN and OUT parameters in the Insert operation.
Using the Oscillator
The 02R96 features an oscillator that can be used for calibration or diagnostic purposes.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button to locate the Oscillator page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter
wheel, INC/DEC button, or [ENTER] button to set them.
OSCILLATOR ON: This turns the Oscillator on or off. While the LEVEL parameter is
selected, the [ENTER] button can be used to turn on and off the Oscillator.
Note: To prevent any sudden tone burst surprises in your monitors or headphones, you may
want to set the LEVEL parameter to minimum before turning on the oscillator.
LEVEL: This sets the Oscillator output level, which is displayed by the adjacent meter. This
parameter can be set by using the Parameter wheel regardless of which parameter is currently selected.
WAVEFORM: These buttons are used to select the waveforms: SINE 100Hz, SINE 1kHz,
SINE 10kHz, 1kHz/400Hz, PINK NOISE, or BURST NOISE, which is 200 msec pink noise
pulses at four second intervals. If you select 1 kHz/400 Hz, the Oscillator outputs a sine wave
at different frequencies to L, R, and odd/even buses.
ASSIGN: These buttons are used to assign the Oscillator output to Bus Outs, Aux Sends,
and the Stereo Out.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Operation Lock
235
Operation Lock
The 02R96 features the Operation Lock function, which avoids unintentional edits and uses
a password to restrict access to panel operation.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button to locate the Operation Lock
page.
2
Use the cursor buttons to select the PASSWORD button, then press [ENTER].
3
Use the [SEL] buttons to set the password.
Enter a four-letter password using the Channel 1–10 [SEL] buttons (Channel 10 [SEL] button enters “0”). (The factory default password is 1234.)
Enter the current password in the PASSWORD field, and a new password in the NEW
PASSWORD field. Enter the new password again in the REENTRY field.
4
Use the cursor buttons to select the OK button, then press [ENTER] to update
the password.
If you forget the password, you will be unable to cancel Operation Lock. Be sure to remember the password.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
236
Chapter 20—Other Functions
5
Use the buttons in the OPERATION LOCK SAFE section to select certain controls on the panel to exclude from Operation Lock.
Buttons
Controls excluded from Operation Lock
CHANNEL FADER
Channel faders (1–24, STEREO)
CHANNEL ENCODER
Channel Encoders (1–24)
CHANNEL ON
Channel [ON] buttons (1–24, STEREO)
CHANNEL SOLO
Channel [SOLO] buttons (1–24)
CHANNEL SEL
Channel [SEL] buttons (1–24, STEREO)
FADER MODE
All buttons in the FADER MODE section
ENCODER MODE
All buttons in the ENCODER MODE section
AUX SELECT
All buttons in the AUX SELECT section
SCENE MEMORY
All buttons in the SCENE MEMORY section (excluding the [STORE] button)
SELECTED CHANNEL
All controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section
LAYER
All buttons in the LAYER section
USER DEFINED KEYS
All buttons in the USER DEFINED KEYS section
EFFECTS/PLUGINS
All buttons in the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS section (including the Parameter controls 1–4)
MONITOR
All controls in the MONITOR section
MACHINE CONTROL1
All buttons in the MACHINE CONTROL section
1. The Parameter wheel is also excluded from Operation Lock when the [SHUTTLE] or [SCRUB] button is
on.
6
Use the cursor buttons to select the OPERATION LOCK button, then press
[ENTER].
The Password window appears.
7
Use the [SEL] buttons to enter the password you set in Step 4.
The Operation Lock function is activated.
To cancel Operation Lock, press [ENTER]. The Password window opens again. Enter the
same password again, and Operation Lock is cancelled.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Checking the Battery and the System Version
237
Checking the Battery and the System Version
The condition of the internal memory-backup battery can be checked as follows.
1
Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button to locate the Battery Check page.
If the Status is “Okay,” the battery is okay. If the Status is “Getting Low,” ask your Yamaha
dealer to replace the battery as soon as possible. Do not attempt to replace the battery yourself. Failure to replace a low battery may result in data loss.
Ver x.xx: This description identifies the system version number. Check the current system
version number against this description before you update the firmware. Visit the following
website to check the latest system version number:
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Initializing the 02R96
The 02R96 can be initialized as follows.
Warning: This procedure will clear all user memories and reset all settings to their initial values.
You may want to back up any important data beforehand via MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 195).
If you want to reset just the mix settings, recall scene memory #0 instead (see page 163).
1
Turn off the 02R96.
2
While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button, turn on the
02R96.
3
When the confirmation message appears, release the SCENE MEMORY
[STORE] button, select [INITIALIZE] button, and press [ENTER].
The following message is displayed while initialization is in progress: “Loading Factory Presets & Calibrating the Faders... Do Not Touch the Faders!”
It’s important that you do not touch the faders while this message is displayed, as the faders may not be calibrated correctly.
The display returns to normal when initialization is complete.
Initializing the Password
Follow the steps below to initialize the password for the Operation Lock function.
1
Turn off the power to the 02R96.
2
Hold down the SCENE MEMORY[STORE] button, and turn on the power to
the 02R96.
3
When a confirmation message appears, release the SCENE MEMORY
[STORE] button. Use the cursor buttons to select the PASSWORD button,
then press [ENTER].
The password is reset to “1234”.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
238
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
USER DEFINED KEYS
#
Function
Display
#
Function
Display
0
No ASSIGN
No Assign
47
Input Fader Group Enable E
IN Fader Group E
1
Scene MEM. Recall +1
Scene +1 Recall
48
Input Fader Group Enable F
IN Fader Group F
2
Scene MEM. Recall –1
Scene –1 Recall
49
Input Fader Group Enable G
IN Fader Group G
3
Scene MEM. Recall No. XX
Scene XX Recall
50
Input Fader Group Enable H
IN Fader Group H
4
Effect-1 Lib. Recall +1
Fx1 Lib+1 Recall
51
Input MUTE Group Enable I
IN Mute Group I
5
Effect-1 Lib. Recall –1
Fx1 Lib–1 Recall
52
Input MUTE Group Enable J
IN Mute Group J
6
Effect-1 Lib. Recall No.XX
Fx1 LibXXX RCL.
53
Input MUTE Group Enable K
IN Mute Group K
7
Effect-2 Lib. Recall +1
Fx2 Lib+1 Recall
54
Input MUTE Group Enable L
IN Mute Group L
8
Effect-2 Lib. Recall –1
Fx2 Lib–1 Recall
55
Input MUTE Group Enable M
IN Mute Group M
9
Effect-2 Lib. Recall No.XX
Fx2 LibXXX RCL.
56
Input MUTE Group Enable N
IN Mute Group N
10
Effect-3 Lib. Recall +1
Fx3 Lib+1 Recall
57
Input MUTE Group Enable O
IN Mute Group O
11
Effect-3 Lib. Recall –1
Fx3 Lib–1 Recall
58
Input MUTE Group Enable P
IN Mute Group P
12
Effect-3 Lib. Recall No.XX
Fx3 LibXXX RCL.
59
Output Fader Group Enable Q
OutFader Group Q
13
Effect-4 Lib. Recall +1
Fx4 Lib+1 Recall
60
Output Fader Group Enable R
OutFader Group R
14
Effect-4 Lib. Recall –1
Fx4 Lib–1 Recall
61
Output Fader Group Enable S
OutFader Group S
15
Effect-4 Lib. Recall No.XX
Fx4 LibXXX RCL.
62
Output Fader Group Enable T
OutFader Group T
16
Effect-1 Bypass On/Off
Fx1 Bypass
63
Output MUTE Group Enable U
Out Mute Group U
17
Effect-2 Bypass On/Off
Fx2 Bypass
64
Output MUTE Group Enable V
Out Mute Group V
18
Effect-3 Bypass On/Off
Fx3 Bypass
65
Output MUTE Group Enable W
Out Mute Group W
19
Effect-4 Bypass On/Off
Fx4 Bypass
66
Output MUTE Group Enable X
Out Mute Group X
20
Channel Lib. Recall +1
CH Lib+1 Recall
67
PEAK HOLD On/Off
Peak Hold
21
Channel Lib. Recall –1
CH Lib–1 Recall
68
OSCILLATOR On/Off
OSC. ON/OFF
22
Channel Lib. Recall No. XX
CH LibXXX Recall
69
SOLO Enable
SOLO ENABLE
23
GATE Lib. Recall +1
Gate Lib+1 RCL.
70
Input Patch Lib. Recall +1
IN Patch Lib+1
24
GATE Lib. Recall –1
Gate Lib–1 RCL.
71
Input Patch Lib. Recall –1
IN Patch Lib–1
25
GATE Lib. Recall No. XX
Gate LibXXX RCL.
72
Input Patch Lib. Recall No. XX
IN Patch LibXX
26
COMP Lib. Recall +1
Comp Lib+1 RCL.
73
Output Patch Lib. Recall +1
Out Patch Lib+1
27
COMP Lib. Recall –1
Comp Lib–1 RCL.
74
Output Patch Lib. Recall –1
Out Patch Lib–1
28
COMP Lib. Recall No. XX
Comp LibXXX RCL.
75
Output Patch Lib. Recall No. XX
Out Patch LibXX
29
EQ Lib. Recall +1
EQ Lib+1 Recall
76
Channel Name ID/Short
CH Name ID/Short
30
EQ Lib. Recall –1
EQ Lib–1 Recall
77
Port Name ID/Short
PortNameID/Short
31
EQ Lib. Recall No. XX
EQ LibXXX Recall
78
Automix REC
Automix REC
32
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute L On/Off Surr.Mon L Mute
79
Automix PLAY
Automix PLAY
33
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute R On/Off Surr.Mon R Mute
80
Automix STOP
Automix STOP
34
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Ls
On/Off
Surr.Mon Ls Mute
81
Automix ABORT
Automix ABORT
82
Automix AUTO REC
Automix AUTOREC
35
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Rs
On/Off
Surr.Mon Rs Mute
83
Automix ENABLE
Automix ENABLE
36
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute C On/Off Surr.Mon C Mute
84
Automix RETURN
Automix RETURN
85
Automix TAKEOVER
Automix TAKEOVER
86
Automix RELATIVE
Automix RELATIVE
87
Automix TOUCH SENSE
Automix T.SENSE
88
Overwrite FADER
Overwrite FADER
89
Overwrite ON
Overwrite ON
90
Overwrite PAN
Overwrite PAN
91
Overwrite SURROUND
Overwrite SURR.
92
Overwrite EQ
Overwrite EQ
93
Overwrite AUX
Overwrite AUX
94
Overwrite AUX ON
Overwrite AUX ON
95
Track Arming 1 ON/OFF
Track Arming 1
96
Track Arming 2 ON/OFF
Track Arming 2
97
Track Arming 3 ON/OFF
Track Arming 3
98
Track Arming 4 ON/OFF
Track Arming 4
99
Track Arming 5 ON/OFF
Track Arming 5
37
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute LFE
On/Off
Surr.Mon LFE Mute
38
SURR. MONI ASSIGN X SLOT1
ON/OFF
Surr.ASGNX SL1 ON
39
SURR. MONI ASSIGN X SLOT2
ON/OFF
Surr.ASGNX SL2 ON
SURR. MONI ASSIGN X SLOT3
ON/OFF
Surr.ASGNX SL3 ON
40
41
SURR. MONI ASSIGN X SLOT4
ON/OFF
42
SURR. MONI BASS MANAGE
ON/OFF
Bass Manage ON
43
Input Fader Group Enable A
IN Fader Group A
44
Input Fader Group Enable B
IN Fader Group B
45
Input Fader Group Enable C
IN Fader Group C
46
Input Fader Group Enable D
IN Fader Group D
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Surr.ASGNX SL4 ON
USER DEFINED KEYS
#
Function
Display
#
Function
239
Display
100 Track Arming 6 ON/OFF
Track Arming 6
157 User Assignable Layer BANK +1
USER LAYER BANK+1
101 Track Arming 7 ON/OFF
Track Arming 7
158 User Assignable Layer BANK –1
USER LAYER BANK–1
102 Track Arming 8 ON/OFF
Track Arming 8
159 User Assignable Layer BANK X
USER LAYER BANK X
103 Track Arming 9 ON/OFF
Track Arming 9
160 MIDI NOTE No.XX
MIDI NOTE XXX
104 Track Arming 10 ON/OFF
Track Arming 10
161 MIDI Program change No.XX
MIDI PGM XXX
105 Track Arming 11 ON/OFF
Track Arming 11
162 MIDI Control Change No.XX
MIDI CC XXX
106 Track Arming 12 ON/OFF
Track Arming 12
163 Track Arming All Clear
107 Track Arming 13 ON/OFF
Track Arming 13
108 Track Arming 14 ON/OFF
Track Arming 14
109 Track Arming 15 ON/OFF
Track Arming 15
110 Track Arming 16 ON/OFF
Track Arming 16
111 Track Arming 17 ON/OFF
Track Arming 17
112 Track Arming 18 ON/OFF
Track Arming 18
113 Track Arming 19 ON/OFF
Track Arming 19
114 Track Arming 20 ON/OFF
Track Arming 20
115 Track Arming 21 ON/OFF
Track Arming 21
116 Track Arming 22 ON/OFF
Track Arming 22
117 Track Arming 23 ON/OFF
Track Arming 23
118 Track Arming 24 ON/OFF
Track Arming 24
119 SURR Lib. Recall +1
Surr Lib+1 RCL
120 SURR Lib. Recall –1
Surr Lib–1 RCL
121 SURR Lib. Recall No.XX
Surr LibXX RCL
122 Channel Copy
Channel Copy
123 Channel Paste
Channel Paste
124 Display Back
Display Back
125 Display Forward
Display Forward
126
SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Bs
On/Off
SNAP TO SPL85
128 Bus to ST Lib. Recall +1
BUS To ST LIB+1
129 Bus to ST Lib. Recall –1
BUS To ST LIB–1
130 Bus to ST Lib. Recall No. XX
BUS To ST LIBXX
131 Input Fader Group Assign X
IN Fader Assign X
132 Input Mute Group Assign X
IN Mute Assign X
133 Input EQ Group Assign X
IN EQ Assign x
134 Input COMP Group Assign X
IN COMP Assign x
135 Output Fader Group Assign X
OutFader Assign X
136 Output Mute Group Assign X
Out Mute Assign X
137 Output EQ Group Assign X
Out EQ Assign x
138 Output COMP Group Assign X
Out COMP Assign x
139 Input Mute Group Master X
In Mute Master X
140 Output MUTE Group Master X
Out Mute Master X
141 Automix UPDATE TO END
Amx UPDATE TO END
142 AUX/SOLO LINK Mode On/Off
AUX/SOLO LINK
FADER/SOLO RELEASE Mode
On/Off
Studio Manager Window Control
Close
SM Ctrl Close
165
Studio Manager Window Control
Close All
SM Ctrl Close All
166
Studio Manager Window Control
Selected Channel
SM Ctrl Sel Ch
167
Studio Manager Window Control
Library
SM Ctrl Library
168
Studio Manager Window Control
Patch Editor
SM Ctrl Patch
169
Studio Manager Window Control
Surround Editor
SM Ctrl Surround
170
Studio Manager Window Control
Time Counter
SM Ctrl TimeCount
171
Studio Manager Window Control
Effect Editor
SM Ctrl Effect
Studio Manager Window Control
172
Meter
SM Ctrl Meter
173
Studio Manager Window Control
Layer
SM Ctrl Layer
174
Studio Manager Window Control
Master
SM Ctrl Master
Surr.Mon Bs Mute
127 SURR. MONI SNAP TO 85dB SPL
143
Track Arming CLR
164
FaderSoloRELEASE
144 Control Room Monitor MONO
C-R MONO
145 Talkback Assign SLOT1
Talkback SLOT1-XX
146 Talkback Assign SLOT2
Talkback SLOT2-XX
147 Talkback Assign SLOT3
Talkback SLOT3-XX
148 Talkback Assign SLOT4
Talkback SLOT4-XX
149 Talkback Assign OMNI OUT
Talkback OMNI-XX
Talkback Studio Monitor Out
150
On/Off
Talkback S.Moni
151 User Defined Keys BANK +1
UDEF KEYS BANK+1
152 User Defined Keys BANK –1
UDEF KEYS BANK–1
153 User Defined Keys BANK X
UDEF KEYS BANK X
154 Remote User Defined BANK +1
RMT UDEF BANK+1
155 Remote User Defined BANK –1
RMT UDEF BANK–1
156 Remote User Defined BANK X
RMT UDEF BANK X
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
240
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments
No.
Bank A
(Surround
Monitor)
Bank B
(Scene
Recall)
Bank C
(Group
Enable)
Bank D
(Automix)
Bank E
(Effect
Library)
Bank F
(Group
Assign)
Bank G
(Mute
Master)
Bank H
(Program
Change)
1
SNAP TO SPL Scene 1
85
Recall
IN Fader
Group A
Automix
ENABLE
Fx 1 Lib+1
Recall
IN Fader
Assign A
IN Mute
Master I
MIDI PGM 1
2
No Assign
Scene 2
Recall
IN Fader
Group B
Automix REC
Fx 2 Lib+1
Recall
IN Fader
Assign B
IN Mute
Master J
MIDI PGM 2
3
Surr Lib 0
Recall
Scene 3
Recall
IN Fader
Group C
Automix
ABORT
Fx 3 Lib+1
Recall
IN Fader
Assign C
IN Mute
Master K
MIDI PGM 3
4
Surr Lib–1
Recall
Scene 4
Recall
IN Fader
Group D
Automix
AUTOREC
Fx 4 Lib+1
Recall
IN Fader
Assign D
IN Mute
Master L
MIDI PGM 4
5
Surr Lib+1
Recall
Scene 5
Recall
IN Fader
Group E
Automix
RETURN
No Assign
IN Fader
Assign E
IN Mute
Master M
MIDI PGM 5
6
Surr Mon L
Mute
Scene 6
Recall
IN Fader
Group F
Automix RELNo Assign
ATIVE
IN Fader
Assign F
IN Mute
Master N
MIDI PGM 6
7
Surr Mon C
Mute
Scene 7
Recall
IN Fader
Group G
Automix
T.SENSE
No Assign
IN Fader
Assign G
IN Mute
Master O
MIDI PGM 7
8
Surr Mon R
Mute
Scene +1
Recall
IN Fader
Group H
Automix
TAKEOVER
No Assign
IN Fader
Assign H
IN Mute
Master P
MIDI PGM 8
9
Bass Manage ON
Scene 8
Recall
IN Mute
Group I
Overwrite
FADER
Fx 1 Lib-1
Recall
IN Mute
Assign I
OUT Mute
Master U
MIDI PGM 9
10
No Assign
Scene 9
Recall
IN Mute
Group J
Overwrite
ON
Fx 2 Lib-1
Recall
IN Mute
Assign J
OUT Mute
Master V
MIDI PGM
10
11
No Assign
Scene 10
Recall
IN Mute
Group K
Overwrite
PAN
Fx 3 Lib-1
Recall
IN Mute
Assign K
OUT Mute
Master W
MIDI PGM
11
12
No Assign
Scene 11
Recall
IN Mute
Group L
Overwrite
SURR.
Fx 4 Lib-1
Recall
IN Mute
Assign L
OUT Mute
Master X
MIDI PGM
12
13
Surr.Mon
LFEMute
Scene 12
Recall
IN Mute
Group M
Overwrite
AUX
No Assign
IN Mute
Assign M
No Assign
MIDI PGM
13
14
Surr.Mon Ls
Mute
Scene 13
Recall
IN Mute
Group N
Overwrite
AUX ON
No Assign
IN Mute
Assign N
No Assign
MIDI PGM
14
15
Surr.Mon Bs
Mute
Scene 14
Recall
IN Mute
Group O
Overwrite EQ No Assign
IN Mute
Assign O
No Assign
MIDI PGM
15
16
Surr.Mon Rs
Mute
Scene –1
Recall
IN Mute
Group P
Automix
STOP
IN Mute
Assign P
No Assign
MIDI PGM
16
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
No Assign
Input Patch Parameters
241
Input Patch Parameters
Input Channel Inputs
Port ID
Input Channel insert Ins
Description
Port ID
Internal Effects Processor Inputs
Description
Port ID
Description
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
AD1
AD IN 1
AD1
AD IN 1
AUX1
AUX1
AD2
AD IN 2
AD2
AD IN 2
AUX2
AUX2
AD3
AD IN 3
AD3
AD IN 3
AUX3
AUX3
AD4
AD IN 4
AD4
AD IN 4
AUX4
AUX4
AD5
AD IN 5
AD5
AD IN 5
AUX5
AUX5
AD6
AD IN 6
AD6
AD IN 6
AUX6
AUX6
AD7
AD IN 7
AD7
AD IN 7
AUX7
AUX7
AD8
AD IN 8
AD8
AD IN 8
AUX8
AUX8
AD9
AD IN 9
AD9
AD IN 9
INSCH1
InsertOut-CH1
AD10
AD IN 10
AD10
AD IN 10
INSCH2
InsertOut-CH2
AD11
AD IN 11
AD11
AD IN 11
INSCH3
InsertOut-CH3
AD12
AD IN 12
AD12
AD IN 12
INSCH4
InsertOut-CH4
AD13
AD IN 13
AD13
AD IN 13
INSCH5
InsertOut-CH5
AD14
AD IN 14
AD14
AD IN 14
INSCH6
InsertOut-CH6
AD15
AD IN 15
AD15
AD IN 15
INSCH7
InsertOut-CH7
AD16
AD IN 16
AD16
AD IN 16
INSCH8
InsertOut-CH8
AD17
AD IN 17
AD17
AD IN 17
INSCH9
InsertOut-CH9
AD18
AD IN 18
AD18
AD IN 18
INSCH10
InsertOut-CH10
AD19
AD IN 19
AD19
AD IN 19
INSCH11
InsertOut-CH11
AD20
AD IN 20
AD20
AD IN 20
INSCH12
InsertOut-CH12
AD21
AD IN 21
AD21
AD IN 21
INSCH13
InsertOut-CH13
AD22
AD IN 22
AD22
AD IN 22
INSCH14
InsertOut-CH14
AD23
AD IN 23
AD23
AD IN 23
INSCH15
InsertOut-CH15
AD24
AD IN 24
AD24
AD IN 24
INSCH16
InsertOut-CH16
S1-1
Slot1 CH1 IN
S1-1
Slot1 CH1 IN
INSCH17
InsertOut-CH17
S1-2
Slot1 CH2 IN
S1-2
Slot1 CH2 IN
INSCH18
InsertOut-CH18
S1-3
Slot1 CH3 IN
S1-3
Slot1 CH3 IN
INSCH19
InsertOut-CH19
S1-4
Slot1 CH4 IN
S1-4
Slot1 CH4 IN
INSCH20
InsertOut-CH20
S1-5
Slot1 CH5 IN
S1-5
Slot1 CH5 IN
INSCH21
InsertOut-CH21
S1-6
Slot1 CH6 IN
S1-6
Slot1 CH6 IN
INSCH22
InsertOut-CH22
S1-7
Slot1 CH7 IN
S1-7
Slot1 CH7 IN
INSCH23
InsertOut-CH23
S1-8
Slot1 CH8 IN
S1-8
Slot1 CH8 IN
INSCH24
InsertOut-CH24
S1-9
Slot1 CH9 IN
S1-9
Slot1 CH9 IN
INSCH25
InsertOut-CH25
S1-10
Slot1 CH10 IN
S1-10
Slot1 CH10 IN
INSCH26
InsertOut-CH26
S1-11
Slot1 CH11 IN
S1-11
Slot1 CH11 IN
INSCH27
InsertOut-CH27
S1-12
Slot1 CH12 IN
S1-12
Slot1 CH12 IN
INSCH28
InsertOut-CH28
S1-13
Slot1 CH13 IN
S1-13
Slot1 CH13 IN
INSCH29
InsertOut-CH29
S1-14
Slot1 CH14 IN
S1-14
Slot1 CH14 IN
INSCH30
InsertOut-CH30
S1-15
Slot1 CH15 IN
S1-15
Slot1 CH15 IN
INSCH31
InsertOut-CH31
S1-16
Slot1 CH16 IN
S1-16
Slot1 CH16 IN
INSCH32
InsertOut-CH32
S2-1
Slot2 CH1 IN
S2-1
Slot2 CH1 IN
INSCH33
InsertOut-CH33
S2-2
Slot2 CH2 IN
S2-2
Slot2 CH2 IN
INSCH34
InsertOut-CH34
S2-3
Slot2 CH3 IN
S2-3
Slot2 CH3 IN
INSCH35
InsertOut-CH35
S2-4
Slot2 CH4 IN
S2-4
Slot2 CH4 IN
INSCH36
InsertOut-CH36
S2-5
Slot2 CH5 IN
S2-5
Slot2 CH5 IN
INSCH37
InsertOut-CH37
S2-6
Slot2 CH6 IN
S2-6
Slot2 CH6 IN
INSCH38
InsertOut-CH38
S2-7
Slot2 CH7 IN
S2-7
Slot2 CH7 IN
INSCH39
InsertOut-CH39
S2-8
Slot2 CH8 IN
S2-8
Slot2 CH8 IN
INSCH40
InsertOut-CH40
S2-9
Slot2 CH9 IN
S2-9
Slot2 CH9 IN
INSCH41
InsertOut-CH41
S2-10
Slot2 CH10 IN
S2-10
Slot2 CH10 IN
INSCH42
InsertOut-CH42
S2-11
Slot2 CH11 IN
S2-11
Slot2 CH11 IN
INSCH43
InsertOut-CH43
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
242
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Input Channel Inputs
Port ID
Input Channel insert Ins
Description
Port ID
Description
Internal Effects Processor Inputs
Port ID
Description
S2-12
Slot2 CH12 IN
S2-12
Slot2 CH12 IN
INSCH44
InsertOut-CH44
S2-13
Slot2 CH13 IN
S2-13
Slot2 CH13 IN
INSCH45
InsertOut-CH45
S2-14
Slot2 CH14 IN
S2-14
Slot2 CH14 IN
INSCH46
InsertOut-CH46
S2-15
Slot2 CH15 IN
S2-15
Slot2 CH15 IN
INSCH47
InsertOut-CH47
S2-16
Slot2 CH16 IN
S2-16
Slot2 CH16 IN
INSCH48
InsertOut-CH48
S3-1
Slot3 CH1 IN
S3-1
Slot3 CH1 IN
INSCH49
InsertOut-CH49
S3-2
Slot3 CH2 IN
S3-2
Slot3 CH2 IN
INSCH50
InsertOut-CH50
S3-3
Slot3 CH3 IN
S3-3
Slot3 CH3 IN
INSCH51
InsertOut-CH51
S3-4
Slot3 CH4 IN
S3-4
Slot3 CH4 IN
INSCH52
InsertOut-CH52
S3-5
Slot3 CH5 IN
S3-5
Slot3 CH5 IN
INSCH53
InsertOut-CH53
S3-6
Slot3 CH6 IN
S3-6
Slot3 CH6 IN
INSCH54
InsertOut-CH54
S3-7
Slot3 CH7 IN
S3-7
Slot3 CH7 IN
INSCH55
InsertOut-CH55
S3-8
Slot3 CH8 IN
S3-8
Slot3 CH8 IN
INSCH56
InsertOut-CH56
S3-9
Slot3 CH9 IN
S3-9
Slot3 CH9 IN
INSBUS1
InsertOut-BUS1
S3-10
Slot3 CH10 IN
S3-10
Slot3 CH10 IN
INSBUS2
InsertOut-BUS2
S3-11
Slot3 CH11 IN
S3-11
Slot3 CH11 IN
INSBUS3
InsertOut-BUS3
S3-12
Slot3 CH12 IN
S3-12
Slot3 CH12 IN
INSBUS4
InsertOut-BUS4
S3-13
Slot3 CH13 IN
S3-13
Slot3 CH13 IN
INSBUS5
InsertOut-BUS5
S3-14
Slot3 CH14 IN
S3-14
Slot3 CH14 IN
INSBUS6
InsertOut-BUS6
S3-15
Slot3 CH15 IN
S3-15
Slot3 CH15 IN
INSBUS7
InsertOut-BUS7
S3-16
Slot3 CH16 IN
S3-16
Slot3 CH16 IN
INSBUS8
InsertOut-BUS8
S4-1
Slot4 CH1 IN
S4-1
Slot4 CH1 IN
INSAUX1
InsertOut-AUX1
S4-2
Slot4 CH2 IN
S4-2
Slot4 CH2 IN
INSAUX2
InsertOut-AUX2
S4-3
Slot4 CH3 IN
S4-3
Slot4 CH3 IN
INSAUX3
InsertOut-AUX3
S4-4
Slot4 CH4 IN
S4-4
Slot4 CH4 IN
INSAUX4
InsertOut-AUX4
S4-5
Slot4 CH5 IN
S4-5
Slot4 CH5 IN
INSAUX5
InsertOut-AUX5
S4-6
Slot4 CH6 IN
S4-6
Slot4 CH6 IN
INSAUX6
InsertOut-AUX6
S4-7
Slot4 CH7 IN
S4-7
Slot4 CH7 IN
INSAUX7
InsertOut-AUX7
S4-8
Slot4 CH8 IN
S4-8
Slot4 CH8 IN
INSAUX8
InsertOut-AUX8
S4-9
Slot4 CH9 IN
S4-9
Slot4 CH9 IN
INSSTL
InsertOut-STL
S4-10
Slot4 CH10 IN
S4-10
Slot4 CH10 IN
INSSTR
InsertOut-STR
S4-11
Slot4 CH11 IN
S4-11
Slot4 CH11 IN
FX1-1
Effect1 OUT 1
S4-12
Slot4 CH12 IN
S4-12
Slot4 CH12 IN
FX1-2
Effect1 OUT 2
S4-13
Slot4 CH13 IN
S4-13
Slot4 CH13 IN
FX2-1
Effect2 OUT 1
S4-14
Slot4 CH14 IN
S4-14
Slot4 CH14 IN
FX2-2
Effect2 OUT 2
S4-15
Slot4 CH15 IN
S4-15
Slot4 CH15 IN
FX3-1
Effect3 OUT 1
S4-16
Slot4 CH16 IN
S4-16
Slot4 CH16 IN
FX3-2
Effect3 OUT 2
FX1-1
Effect1 OUT 1
FX1-1
Effect1 OUT 1
FX4-1
Effect4 OUT 1
FX1-2
Effect1 OUT 2
FX1-2
Effect1 OUT 2
FX4-2
Effect4 OUT 2
FX1-3
Effect1 OUT 3
FX1-3
Effect1 OUT 3
FX1-4
Effect1 OUT 4
FX1-4
Effect1 OUT 4
FX1-5
Effect1 OUT 5
FX1-5
Effect1 OUT 5
FX1-6
Effect1 OUT 6
FX1-6
Effect1 OUT 6
FX1-7
Effect1 OUT 7
FX1-7
Effect1 OUT 7
FX1-8
Effect1 OUT 8
FX1-8
Effect1 OUT 8
FX2-1
Effect2 OUT 1
FX2-1
Effect2 OUT 1
FX2-2
Effect2 OUT 2
FX2-2
Effect2 OUT 2
FX3-1
Effect3 OUT 1
FX3-1
Effect3 OUT 1
FX3-2
Effect3 OUT 2
FX3-2
Effect3 OUT 2
FX4-1
Effect4 OUT 1
FX4-1
Effect4 OUT 1
FX4-2
Effect4 OUT 2
FX4-2
Effect4 OUT 2
2TD1L
2TR IN Dig.1 L
2TD1L
2TR IN Dig.1 L
2TD1R
2TR IN Dig.1 R
2TD1R
2TR IN Dig.1 R
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Input Patch Parameters
Input Channel Inputs
Port ID
Description
243
Input Channel insert Ins
Port ID
Description
2TD2L
2TR IN Dig.2 L
2TD2L
2TR IN Dig.2 L
2TD2R
2TR IN Dig.2 R
2TD2R
2TR IN Dig.2 R
2TD3L
2TR IN Dig.3 L
2TD3L
2TR IN Dig.3 L
2TD3R
2TR IN Dig.3 R
2TD3R
2TR IN Dig.3 R
2TA1L
2TR IN Analog1 L
2TA1L
2TR IN Analog1 L
2TA1R
2TR IN Analog1 R
2TA1R
2TR IN Analog1 R
2TA2L
2TR IN Analog2 L
2TA2L
2TR IN Analog2 L
2TA2R
2TR IN Analog2 R
2TA2R
2TR IN Analog2 R
BUS1
BUS1
BUS2
BUS2
BUS3
BUS3
BUS4
BUS4
BUS5
BUS5
BUS6
BUS6
BUS7
BUS7
BUS8
BUS8
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
AUX3
AUX3
AUX4
AUX4
AUX5
AUX5
AUX6
AUX6
AUX7
AUX7
AUX8
AUX8
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
244
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Initial Input Patch Settings
Input channel Inputs
#
Source
#
Effects Processors Inputs
Source
#
Source
1
AD01
29
S1-05
1-1
AUX1
2
AD02
30
S1-06
1-2
NONE
3
AD03
31
S1-07
1-3
NONE
4
AD04
32
S1-08
1-4
NONE
5
AD05
33
S2-01
1-5
NONE
6
AD06
34
S2-02
1-6
NONE
7
AD07
35
S2-03
1-7
NONE
8
AD08
36
S2-04
1-8
NONE
9
AD09
37
S2-05
2-1
AUX2
10
AD10
38
S2-06
2-2
NONE
11
AD11
39
S2-07
3-1
AUX3
12
AD12
40
S2-08
3-2
NONE
13
AD13
41
S3-01
4-1
AUX4
14
AD14
42
S3-02
4-2
NONE
15
AD15
43
S3-03
16
AD16
44
S3-04
17
AD17
45
S3-05
18
AD18
46
S3-06
19
AD19
47
S3-07
20
AD20
48
S3-08
21
AD21
49
S4-01
22
AD22
50
S4-02
23
AD23
51
S4-03
24
AD24
52
S4-04
25
S1-01
53
S4-05
26
S1-02
54
S4-06
27
S1-03
55
S4-07
28
S1-04
56
S4-08
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Output Patch Parameters
245
Output Patch Parameters
Output patch parameters are split into two tables. The first table contains parameters for
the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, and Output Channel Insert Ins. The second table, Direct
Outs and, 2TR Digital Outputs.
Output Patch Table 1
Slot Outputs
Source
Description
Omni Outs
Source
Description
Output Channel Insert Ins
Source
Description
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
BUS1
BUS1
BUS1
BUS1
AD1
AD IN 1
BUS2
BUS2
BUS2
BUS2
AD2
AD IN 2
BUS3
BUS3
BUS3
BUS3
AD3
AD IN 3
BUS4
BUS4
BUS4
BUS4
AD4
AD IN 4
BUS5
BUS5
BUS5
BUS5
AD5
AD IN 5
BUS6
BUS6
BUS6
BUS6
AD6
AD IN 6
BUS7
BUS7
BUS7
BUS7
AD7
AD IN 7
BUS8
BUS8
BUS8
BUS8
AD8
AD IN 8
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AD9
AD IN 9
AUX2
AUX2
AUX2
AUX2
AD10
AD IN 10
AUX3
AUX3
AUX3
AUX3
AD11
AD IN 11
AUX4
AUX4
AUX4
AUX4
AD12
AD IN 12
AUX5
AUX5
AUX5
AUX5
AD13
AD IN 13
AUX6
AUX6
AUX6
AUX6
AD14
AD IN 14
AUX7
AUX7
AUX7
AUX7
AD15
AD IN 15
AUX8
AUX8
AUX8
AUX8
AD16
AD IN 16
STEREO-L
STEREO L
STEREO-L
STEREO L
AD17
AD IN 17
STEREO-R
STEREO R
STEREO-R
STEREO R
AD18
AD IN 18
INSCH1
InsertOut-CH1
INSCH1
InsertOut-CH1
AD19
AD IN 19
INSCH2
InsertOut-CH2
INSCH2
InsertOut-CH2
AD20
AD IN 20
INSCH3
InsertOut-CH3
INSCH3
InsertOut-CH3
AD21
AD IN 21
INSCH4
InsertOut-CH4
INSCH4
InsertOut-CH4
AD22
AD IN 22
INSCH5
InsertOut-CH5
INSCH5
InsertOut-CH5
AD23
AD IN 23
INSCH6
InsertOut-CH6
INSCH6
InsertOut-CH6
AD24
AD IN 24
INSCH7
InsertOut-CH7
INSCH7
InsertOut-CH7
S1-1
Slot1 CH1 IN
INSCH8
InsertOut-CH8
INSCH8
InsertOut-CH8
S1-2
Slot1 CH2 IN
INSCH9
InsertOut-CH9
INSCH9
InsertOut-CH9
S1-3
Slot1 CH3 IN
INSCH10
InsertOut-CH10
INSCH10
InsertOut-CH10
S1-4
Slot1 CH4 IN
INSCH11
InsertOut-CH11
INSCH11
InsertOut-CH11
S1-5
Slot1 CH5 IN
INSCH12
InsertOut-CH12
INSCH12
InsertOut-CH12
S1-6
Slot1 CH6 IN
INSCH13
InsertOut-CH13
INSCH13
InsertOut-CH13
S1-7
Slot1 CH7 IN
INSCH14
InsertOut-CH14
INSCH14
InsertOut-CH14
S1-8
Slot1 CH8 IN
INSCH15
InsertOut-CH15
INSCH15
InsertOut-CH15
S1-9
Slot1 CH9 IN
INSCH16
InsertOut-CH16
INSCH16
InsertOut-CH16
S1-10
Slot1 CH10 IN
INSCH17
InsertOut-CH17
INSCH17
InsertOut-CH17
S1-11
Slot1 CH11 IN
INSCH18
InsertOut-CH18
INSCH18
InsertOut-CH18
S1-12
Slot1 CH12 IN
INSCH19
InsertOut-CH19
INSCH19
InsertOut-CH19
S1-13
Slot1 CH13 IN
INSCH20
InsertOut-CH20
INSCH20
InsertOut-CH20
S1-14
Slot1 CH14 IN
INSCH21
InsertOut-CH21
INSCH21
InsertOut-CH21
S1-15
Slot1 CH15 IN
INSCH22
InsertOut-CH22
INSCH22
InsertOut-CH22
S1-16
Slot1 CH16 IN
INSCH23
InsertOut-CH23
INSCH23
InsertOut-CH23
S2-1
Slot2 CH1 IN
INSCH24
InsertOut-CH24
INSCH24
InsertOut-CH24
S2-2
Slot2 CH2 IN
INSCH25
InsertOut-CH25
INSCH25
InsertOut-CH25
S2-3
Slot2 CH3 IN
INSCH26
InsertOut-CH26
INSCH26
InsertOut-CH26
S2-4
Slot2 CH4 IN
INSCH27
InsertOut-CH27
INSCH27
InsertOut-CH27
S2-5
Slot2 CH5 IN
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
246
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Slot Outputs
Source
Description
Omni Outs
Source
Description
Output Channel Insert Ins
Source
Description
INSCH28
InsertOut-CH28
INSCH28
InsertOut-CH28
S2-6
Slot2 CH6 IN
INSCH29
InsertOut-CH29
INSCH29
InsertOut-CH29
S2-7
Slot2 CH7 IN
INSCH30
InsertOut-CH30
INSCH30
InsertOut-CH30
S2-8
Slot2 CH8 IN
INSCH31
InsertOut-CH31
INSCH31
InsertOut-CH31
S2-9
Slot2 CH9 IN
INSCH32
InsertOut-CH32
INSCH32
InsertOut-CH32
S2-10
Slot2 CH10 IN
INSCH33
InsertOut-CH33
INSCH33
InsertOut-CH33
S2-11
Slot2 CH11 IN
INSCH34
InsertOut-CH34
INSCH34
InsertOut-CH34
S2-12
Slot2 CH12 IN
INSCH35
InsertOut-CH35
INSCH35
InsertOut-CH35
S2-13
Slot2 CH13 IN
INSCH36
InsertOut-CH36
INSCH36
InsertOut-CH36
S2-14
Slot2 CH14 IN
INSCH37
InsertOut-CH37
INSCH37
InsertOut-CH37
S2-15
Slot2 CH15 IN
INSCH38
InsertOut-CH38
INSCH38
InsertOut-CH38
S2-16
Slot2 CH16 IN
INSCH39
InsertOut-CH39
INSCH39
InsertOut-CH39
S3-1
Slot3 CH1 IN
INSCH40
InsertOut-CH40
INSCH40
InsertOut-CH40
S3-2
Slot3 CH2 IN
INSCH41
InsertOut-CH41
INSCH41
InsertOut-CH41
S3-3
Slot3 CH3 IN
INSCH42
InsertOut-CH42
INSCH42
InsertOut-CH42
S3-4
Slot3 CH4 IN
INSCH43
InsertOut-CH43
INSCH43
InsertOut-CH43
S3-5
Slot3 CH5 IN
INSCH44
InsertOut-CH44
INSCH44
InsertOut-CH44
S3-6
Slot3 CH6 IN
INSCH45
InsertOut-CH45
INSCH45
InsertOut-CH45
S3-7
Slot3 CH7 IN
INSCH46
InsertOut-CH46
INSCH46
InsertOut-CH46
S3-8
Slot3 CH8 IN
INSCH47
InsertOut-CH47
INSCH47
InsertOut-CH47
S3-9
Slot3 CH9 IN
INSCH48
InsertOut-CH48
INSCH48
InsertOut-CH48
S3-10
Slot3 CH10 IN
INSCH49
InsertOut-CH49
INSCH49
InsertOut-CH49
S3-11
Slot3 CH11 IN
INSCH50
InsertOut-CH50
INSCH50
InsertOut-CH50
S3-12
Slot3 CH12 IN
INSCH51
InsertOut-CH51
INSCH51
InsertOut-CH51
S3-13
Slot3 CH13 IN
INSCH52
InsertOut-CH52
INSCH52
InsertOut-CH52
S3-14
Slot3 CH14 IN
INSCH53
InsertOut-CH53
INSCH53
InsertOut-CH53
S3-15
Slot3 CH15 IN
INSCH54
InsertOut-CH54
INSCH54
InsertOut-CH54
S3-16
Slot3 CH16 IN
INSCH55
InsertOut-CH55
INSCH55
InsertOut-CH55
S4-1
Slot4 CH1 IN
INSCH56
InsertOut-CH56
INSCH56
InsertOut-CH56
S4-2
Slot4 CH2 IN
INSBUS1
InsertOut-BUS1
INSBUS1
InsertOut-BUS1
S4-3
Slot4 CH3 IN
INSBUS2
InsertOut-BUS2
INSBUS2
InsertOut-BUS2
S4-4
Slot4 CH4 IN
INSBUS3
InsertOut-BUS3
INSBUS3
InsertOut-BUS3
S4-5
Slot4 CH5 IN
INSBUS4
InsertOut-BUS4
INSBUS4
InsertOut-BUS4
S4-6
Slot4 CH6 IN
INSBUS5
InsertOut-BUS5
INSBUS5
InsertOut-BUS5
S4-7
Slot4 CH7 IN
INSBUS6
InsertOut-BUS6
INSBUS6
InsertOut-BUS6
S4-8
Slot4 CH8 IN
INSBUS7
InsertOut-BUS7
INSBUS7
InsertOut-BUS7
S4-9
Slot4 CH9 IN
INSBUS8
InsertOut-BUS8
INSBUS8
InsertOut-BUS8
S4-10
Slot4 CH10 IN
INSAUX1
InsertOut-AUX1
INSAUX1
InsertOut-AUX1
S4-11
Slot4 CH11 IN
INSAUX2
InsertOut-AUX2
INSAUX2
InsertOut-AUX2
S4-12
Slot4 CH12 IN
INSAUX3
InsertOut-AUX3
INSAUX3
InsertOut-AUX3
S4-13
Slot4 CH13 IN
INSAUX4
InsertOut-AUX4
INSAUX4
InsertOut-AUX4
S4-14
Slot4 CH14 IN
INSAUX5
InsertOut-AUX5
INSAUX5
InsertOut-AUX5
S4-15
Slot4 CH15 IN
INSAUX6
InsertOut-AUX6
INSAUX6
InsertOut-AUX6
S4-16
Slot4 CH16 IN
INSAUX7
InsertOut-AUX7
INSAUX7
InsertOut-AUX7
FX1-1
Effect1 OUT 1
INSAUX8
InsertOut-AUX8
INSAUX8
InsertOut-AUX8
FX1-2
Effect1 OUT 2
INSSTL
InsertOut-STL
INSSTL
InsertOut-STL
FX1-3
Effect1 OUT 3
INSSTR
InsertOut-STR
INSSTR
InsertOut-STR
FX1-4
Effect1 OUT 4
Surr L
Surround Monitor L
Surr L
Surround Monitor L
FX1-5
Effect1 OUT 5
Surr R
Surround Monitor R
Surr R
Surround Monitor R
FX1-6
Effect1 OUT 6
Surr Ls
Surround Monitor Ls
Surr Ls
Surround Monitor Ls
FX1-7
Effect1 OUT 7
Surr Rs
Surround Monitor Rs
Surr Rs
Surround Monitor Rs
FX1-8
Effect1 OUT 8
Surr C
Surround Monitor C
Surr C
Surround Monitor C
FX2-1
Effect2 OUT 1
Surr LFE
Surround Monitor LFE
Surr LFE
Surround Monitor LFE
FX2-2
Effect2 OUT 2
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Output Patch Parameters
Slot Outputs
Source
Description
Omni Outs
Source
Description
247
Output Channel Insert Ins
Source
Description
Surr Ls2
Surround Monitor Ls2
Surr Ls2
Surround Monitor Ls2
FX3-1
Effect3 OUT 1
Surr Rs2
Surround Monitor Rs2
Surr Rs2
Surround Monitor Rs2
FX3-2
Effect3 OUT 2
FX4-1
Effect4 OUT 1
FX4-2
Effect4 OUT 2
2TD1L
2TR IN Dig.1 L
2TD1R
2TR IN Dig.1 R
2TD2L
2TR IN Dig.2 L
2TD2R
2TR IN Dig.2 R
2TD3L
2TR IN Dig.3 L
2TD3R
2TR IN Dig.3 R
2TA1L
2TR IN Analog1 L
2TA1R
2TR IN Analog1 R
2TA2L
2TR IN Analog2 L
2TA2R
2TR IN Analog2 R
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
248
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Output Patch Table 2
Direct Outs
Direct Outs
2TR Digital Outs
Source
Description
NONE
NONE
NONE
NONE
S4-4
Slot4 CH4 OUT
INSCH34
InsertOut-CH34
S1-1
Slot1 CH1 OUT
BUS1
BUS1
S4-5
Slot4 CH5 OUT
INSCH35
InsertOut-CH35
S1-2
Slot1 CH2 OUT
BUS2
BUS2
S4-6
Slot4 CH6 OUT
INSCH36
InsertOut-CH36
S1-3
Slot1 CH3 OUT
BUS3
BUS3
S4-7
Slot4 CH7 OUT
INSCH37
InsertOut-CH37
S1-4
Slot1 CH4 OUT
BUS4
BUS4
S4-8
Slot4 CH8 OUT
INSCH38
InsertOut-CH38
S1-5
Slot1 CH5 OUT
BUS5
BUS5
S4-9
Slot4 CH9 OUT
INSCH39
InsertOut-CH39
S1-6
Slot1 CH6 OUT
BUS6
BUS6
S4-10
Slot4 CH10 OUT
INSCH40
InsertOut-CH40
S1-7
Slot1 CH7 OUT
BUS7
BUS7
S4-11
Slot4 CH11 OUT
INSCH41
InsertOut-CH41
S1-8
Slot1 CH8 OUT
BUS8
BUS8
S4-12
Slot4 CH12 OUT
INSCH42
InsertOut-CH42
S1-9
Slot1 CH9 OUT
AUX1
AUX1
S4-13
Slot4 CH13 OUT
INSCH43
InsertOut-CH43
S1-10
Slot1 CH10 OUT
AUX2
AUX2
S4-14
Slot4 CH14 OUT
INSCH44
InsertOut-CH44
S1-11
Slot1 CH11 OUT
AUX3
AUX3
S4-15
Slot4 CH15 OUT
INSCH45
InsertOut-CH45
S1-12
Slot1 CH12 OUT
AUX4
AUX4
S4-16
Slot4 CH16 OUT
INSCH46
InsertOut-CH46
S1-13
Slot1 CH13 OUT
AUX5
AUX5
OMNI1
OMNI OUT 1
INSCH47
InsertOut-CH47
S1-14
Slot1 CH14 OUT
AUX6
AUX6
OMNI2
OMNI OUT 2
INSCH48
InsertOut-CH48
S1-15
Slot1 CH15 OUT
AUX7
AUX7
OMNI3
OMNI OUT 3
INSCH49
InsertOut-CH49
S1-16
Slot1 CH16 OUT
AUX8
AUX8
OMNI4
OMNI OUT 4
INSCH50
InsertOut-CH50
S2-1
Slot2 CH1 OUT
STEREO-L
STEREO L
OMNI5
OMNI OUT 5
INSCH51
InsertOut-CH51
S2-2
Slot2 CH2 OUT
STEREO-R
STEREO R
OMNI6
OMNI OUT 6
INSCH52
InsertOut-CH52
S2-3
Slot2 CH3 OUT
INSCH1
InsertOut-CH1
OMNI7
OMNI OUT 7
INSCH53
InsertOut-CH53
S2-4
Slot2 CH4 OUT
INSCH2
InsertOut-CH2
OMNI8
OMNI OUT 8
INSCH54
InsertOut-CH54
S2-5
Slot2 CH5 OUT
INSCH3
InsertOut-CH3
2TD1L
2TR OUT Dig.1 L
INSCH55
InsertOut-CH55
S2-6
Slot2 CH6 OUT
INSCH4
InsertOut-CH4
2TD1R
2TR OUT Dig.1 R
INSCH56
InsertOut-CH56
S2-7
Slot2 CH7 OUT
INSCH5
InsertOut-CH5
2TD2L
2TR OUT Dig.2 L
INSBUS1
InsertOut-BUS1
S2-8
Slot2 CH8 OUT
INSCH6
InsertOut-CH6
2TD2R
2TR OUT Dig.2 R
INSBUS2
InsertOut-BUS2
S2-9
Slot2 CH9 OUT
INSCH7
InsertOut-CH7
2TD3L
2TR OUT Dig.3 L
INSBUS3
InsertOut-BUS3
S2-10
Slot2 CH10 OUT
INSCH8
InsertOut-CH8
2TD3R
2TR OUT Dig.3 R
INSBUS4
InsertOut-BUS4
S2-11
Slot2 CH11 OUT
INSCH9
InsertOut-CH9
INSBUS5
InsertOut-BUS5
S2-12
Slot2 CH12 OUT
INSCH10
InsertOut-CH10
INSBUS6
InsertOut-BUS6
S2-13
Slot2 CH13 OUT
INSCH11
InsertOut-CH11
INSBUS7
InsertOut-BUS7
S2-14
Slot2 CH14 OUT
INSCH12
InsertOut-CH12
INSBUS8
InsertOut-BUS8
S2-15
Slot2 CH15 OUT
INSCH13
InsertOut-CH13
INSAUX1
InsertOut-AUX1
S2-16
Slot2 CH16 OUT
INSCH14
InsertOut-CH14
INSAUX2
InsertOut-AUX2
S3-1
Slot3 CH1 OUT
INSCH15
InsertOut-CH15
INSAUX3
InsertOut-AUX3
S3-2
Slot3 CH2 OUT
INSCH16
InsertOut-CH16
INSAUX4
InsertOut-AUX4
S3-3
Slot3 CH3 OUT
INSCH17
InsertOut-CH17
INSAUX5
InsertOut-AUX5
S3-4
Slot3 CH4 OUT
INSCH18
InsertOut-CH18
INSAUX6
InsertOut-AUX6
S3-5
Slot3 CH5 OUT
INSCH19
InsertOut-CH19
INSAUX7
InsertOut-AUX7
S3-6
Slot3 CH6 OUT
INSCH20
InsertOut-CH20
INSAUX8
InsertOut-AUX8
S3-7
Slot3 CH7 OUT
INSCH21
InsertOut-CH21
INSSTL
InsertOut-STL
S3-8
Slot3 CH8 OUT
INSCH22
InsertOut-CH22
INSSTR
InsertOut-STR
S3-9
Slot3 CH9 OUT
INSCH23
InsertOut-CH23
CR-L
Control Room L
S3-10
Slot3 CH10 OUT
INSCH24
InsertOut-CH24
CR-R
Control Room R
S3-11
Slot3 CH11 OUT
INSCH25
InsertOut-CH25
S3-12
Slot3 CH12 OUT
INSCH26
InsertOut-CH26
S3-13
Slot3 CH13 OUT
INSCH27
InsertOut-CH27
S3-14
Slot3 CH14 OUT
INSCH28
InsertOut-CH28
S3-15
Slot3 CH15 OUT
INSCH29
InsertOut-CH29
S3-16
Slot3 CH16 OUT
INSCH30
InsertOut-CH30
S4-1
Slot4 CH1 OUT
INSCH31
InsertOut-CH31
S4-2
Slot4 CH2 OUT
INSCH32
InsertOut-CH32
S4-3
Slot4 CH3 OUT
INSCH33
InsertOut-CH33
Source
Description
Source
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Description
Source
Description
2TR Digital Outs
Initial Output Patch Settings
249
Initial Output Patch Settings
Slot Outputs
#
Omni Outs
Source
#
Source
#
Source
SLOT1-01
BUS1
SLOT3-01
BUS1
1
AUX1
SLOT1-02
BUS2
SLOT3-02
BUS2
2
AUX2
SLOT1-03
BUS3
SLOT3-03
BUS3
3
AUX3
SLOT1-04
BUS4
SLOT3-04
BUS4
4
AUX4
SLOT1-05
BUS5
SLOT3-05
BUS5
5
AUX5
SLOT1-06
BUS6
SLOT3-06
BUS6
6
AUX6
SLOT1-07
BUS7
SLOT3-07
BUS7
7
AUX7
SLOT1-08
BUS8
SLOT3-08
BUS8
8
AUX8
SLOT1-09
BUS1
SLOT3-09
BUS1
SLOT1-10
BUS2
SLOT3-10
BUS2
SLOT1-11
BUS3
SLOT3-11
BUS3
SLOT1-12
BUS4
SLOT3-12
BUS4
Direct Outs
#
Destination
#
Destination
SLOT1-13
BUS5
SLOT3-13
BUS5
1
SLOT1-14
BUS6
SLOT3-14
BUS6
2
SLOT1-02
30
SLOT4-06
SLOT1-15
BUS7
SLOT3-15
BUS7
3
SLOT1-03
31
SLOT4-07
SLOT1-16
BUS8
SLOT3-16
BUS8
4
SLOT1-04
32
SLOT4-08
SLOT2-01
BUS1
SLOT4-01
BUS1
5
SLOT1-05
33
NONE
BUS2
6
SLOT1-06
34
NONE
BUS3
7
SLOT1-07
35
NONE
BUS4
8
SLOT1-08
36
NONE
BUS5
9
SLOT2-01
37
NONE
SLOT2-02
38
NONE
SLOT2-02
SLOT2-03
SLOT2-04
SLOT2-05
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
SLOT4-02
SLOT4-03
SLOT4-04
SLOT4-05
SLOT1-01
29
SLOT4-05
SLOT2-06
BUS6
SLOT4-06
BUS6
10
SLOT2-07
BUS7
SLOT4-07
BUS7
11
SLOT2-03
39
NONE
SLOT2-08
BUS8
SLOT4-08
BUS8
12
SLOT2-04
40
NONE
SLOT2-09
BUS1
SLOT4-09
BUS1
13
SLOT2-05
41
NONE
BUS2
14
SLOT2-06
42
NONE
BUS3
15
SLOT2-07
43
NONE
BUS4
16
SLOT2-08
44
NONE
BUS5
17
SLOT3-01
45
NONE
SLOT3-02
46
NONE
SLOT2-10
SLOT2-11
SLOT2-12
SLOT2-13
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
SLOT4-10
SLOT4-11
SLOT4-12
SLOT4-13
SLOT2-14
BUS6
SLOT4-14
BUS6
18
SLOT2-15
BUS7
SLOT4-15
BUS7
19
SLOT3-03
47
NONE
SLOT2-16
BUS8
SLOT4-16
BUS8
20
SLOT3-04
48
NONE
21
SLOT3-05
49
NONE
22
SLOT3-06
50
NONE
23
SLOT3-07
51
NONE
24
SLOT3-08
52
NONE
25
SLOT4-01
53
NONE
26
SLOT4-02
54
NONE
27
SLOT4-03
55
NONE
28
SLOT4-04
56
NONE
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
250
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Initial Input Channel Names
Input
Channel ID
CH01
CH02
CH03
CH04
CH05
CH06
CH07
CH08
CH09
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH17
CH18
CH19
CH20
CH21
CH22
CH23
CH24
CH25
CH26
CH27
CH28
CH29
CH30
CH31
CH32
CH33
CH34
CH35
CH36
CH37
CH38
CH39
CH40
CH41
CH42
CH43
CH44
CH45
CH46
CH47
CH48
CH49
CH50
CH51
CH52
CH53
CH54
CH55
CH56
Short Name
CH01
CH02
CH03
CH04
CH05
CH06
CH07
CH08
CH09
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH17
CH18
CH19
CH20
CH21
CH22
CH23
CH24
CH25
CH26
CH27
CH28
CH29
CH30
CH31
CH32
CH33
CH34
CH35
CH36
CH37
CH38
CH39
CH40
CH41
CH42
CH43
CH44
CH45
CH46
CH47
CH48
CH49
CH50
CH51
CH52
CH53
CH54
CH55
CH56
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Long Name
CH01
CH02
CH03
CH04
CH05
CH06
CH07
CH08
CH09
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
CH17
CH18
CH19
CH20
CH21
CH22
CH23
CH24
CH25
CH26
CH27
CH28
CH29
CH30
CH31
CH32
CH33
CH34
CH35
CH36
CH37
CH38
CH39
CH40
CH41
CH42
CH43
CH44
CH45
CH46
CH47
CH48
CH49
CH50
CH51
CH52
CH53
CH54
CH55
CH56
Initial Output Channel Names
Output
Channel ID
Short Name
Long Name
BUS1
BUS1
BUS1
BUS2
BUS2
BUS2
BUS3
BUS3
BUS3
BUS4
BUS4
BUS4
BUS5
BUS5
BUS5
BUS6
BUS6
BUS6
BUS7
BUS7
BUS7
BUS8
BUS8
BUS8
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX2
AUX2
AUX2
AUX3
AUX3
AUX3
AUX4
AUX4
AUX4
AUX5
AUX5
AUX5
AUX6
AUX6
AUX6
AUX7
AUX7
AUX7
AUX8
AUX8
AUX8
ST
ST
STEREO
Initial Input Port Names
251
Initial Input Port Names
Port
PORT ID
Short
Name
Long Name
Port
PORT ID
Short
Name
Long Name
AD1
AD01
AD01
AD IN 1
SLOT2-13
S213
S213
Slot2 CH13 IN
AD2
AD02
AD02
AD IN 2
SLOT2-14
S214
S214
Slot2 CH14 IN
AD3
AD03
AD03
AD IN 3
SLOT2-15
S215
S215
Slot2 CH15 IN
AD4
AD04
AD04
AD IN 4
SLOT2-16
S216
S216
Slot2 CH16 IN
AD5
AD05
AD05
AD IN 5
SLOT3-01
S3-1
S3-1
Slot3 CH1 IN
AD6
AD06
AD06
AD IN 6
SLOT3-02
S3-2
S3-2
Slot3 CH2 IN
AD7
AD07
AD07
AD IN 7
SLOT3-03
S3-3
S3-3
Slot3 CH3 IN
AD8
AD08
AD08
AD IN 8
SLOT3-04
S3-4
S3-4
Slot3 CH4 IN
AD9
AD09
AD09
AD IN 9
SLOT3-05
S3-5
S3-5
Slot3 CH5 IN
AD10
AD10
AD10
AD IN 10
SLOT3-06
S3-6
S3-6
Slot3 CH6 IN
AD11
AD11
AD11
AD IN 11
SLOT3-07
S3-7
S3-7
Slot3 CH7 IN
AD12
AD12
AD12
AD IN 12
SLOT3-08
S3-8
S3-8
Slot3 CH8 IN
AD13
AD13
AD13
AD IN 13
SLOT3-09
S3-9
S3-9
Slot3 CH9 IN
AD14
AD14
AD14
AD IN 14
SLOT3-10
S310
S310
Slot3 CH10 IN
AD15
AD15
AD15
AD IN 15
SLOT3-11
S311
S311
Slot3 CH11 IN
AD16
AD16
AD16
AD IN 16
SLOT3-12
S312
S312
Slot3 CH12 IN
AD17
AD17
AD17
AD IN 17
SLOT3-13
S313
S313
Slot3 CH13 IN
AD18
AD18
AD18
AD IN 18
SLOT3-14
S314
S314
Slot3 CH14 IN
AD19
AD19
AD19
AD IN 19
SLOT3-15
S315
S315
Slot3 CH15 IN
AD20
AD20
AD20
AD IN 20
SLOT3-16
S316
S316
Slot3 CH16 IN
AD21
AD21
AD21
AD IN 21
SLOT4-01
S4-1
S4-1
Slot4 CH1 IN
AD22
AD22
AD22
AD IN 22
SLOT4-02
S4-2
S4-2
Slot4 CH2 IN
AD23
AD23
AD23
AD IN 23
SLOT4-03
S4-3
S4-3
Slot4 CH3 IN
AD24
AD24
AD24
AD IN 24
SLOT4-04
S4-4
S4-4
Slot4 CH4 IN
SLOT1-01
S1-1
S1-1
Slot1 CH1 IN
SLOT4-05
S4-5
S4-5
Slot4 CH5 IN
SLOT1-02
S1-2
S1-2
Slot1 CH2 IN
SLOT4-06
S4-6
S4-6
Slot4 CH6 IN
SLOT1-03
S1-3
S1-3
Slot1 CH3 IN
SLOT4-07
S4-7
S4-7
Slot4 CH7 IN
SLOT1-04
S1-4
S1-4
Slot1 CH4 IN
SLOT4-08
S4-8
S4-8
Slot4 CH8 IN
SLOT1-05
S1-5
S1-5
Slot1 CH5 IN
SLOT4-09
S4-9
S4-9
Slot4 CH9 IN
SLOT1-06
S1-6
S1-6
Slot1 CH6 IN
SLOT4-10
S410
S410
Slot4 CH10 IN
SLOT1-07
S1-7
S1-7
Slot1 CH7 IN
SLOT4-11
S411
S411
Slot4 CH11 IN
SLOT1-08
S1-8
S1-8
Slot1 CH8 IN
SLOT4-12
S412
S412
Slot4 CH12 IN
SLOT1-09
S1-9
S1-9
Slot1 CH9 IN
SLOT4-13
S413
S413
Slot4 CH13 IN
SLOT1-10
S110
S110
Slot1 CH10 IN
SLOT4-14
S414
S414
Slot4 CH14 IN
SLOT1-11
S111
S111
Slot1 CH11 IN
SLOT4-15
S415
S415
Slot4 CH15 IN
SLOT1-12
S112
S112
Slot1 CH12 IN
SLOT4-16
S416
S416
Slot4 CH16 IN
SLOT1-13
S113
S113
Slot1 CH13 IN
2TD1L
2TD1L
2D1L
2TR IN Dig.1 L
SLOT1-14
S114
S114
Slot1 CH14 IN
2TD1R
2TD1R
2D1R
2TR IN Dig.1 R
SLOT1-15
S115
S115
Slot1 CH15 IN
2TD2L
2TD2L
2D2L
2TR IN Dig.2 L
SLOT1-16
S116
S116
Slot1 CH16 IN
2TD2R
2TD2R
2D2R
2TR IN Dig.2 R
SLOT2-01
S2-1
S2-1
Slot2 CH1 IN
2TD3L
2TD3L
2D3L
2TR IN Dig.3 L
SLOT2-02
S2-2
S2-2
Slot2 CH2 IN
2TD3R
2TD3R
2D3R
2TR IN Dig.3 R
SLOT2-03
S2-3
S2-3
Slot2 CH3 IN
2TA1L
2TA1L
2A1L
2TR IN Analog1 L
SLOT2-04
S2-4
S2-4
Slot2 CH4 IN
2TA1R
2TA1R
2A1R
2TR IN Analog1 R
SLOT2-05
S2-5
S2-5
Slot2 CH5 IN
2TA2L
2TA2L
2A2L
2TR IN Analog2 L
SLOT2-06
S2-6
S2-6
Slot2 CH6 IN
2TA2R
2TA2R
2A2R
2TR IN Analog2 R
SLOT2-07
S2-7
S2-7
Slot2 CH7 IN
SLOT2-08
S2-8
S2-8
Slot2 CH8 IN
SLOT2-09
S2-9
S2-9
Slot2 CH9 IN
SLOT2-10
S210
S210
Slot2 CH10 IN
SLOT2-11
S211
S211
Slot2 CH11 IN
SLOT2-12
S212
S212
Slot2 CH12 IN
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
252
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Initial Output Port Names
Port
Port ID
Short
Name
Long Name
Port
Port ID
Short
Name
Long Name
SLOT1-01
S1-1
S1-1
Slot1 CH1 OUT
SLOT4-05
S4-5
S4-5
Slot4 CH5 OUT
SLOT1-02
S1-2
S1-2
Slot1 CH2 OUT
SLOT4-06
S4-6
S4-6
Slot4 CH6 OUT
SLOT1-03
S1-3
S1-3
Slot1 CH3 OUT
SLOT4-07
S4-7
S4-7
Slot4 CH7 OUT
SLOT1-04
S1-4
S1-4
Slot1 CH4 OUT
SLOT4-08
S4-8
S4-8
Slot4 CH8 OUT
SLOT1-05
S1-5
S1-5
Slot1 CH5 OUT
SLOT4-09
S4-9
S4-9
Slot4 CH9 OUT
SLOT1-06
S1-6
S1-6
Slot1 CH6 OUT
SLOT4-10
S410
S410
Slot4 CH10 OUT
SLOT1-07
S1-7
S1-7
Slot1 CH7 OUT
SLOT4-11
S411
S411
Slot4 CH11 OUT
SLOT1-08
S1-8
S1-8
Slot1 CH8 OUT
SLOT4-12
S412
S412
Slot4 CH12 OUT
SLOT1-09
S1-9
S1-9
Slot1 CH9 OUT
SLOT4-13
S413
S413
Slot4 CH13 OUT
SLOT1-10
S110
S110
Slot1 CH10 OUT
SLOT4-14
S414
S414
Slot4 CH14 OUT
SLOT1-11
S111
S111
Slot1 CH11 OUT
SLOT4-15
S415
S415
Slot4 CH15 OUT
SLOT1-12
S112
S112
Slot1 CH12 OUT
SLOT4-16
S416
S416
Slot4 CH16 OUT
SLOT1-13
S113
S113
Slot1 CH13 OUT
OMNI1
OMNI1
OMN1
OMNI OUT 1
SLOT1-14
S114
S114
Slot1 CH14 OUT
OMNI2
OMNI2
OMN2
OMNI OUT 2
SLOT1-15
S115
S115
Slot1 CH15 OUT
OMNI3
OMNI3
OMN3
OMNI OUT 3
SLOT1-16
S116
S116
Slot1 CH16 OUT
OMNI4
OMNI4
OMN4
OMNI OUT 4
SLOT2-01
S2-1
S2-1
Slot2 CH1 OUT
OMNI5
OMNI5
OMN5
OMNI OUT 5
SLOT2-02
S2-2
S2-2
Slot2 CH2 OUT
OMNI6
OMNI6
OMN6
OMNI OUT 6
SLOT2-03
S2-3
S2-3
Slot2 CH3 OUT
OMNI7
OMNI7
OMN7
OMNI OUT 7
SLOT2-04
S2-4
S2-4
Slot2 CH4 OUT
OMNI8
OMNI8
OMN8
OMNI OUT 8
SLOT2-05
S2-5
S2-5
Slot2 CH5 OUT
2TD1L
2TD1L
2D1L
2TR OUT Dig. 1L
SLOT2-06
S2-6
S2-6
Slot2 CH6 OUT
2TD1R
2TD1R
2D1R
2TR OUT Dig. 1R
SLOT2-07
S2-7
S2-7
Slot2 CH7 OUT
2TD2L
2TD2L
2D2L
2TR OUT Dig. 2L
SLOT2-08
S2-8
S2-8
Slot2 CH8 OUT
2TD2R
2TD2R
2D2R
2TR OUT Dig. 2R
SLOT2-09
S2-9
S2-9
Slot2 CH9 OUT
2TD3L
2TD3L
2D3L
2TR OUT Dig. 3L
SLOT2-10
S210
S210
Slot2 CH10 OUT
2TD3R
2TD3R
2D3R
2TR OUT Dig. 3R
SLOT2-11
S211
S211
Slot2 CH11 OUT
SLOT2-12
S212
S212
Slot2 CH12 OUT
SLOT2-13
S213
S213
Slot2 CH13 OUT
SLOT2-14
S214
S214
Slot2 CH14 OUT
SLOT2-15
S215
S215
Slot2 CH15 OUT
SLOT2-16
S216
S216
Slot2 CH16 OUT
SLOT3-01
S3-1
S3-1
Slot3 CH1 OUT
SLOT3-02
S3-2
S3-2
Slot3 CH2 OUT
SLOT3-03
S3-3
S3-3
Slot3 CH3 OUT
SLOT3-04
S3-4
S3-4
Slot3 CH4 OUT
SLOT3-05
S3-5
S3-5
Slot3 CH5 OUT
SLOT3-06
S3-6
S3-6
Slot3 CH6 OUT
SLOT3-07
S3-7
S3-7
Slot3 CH7 OUT
SLOT3-08
S3-8
S3-8
Slot3 CH8 OUT
SLOT3-09
S3-9
S3-9
Slot3 CH9 OUT
SLOT3-10
S310
S310
Slot3 CH10 OUT
SLOT3-11
S311
S311
Slot3 CH11 OUT
SLOT3-12
S312
S312
Slot3 CH12 OUT
SLOT3-13
S313
S313
Slot3 CH13 OUT
SLOT3-14
S314
S314
Slot3 CH14 OUT
SLOT3-15
S315
S315
Slot3 CH15 OUT
SLOT3-16
S316
S316
Slot3 CH16 OUT
SLOT4-01
S4-1
S4-1
Slot4 CH1 OUT
SLOT4-02
S4-2
S4-2
Slot4 CH2 OUT
SLOT4-03
S4-3
S4-3
Slot4 CH3 OUT
SLOT4-04
S4-4
S4-4
Slot4 CH4 OUT
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
GPI Trigger Source & Target List
253
GPI Trigger Source & Target List
INPUT
#
Target
#
Target
#
Target
#
Target
0
NO ASSIGN
51
CH11 ON
102
AUX6 ON
153
CH48 ON UNLATCH
1
TALKBACK
52
CH12 ON
103
AUX7 ON
154
CH49 ON UNLATCH
2
SLATE
53
CH13 ON
104
AUX8 ON
155
CH50 ON UNLATCH
3
DIMMER
54
CH14 ON
105
STEREO ON
156
CH51 ON UNLATCH
4
MONO
55
CH15 ON
106
CH1 ON UNLATCH
157
CH52 ON UNLATCH
5
SMALL
56
CH16 ON
107
CH2 ON UNLATCH
158
CH53 ON UNLATCH
6
SR BUS
57
CH17 ON
108
CH3 ON UNLATCH
159
CH54 ON UNLATCH
7
SR ASSIGN1
58
CH18 ON
109
CH4 ON UNLATCH
160
CH55 ON UNLATCH
8
SR ASSIGN2
59
CH19 ON
110
CH5 ON UNLATCH
161
CH56 ON UNLATCH
9
CR STEREO
60
CH20 ON
111
CH6 ON UNLATCH
162
BUS1 ON UNLATCH
10
CR 2TRD1
61
CH21 ON
112
CH7 ON UNLATCH
163
BUS2 ON UNLATCH
11
CR 2TRD2
62
CH22 ON
113
CH8 ON UNLATCH
164
BUS3 ON UNLATCH
12
CR 2TRD3
63
CH23 ON
114
CH9 ON UNLATCH
165
BUS4 ON UNLATCH
13
CR 2TRA1
64
CH24 ON
115
CH10 ON UNLATCH
166
BUS5 ON UNLATCH
14
CR 2TRA2
65
CH25 ON
116
CH11 ON UNLATCH
167
BUS6 ON UNLATCH
15
CR ASSIGN1
66
CH26 ON
117
CH12 ON UNLATCH
168
BUS7 ON UNLATCH
16
CR ASSIGN2
67
CH27 ON
118
CH13 ON UNLATCH
169
BUS8 ON UNLATCH
17
SM C-R
68
CH28 ON
119
CH14 ON UNLATCH
170
AUX1 ON UNLATCH
18
SM STEREO
69
CH29 ON
120
CH15 ON UNLATCH
171
AUX2 ON UNLATCH
19
SM AUX11
70
CH30 ON
121
CH16 ON UNLATCH
172
AUX3 ON UNLATCH
20
SM AUX12
71
CH31 ON
122
CH17 ON UNLATCH
173
AUX4 ON UNLATCH
21
TALKBACK UNLATCH
72
CH32 ON
123
CH18 ON UNLATCH
174
AUX5 ON UNLATCH
22
SLATE UNLATCH
73
CH33 ON
124
CH19 ON UNLATCH
175
AUX6 ON UNLATCH
23
DIMMER UNLATCH
74
CH34 ON
125
CH20 ON UNLATCH
176
AUX7 ON UNLATCH
24
MONO UNLATCH
75
CH35 ON
126
CH21 ON UNLATCH
177
AUX8 ON UNLATCH
25
SMALL UNLATCH
76
CH36 ON
127
CH22 ON UNLATCH
178
ST ON UNLATCH
26
SR BUS UNLATCH
77
CH37 ON
128
CH23 ON UNLATCH
179
UDEF1
27
SR ASGN1 UNLATCH
78
CH38 ON
129
CH24 ON UNLATCH
180
UDEF2
28
SR ASGN2 UNLATCH
79
CH39 ON
130
CH25 ON UNLATCH
181
UDEF3
29
CR ST UNLATCH
80
CH40 ON
131
CH26 ON UNLATCH
182
UDEF4
30
CR 2TRD1 UNLATCH
81
CH41 ON
132
CH27 ON UNLATCH
183
UDEF5
31
CR 2TRD2 UNLATCH
82
CH42 ON
133
CH28 ON UNLATCH
184
UDEF6
32
CR 2TRD3 UNLATCH
83
CH43 ON
134
CH29 ON UNLATCH
185
UDEF7
33
CR 2TRA1 UNLATCH
84
CH44 ON
135
CH30 ON UNLATCH
186
UDEF8
34
CR 2TRA2 UNLATCH
85
CH45 ON
136
CH31 ON UNLATCH
187
UDEF9
35
CR ASGN1 UNLATCH
86
CH46 ON
137
CH32 ON UNLATCH
188
UDEF10
36
CR ASGN2 UNLATCH
87
CH47 ON
138
CH33 ON UNLATCH
189
UDEF11
37
SD C-R UNLATCH
88
CH48 ON
139
CH34 ON UNLATCH
190
UDEF12
38
SD ST UNLATCH
89
CH49 ON
140
CH35 ON UNLATCH
191
UDEF13
39
SD AUX11 UNLATCH
90
CH50 ON
141
CH36 ON UNLATCH
192
UDEF14
40
SD AUX12 UNLATCH
91
CH51 ON
142
CH37 ON UNLATCH
193
UDEF15
41
CH1 ON
92
CH52 ON
143
CH38 ON UNLATCH
194
UDEF16
42
CH2 ON
93
CH53 ON
144
CH39 ON UNLATCH
43
CH3 ON
94
CH54 ON
145
CH40 ON UNLATCH
44
CH4 ON
95
CH55 ON
146
CH41 ON UNLATCH
45
CH5 ON
96
CH56 ON
147
CH42 ON UNLATCH
46
CH6 ON
97
AUX1 ON
148
CH43 ON UNLATCH
47
CH7 ON
98
AUX2 ON
149
CH44 ON UNLATCH
48
CH8 ON
99
AUX3 ON
150
CH45 ON UNLATCH
49
CH9 ON
100
AUX4 ON
151
CH46 ON UNLATCH
50
CH10 ON
101
AUX5 ON
152
CH47 ON UNLATCH
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
254
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
OUTPUT
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Target
NO ASSIGN
CH1 FADER ON
CH2 FADER ON
CH3 FADER ON
CH4 FADER ON
CH5 FADER ON
CH6 FADER ON
CH7 FADER ON
CH8 FADER ON
CH9 FADER ON
CH10 FADER ON
CH11 FADER ON
CH12 FADER ON
CH13 FADER ON
CH14 FADER ON
CH15 FADER ON
CH16 FADER ON
CH17 FADER ON
CH18 FADER ON
CH19 FADER ON
CH20 FADER ON
CH21 FADER ON
CH22 FADER ON
CH23 FADER ON
CH24 FADER ON
CH25 FADER ON
CH26 FADER ON
CH27 FADER ON
CH28 FADER ON
CH29 FADER ON
CH30 FADER ON
CH31 FADER ON
CH32 FADER ON
CH33 FADER ON
CH34 FADER ON
CH35 FADER ON
CH36 FADER ON
CH37 FADER ON
CH38 FADER ON
CH39 FADER ON
CH40 FADER ON
CH41 FADER ON
CH42 FADER ON
CH43 FADER ON
CH44 FADER ON
CH45 FADER ON
CH46 FADER ON
CH47 FADER ON
CH48 FADER ON
CH49 FADER ON
CH50 FADER ON
CH51 FADER ON
CH52 FADER ON
CH53 FADER ON
CH54 FADER ON
CH55 FADER ON
CH56 FADER ON
BUS1 FADER ON
BUS2 FADER ON
BUS3 FADER ON
BUS4 FADER ON
BUS5 FADER ON
BUS6 FADER ON
BUS7 FADER ON
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
#
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
Target
BUS8 FADER ON
AUX1 FADER ON
AUX2 FADER ON
AUX3 FADER ON
AUX4 FADER ON
AUX5 FADER ON
AUX6 FADER ON
AUX7 FADER ON
AUX8 FADER ON
STEREO FADER ON
CH1 FADER OFF
CH2 FADER OFF
CH3 FADER OFF
CH4 FADER OFF
CH5 FADER OFF
CH6 FADER OFF
CH7 FADER OFF
CH8 FADER OFF
CH9 FADER OFF
CH10 FADER OFF
CH11 FADER OFF
CH12 FADER OFF
CH13 FADER OFF
CH14 FADER OFF
CH15 FADER OFF
CH16 FADER OFF
CH17 FADER OFF
CH18 FADER OFF
CH19 FADER OFF
CH20 FADER OFF
CH21 FADER OFF
CH22 FADER OFF
CH23 FADER OFF
CH24 FADER OFF
CH25 FADER OFF
CH26 FADER OFF
CH27 FADER OFF
CH28 FADER OFF
CH29 FADER OFF
CH30 FADER OFF
CH31 FADER OFF
CH32 FADER OFF
CH33 FADER OFF
CH34 FADER OFF
CH35 FADER OFF
CH36 FADER OFF
CH37 FADER OFF
CH38 FADER OFF
CH39 FADER OFF
CH40 FADER OFF
CH41 FADER OFF
CH42 FADER OFF
CH43 FADER OFF
CH44 FADER OFF
CH45 FADER OFF
CH46 FADER OFF
CH47 FADER OFF
CH48 FADER OFF
CH49 FADER OFF
CH50 FADER OFF
CH51 FADER OFF
CH52 FADER OFF
CH53 FADER OFF
CH54 FADER OFF
#
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
Target
CH55 FADER OFF
CH56 FADER OFF
BUS1 FADER OFF
BUS2 FADER OFF
BUS3 FADER OFF
BUS4 FADER OFF
BUS5 FADER OFF
BUS6 FADER OFF
BUS7 FADER OFF
BUS8 FADER OFF
AUX1 FADER OFF
AUX2 FADER OFF
AUX3 FADER OFF
AUX4 FADER OFF
AUX5 FADER OFF
AUX6 FADER OFF
AUX7 FADER OFF
AUX8 FADER OFF
STEREO FADER OFF
CH1 FADER TALLY
CH2 FADER TALLY
CH3 FADER TALLY
CH4 FADER TALLY
CH5 FADER TALLY
CH6 FADER TALLY
CH7 FADER TALLY
CH8 FADER TALLY
CH9 FADER TALLY
CH10 FADER TALLY
CH11 FADER TALLY
CH12 FADER TALLY
CH13 FADER TALLY
CH14 FADER TALLY
CH15 FADER TALLY
CH16 FADER TALLY
CH17 FADER TALLY
CH18 FADER TALLY
CH19 FADER TALLY
CH20 FADER TALLY
CH21 FADER TALLY
CH22 FADER TALLY
CH23 FADER TALLY
CH24 FADER TALLY
CH25 FADER TALLY
CH26 FADER TALLY
CH27 FADER TALLY
CH28 FADER TALLY
CH29 FADER TALLY
CH30 FADER TALLY
CH31 FADER TALLY
CH32 FADER TALLY
CH33 FADER TALLY
CH34 FADER TALLY
CH35 FADER TALLY
CH36 FADER TALLY
CH37 FADER TALLY
CH38 FADER TALLY
CH39 FADER TALLY
CH40 FADER TALLY
CH41 FADER TALLY
CH42 FADER TALLY
CH43 FADER TALLY
CH44 FADER TALLY
CH45 FADER TALLY
#
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
20.
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
Target
CH46 FADER TALLY
CH47 FADER TALLY
CH48 FADER TALLY
CH49 FADER TALLY
CH50 FADER TALLY
CH51 FADER TALLY
CH52 FADER TALLY
CH53 FADER TALLY
CH54 FADER TALLY
CH55 FADER TALLY
CH56 FADER TALLY
BUS1 FADER TALLY
BUS2 FADER TALLY
BUS3 FADER TALLY
BUS4 FADER TALLY
BUS5 FADER TALLY
BUS6 FADER TALLY
BUS7 FADER TALLY
BUS8 FADER TALLY
AUX1 FADER TALLY
AUX2 FADER TALLY
AUX3 FADER TALLY
AUX4 FADER TALLY
AUX5 FADER TALLY
AUX6 FADER TALLY
AUX7 FADER TALLY
AUX8 FADER TALLY
ST FADER TALLY
UDEF1 LATCH
UDEF2 LATCH
UDEF3 LATCH
UDEF4 LATCH
UDEF5 LATCH
UDEF6 LATCH
UDEF7 LATCH
UDEF8 LATCH
UDEF9 LATCH
UDEF10 LATCH
UDEF11 LATCH
UDEF12 LATCH
UDEF13 LATCH
UDEF14 LATCH
UDEF15 LATCH
UDEF16 LATCH
UDEF1 UNLATCH
UDEF2 UNLATCH
UDEF3 UNLATCH
UDEF4 UNLATCH
UDEF5 UNLATCH
UDEF6 UNLATCH
UDEF7 UNLATCH
UDEF8 UNLATCH
UDEF9 UNLATCH
UDEF10 UNLATCH
UDEF11 UNLATCH
UDEF12 UNLATCH
UDEF13 UNLATCH
UDEF14 UNLATCH
UDEF15 UNLATCH
UDEF16 UNLATCH
REC LAMP
POWER ON
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
255
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
Bank 1 (GM Vol & Pan)
ID
Short
Name
Long
RM01 GM01
GM-CH01 VOL&PAN
RM02 GM02
GM-CH02 VOL&PAN
RM03 GM03
GM-CH03 VOL&PAN
RM04 GM04
GM-CH04 VOL&PAN
RM05 GM05
GM-CH05 VOL&PAN
RM06 GM06
GM-CH06 VOL&PAN
RM07 GM07
GM-CH07 VOL&PAN
RM08 GM08
GM-CH08 VOL&PAN
RM09 GM09
GM-CH09 VOL&PAN
RM10 GM10
GM-CH10 VOL&PAN
RM11 GM11
GM-CH11 VOL&PAN
RM12 GM12
GM-CH12 VOL&PAN
RM13 GM13
GM-CH13 VOL&PAN
RM14 GM14
GM-CH14 VOL&PAN
RM15 GM15
GM-CH15 VOL&PAN
RM16 GM16
GM-CH16 VOL&PAN
RM17 GM17
NO ASSIGN
RM18 GM18
NO ASSIGN
RM19 GM19
NO ASSIGN
RM20 GM20
NO ASSIGN
RM21 GM21
NO ASSIGN
RM22 GM22
NO ASSIGN
RM23 GM23
NO ASSIGN
RM24 GM24
NO ASSIGN
Controller
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
1
2
3
4
5
6
END
B0
B0
END
B1
B1
END
B2
B2
END
B3
B3
END
B4
B4
END
B5
B5
END
B6
B6
END
B7
B7
END
B8
B8
END
B9
B9
END
BA
BA
END
BB
BB
END
BC
BC
END
BD
BD
END
BE
BE
END
BF
BF
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
0A
07
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Data Format
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
256
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Bank 2 (GM Vol & Effect 1)
ID
Short
Name
Long
RM01 GM01
GM-CH01 VOL&EFF1
RM02 GM02
GM-CH02 VOL&EFF1
RM03 GM03
GM-CH03 VOL&EFF1
RM04 GM04
GM-CH04 VOL&EFF1
RM05 GM05
GM-CH05 VOL&EFF1
RM06 GM06
GM-CH06 VOL&EFF1
RM07 GM07
GM-CH07 VOL&EFF1
RM08 GM08
GM-CH08 VOL&EFF1
RM09 GM09
GM-CH09 VOL&EFF1
RM10 GM10
GM-CH10 VOL&EFF1
RM11 GM11
GM-CH11 VOL&EFF1
RM12 GM12
GM-CH12 VOL&EFF1
RM13 GM13
GM-CH13 VOL&EFF1
RM14 GM14
GM-CH14 VOL&EFF1
RM15 GM15
GM-CH15 VOL&EFF1
RM16 GM16
GM-CH16 VOL&EFF1
RM17 GM17
NO ASSIGN
RM18 GM18
NO ASSIGN
RM19 GM19
NO ASSIGN
RM20 GM20
NO ASSIGN
RM21 GM21
NO ASSIGN
RM22 GM22
NO ASSIGN
RM23 GM23
NO ASSIGN
RM24 GM24
NO ASSIGN
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Controller
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
1
2
3
4
5
6
END
B0
B0
END
B1
B1
END
B2
B2
END
B3
B3
END
B4
B4
END
B5
B5
END
B6
B6
END
B7
B7
END
B8
B8
END
B9
B9
END
BA
BA
END
BB
BB
END
BC
BC
END
BD
BD
END
BE
BE
END
BF
BF
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
0C
07
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Data Format
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings
257
Bank 3 (XG Vol & Pan)
ID
Short
Name
Long
RM01 XG01
XG-CH01 VOL&PAN
RM02 XG02
XG-CH02 VOL&PAN
RM03 XG03
XG-CH03 VOL&PAN
RM04 XG04
XG-CH04 VOL&PAN
RM05 XG05
XG-CH05 VOL&PAN
RM06 XG06
XG-CH06 VOL&PAN
RM07 XG07
XG-CH07 VOL&PAN
RM08 XG08
XG-CH08 VOL&PAN
RM09 XG09
XG-CH09 VOL&PAN
RM10 XG10
XG-CH10 VOL&PAN
RM11 XG11
XG-CH11 VOL&PAN
RM12 XG12
XG-CH12 VOL&PAN
RM13 XG13
XG-CH13 VOL&PAN
RM14 XG14
XG-CH14 VOL&PAN
RM15 XG15
XG-CH15 VOL&PAN
RM16 XG16
XG-CH16 VOL&PAN
RM17 XG17
XG-CH17 VOL&PAN
RM18 XG18
XG-CH18 VOL&PAN
RM19 XG19
XG-CH19 VOL&PAN
RM20 XG20
XG-CH20 VOL&PAN
RM21 XG21
XG-CH21 VOL&PAN
RM22 XG22
XG-CH22 VOL&PAN
RM23 XG23
XG-CH23 VOL&PAN
RM24 XG24
XG-CH24 VOL&PAN
Controller
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
1
2
3
4
5
6
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
END
F0
F0
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
43
43
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
10
10
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
4C
4C
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
08
08
NOP
00
00
NOP
01
01
NOP
02
02
NOP
03
03
NOP
04
04
NOP
05
05
NOP
06
06
NOP
07
07
NOP
08
08
NOP
09
09
NOP
0A
0A
NOP
0B
0B
NOP
0C
0C
NOP
0D
0D
NOP
0E
0E
NOP
0F
0F
NOP
10
10
NOP
11
11
NOP
12
12
NOP
13
13
NOP
14
14
NOP
15
15
NOP
16
16
NOP
17
17
Data Format
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
0E
0B
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
ENC
FAD
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
F7
F7
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
END
END
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
258
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Bank 4 (Nuendo VST Mixer)
ID
Short
Name
Long
RM01 CH1
VST MIXER CH1
RM02 CH2
VST MIXER CH2
RM03 CH3
VST MIXER CH3
RM04 CH4
VST MIXER CH4
RM05 CH5
VST MIXER CH5
RM06 CH6
VST MIXER CH6
RM07 CH7
VST MIXER CH7
RM08 CH8
VST MIXER CH8
RM09 CH9
VST MIXER CH9
RM10 CH10
VST MIXER CH10
RM11 CH11
VST MIXER CH11
RM12 CH12
VST MIXER CH12
RM13 CH13
VST MIXER CH13
RM14 CH14
VST MIXER CH14
RM15 CH15
VST MIXER CH15
RM16 CH16
VST MIXER CH16
RM17 CH17
VST MIXER CH17
RM18 CH18
VST MIXER CH18
RM19 CH19
VST MIXER CH19
RM20 CH20
VST MIXER CH20
RM21 CH21
VST MIXER CH21
RM22 CH22
VST MIXER CH22
RM23 CH23
VST MIXER CH23
RM24 CH24
VST MIXER CH24
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Controller
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
ON
ENCODER
FADER
1
2
B0
B0
B0
B1
B1
B1
B2
B2
B2
B3
B3
B3
B4
B4
B4
B5
B5
B5
B6
B6
B6
B7
B7
B7
B8
B8
B8
B9
B9
B9
BA
BA
BA
BB
BB
BB
BC
BC
BC
BD
BD
BD
BE
BE
BE
BF
BF
BF
B0
B0
B0
B1
B1
B1
B2
B2
B2
B3
B3
B3
B4
B4
B4
B5
B5
B5
B6
B6
B6
B7
B7
B7
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
40
0A
07
60
2A
27
60
2A
27
60
2A
27
60
2A
27
60
2A
27
60
2A
27
60
2A
27
60
2A
27
3
4
5
6
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
SW
ENC
FAD
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
END
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Data Format
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
NOP
Effects Parameters
259
Effects Parameters
REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE
One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
E/R DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Delay between early reflections and reverb
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
GATE LVL
OFF, –60 to 0 dB
Level at which gate kicks in
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Gate opening speed
HOLD
1
Gate open time
DECAY
2
Gate closing speed
1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz), 0.01 ms–1.06 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.01 ms–981 ms
(fs=96 kHz)
2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
EARLY REF.
One input, two output early reflections.
Parameter
Range
Description
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
FB GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
260
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate.
Parameter
Range
Description
TYPE
Type-A, Type-B
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reflection density
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
FB GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
MONO DELAY
One input, one output basic repeat delay.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY
0.0–2730.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
1.
(Max. value depends on tempo setting)
STEREO DELAY
Two input, two output basic stereo delay.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. G R
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
1.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Effects Parameters
261
MOD. DELAY
One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine/Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE
2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
2.
DELAY LCR
One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).
Range
Parameter
Description
DELAY L
0.0–2730.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY C
0.0–2730.0 ms
Center channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–2730.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–2730.0 ms
Feedback delay time
LEVEL L
–100 to +100%
Left channel delay level
LEVEL C
–100 to +100%
Center channel delay level
LEVEL R
–100 to +100%
Right channel delay level
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L
NOTE C
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R
NOTE FB
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
262
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
ECHO
Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB.DLY L
0.0–1350.0 ms
Left channel feedback delay time
FB.DLY R
0.0–1350.0 ms
Right channel feedback delay time
FB. G L
–99 to +99%
Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
FB. G R
–99 to +99%
Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
L->R FBG
–99 to +99%
Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
R->L FBG
–99 to +99%
Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase
feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R
NOTE FBL
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D L
NOTE FBR
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D R
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
CHORUS
Two input, two output chorus effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH
0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
263
FLANGE
Two input, two output flange effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
SYMPHONIC
Two input, two output symphonic effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
264
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
PHASER
Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
OFFSET
0–100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
PHASE
0.00–354.38 degrees
Left and right modulation phase balance
STAGE
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 dB
Low shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
AUTOPAN
Two input, two output autopanner.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DIR.
1
Panning direction
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R
2.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
265
TREMOLO
Two input, two output tremolo effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 dB
High shelving filter gain
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
HQ. PITCH
One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.
Parameter
Range
Description
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones
Pitch shift
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Pitch shift fine
DELAY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
MODE
1–10
Pitch shift precision
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
266
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
DUAL PITCH
Two input, two output pitch shifter.
Parameter
Range
Description
PITCH 1
–24 to +24 semitones
Channel #1 pitch shift
FINE 1
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #1 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 1
–100 to +100%
Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for
reverse phase)
PAN 1
L63 to R63
Channel #1 pan
DELAY 1
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #1 delay time
FB. G 1
–99 to +99%
Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
PITCH 2
–24 to +24 semitones
Channel #2 pitch shift
FINE 2
–50 to +50 cents
Channel #2 pitch shift fine
LEVEL 2
–100 to +100%
Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for
reverse phase)
PAN 2
L63 to R63
Channel #2 pan
DELAY 2
0.0–1000.0 ms
Channel #2 delay time
FB. G 2
–99 to +99%
Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,
minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
MODE
1–10
Pitch shift precision
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE 1
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay
NOTE 2
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
ROTARY
One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.
Parameter
Range
Description
ROTATE
STOP, START
SPEED
SLOW, FAST
Rotation stop, start
Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)
SLOW
0.05–10.00 Hz
SLOW rotation speed
FAST
0.05–10.00 Hz
FAST rotation speed
DRIVE
0–100
Overdrive level
ACCEL
0–10
Acceleration at speed changes
LOW
0–100
Low-frequency filter
HIGH
0–100
High-frequency filter
RING MOD.
Two input, two output ring modulator.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
OSC, SELF
Modulation source: oscillator or input signal
OSC FREQ
0.0–5000.0 Hz
Oscillator frequency
FM FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Oscillator frequency modulation speed
FM DEPTH
0–100%
Oscillator frequency modulation depth
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE FM
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ
1.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
267
MOD. FILTER
Two input, two output modulation filter.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
PHASE
0.00–354.38 degrees
Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass
OFFSET
0–100
Filter frequency offset
RESO.
0–20
Filter resonance
LEVEL
0–100
Output level
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ
1.
DISTORTION
One input, two output distortion effect.
Parameter
Range
Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
AMP SIMULATE
One input, two output guitar amp simulator.
Parameter
Range
Description
AMP TYPE
1
Guitar amp simulation type
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
BASS
0–100
Bass tone control
MIDDLE
0–100
Middle tone control
TREBLE
0–100
High tone control
CAB DEP
0–100%
Speaker cabinet simulation depth
EQ F
100 Hz–8.0 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
268
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
DYNA. FILTER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
SENSE
0–100
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
1
Filter frequency change decay speed
TYPE
LPF, HPF, BPF
Filter type
OFFSET
0–100
Filter frequency offset
RESO.
0–20
Filter resonance
LEVEL
0–100
Output Level
1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
DYNA. FLANGE
Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
SENSE
0–100
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
Sensitivity
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
1
Decay speed
OFFSET
0–100
Delay time offset
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 dB
Low shelving filter gain
EQ F
100 Hz–8.00 kHz
EQ (peaking type) frequency
EQ G
–12 to +12 dB
EQ (peaking type) gain
EQ Q
10.0–0.10
EQ (peaking type) bandwidth
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 dB
High shelving filter gain
1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
DYNA. PHASER
Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
INPUT, MIDI
Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity
SENSE
0–100
Sensitivity
DIR.
UP, DOWN
Upward or downward frequency change
DECAY
1
Decay speed
OFFSET
0–100
Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset
FB.GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
STAGE
2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16
Number of phase shift stages
LSH F
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low shelving filter frequency
LSH G
–12 to +12 dB
Low shelving filter gain
HSH F
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
High shelving filter frequency
HSH G
–12 to +12 dB
High shelving filter gain
1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
269
REV+CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/CHO
0–100%
Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH
0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
REV->CHORUS
One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb,
100% = all reverb)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH
0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
270
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
REV+FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/FLG
0–100%
Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
REV->FLANGE
One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb, 100%
= all reverb)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
271
REV+SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV/SYM
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
REV->SYMPHO.
One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb,
100% = all reverb)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
272
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
REV->PAN
One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REV.BAL
0–100%
Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100%
= all reverb)
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DIR.
1
Panning direction
WAVE
Sine, Tri, Square
Modulation waveform
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1. L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R
2.
DELAY+ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY/ER
0–100%
Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early
reflections)
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE FB
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
Effects Parameters
273
DELAY->ER.
One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected
delay, 100% = all delay)
TYPE
S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,
Revers, Plate, Spring
Type of early reflection simulation
ROOMSIZE
0.1–20.0
Reflection spacing
LIVENESS
0–10
Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
ER NUM.
1–19
Number of early reflections
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE FB
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
DELAY+REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY/REV
0–100%
Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE FB
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
274
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
DELAY->REV
One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
DELAY L
0.0–1000.0 ms
Left channel delay time
DELAY R
0.0–1000.0 ms
Right channel delay time
FB. DLY
0.0–1000.0 ms
Feedback delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
DELAY HI
0.1–1.0
Delay high-frequency feedback ratio
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% =
all delay)
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
INI. DLY
0.0–500.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
REV HI
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Spread
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE L
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L
NOTE R
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY
R
NOTE FB
*1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)
DIST->DELAY
One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.
Parameter
Range
Description
DST TYPE
DST1, DST2, OVD1,
OVD2, CRUNCH
Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)
DRIVE
0–100
Distortion drive
MASTER
0–100
Master volume
TONE
–10 to +10
Tone control
N. GATE
0–20
Noise reduction
DELAY
0.0–2725.0 ms
Delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency feedback ratio
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
DLY.BAL
0–100%
Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all
delayed distortion)
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
DLY.NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY
MOD.NOTE
2
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
(Maximum value depends on the tempo
setting)
2.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
275
MULTI FILTER
Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).
Parameter
Range
Description
TYPE 1
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
TYPE 2
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
TYPE 3
HPF, LPF, BPF
Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass
FREQ. 1
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 1 frequency
FREQ. 2
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 2 frequency
FREQ. 3
28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz
Filter 3 frequency
LEVEL 1
0–100
Filter 1 level
LEVEL 2
0–100
Filter 2 level
LEVEL 3
0–100
Filter 3 level
RESO. 1
0–20
Filter 1 resonance
RESO. 2
0–20
Filter 2 resonance
RESO. 3
0–20
Filter 3 resonance
FREEZE
One input, one output basic sampler.
Parameter
Range
Description
REC MODE
MANUAL, INPUT
In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and
PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by
pressing the REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the
input signal.
REC DLY
–1000 to +1000 ms
Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is
received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is
received.
TRG LVL
–60 to 0 dB
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording
or playback)
TRG MASK
0–1000 ms
Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored
for the duration of the TRG MASK time.
PLY MODE
MOMENT, CONTI.,
INPUT
In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the PLAY
button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the
PLAY button has been pressed. The number of times the sample
plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal.
START
1
Playback start point in milliseconds
END
1
Playback end point in milliseconds
LOOP
1
Loop start point in milliseconds
LOOP
NUM
0–100
Number of times the sample plays
START
[SAMPLE]
0–262000
Playback start point in samples
END
[SAMPLE]
0–262000
Playback end point in samples
LOOP
[SAMPLE]
0–262000
Loop start point in samples
PITCH
–12 to +12 semitones
Playback pitch shift
FINE
–50 to +50 cents
Playback pitch shift fine
MIDI TRG
OFF, C1–C6, ALL
PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages.
1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz), 0.0–2970.5 ms (fs=88.2 kHz),
0.0 ms–2729.2 ms (fs=96 kHz)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
276
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
ST REVERB
Two input, two output stereo reverb.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV TYPE
Hall, Room, Stage, Plate
Reverb type
INI. DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
REVERB 5.1
One input, six output reverb for 5.1 surround, with surround panning.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV TYPE
Hall, Room, Stage, Plate
Reverb type
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
DIV.
0–100%
Divergence determines how the front center signal is fed to the
Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 0%, it’s fed only to
the Left and Right channels (i.e., Phantom Center). When set to
50%, it’s fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When
set to 100%, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center).
ROOMSIZE
0.1–20.0
Size of simulated room’s reverb
POS L/R
L63–R63
Left/right listening position
POS F/R
F63–R63
Front/rear listening position
POS CTRL
OFF, NORMAL, INVERT
1
ER L/R
L63–R63
Left/right early reflections position
ER F/R
F63–R63
Front/rear early reflections position
ER LVL
0–100%
Early reflections level
ER CTRL
OFF, NORMAL, INVERT
1
REV L/R
L63–R63
Left/right reverb position
REV F/R
F63–R63
Front/rear reverb position
REV LVL
0–100%
Reverb level
REV CTRL
OFF, NORMAL, INVERT
1
POS RAD.
0–63
Radius of the panning track at the listening position
ER RAD.
0–63
Radius of the panning track for early reflections
REV RAD.
0–63
Radius of the panning track for reverb
1. When set to NOR, the position can be set by using the Joystick so long as the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [EFFECT] button’s indicator is on. When set to INV, the Joystick will work inversely. When set to OFF,
Joystick control is off. The CTRL button on the Effect Edit page works the same as the [EFFECT] button.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Effects Parameters
277
OCTA REVERB
Eight input, eight output reverb.
Parameter
Range
Description
REV TIME
0.3–99.0 s
Reverb time
REV TYPE
Hall, Room, Stage, Plate
Reverb type
INI. DLY
0.0–100.0 ms
Initial delay before reverb begins
HI. RATIO
0.1–1.0
High-frequency reverb time ratio
LO. RATIO
0.1–2.4
Low-frequency reverb time ratio
DIFF.
0–10
Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)
DENSITY
0–100%
Reverb density
E/R BAL.
0–100%
Balance of early reflections and reverb
(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections)
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
AUTO PAN 5.1
Six input, six output autopanner for 5.1 surround. You can reset to the pan position specified by
the OFFSET parameter by pressing the RESET button.
Parameter
Range
Description
SOURCE
OFF, HOLD, INPUT1,
INPUT2, INPUT3,
INPUT4, INPUT5,
INPUT6, MIDI
When set to OFF, the TRIGGER button is used to start autopan.
When set to HOLD, autopan runs continuously. When set to INPUT
1–6, the specified channel’s input signal triggers autopan. When set
to MIDI, a MIDI Note On message can be used to trigger autopan.
TRIG. LVL
–60 to 0 dB
Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger panning
when SOURCE set to INPUT)
TRG MASK
0–1000 ms
Trigger Mask specifies the time from when a trigger is received until
the next trigger will be accepted.
TIME
0.0 s–10.0 s
The time after which autopan starts once it’s been triggered
SPEED
0.05 Hz–40.00 Hz
Autopan speed
DIR.
Turn L, Turn R
Autopan direction
OFFSET
–180 to +180 degrees
Pan offset
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
CHORUS 5.1
Six input, six output chorus for 5.1 surround.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
Modulation speed
AM DEPTH
0–100%
Amplitude modulation depth
PM DEPTH
0–100%
Pitch modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–400.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
278
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
FLANGE 5.1
Six input, six output flanger for 5.1 surround.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation speed
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–400.0 ms
Modulation delay time
FB. GAIN
–99 to +99%
Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
SYMPHO 5.1
Six input, six output symphonic effect for 5.1 surround.
Parameter
Range
Description
FREQ.
0.05–40.00 Hz
DEPTH
0–100%
Modulation depth
MOD. DLY
0.0–400.0 ms
Modulation delay time
WAVE
Sine, Tri
Modulation waveform
HPF
THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
High-pass filter cutoff frequency
LPF
50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency
SYNC
OFF/ON
Tempo parameter sync on/off
NOTE
1
Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.
1.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Modulation speed
Effects Parameters
279
M. BAND DYNA.
Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.
Parameter
Range
Description
LOW GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Low band level
MID GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Mid band level
HI. GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
High band level
PRESENCE
–10 to +10
For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and
the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the
opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the
same.
CMP. THRE
–24.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Compressor threshold
CMP. RAT
1:1 to 20:1
Compressor ratio
CMP. ATK
0–120 ms
Compressor attack
CMP. REL
1
Compressor release time
CMP. KNEE
0–5
Compressor knee
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
CMP. BYP
ON/OFF
Compressor bypass
L–M XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low/mid crossover frequency
M–H XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE
–6 dB, –12 dB
Filter slope
CEILING
–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
Specifies the maximum output level
EXP. THRE
–54.0 dB to –24.0 dB
Expander threshold
EXP. RAT
1:1 to ∞:1
Expander ratio
EXP. REL
1
Expander release time
EXP. BYP
ON/OFF
Expander bypass
LIM. THRE
–12.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Limiter threshold
LIM. ATK
0–120 ms
Limiter attack
LIM. REL
1
Limiter release time
LIM. BYP
ON/OFF
Limiter bypass
LIM. KNEE
0–5
Limiter knee
1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
280
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
COMP 5.1
Six input, six output compressor for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and gain
reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS), center (C),
or LFE channels.
Parameter
Range
Description
LOW GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Low band level
MID GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Mid band level
HI. GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
High band level
PRESENCE
–10 to +10
For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the
threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same.
THRE
–24.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Compressor threshold
RATIO
1:1 to ∞:1
Compressor ratio
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Attack
RELEASE
1
Expander release time
KNEE
0–5
Compressor knee
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
KEY LINK
2
Key-in linking
L–M XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low/mid crossover frequency
M–H XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE
–6 dB, –12 dB
Filter slope
CEILING
–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
Specifies the maximum output level
1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)
2. 5.1: key-in of all inputs are linked. 5.0: key-in of the L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent). 3+2: key-in
of L, C, and R are linked, and LS and RS are linked. 2+2: key-in of L and R are linked, and LS and RS are linked.
COMPAND 5.1
Six input, six output compander for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and gain
reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS), center (C),
or LFE channels.
Parameter
Range
Description
LOW GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Low band level
MID GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
Mid band level
HI. GAIN
–96.0 to +12.0 dB
High band level
PRESENCE
–10 to +10
For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the
threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same.
THRE
–24.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Compressor threshold
RATIO
1:1 to 20:1
Compressor ratio
ATTACK
0–120 ms
Compressor attack
WIDTH
1–90 dB
Width before the expander operates
TYPE
Soft, Hard
Compander type
LOOKUP
0.0–100.0 ms
Lookup delay
KEY LINK
1
Key-in linking
L–M XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Low/mid crossover frequency
M–H XOVR
21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz
Mid/high crossover frequency
SLOPE
–6 dB, –12 dB
Filter slope
CEILING
–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF
Specifies the maximum output level
1. 5.1: key-in of all inputs are linked. 5.0: key-in of the L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent). 3+2: key-in
of L, C, and R are linked, and LS and RS are linked. 2+2: key-in of L and R are linked, and LS and RS are linked.
Other preset effects (COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S, EQUALIZER601, OPENDECK, REV-X HALL, REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE) are optional Add-On
Effects. For more information on these effects, refer to the Owner’s Manual that comes with the
Add-On Effects package.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Effects and tempo synchronization
281
Effects and tempo synchronization
Some of the 02R96’s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo. There are two such types of effect; delay-type effects
and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects,
the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo.
• Parameters related to tempo synchronization
The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization.
1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.
SYNC: ............................ This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.
NOTE and TEMPO:..... These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.
DELAY and FREQ.: ...... DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect
the way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and
FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects.
• How the parameters are related
Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo, and continues making
adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY (or FREQ.). This means that when TEMPO, NOTE,
and DELAY (or FREQ.) are synchronized, and you change any of these values, the other parameters will be re-set in order to
maintain the correct relationship. The parameters that are re-set and the calculation method(*a) used are as follows.
If you turn SYNC on → NOTE will be set
If you edit DELAY (or FREQ.) → NOTE will be set
In this case, the NOTE value is calculated as follows.
NOTE = DELAY (or FREQ.)/(4 x (60/TEMPO))
If you edit NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
If you edit TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set
In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.
DELAY (or FREQ.) = original DELAY (or FREQ.) x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)
Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note
DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)
= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)
= 0.5 (sec)
= 500 ms
Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.
Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121
DELAY= original DELAY x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)
= 250 x (120/121)
= 247.9 (ms)
Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.
*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.
• Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values
The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set NOTE or
TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This
limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF.
• Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter
The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.
• It is a common value shared by all effects
• You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.)
This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here
is an example.
Store the effect: TEMPO=120 → Change TEMPO to 60 → Recall the effect: TEMPO=60
Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.)
were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in
this way between store and recall, the 02R96 does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the
TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored.
* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.
= 1/48
= 1/24
= 1/16
= 1/12
= 3/32
= 1/8
= 1/6
= 3/16
= 1/4
= 3/8
= 1/2
= 3/4
= 1/1
= 2/1
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
282
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Preset EQ Parameters
#
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Parameter
Title
Bass Drum 1
Bass Drum 2
Snare Drum
1
Snare Drum
2
Tom-tom 1
Cymbal
High Hat
Percussion
E. Bass 1
E. Bass 2
Syn. Bass 1
Syn. Bass 2
LOW
L-MID
H-MID
HIGH
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–3.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
100 Hz
265 Hz
1.06 kHz
5.30 kHz
Q
1.2
10
0.9
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
LPF
G
+8.0 dB
–7.0 dB
+6.0 dB
ON
F
80 Hz
400 Hz
2.50 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
1.4
4.5
2.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+4.5 dB
F
132 Hz
1.00 kHz
3.15 kHz
5.00 kHz
Q
1.2
4.5
0.11
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+1.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
335 Hz
2.36 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
—
10
0.7
0.1
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+2.0 dB
–7.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+1.0 dB
F
212 Hz
670 Hz
4.50 kHz
6.30 kHz
Q
1.4
10
1.2
0.28
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
106 Hz
425 Hz
1.06 kHz
13.2 kHz
Q
—
8
0.9
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+1.0 dB
+0.5 dB
F
95 Hz
425 Hz
2.80 kHz
7.50 kHz
Q
—
0.5
1
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.5 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
100 Hz
400 Hz
2.80 kHz
17.0 kHz
Q
—
4.5
0.56
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
35.5 Hz
112 Hz
2.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
—
5
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.5 dB
+0.5 dB
F
112 Hz
112 Hz
2.24 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
0.1
5
6.3
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
+8.5 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
85 Hz
950 Hz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
0.1
8
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
180 Hz
1.12 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
1.6
8
2.2
—
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
#
13
Parameter
Title
Piano 1
Piano 2
E. G. Clean
E. G. Crunch
1
E. G. Crunch
2
PEAKING
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
95 Hz
950 Hz
3.15 kHz
7.50 kHz
—
8
0.9
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+3.5 dB
–8.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
224 Hz
600 Hz
3.15 kHz
5.30 kHz
5.6
10
0.7
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.5 dB
+0.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
265 Hz
400 Hz
1.32 kHz
4.50 kHz
E. G. Dist. 1
E. G. Dist. 2
A. G. Stroke
1
A. G. Stroke
2
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
+2.0 dB
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.60 kHz
8
4.5
0.63
9
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
125 Hz
450 Hz
3.35 kHz
19.0 kHz
A. G. Arpeg.
1
A. G. Arpeg.
2
Brass Sec.
0.16
—
PEAKING
H.SHELF
+5.0 dB
0.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
355 Hz
950 Hz
3.35 kHz
12.5 kHz
—
9
10
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+6.0 dB
–8.5 dB
+4.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
315 Hz
1.06 kHz
4.25 kHz
12.5 kHz
—
10
4
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
106 Hz
1.00 kHz
1.90 kHz
5.30 kHz
0.9
4.5
3.5
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–3.5 dB
–2.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
300 Hz
750 Hz
2.00 kHz
3.55 kHz
—
9
4.5
—
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
F
224 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
—
4.5
4.5
0.12
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
0.0 dB
–5.5 dB
0.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
180 Hz
355 Hz
4.00 kHz
4.25 kHz
Q
24
0.4
PEAKING
F
Q
23
8
L.SHELF
G
Q
22
—
PEAKING
140 Hz
Q
21
6.3
PEAKING
+4.5 dB
Q
20
10
PEAKING
F
Q
19
0.18
PEAKING
G
Q
18
H.SHELF
PEAKING
Q
17
HIGH
–6.0 dB
Q
16
H-MID
L.SHELF
Q
15
L-MID
G
Q
14
LOW
—
7
4.5
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
Q
2.8
2
0.7
7
Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)
#
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Parameter
Title
Male Vocal
1
Male Vocal
2
Female Vo.
1
Female Vo.
2
Chorus &
Harmo
Total EQ 1
Total EQ 3
Bass Drum 3
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
F
190 Hz
1.00 kHz
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
0.11
4.5
0.56
0.11
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+2.0 dB
–5.0 dB
–2.5 dB
+4.0 dB
F
170 Hz
236 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
0.11
10
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–1.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
F
118 Hz
400 Hz
2.65 kHz
6.00 kHz
Q
0.18
0.45
0.56
0.14
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–7.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
112 Hz
335 Hz
2.00 kHz
6.70 kHz
Q
—
0.16
0.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–2.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+3.0 dB
F
90 Hz
850 Hz
2.12 kHz
4.50 kHz
Q
2.8
2
0.7
7
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–0.5 dB
0.0 dB
+3.0 dB
+6.5 dB
F
95 Hz
950 Hz
2.12 kHz
16.0 kHz
Q
7
2.2
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
+4.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+6.0 dB
F
Snare Drum
3
Tom-tom 2
750 Hz
1.80 kHz
#
36
Parameter
Title
Piano 3
Piano Low
Piano High
Fine-EQ
Cass
Narrator
H.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
–13.0 dB
+4.5 dB
+2.5 dB
F
100 Hz
475 Hz
2.36 kHz
10.0 kHz
8
10
9
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+6.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
12.5 kHz
10
6.3
2.2
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
–5.5 dB
+1.5 dB
+5.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
190 Hz
400 Hz
6.70 kHz
5.60 kHz
10
6.3
2.2
0.1
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–1.5 dB
0.0 dB
+1.0 dB
+3.0 dB
F
75 Hz
1.00 kHz
4.00 kHz
12.5 kHz
Q
40
HIGH
+4.5 dB
Q
39
H-MID
PEAKING
Q
38
L-MID
G
Q
37
LOW
—
4.5
1.8
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–4.0 dB
–1.0 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
106 Hz
710 Hz
2.50 kHz
10.0 kHz
Q
4
7
0.63
—
Preset Gate Parameters
(fs = 44.1 kHz)
#
Title
Type
18.0 kHz
7
2.8
5.6
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
+1.5 dB
+0.5 dB
+2.0 dB
+4.0 dB
F
67 Hz
850 Hz
1.90 kHz
15.0 kHz
—
0.28
0.7
—
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
+3.5 dB
–10.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
118 Hz
315 Hz
4.25 kHz
20.0 kHz
2
10
0.4
0.4
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
PEAKING
G
0.0 dB
+2.0 dB
+3.5 dB
0.0 dB
F
224 Hz
560 Hz
4.25 kHz
4.00 kHz
Q
35
95 Hz
L.SHELF
Q
34
HIGH
–0.5 dB
Q
33
H-MID
PEAKING
Q
32
L-MID
G
G
Total EQ 2
LOW
—
4.5
2.8
0.1
L.SHELF
PEAKING
PEAKING
H.SHELF
G
–9.0 dB
+1.5 dB
+2.0 dB
0.0 dB
F
90 Hz
212 Hz
5.30 kHz
17.0 kHz
Q
—
4.5
1.2
—
283
1
Gate
GATE
2
Ducking
DUCKING
3
A. Dr. BD
GATE
4
A. Dr. SN
GATE
Parameter
Value
Threshold (dB) –26
Range (dB)
–56
Attack (ms)
0
Hold (ms)
2.56
Decay (ms)
331
Threshold (dB) –19
Range (dB)
–22
Attack (ms)
93
Hold (ms)
1.20 S
Decay (ms)
6.32 S
Threshold (dB) –11
Range (dB)
–53
Attack (ms)
0
Hold (ms)
1.93
Decay (ms)
400
Threshold (dB)
–8
Range (dB)
–23
Attack (ms)
1
Hold (ms)
0.63
Decay (ms)
238
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
284
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)
#
Title
1
Comp
2
Expand
3
Compander
(H)
4
Compander
(S)
5
A. Dr. BD
6
A. Dr. BD
7
A. Dr. SN
8
A. Dr. SN
9
A. Dr. SN
Type
Parameter
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
COMP
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
EXPAND
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
COMPAND-H
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
COMPAND-S
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
COMP
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
COMPAND-H
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
COMP
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
EXPAND
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
COMPAND-S
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Value
–8
2.5
60
0.0
2
250
–23
1.7
1
3.5
2
70
–10
3.5
1
0.0
6
250
–8
4
25
0.0
24
180
–24
3
9
5.5
2
58
–11
3.5
1
–1.5
7
192
–17
2.5
8
3.5
2
12
–23
2
0
0.5
2
151
–8
1.7
11
0.0
10
128
#
Title
Type
10
A. Dr. Tom
EXPAND
11
A. Dr.
OverTop
COMPAND-S
12
E. B. Finger
COMP
13
E. B. Slap
COMP
14
Syn. Bass
COMP
15
Piano1
COMP
16
Piano2
COMP
17
E. Guitar
COMP
18
A. Guitar
COMP
Parameter
Value
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Width (dB)
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
Threshold (dB)
Ratio ( :1)
Attack (ms)
Out gain (dB)
Knee
Release (ms)
–20
2
2
5.0
2
749
–24
2
38
–3.5
54
842
–12
2
15
4.5
2
470
–12
1.7
6
4.0
hard
133
–10
3.5
9
3.0
hard
250
–9
2.5
17
1.0
hard
238
–18
3.5
7
6.0
2
174
–8
3.5
7
2.5
4
261
–10
2.5
5
1.5
2
238
Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)
#
Title
Type
19
Strings1
COMP
20
Strings2
COMP
21
Strings3
COMP
22
BrassSection
COMP
23
Syn. Pad
COMP
24
SamplingPerc COMPAND-S
25
Sampling BD
COMP
26
Sampling SN
COMP
27
Hip Comp
COMPAND-S
Parameter
Value
Threshold (dB) –11
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
33
Out gain (dB)
1.5
Knee
2
Release (ms)
749
Threshold (dB) –12
Ratio ( :1)
1.5
Attack (ms)
93
Out gain (dB)
1.5
Knee
4
Release (ms)
1.35 S
Threshold (dB) –17
Ratio ( :1)
1.5
Attack (ms)
76
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Knee
2
Release (ms)
186
Threshold (dB) –18
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
18
Out gain (dB)
4.0
Knee
1
Release (ms)
226
Threshold (dB) –13
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
58
Out gain (dB)
2.0
Knee
1
Release (ms)
238
Threshold (dB) –18
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
8
Out gain (dB)
–2.5
Width (dB)
18
Release (ms)
238
Threshold (dB) –14
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
2
Out gain (dB)
3.5
Knee
4
Release (ms)
35
Threshold (dB) –18
Ratio ( :1)
4
Attack (ms)
8
Out gain (dB)
8.0
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
354
Threshold (dB) –23
Ratio ( :1)
20
Attack (ms)
15
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Width (dB)
15
Release (ms)
163
#
Title
28
Solo Vocal1
29
Solo Vocal2
30
Chorus
31
Click Erase
32
Announcer
33
Limiter1
34
Limiter2
35
Total Comp1
36
Total Comp2
Type
Parameter
285
Value
Threshold (dB) –20
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
31
COMP
Out gain (dB)
2.0
Knee
1
Release (ms)
342
Threshold (dB)
–8
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
26
COMP
Out gain (dB)
1.5
Knee
3
Release (ms)
331
Threshold (dB)
–9
Ratio ( :1)
1.7
Attack (ms)
39
COMP
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Knee
2
Release (ms)
226
Threshold (dB) –33
Ratio ( :1)
2
Attack (ms)
1
EXPAND
Out gain (dB)
2.0
Knee
2
Release (ms)
284
Threshold (dB) –14
Ratio ( :1)
2.5
Attack (ms)
1
COMPAND-H
Out gain (dB)
–2.5
Width (dB)
18
Release (ms)
180
Threshold (dB)
–9
Ratio ( :1)
3
Attack (ms)
20
COMPAND-S
Out gain (dB)
–3.0
Width (dB)
90
Release (ms)
3.90 s
Threshold (dB)
0
Ratio ( :1)
∞
Attack (ms)
0
COMP
Out gain (dB)
0.0
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
319
Threshold (dB) –18
Ratio ( :1)
3.5
Attack (ms)
94
COMP
Out gain (dB)
2.5
Knee
hard
Release (ms)
447
Threshold (dB) –16
Ratio ( :1)
6
Attack (ms)
11
COMP
Out gain (dB)
6.0
Knee
1
Release (ms)
180
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
286
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Dynamics Parameters
The dynamics effects for each channel strip include a Gate section (only for Input Channels) and a Comp section. The Gate section includes Gate and Ducking types. The Comp
section includes Compressor, Expander, Compander Hard (COMP. (H)), and Compander
Soft (COMP. (S)) types.
GATE Section (Only for Input Channels)
GATE
A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
This determines the level at which the gate effect
is applied.
RANGE (dB)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when
the gate closes.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how fast the gate opens when the
signal exceeds the threshold level.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec
88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec
96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms
(160 points)
This determines how long the gate stays open
once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold.
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
This determines how fast the gate closes once the
hold time has expired. The value is expressed as
the duration required for the level to change by
6 dB.
I/O Characteristics
Time Series Analysis
Output Signal
THRESHOLD
Output Level
Input Level
Output Level
Input Signal
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RANGE
Input Level
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Time
Time
287
Dynamics Parameters
DUCKING
Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music
level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal
level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified
amount (RANGE).
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN)
required to activate ducking.
RANGE (dB)
–70 to 0 (71 points)
This determines the amount of attenuation when
ducking is activated.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is ducked
once the ducker has been triggered.
HOLD (ms)
44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec
48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec
88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec
96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms
(160 points)
This determines how long ducking remains active
once the trigger signal has fallen below the
THRESHOLD level.
DECAY (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
This determines how soon the ducker returns to its
normal gain once the trigger signal level drops
below the threshold. The value is expressed as the
duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.
I/O Characteristics
Time Series Analysis
Output Level
Output Signal
Input Level
Output Level
Input Signal
THRESHOLD
ATTACK
HOLD
DECAY
THRESHOLD
RANGE
RANGE
Input Level
Time
Time
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
288
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
COMP Section
COMP
The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified
RATIO. The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1,
reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually
exceeds the threshold.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
This determines the level of input signal required to
trigger the compressor.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,
1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,
3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1
(16 points)
This determines the amount of compression, that
is, the change in output signal level relative to
change in input signal level.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor returns
to its normal gain once the trigger signal level
drops below the threshold. The value is expressed
as the duration required for the level to change by
6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
0.0 to +18.0 (180 points)
This sets the compressor's output signal level.
KNEE
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how compression is applied at the
threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is
applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
I/O Characteristics
(KNEE=hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)
Time Series Analysis (RATIO=∞:1)
RATIO
Output Level
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
Input Level
Output Level
Input signal
ATTACK
RELEASE
THRESHOLD
Input Level
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Time
Time
Dynamics Parameters
289
EXPAND
An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
This determines the level of input signal required to
trigger the expander.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,
1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,
3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1
(16 points)
This determines the amount of expansion.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the expander returns to
its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds
the threshold.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
This determines how soon the signal is expanded
once the signal level drops below the threshold.
The value is expressed as the duration required for
the level to change by 6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
0.0 to +18.0 (180 points)
This sets the expander's output signal level.
Hard, 1–5 (6 points)
This determines how expansion is applied at the
threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is
applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound.
KNEE
I/O Characteristics
(KNEE=hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)
Time Series Analysis (RATIO=∞:1)
Output Level
THRESHOLD
Output Signal
Input Level
Output Level
Input Signal
ATTACK
RELEASE
THRESHOLD
RATIO
Input Level
Time
Time
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
290
Appendix A: Parameter Lists
Output Level
COMPANDER HARD (H)
COMPANDER SOFT (S)
The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.
THRESHOLD
0dB
Input Level
WIDTH
The companders function differently at the following levels:
1 0 dB and higher.....................................Functions as a limiter.
2 Exceeding the threshold .......................Functions as a compressor.
3 Below the threshold and width............Functions as an expander.
The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum.
The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.
* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can
be increased by up to 18 dB.
* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change
caused by the compression and expansion processes.
Parameter
Range
Description
THRESHOLD (dB)
–54.0 to 0.0 (541 points)
This determines the level at which compression is
applied.
RATIO
1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1,
1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1,
3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,
8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, (15 points)
This determines the amount of compression.
ATTACK (ms)
0–120 (121 points)
This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has
been triggered.
RELEASE (ms)
44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec
48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec
88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec
96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec
(160 points)
This determines how soon the compressor or
expander returns to the normal gain once the
trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the
threshold respectively. The value is expressed as
the duration required for the level to change by
6 dB.
OUT GAIN (dB)
–18.0 to 0.0 (180 points)
This sets the compander's output signal level.
0–90 (91 points)
This determines how far below the threshold
expansion will be applied. The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold
and width.
WIDTH (dB)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
General Spec
291
Appendix B: Specifications
General Spec
Number of scene memories
99
Internal
Sampling Frequency
External
Normal rate: 44.1 kHz–10% to 48 kHz+6%
Double rate: 88.2 kHz–10% to 96 kHz+6%
Less than 2.0 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT (fs=48 kHz)
Signal Delay
Less than 1.1 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT (fs=96 kHz)
100 mm motorized with touch sense × 25
Fader
+10 to –138, –∞dB input faders (10bit fader data)
Fader Resolution
Total Harmonic Distortion1
(CH INPUT to STEREO OUT)
(Input Gain=Min.)
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz
0 to –138, –∞dB master fader (10bit fader data)
fs=48 kHz
Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 20 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω
Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +18 dB into 600 Ω
fs=96 kHz
Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 40 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω
Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +18 dB into 600 Ω
20 Hz–20 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω (fs=48 kHz)
Frequency Response
(CH INPUT to STEREO OUT)
20 Hz–40 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω (fs=96 kHz)
110 dB typ. DA Converter (STEREO OUT)
Dynamic Range
(maximum level to noise level)
105 dB typ. AD+DA (to STEREO OUT) @ fs=48 kHz
105 dB typ. AD+DA (to STEREO OUT) @ fs=96 kHz
–128 dB Equivalent Input Noise
Hum & Noise2
(20 Hz–20 kHz)
–92 dB residual output noise. STEREO OUT (STEREO OUT off)
–92 dB (96 dB S/N) STEREO OUT (STEREO fader at nominal level and
all CH INPUT faders at minimum level)
Rs=150 Ω
Input Gain=Max.
Input Pad =0 dB
–64 dB (68 dB S/N) STEREO OUTPUT (STEREO fader at nominal level
and one CH INPUT fader at nominal level)
74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–24) to STEREO OUT/OMNI (BUS) OUT
74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–24) to OMNI (AUX) OUT (via pre input fader)
Maximum Voltage Gain
74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–24) to CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT (via
STEREO bus)
Crosstalk
(@ 1 kHz)
–80 dB adjacent input channels (CH1–24)
–80 dB input to output
Input Gain=Min.
Phantom switch
+48 V DC is supplied to A (XLR-3-31 type) input
Pad switch
0/26 dB attenuation
Gain control
44 dB (–60 to –16), detented
Peak indicator
LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping
Signal indicator
LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal
Insert
I/O (pre AD converter)
Insert switch
on/off
AD converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=48 kHz)
Gain control
44 dB (–34 to +10), detented
Peak indicator
LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping
Signal indicator
LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal
AD converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=48 kHz)
Analog Input
(2TR IN ANALOG 1, 2)
AD converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=48 kHz)
Option Input (SLOT 1–4)
Available cards
Optional digital interface cards (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)
Digital Input
(2TR IN DIGITAL 1–3)
SRC
On/off (1:3 and 3:1 maximum input to output sample rate ratio)
AD Input (1–16: A/B)
AD Input (17–24)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
292
Appendix B: Specifications
Input patch
Phase
Gate-type3
—
Normal/reverse
On/off
Key in: 12 ch Group (1–12, 13–24, 25–36, 37–48, 49–56)/AUX1–8
On/off
Comp-type4
Key in: self /Stereo Link
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
Attenuator
EQ
Input Channel CH1–56
On/off
—
Fader
100 mm motorized (INPUT/AUX1–8)
OMNI OUT 1–8
CONTROL ROOM MONITOR
OUT
STUDIO MONITOR OUT
On/off
Pre fader/after pan
127 positions (Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63)
127 × 127 positions
LFE level
–∞, –96 dB to +10 dB (256 step)
Routing
STEREO, BUS1–8, DIRECT OUT
Direct out
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
Displayed on LCD
Peak hold on/off
Level control
Analog rotary potentiometer
AD converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling
Talkback select
Built-in microphone/AD IN 1–16
On/off
—
Level
0 to –96 dB (1 dB step)
On/off
—
Waveform
Sine 100 Hz, sine 1 kHz, sine 10 kHz, pink noise, burst noise
Routing
BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO L, R
DA converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling
Output patch
SURROUND MONITOR, STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, DIRECT OUT
1–56, INSERT OUT (CH1–56, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO)
DA converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling
Monitor select
STEREO, 2TR IN DIGITAL 1, 2TR IN DIGITAL 2, 2TR IN DIGITAL 3, 2TR
I N ANALOG 1, 2TR IN ANALOG 2, ASSIGN 1, 2 (BUS 1–8/AUX 1–8)
Mono
On/off
Dimmer
On/off
DA converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling
Level control
Analog rotary potentiometer
Phones level
Analog rotary potentiometer
Monitor select
CONTROL ROOM, STEREO, AUX 7, AUX 8, TALKBACK
DA converter
24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling
Level control
Analog rotary potentiometer
2TR OUT DIGITAL 1–3
On/off
Word length 16, 20, 24-bit
Output patch
STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, DIRECT OUT 1–56, INSERT OUT, CONTROL ROOM
Available card
Optional digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)
Output patch
SURROUND MONITOR, STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, DIRECT OUT
1–56, INSERT OUT (CH1–56, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO)
Dither
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
AUX1–8; pre fader/post fader
Surround pan
Dither
Option Output (SLOT 1–4)
On/off
Pan
Metering
STEREO OUT
On/off
0–43400 samples
Solo
OSCILLATOR
4-band PEQ5
Delay
Aux send
TALKBACK
–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
On/off
Word length 16/20/24-bit
General Spec
Comp-type4
Attenuator
EQ
STEREO
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
4-band PEQ5
On/off
—
Fader
100 mm motorized
Balance
127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)
Delay
0–43400 samples
Comp-type4
Attenuator
EQ
BUS1–8
On/off
On/off
Metering
293
Displayed on LCD
Peak hold on/off
On/off
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
4-band PEQ5
On/off
On/off
—
Fader
100 mm motorized
Delay
0–43400 samples
Level (–∞, –130 dB to 0 dB)
Bus to stereo
On/off
Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)
Metering
Comp-type4
Attenuator
EQ
AUX1–8
Dimensions
On/off
Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader
–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)
4-band PEQ5
On/off
—
Fader
100 mm motorized
Delay
0–43400 samples
Displayed on LCD
Peak hold on/off
Mute
On/off
Solo
On/off
Source
BUS1–8, SLOT 1–4
Monitor to C-R
On/off
Oscillator
Pink noise/500–2 kHz/1 kHz/50 Hz
Monitor matrix
6.1→6.1, 6.1→5.1, 6.1→3-1, 6.1→ST, 5.1→5.1, 5.1→3-1, 5.1→ST,
3.1→3.1, 3.1→ST
Bass
management
5 presets
Monitor
alignment
ATT (–12.0 dB to 12 dB 0.1 dB step), Delay (0–30.0 msec 0.02 msec
step)
Bypass
On/off
SURROUND MONITOR
Power Requirements
Peak hold on/off
On/off
Metering
INTERNAL EFFECTS
(EFFECT 1–4)
Displayed on LCD
In/out
8-in, 8-out (EFFECT1): depends on effects type
2-in, 2-out (EFFECT2–4): depends on effects type
Effect-in from
AUX1–8/INSERT OUT/effect-out
Effect-out to
Input patch/effect-in
U.S./Canada
120 V, 60 Hz 200 W
Other
220–240 V, 50/60 Hz 200 W
(H x D x W)
239 x 697 x 667 mm (9.4" x 27.4" x 26.3")
Net weight
34 kg (75 lbs)
Operating free-air temperature range
10–35°C (50–95°F)
Storage temperature range
–20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F)
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
294
Appendix B: Specifications
Supplied Accessories
AC Cable
CD-ROM (Studio Manager)
Options
Digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)
PEAK METER BRIDGE: MB02R96
SIDE PANEL: SP02R96
1. Total harmonic distortion is measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 80 kHz.
2. Hum & Noise are measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave
attenuation.
3. See “Gate Parameters” on page 294.
4. See “Comp Parameters” on page 295.
5. See “EQ Parameters” on page 294.
EQ Parameters
LOW/HPF
L-MID
H-MID
0.1–10.0
(41 points)
low shelving
HPF
Q
F
0.1–10.0
(41 points)
±18 dB
(0.1 dB step)
HPF: on/off
±18 dB
(0.1 dB step)
Gate Parameters
Threshold
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Range
–70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz
Hold
0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz
0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz
0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Decay
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
Threshold
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Range
–70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz
Ducking
0.1–10.0
(41 points)
high shelving
LPF
21.2 Hz–20 kHz (1/12 oct step)
G
Gate
HIGH /LPF
Hold
0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz
0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz
0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Decay
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
±18 dB
(0.1 dB step)
LPF: on/off
General Spec
295
Comp Parameters
Compressor
Threshold
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Ratio (x :1)
x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)
Out gain
0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)
Knee
Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 step)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Release
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
Expander
Threshold
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Ratio (x :1)
x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)
Out gain
0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)
Knee
Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 points)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Release
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
Compander H
Threshold
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Ratio (x :1)
x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points)
Out gain
–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Width
1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Release
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
Compander S
Threshold
–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Ratio (x :1)
x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points)
Out gain
–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)
Width
1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)
Attack
0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)
5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz
Release
6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz
3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz
3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
296
Appendix B: Specifications
Libraries
Effect library (EFFECT 1–4)
Compressor library
Gate library
EQ library
Channel library
Surround Monitor library
Input patch library
Output patch library
Bus to Stereo library
1. Effects #53–61 are Add-On Effects.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Presets
61 (EFFECT 2–4: 53)1
User memories
67
Presets
36
User memories
92
Presets
4
User memories
124
Presets
40
User memories
160
Presets
2
User memories
127
Presets
1
User memories
32
Presets
1
User memories
32
Presets
1
User memories
32
Presets
1
User memories
32
Analog Input Spec
297
Analog Input Spec
Input
PAD
GAIN
Actual Load For Use With
Impedance
Nominal
Sensitivity1
–60 dB
0
3k Ω
INPUT A/B 1–16
–16 dB
50–600 Ω
Mics & 600 Ω
Lines
26
–34 dB
INPUT 17–24
—
4K Ω
600 Ω Lines
+10 dB
Input level
Max.
before clip
Nominal
Connector
–70 dB
–60 dB
(0.245 mV) (0.775 mV)
–46 dB
(3.88 mV)
A: XLR-3-31 type
–26 dB
(38.8 mV)
–16 dB
(0.123 V)
–2 dB
(616 mV)
B: Phone jack (TRS)
0 dB
(775 mV)
+10 dB
(2.45 V)
+24 dB
(12.28 V)
–44 dB
(4.89 mV)
–34 dB
(15.5 mV)
–20 dB
(77.5 mV)
0 dB
(775 mV)
+10 dB
(2.45 V)
+24 dB
(12.28 V)
(Balanced)2
(Balanced)3
Phone jack (TRS)
(Balanced)3
INSERT IN 1–16
—
10K Ω
600 Ω Lines
–6 dB
(388 mV)
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+18 dB
(6.16 V)
2TR IN ANALOG
1 [L, R]
—
10K Ω
600 Ω Lines
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+18 dB
(6.16 V)
Phone jack (TRS)
2TR IN ANALOG
2 [L, R]
—
10K Ω
600 Ω Lines
–10 dBV
(0.316 V)
–10 dBV
(0.316 V)
+4 dBV
(1.58 V)
Phono
(Unbalanced)
Phone jack (TRS)4
(Balanced)3
1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dB (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit
is set to maximum gain. (All faders and level controls are maximum position.)
2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
3. Phone jacks are balanced (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND).
4. Phone jacks are wired: Tip=OUT, Ring=IN, Sleeve=GND
In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.
For 2TR IN ANALOG 2 levels, 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 Vrms.
All input AD converters (except INSERT I/O 1–16) are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling.
+48 V DC (phantom power) is supplied to CH INPUT (1–16) XLR type connectors via individual switches.
Analog Output Spec
Output
Actual Source For Use With
Impedance
Nominal
Output level
GAIN
SW1
Nominal
Max.
before clip
Connector
600 Ω
10k Ω Lines
—
–10 dBV
(0.316 V)
+4 dBV
(1.58 V)
75 Ω
600 Ω Lines
—
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+18 dB
(6.16 V)
XLR-3-32 type
STUDIO MONITOR OUT
[L, R]
150 Ω
10k Ω Lines
—
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+18 dB
(6.16 V)
Phone Jack (TRS)
C-R MONITOR OUT [L, R]
150 Ω
10k Ω Lines
—
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+18 dB
(6.16 V)
Phone Jack (TRS)
+18 dB
(default)
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+18 dB
(6.16 V)
+4 dB
–10 dB
(0.245 V)
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
10k Ω Lines
—
+4 dB
(1.23 V)
+18 dB
(6.16 V)
Phone Jack (TRS)4
8 Ω Phones
—
4 mW
25 mW
Stereo Phone Jack (TRS)
40 Ω Phones
—
12 mW
75 mW
(Unbalanced)5
STEREO OUT [L, R]
OMNI OUT 1–8
150 Ω
INSERT OUT 1–16
600 Ω
PHONES
100 Ω
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
10k Ω Lines
Phono (Unbalanced)
(Balanced)2
(Balanced)3
(Balanced)3
Phone Jack (TRS)
(Balanced)3
The maximum output level of each OMNI OUT can be set internally.
XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
Phone jacks are balanced (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND).
Phone jacks are wired: Tip=OUT, Ring=IN, Sleeve=GND
PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND).
STEREO OUT [L, R], 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 Vrms.
In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.
All output DA converters (except INSERT OUT 1–16) are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
298
Appendix B: Specifications
Digital Input Spec
Input
2TR IN DIGITAL
Format
Data length
Level
Connector
1
AES/EBU
24-bit
RS422
XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)1
2
IEC-60958
24-bit
0.5 Vpp/75 Ω
3
IEC-60958
24-bit
0.5 Vpp/75 Ω
—
—
RS422
CASCADE IN
RCA pin jack
RCA pin jack
D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P (Female)
1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
Digital Output Spec
Output
Format
1
2TR OUT DIGITAL
Data length
Level
Connector
24-bit2
RS422
XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)3
AES/EBU1
Professional use
2
IEC-609584
Consumer use
24-bit2
0.5V pp/75 Ω
RCA pin jack
3
IEC-609584
Consumer use
24-bit2
0.5V pp/75 Ω
RCA pin jack
—
—
RS422
CASCADE OUT
1. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1
Type:
2 audio channels
Emphasis:
NO
Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration
2. Dither:
word length 16/20/24 bit
3. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
4. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2, 3
Type:
2 audio channels
Category code: 2 channel PCM encoder/decoder
Copy prohibit: NO
Emphasis:
NO
Clock accuracy: Level II (1000 ppm)
Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P (Female)
299
I/O Slot Spec (1–4)
I/O Slot Spec (1–4)
Each I/O SLOT accepts a digital interface card. Only SLOT #1 has a serial interface.
Card Name
MY16-AT
Function
Input
ADAT
MY8-AT
Number of
available cards
Output
16 IN
16OUT (depends on output patch)1
4
8 IN
patch)1
4
ADAT
8 OUT (depends on output
patch)1
MY16-TD
TASCAM
16 IN
MY8-TD
TASCAM
8 IN
8 OUT (depends on output
MY16-AE
AES/EBU
16 IN
16 OUT (depends on output patch)1
4
MY8-AE
AES/EBU
8 IN
8 OUT (depends on output patch)1
4
patch)1
16 OUT (depends on output
MY8-AEB
AES/EBU
8 IN
MY4-AD
ANALOG IN
4 IN
MY8-AD
ANALOG IN
8 IN
MY4-DA
ANALOG OUT
MY8-AD24
ANALOG IN
8 IN
—
MY8-AD96
ANALOG IN
8 IN
—
MY8-DA96
ANALOG OUT
MY8-AE96S
AES/EBU
MY8-AE96
—
MY8-mLAN
mLAN
4
4
4
—
4
—
4
4 OUT (depends on output patch)1
4
4
4
patch)1
4
8 IN
8 OUT (depends on output patch)1
2
8 IN
8 OUT (depends on output
patch)1
4
8 OUT (depends on output
patch)1
4
—
AES/EBU
8 OUT (depends on output
patch)1
8 IN
8 OUT (depends on output
patch)1
MY16-mLAN
mLAN
16 IN
Waves Y56K
Effect & I/O
8 IN
8 OUT (depends on output
patch)1
2
Waves Y96K
Effect & I/O
8 IN
8 OUT (depends on output patch)1
2
Apogee AP8AD
ANALOG IN
8 IN
Apogee AP8DA
ANALOG OUT
—
16 OUT (depends on output
—
3
2
8 OUT (depends on output patch)1
2
1. See the Digital I/O chapter.
Details depend on each interface card.
Control I/O Spec
I/O Port
TO HOST
MIDI
Format
Serial
Level
Connector in Console
—
RS422
USB 1.1
0 V–3.3 V
IN
MIDI
—
DIN Connector 5P
OUT
MIDI
—
DIN Connector 5P
THRU
MIDI
—
DIN Connector 5P
DIN Connector 5P
USB
MIDI
—
SMPTE
Nominal –10 dB/10k Ω
IN
—
TTL/75 Ω (ON/OFF)2
OUT
—
TTL/75 Ω
CONTROL
—
—
D-SUB Connector 25P (Female)
METER
—
RS422
D-SUB Connector 15P (Female)
TIME CODE IN
WORD CLOCK
MTC
Mini DIN Connector 8P
B type USB connector
SMPTE
XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)1
BNC Connector
BNC Connector
1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).
2. This switch is on the rear panel.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
300
Appendix B: Specifications
Connector Pin Assignments
CASCADE IN
Pin
CASCADE OUT
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
GND
35 GND
1
GND
35 GND
2
INPUT 1-2(+)
36 INPUT 1-2(–)
2
OUTPUT 1-2(+)
36 OUTPUT 1-2(–)
3
INPUT 3-4(+)
37 INPUT 3-4(–)
3
OUTPUT 3-4(+)
37 OUTPUT 3-4(–)
4
INPUT 5-6(+)
38 INPUT 5-6(–)
4
OUTPUT 5-6(+)
38 OUTPUT 5-6(–)
5
INPUT 7-8(+)
39 INPUT 7-8(–)
5
OUTPUT 7-8(+)
39 OUTPUT 7-8(–)
6
INPUT 9-10(+)
40 INPUT 9-10(–)
6
OUTPUT 9-10(+)
40 OUTPUT 9-10(–)
7
INPUT 11-12(+)
41 INPUT 11-12(–)
7
OUTPUT 11-12(+)
41 OUTPUT 11-12(–)
8
INPUT 13-14(+)
42 INPUT 13-14(–)
8
OUTPUT 13-14(+)
42 OUTPUT 13-14(–)
9
INPUT 15-16(+)
43 INPUT 15-16(–)
9
OUTPUT 15-16(+)
43 OUTPUT 15-16(–)
10 DTR IN(+)
44 DTR IN(–)
10 DTR OUT(+)
44 DTR OUT(–)
11 RTS OUT(+)
45 RTS OUT(–)
11 RTS IN(+)
45 RTS IN(–)
12 GND
46 GND
12 GND
46 GND
13 WORD CLOCK IN(+)
47 WORD CLOCK IN(–)
13 WORD CLOCK OUT(+)
47 WORD CLOCK OUT(–)
14 WORD CLOCK OUT(+)
48 WORD CLOCK OUT(–)
14 WORD CLOCK IN(+)
48 WORD CLOCK IN(–)
15 CONTROL IN(+)
49 CONTROL IN(–)
15 CONTROL OUT(+)
49 CONTROL OUT(–)
16 CONTROL OUT(+)
50 CONTROL OUT(–)
16 CONTROL IN(+)
50 CONTROL IN(–)
17 GND
51 ID6 IN
17 GND
51 ID6 OUT
18 GND
52 ID6 OUT
18 GND
52 ID6 IN
19 INPUT 17-18(+)
53 INPUT 17-18(–)
19 OUTPUT 17-18(+)
53 OUTPUT 17-18(–)
20 INPUT 19-20(+)
54 INPUT 19-20(–)
20 OUTPUT 19-20(+)
54 OUTPUT 19-20(–)
21 INPUT 21-22(+)
55 INPUT 21-22(–)
21 OUTPUT 21-22(+)
55 OUTPUT 21-22(–)
22 INPUT 23-24(+)
56 INPUT 23-24(–)
22 OUTPUT 23-24(+)
56 OUTPUT 23-24(–)
23 RESERVED
57 RESERVED
23 RESERVED
57 RESERVED
24 RESERVED
58 RESERVED
24 RESERVED
58 RESERVED
25 RESERVED
59 RESERVED
25 RESERVED
59 RESERVED
26 RESERVED
60 RESERVED
26 RESERVED
60 RESERVED
27 ID0 IN
61 ID1 IN
27 ID0 OUT
61 ID1 OUT
28 ID2 IN
62 ID3 IN
28 ID2 OUT
62 ID3 OUT
29 ID4 IN
63 ID5 IN
29 ID4 OUT
63 ID5 OUT
30 ID0 OUT
64 ID1 OUT
30 ID0 IN
64 ID1 IN
31 ID2 OUT
65 ID3 OUT
31 ID2 IN
65 ID3 IN
32 ID4 OUT
66 ID5 OUT
32 ID4 IN
66 ID5 IN
33 MSB IN
67 2CH/LINE IN
33 MSB OUT
67 2CH/LINE OUT
34 FG
68 FG
34 FG
68 FG
CONTROL Port
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
GPO0
10
GPI1
19
GND
2
GPO2
11
N.C.
20
GND
3
GPO4
12
SMODE1
21
+5V
4
GPO6
13
SPARE1
22
GPI0
5
GND
14
GPO1
23
N.C.
6
GND
15
GPO3
24
SOLO1
7
GND
16
GPO5
25
MAS/SLV1
8
GND
17
GPO7
9
+5V
18
GND
1. For 02R SOLO control.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
239 mm
PAD
PAN
FADER
ON
2
ON
1
15
20
30
15
20
30
50
10
10
40
5
5
50
0
40
5
2
26
50
SOLO
SOLO
10
SEL
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
3
27
51
3
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
2
AUTO
PLUG INS
1
0
AUX
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
4
28
52
4
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
3
CHANNEL
INSERTS
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
5
29
53
5
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
4
ASSIGN 2
AUX 8
AUX 7
ASSIGN 1
AUX 4
EFFECTS / PLUG INS
SEL
1
25
49
AUX
FADER MODE
INTERNAL
EFFECTS
5
10
AUX 6
AUX 5
ENCODER MODE
AUX 2
AUX 1
OUTPUT
PATCH
VIEW
UTILITY
OFF
ON
AUX 3
METER
INPUT
PATCH
REMOTE
GROUP
MIDI
PAIR
AUX SELECT
4
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
SIGNAL
SETUP
OFF
ON
DIO
AUTOMIX
AUTO
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
INSERT
DISPLAY ACCESS
INSERT
3
1
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
SIGNAL
OFF
ON
-60
2
GAIN
26dB
+ 48V
PEAK
-16
ON
OFF
SIGNAL
OFF
ON
-60
26dB
+ 48V
PEAK
GAIN
ON
OFF
SIGNAL
-16
26dB
+ 48V
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
6
30
54
6
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
INSERT
5
SIGNAL
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
OFF
ON
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
7
31
55
7
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
INSERT
6
SIGNAL
10
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
8
32
56
8
ON
SOLO
SEL
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
10
10
34
AUX 2
9
33
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
OFF
ON
AUX 1
9
ON
SOLO
SEL
8
INSERT
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
SIGNAL
AUTO
OFF
ON
10
0
5
INSERT
7
SIGNAL
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
AUTO
OFF
ON
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
10
11
35
OFF
ON
AUX 3
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
11
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
INSERT
9
SIGNAL
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
10
12
36
AUX 4
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
12
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
INSERT
10
SIGNAL
13
37
13
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
5
14
38
PEAK
10
15
39
15
ON
SOLO
SEL
10
16
40
OFF
ON
AUX 8
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
16
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
INSERT
13
SIGNAL
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
5
17
41
BUS 1
50
40
30
20
15
10
17
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
DISPLAY
EQ ON
10
OFF
ON
DIRECT
8
6
INSERT
16
SIGNAL
125
kHz
Hz
dB
GAIN
LOW
18
42
18
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
9
1
3
19
43
19
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
11
BUS 3
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
10
2
10
20
44
19 20
34
20
DELAY
R
EVEN
L
ODD
5
6
21
45
21
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
14
BUS 5
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
13
10
22
46
22
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
BUS 6
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
7
15
23
47
23
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
10
5
24
48
BUS 8
50
40
30
20
15
10
24
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
LINK
STORE
MASTER
ON
SEL
AUTO
STEREO
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
REMOTE
STEREO
1 24
ENTER
SCRUB
SHUTTLE
STOP
REW
SET
10
AUX8
2TR A1
2TR A2
STEREO
SLOT
DIMMER
FF
5
DEC
PLAY
2
6
1
3
REC
7
8
4
INC
TALKBACK
0
10
CONTROL ROOM LEVEL
0
10
SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL
BUS
ASSIGN2
ASSIGN1
SURROUND
2TR D3
2TR D2
2TR D1
CONTROL ROOM
CLEAR
SOLO
AUX7
10
PHONES
0
STEREO
STUDIO
DISPLAY
CONTROL
ROOM
10
PHONES
LEVEL
MONITOR
STUDIO
LEVEL
0
0
TALKBACK LEVEL
MACHINE CONTROL
LOCATE MEMORY
RECALL
kHz
Hz
dB
GAIN
DISPLAY
10.0
25 48
LAYER
Q
EFFECT
HIGH
GAIN
HOLD
GRAB
FREQUENCY
RELEASE
DECAY
SCENE MEMORY
kHz
Hz
dB
GAIN
HIGH MID
ATTACK
ATTACK
00
0
24
34
23 24
4.00
5
23
34
DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE
FREQUENCY
Q
DISPLAY
BUS 7
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
16
8
kHz
Hz
dB
GAIN
LOW MID
1.00
FREQUENCY
RATIO
Q
GAIN
GAIN
PEAK
+10
+10
SIGNAL
34
22
21 22
THRESHOLD
R
PAN / SURROUND
PHASE /
INSERT
DISPLAY ACCESS
21
34
PEAK
GAIN
GAIN
SIGNAL
+10
+10
COMP
BUS 4
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
20
ON
19
34
RANGE
SOLO
SEL
PEAK
GAIN
GAIN
SIGNAL
+10
+10
SELECTED CHANNEL
17 18
34
18
THRESHOLD
AUTO
12
4
USER DEFINED KEYS
Q
FREQUENCY
EQUALIZER
17
34
GATE / COMP
GATE
L
PEAK
GAIN
GAIN
SIGNAL
+10
+10
DISPLAY
OFF
ON
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
GATE ON COMP ON
DYNAMICS
STEREO
7
5
2
4
1
3
ROUTING
INSERT
15
SIGNAL
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
BUS 2
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
FOLLOW PAN
10
0
5
OFF
ON
DISPLAY
INSERT
14
SIGNAL
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
667 mm
AUX 7
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
OFF
ON
AUTO
INSERT
12
SIGNAL
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
26dB
+ 48V
-16
AUX 6
50
40
30
20
15
10
14
ON
SOLO
SEL
AUTO
OFF
ON
10
0
5
INSERT
11
SIGNAL
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
AUX 5
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
OFF
ON
-60
ON
OFF
GAIN
PEAK
-16
26dB
+ 48V
Dimensions
301
Dimensions
697 mm
Specifications and external appearance subject to change without notice.
For European Model
Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.
Inrush Current: 70 A
Conformed Environment: E1, E2, E3 and E4
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
302
Appendix C: MIDI
Appendix C: MIDI
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
Program
Change #
Initial
Scene #
1
2
User
Scene #
Program
Change #
Initial
Scene #
01
44
02
45
3
03
4
5
Program
Change#
Initial
Scene #
44
87
87
45
88
88
46
46
89
89
04
47
47
90
90
05
48
48
91
91
6
06
49
49
92
92
7
07
50
50
93
93
8
08
51
51
94
94
9
09
52
52
95
95
10
10
53
53
96
96
11
11
54
54
97
97
12
12
55
55
98
98
13
13
56
56
99
99
14
14
57
57
100
00
15
15
58
58
101
—
16
16
59
59
102
—
17
17
60
60
103
—
18
18
61
61
104
—
19
19
62
62
105
—
20
20
63
63
106
—
21
21
64
64
107
—
22
22
65
65
108
—
23
23
66
66
109
—
24
24
67
67
110
—
25
25
68
68
111
—
26
26
69
69
112
—
27
27
70
70
113
—
28
28
71
71
114
—
29
29
72
72
115
—
30
30
73
73
116
—
31
31
74
74
117
—
32
32
75
75
118
—
33
33
76
76
119
—
34
34
77
77
120
—
35
35
78
78
121
—
36
36
79
79
122
—
37
37
80
80
123
—
38
38
81
81
124
—
39
39
82
82
125
—
40
40
83
83
126
—
41
41
84
84
127
—
42
42
85
85
128
—
43
43
86
86
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
User
Scene #
User
Scene #
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
303
Initial Parameter to Control Change Table
CHANNEL1
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
ON
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
MID
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
MASTER
MASTER
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
LOW
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
STEREO
STEREO
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
FADER L
BALANCE
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
MASTER
MASTER
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
LOW
STEREO
STEREO
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
304
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL2
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
MID
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
LOW
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
305
CHANNEL3
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER H
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
FADER L
MID
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
LOW
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
PAN
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER
NO ASSIGN
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
CHANNEL
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
AUX5
AUX6
AUX7
AUX8
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
306
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL4
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
LOW
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
NO ASSIGN
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
307
CHANNEL5
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
G LOW L
LOW
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
NO ASSIGN
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
308
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL6
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LOW H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
G LOW
G LOW
G LOW
G LOW
G LOW
G LOW
G LOW
G LOW
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
LOW
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LOW
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
NO ASSIGN
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LOW
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
309
CHANNEL7
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
LOW
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
NO ASSIGN
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
310
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL8
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G LO-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G LO-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
LOW
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F LO-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
NO ASSIGN
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q LO-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
311
CHANNEL9
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
LOW
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
NO ASSIGN
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
312
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL10
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
G HI-MID H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
G HI-MID L
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
LOW
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
F HI-MID
NO ASSIGN
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
Q HI-MID
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
313
CHANNEL11
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
LOW
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
NO ASSIGN
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
314
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL12
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
LOW
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
NO ASSIGN
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
315
CHANNEL13
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
G HIGH H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
G HIGH L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
LOW
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
F HIGH
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
NO ASSIGN
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
Q HIGH
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
316
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL14
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
LOW
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
NO ASSIGN
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
Scene Memory to Program Change Table
317
CHANNEL15
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
ATT H
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
ATT L
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
HPF ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
LPF ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
318
Appendix C: MIDI
CHANNEL16
#
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
HIGH
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
LOW
#
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
HIGH
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ
MID
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
NO ASSIGN
LOW
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
INPUT41
INPUT42
INPUT43
INPUT44
INPUT45
INPUT46
INPUT47
INPUT48
INPUT49
INPUT50
INPUT51
INPUT52
INPUT53
INPUT54
INPUT55
INPUT56
MIDI Data Format
319
MIDI Data Format
In the following tables, “tx” means that transmission from the 02R96 is
possible, and “rx” means that receiving messages at the 02R96 is possible.
1. CHANNEL MESSAGE
Command
8n NOTE OFF
9n NOTE ON
Bn CONTROL CHANGE
Cn PROGRAM CHANGE
rx/tx
rx
rx
rx/tx
rx/tx
function
Control the internal effects
Control the internal effects
Control parameters
Switch scene memories
4.2.2 PARAMTER CHANGE
Command
F0 43 1n 3E 0B ... F7
RARAMETER CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 0B ... F7
PARAMETER REQUEST
F0 43 1n 3E 7F ... F7
PARAMETER CHANGE
F0 43 3n 3E 7F ... F7
PARAMETER REQUEST
rx/tx
rx/tx
function
02R96-specific parameter change
rx/tx
02R96-specific parameter request
rx/tx
General purpose digital mixer parameter
change
General purpose digital mixer parameter
request
rx/tx
The following data types of parameter change are used by the 02R96.
2. SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE
Command
F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER
FRAME
F2 SONG POSITION POINTER
rx/tx
rx
rx
function
Used when TIME REFERENCE
is MTC.
Used when TIME REFERENCE
is MIDI CLOCK.
3. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
Command
F8 TIMING CLOCK
FA START
FB CONTINUE
FC STOP
FE ACTIVE SENSING
FF SYSTEM RESET
rx/tx
rx
rx*
rx*
rx*
rx
rx
function
MIDI clock
Start automix (from the beginning)
Start automix (from the middle)
Stop automix
Check MIDI cable connections
Clear running status
* Received only when the AUTOMIX TIME REFERENCE setting is
set to MIDI CLOCK.
The 02R96 can correctly process Exclusive Messges of a length of F0
through F7 of 4096 bytes or shorter.
4.1 Real Time System Exclusive
function
MMC command
MMC response
Used when TIME REFERENCE
is MTC.
4.2 System Exclusive Message
4.2.1 Bulk Dump
Command
rx/tx
F0 43 0n 7E ... F7 BULK DUMP DATA
rx/tx
F0 43 2n 7E ... F7 BULK DUMP REQUEST rx/tx
function
BULK DUMP DATA
BULK DUMP REQUEST
The following data types of bulk dump are used on the 02R96.
Data name
'm'
'S'
'L'
'I'
'V'
'U'
'C'
'P'
'Q'
'Y'
'G'
'E'
'H'
'R'
'O'
'J'
'K'
'a'
'N'
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx
rx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
function
Edit buffer
Patch data
Setup memory
Backup memory
Function (recall, store, title, clear)
Function (pair)
Function (effect)
Sort table data
Function (attribute, link)
Key remote
Remote meter
Remote time counter
Automix status
Format Details
1. NOTE OFF
4. EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
Command
rx/tx
F0 7F dd 06 ... F7 MMC
tx
COMMAND
F0 7F dd 07 ... F7 MMC RESPONSE rx
F0 7F dd 01 ... F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx
Type (HEX)
1 (01)
2 (02)
3 (03)
4 (04)
16 (10)
17 (11)
18 (12)
19 (13)
20 (14)
32 (20)
33 (21)
34 (22)
35 (23)
function
Scene memory & request (compressed data)
Setup memory & request
User defined layer & request
User defined plug-in & request
User defined key & request
User assignable layer & request
Control change table & request
Program change table & request
Equalizer library & request
Compressor library & request
Gate library & request
Effect library & request
Channel library & request
Input patch library & request
Output patch library & request
Bus to stereo library & request
Surround monitor library & request
Automix & request (compressed data)
Plug-in effect card & request
(8n)
Reception
If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these message are echoed.
If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control
effects.
STATUS
DATA
1000nnnn 8n Note off message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (ignored)
2. NOTE ON
(9n)
Reception
If [OTHER ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
If the [Rx CH] matches, these messages are received and used to control
effects.
STATUS
DATA
1001nnnn 9n Note on message
0nnnnnnn nn Note number
0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)
3. CONTROL CHANGE
(Bn)
Reception
If [Control Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
If [TABLE] is selected, these message are received if [Control Change Rx]
is ON, and will control parameters according to the [Control assign table]
settings.
The parameters that can be set are defined in the Control Change Assign
Parameter List.
If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received if [Control Change Rx]
is ON and the [Rx CH] matches, and will control the parameter that is
specified by the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data
Entry control number (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the
Control Change Assign Parameter List.
Transmission
If [TABLE] is selected, operating a parameter specified in the [Control assign table] will cause these messages to be transmitted if [Control Change
Tx] is ON. The parameters that can be specified are defined in the Control
Change Assign Parameter List.
If [NRPN] is selected, operating a specified parameter will cause data to be
transmitted on the [Tx CH] if [Control Change Tx] is ON, using the four
messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and Data Entry control number (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the Control Change Assign Parameter List.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
320
Appendix C: MIDI
This data cannot be transmitted via Program Change to Studio Manager
since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter Change messages will always be used.)
If [TABLE] is selected
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn Bn Control change
0nnnnnnn nn Control number (0-95, 102-119)
0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127)
Formula for converting Control values into parameter data:
paramSteps= paramMax - paramMin + 1;
add=
paramWidth / paramSteps;
mod=
paramWidth - add * paramSteps;
curValue= parm * add + mod / 2;
(1) When the assigned parameter can be set in 128 steps or less:
paramWidth = 127; rxValue = Control value;
(2) When the assigned parameter can be set in 128 through 16383 steps:
paramWidth = 16383;
(2-1) When both High and Low data are received:
rxValue = Control value (High) * 128 + Control value (Low);
(2-2) When only Low data is received:
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value (Low);
(2-3) When only High data is received:
rxValue = Control value (High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);
(3) When the assigned parameter can be set in 16384 through 2097151
steps:
paramWidth = 2097151;
(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data are received:
rxValue = Control value (High) * 16384 + Control value (Middle) *
128 + Control value (Low);
4. PROGRAM CHANGE
(Cn)
Reception
If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
If [Program Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches, these messages
will be received. However if [OMNI] is ON, they will be received regardless
of the channel. When a message is received, a Scene Memory will be recalled according to the settings of the [Program Change Table].
Transmission
If [Program Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted according to
the settings of the [Program Change Table] on the [Tx CH] channel when
a scene memory is recalled.
If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number,
the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted. Transmission
to Studio Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed
since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter Changes will always be used.)
STATUS
DATA
1100nnnn Cn Program change
0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127)
5 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME(F1)
Reception
This is echoed if [OTHER COMMANDS ECHO] is ON.
Automix synchronizes this if the data is received at the port specified by the
TIME REFERENCE setting.
STATUS
DATA
1100nnnn F1 Quarter frame message
0tttdddd td Type & data
6. SONG POSITION POINTER
(F2)
(3-2) When only Low data is received:
rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value (Low);
Reception
If this is received when the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, the automix will move to the song position that was received.
(3-3) When only Middle data is received:
rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value (Middle) * 128;
STATUS
DATA
(3-4) When only High data is received:
rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value (High) * 16384;
(3-5) When Middle and Low data are received:
rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value (Middle) * 128 +
Control value (Low);
(3-6) When High and Low data are received:
rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value (High) * 16384 +
Control value (Low);
(3-7) When High and Middle data are received:
rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value (High) * 16384 + Control value (Middle) * 128;
if ( rxValue > paramWidth)
rxValue = paramWidth;
param = ( rxValue - mod / 2) / add;
If [NRPN] is selected
STATUS
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
STATUS
DATA
1011nnnn
01100010
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
01100011
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
00000110
0vvvvvvv
1011nnnn
00100110
0vvvvvvv
Bn
62
vv
Bn
63
vv
Bn
06
vv
Bn
26
vv
Control changeDATA
NRPN LSB
LSB of parameter number
Control change*1
NRPN MSB
MSB of parameter number
Control change*1
MSB of data entry
MSB of parameter data
11110010 F2 Song position pointer
0vvvvvvv vv Song position LSB
0vvvvvvv vv Song position MSB
7. TIMING CLOCK
(F8)
Reception
If the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, this message
is used to synchronize automix. It is also used to control effects. This message is transmitted 24 times per quarter note.
STATUS
11111000 F8 Timing clock
8. START
(FA)
Reception
This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, and will start the automix. In actuality, automix will start when
the next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the START message.
STATUS
11111010 FA Start
9. CONTINUE
(FB)
Reception
This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, and will cause automix to start from the current song position. In
actuality, automix will start when the next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the CONTINUE message.
STATUS
11111011 FB Continue
Control change*1
LSB of data entry
LSB of parameter data
*1) The second and subsequent STATUS need not be added during
transmission. Reception must be implemented so that reception occurs whether or not STATUS is present.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
10. STOP
(FC)
Reception
This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI
CLOCK, and will cause automix to stop.
STATUS
11111100 FC Stop
Format Details
11. ACTIVE SENSING
(FE)
Reception
Once this message has been received, the failure to receive any message for
an interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initialized, such as by clearing the Running Status.
STATUS
11111110 FE Active sensing
12. SYSTEM RESET
(FF)
Reception
When this message is received, MIDI communications will be cleared, e.g.,
by clearing the Running Status.
STATUS
11111111 FF System reset
13. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0)
13.1 MIDI TIME CODE (FULL MESSAGE)
The Automix synchronizes these messages when they are received at a port
specified by the TIME REFERENCE setting.
13.2 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL (MMC)
These messages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the
02R96 is operated.
13.3 BULK DUMP
This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored
within the 02R96.
The basic format is as follows.
Conversion from actual data into bulk data
d[0~6]: actual data
b[0~7]: bulk data
b[0] = 0;
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
if( d[I]&0x80){
b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);
}
b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;
}
Restoration from bulk data into actual data
d[0~6]: actual data
b[0~7]: bulk data
for( I=0; I<7; I++){
b[0] <<= 1;
d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);
}
13.3.1 Scene memory bulk dump format
(compressed data)
The 02R96 can transmit and receive scene memories in compressed form.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
For DUMP DATA
F0 43 0n 7E cc cc <Model ID> tt mm mm [Data ...]
cs F7
For DUMP REQUEST
F0 43 2n 7E <Model ID> tt mm mm F7
Device Number
n
DATA COUNT (the number of bytes that follow this, ending
cc cc
<Model ID>
tt
mm mm
cs
DATA NAME
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01101101
0mmmmmmm
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
6D
mh
Transmission
This message is transmitted on the [Tx CH] by key operations in the [MIDI]-[BULK DUMP] screen.
A bulk dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] in response to a bulk dump
request.
The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8-bit data into eight
words of 7-bit data.
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'm'
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
CHECK SUM
Reception
This message is received if [Bulk RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the
device number included in the SUB STATUS.
When a bulk dump is received, it is immediately written into the specified
memory.
When a bulk dump request is received, a bulk dump is immediately transmitted.
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number (minimum number
DATA NUMBER
A unique header (Model ID) is used to determine whether the device is a
02R96.
CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT
(LOW) and end before CHECK SUM, taking the binary compliment of
this sum, and then setting bit 7 to 0.
CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F
The 02R96 can transmit and receive BULK data only if the size of a MIDI
packet (F0 - F7) is 4096 bytes or smaller.
If large data consists of multiple MIDI packets, they can be transferred sequentially.
System exclusive message
m=0-99, 256, 8192 (Scene0-99, EDIT
BUFFER, UNDO)
0mmmmmmm ml Receive is effective 1-99, 256, 8192
before the checksum)
Model ID (for 02R96, 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 35 34)
DATA TYPE
321
number)
DATA
CHECK SUM
EOX
0ddddddd
:
:
0ddddddd
0eeeeeee
11110111
ds Scene data of block[bb]
de
ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
F7 End of exclusive
13.3.2 Scene memory bulk dump request format
(compressed data)
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the scene number
that is being requested. If this is 256, the data of the Edit Buffer will be
bulk-dumped. If this is 8192, the data of the Undo Buffer will be
bulk-dumped.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01101101
0mmmmmmm
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
6D
mh
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'm'
m=0-99, 256, 8192 (Scene0-99, EDIT
BUFFER, UNDO)
0mmmmmmm ml
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
322
Appendix C: MIDI
EOX
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
00110100
01001100
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
DATA NAME
13.3.3 Setup memory bulk dump format
Of the setup memory of the 02R96, this bulk-dumps data other than the
User defined layer, User define plug-in, User defined keys, User assignable
layer, Control change table, and Program change table.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01010011
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
53
02
00
tt
'M'
''
13.3.6 User defined layer bulk dump request format
''
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'S'
CHECK SUM
EOX
13.3.4 Setup memory bulk dump request format
DATA NAME
EOX
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'S'
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
01001100
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111
4C 'L'
00
bb b=0-3 (bank no.1-4)
F7 End of exclusive
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
DATA NAME
EOX
System exclusive message
13.3.5 User defined layer bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
No.256 = Current
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
53
02
00
F7
CHECK SUM
EOX
data count = ch * 128 + cl
DATA
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01010011
00000010
00000000
11110111
b=0-3 (bank no.1-4)
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
Universal bulk dump
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds Setup data of block[bb]
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
'L'
DATA
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
'L'
'4'
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds User defined layer data of block[bb]
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
34
4C
00
bb
tt
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
13.3.7 User defined plug-in bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01001001
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
'C'
'5'
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'I'
b=0-7 (bank no.1-8)
CHECK SUM
EOX
'M'
'8'
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
'L'
''
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
DATA
Universal bulk dump
''
System exclusive message
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds User define plug-in data of block[bb]
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
data count = ch * 128 + cl
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
49
00
bb
tt
Format Details
13.3.8 User defined plug-in bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01001001
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
49
00
bb
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'I'
b=0-7 (bank no.1-8)
End of exclusive
13.3.9 User defined keys bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01010110
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
56
00
bb
tt
System exclusive message
EOX
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)
change if the same bank is being used.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01010101
00000000
0bbbbbbb
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'V'
b=0-7 (bank no.A-H)
CHECK SUM
EOX
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
data count = ch * 128 + cl
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'U'
b=0-3 (bank no.1-4)
13.3.12 User assignable layer bulk dump request
format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
13.3.10 User defined keys bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
DATA NAME
Universal bulk dump
CHECK SUM
EOX
DATA NAME
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
56
00
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
''
DATA
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01010110
00000000
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
'L'
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds User defined key data of block[bb]
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
System exclusive message
DATA
data count = ch * 128 + cl
''
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
55
00
bb
tt
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds User assignable layer data of block[bb]
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
'M'
0bbbbbbb bb b=0-7 (bank no.A-H)
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.3.11 User assignable layer bulk dump format
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
Universal bulk dump
323
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'V'
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01010101
00000000
0bbbbbbb
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
55
00
bb
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'U'
b=0-3 (bank no.1-4)
End of exclusive
13.3.13 Control change table bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
324
Appendix C: MIDI
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01000011
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
35
34
43
02
00
tt
'5'
'4'
'C'
No.256 = Current
DATA
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds Control change table data of block[bb]
CHECK SUM
EOX
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.3.14 Control change table bulk dump request
format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01000011
00000010
00000000
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
43
02
00
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'C'
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive
13.3.15 Program change table bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01010000
00000010
00000000
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
50
02
00
tt
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'P'
No.256 = Current
End of exclusive
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01010001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
51
mh
ml
tt
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'Q'
0-199 (EQ Library no.1-200),
256- (Channel current data)
DATA
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds EQ Library data of block[bb]
CHECK SUM
EOX
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
'5'
'4'
13.3.18 Equalizer library bulk dump request format
'P'
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See above)
No.256 = Current
CHECK SUM
EOX
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.3.16 Program change table bulk dump request
format
F0
43
2n
7E
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
''
'C'
'L'
13.3.17 Equalizer library bulk dump format
''
'8'
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
50
02
00
F7
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number.
0:Library no.1 - 199:Library no.200, 256:CH1 - 311:CH56, 384:BUS1 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 - 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO L - 769:STEREO R,
8192:UNDO
256 and up are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer (excluding UNDO).
For reception by the 02R96, only the user area is valid. (40-199, 256-)
'M'
DATA
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
EOX
data count = ch * 128 + cl
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds Program change table data of block[bb]
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01010000
00000010
00000000
11110111
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01010001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
51
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'Q'
0-199 (EQ Library no.1-200),
256- (Channel current data)
End of exclusive
Format Details
13.3.19 Compressor library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.1 - 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 - 351:CH96, 384:BUS1 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 - 523:AUX12, 640:MATRIX1L - 647:MATRIX4R,
768:STEREO L - 769:STEREO R, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer. For reception by the 02R96, only the user area is valid. (36-127, 256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01011001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
59
mh
ml
tt
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'Y'
0-127 (COMP Library no.1-128),
256- (Channel current data)
DATA
CHECK SUM
EOX
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.3.20 Compressor library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above)
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01011001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
59
mh
ml
F7
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'Y'
0-127 (COMP Library no.1-128),
256- (Channel current data)
End of exclusive
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.1 - 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 - 311:CH56, 8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer. For reception by the 02R96, only the user area is valid. (4-127, 256-)
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
'C'
'5'
'4'
'G'
0-127 (GATE Library no.1-128),
256-351 (Channel current data)
13.3.22 Gate library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01000111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
47
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'G'
0-127 (GATE Library no.1-128),
256-351 (Channel current data)
End of exclusive
System exclusive message
13.3.21 Gate library bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
'8'
CHECK SUM
EOX
'M'
''
''
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
'L'
''
''
DATA
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
20
20
38
43
35
34
47
mh
ml
tt
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds GATE Library data of block[bb]
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds COMP Library data of block[bb]
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01000111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
325
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
13.3.23 Effect library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.1 - 127:Library no.128, 256:Effect1 - 259:Effect4, 8192:UNDO
256-263 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer.
For reception by the 02R96, only the user area is valid. (61-127, 256-263)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01000101
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
'L'
'M'
DATA
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
45
mh
ml
tt
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'E'
0-127 (Effect Library no.1-128),
256-259 (Effect1-4 current)
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds Effect Library data of block[bb]
:
:
0ddddddd de
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
326
Appendix C: MIDI
CHECK SUM
EOX
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.3.24 Effect library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01000101
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
45
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'E'
0-127 (Effect Library no.1-128),
256-259 (Effect1-4 current)
End of exclusive
13.3.25 Channel library bulk dump format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 - 128:Library no.128, 256:CH1 - 311:CH56, 384:BUS1 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 - 519:AUX8, 768:STEREO L - 769:STEREO R,
8192:UNDO
256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer. For reception by the 02R96, only the user area is valid. (2-128,256-)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01001000
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
48
mh
ml
tt
DATA NAME
System exclusive message
EOX
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01010010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'H'
0-128 (Channel Library no.0-128),
256- (Current data)
CHECK SUM
EOX
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
'H'
0-128 (Channel Library no.0-128),
256- (Current data)
End of exclusive
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
52
mh
ml
tt
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'R'
0-32 (Input patch Library no.0-32),
256 (Current data)
CHECK SUM
EOX
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.3.28 Input patch library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
13.3.26 Channel library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above)
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
'4'
''
DATA
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
'5'
DATA
'L'
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds Channel Library data of block[bb]
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
'C'
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds Input patch Library data of block[bb]
data count = ch * 128 + cl
''
'8'
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:Current data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the 02R96, only the user area is valid. (1-32,256)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
'M'
38
43
35
34
48
mh
ml
F7
13.3.27 Input patch library bulk dump format
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
Universal bulk dump
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01001000
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01010010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
52
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'R'
0-32 (Input patch Library no.0-32),
256 (Current data)
End of exclusive
System exclusive message
13.3.29 Output patch library bulk dump format
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:Current data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the 02R96, only the user area is valid. (1-32,256)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
STATUS
11110000 F0 System exclusive message
ID No.
01000011 43 Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Format Details
FORMAT No. 01111110 7E
COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch
COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl
01001100 4C
01001101 4D
00100000 20
00100000 20
00111000 38
01000011 43
00110101 35
00110100 34
DATA NAME 01001111 4F
0mmmmmmm mh
0mmmmmmm ml
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt
Universal bulk dump
DATA
data count = ch * 128 + cl
'L'
'M'
''
CHECK SUM
EOX
13.3.32 Bus to stereo library bulk dump request format
'C'
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above)
'5'
'4'
'O'
0-32 (Output patch Library no.0-32),
256 (Current data)
CHECK SUM
EOX
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
13.3.30 Output patch library bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above)
DATA NAME
EOX
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
4F
mh
ml
F7
EOX
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
4A
mh
ml
tt
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
4A
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'J'
0-32 (Bus to stereo Library no.0-32),
256 (Current data)
End of exclusive
13.3.33 Surround monitor library bulk dump format
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:Current data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the 02R96, only the user area is valid. (1-32,256)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
'4'
'O'
0-32 (Output patch Library no.0-32),
256 (Current data)
End of exclusive
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number.
0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:Current data, 8192:UNDO
For reception by the 02R96, only the user area is valid. (1-32,256)
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
DATA NAME 01001010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01001010
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
System exclusive message
13.3.31 Bus to stereo library bulk dump format
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
de
ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
F7 End of exclusive
'8'
DATA
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01001111
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
ds Bus to stereo Library data of block[bb]
''
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
0ddddddd ds Output patch Library data of block[bb]
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
0ddddddd
:
:
0ddddddd
0eeeeeee
11110111
327
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
DATA NAME
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01001011
0mmmmmmm
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
4B
mh
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'K'
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
DATA
0ddddddd ds Surround Monitor Library data of
CHECK SUM
EOX
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
block[bb]
'L'
'M'
''
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number (minimum number
Universal bulk dump
''
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
0-32 (Surround Monitor Library
no.0-32),
0mmmmmmm ml 256 (Current data)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
data count = ch * 128 + cl
System exclusive message
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'J'
13.3.34 Surround monitor library bulk dump request
format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above)
0-32 (Bus to stereo Library no.0-32),
256 (Current data)
total block number (minimum number
is 0)
0bbbbbbb bb current block number (0-total block
number)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
F0
43
2n
7E
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
328
Appendix C: MIDI
DATA NAME
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01001011
0mmmmmmm
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
4B
mh
'L'
13.3.37 Plug-in effect card bulk dump format
'M'
The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the slot number.
0:SLOT 3 - 1:SLOT 4
The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different
than the card that is installed in the slot.
The data is not transmitted if a valid plug-in effect card is not installed.
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'K'
0-32 (Surround Monitor Library
no.0-32),
0mmmmmmm ml 256 (Current data)
EOX
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.3.35 Automix bulk dump format
(compressed data)
The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the library number.
0:Library no.1 - 15:Library no.16, 256:Current automix data
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
COUNT HIGH
COUNT LOW
DATA NAME
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01100001
0mmmmmmm
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
61
mh
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
DATA NAME
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01111110
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01001110
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0bbbbbbb
F0
43
0n
7E
ch
cl
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
4E
mh
ml
bh
'L'
''
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
data count = ch * 128 + cl
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'N'
m=0-1 (SLOT 2-3)
BLOCK INFO.
current block number (0-total block
number)
is 0)
''
DATA
0ttttttt
0000iiii
0000iiii
0000jjjj
0000jjjj
0ddddddd
CHECK SUM
EOX
:
:
0ddddddd de
0eeeeeee ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
0-15 (Automix no.1-16), 256 (Current
data)
0mmmmmmm ml BLOCK INFO.
0bbbbbbb bh current block number (0-total block
number)
0bbbbbbb bl
0ttttttt th total block number (minimum number
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
0bbbbbbb bl
0ttttttt th total block number (minimum number
'M'
'a'
System exclusive message
tl
0i
0i
0j
0j
ds
Developer id (High)
Developer id (Low)
Product id (High)
Product id (Low)
Plug-in Effect card memory data of
block[bb]
is 0)
DATA
CHECK SUM
EOX
0ttttttt
0ddddddd
:
:
0ddddddd
0eeeeeee
11110111
tl
ds Automix memory data of block[bb]
de
ee ee= (Invert ('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F
F7 End of exclusive
13.3.38 Plug-in effect card bulk dump request format
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the slot number.
(See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
13.3.36 Automix bulk dump request format
(compressed data)
The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
FORMAT No.
DATA NAME
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01100001
0mmmmmmm
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
61
mh
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
DATA NAME
'L'
'M'
''
EOX
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01111110
01001100
01001101
00100000
00100000
00111000
01000011
00110101
00110100
01001110
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
2n
7E
4C
4D
20
20
38
43
35
34
4E
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Universal bulk dump
'L'
'M'
''
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'N'
m=0-1 (SLOT 2-3)
End of exclusive
''
'8'
'C'
'5'
'4'
'a'
0-15 (Automix no.1-16), 256 (Current
data)
0mmmmmmm ml
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
13.4 PARAMETER CHANGE
Reception
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. A specific parameter is controlled when a Parameter Change is received. When
a Parameter Request is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter Change with the Device Number set
to [Rx CH].
Format Details
Transmission
If [Parameter change TX] is ON and you operate a parameter for which
Control Change transmission is not enabled, a parameter change will be
transmitted with [Tx CH] as the Device Number.
As a response to a Parameter Request, a parameter change will be transmitted with [Rx CH] as the Device Number.
13.4.1 Parameter change basic format (02R96-specific)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001011
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
0B
tt
ee
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Data type
Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
DATA *)
EOX
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
:
:
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.4.5 Parameter Address
Consult your dealer for parameter address details.
13.4.6 Parameter change
Transmission
If [Parameter change TX] is ON and a parameter that is not assigned in the
[Control Assign Table] is changed, the Parameter Change messages are
transmitted on [Tx CH] device number channel.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
13.4.2 Parameter Change basic format
(Universal format)
EOX
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
tt
ee
EOX
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Data type
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Data type
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.4.4 Parameter request basic format
(Universal format)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
tt
ee
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
Universal
Edit Buffer
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
:
:
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
EOX
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
01
ee
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Edit Buffer
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.4.8 Parameter change
(Patch data)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001011
00000010
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
0B
02
ee
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Patch data
Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00000001
0eeeeeee
(Edit buffer)
Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
System exclusive message
DATA
Universal
Data type
Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
EOX
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter change.
Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
EOX
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
13.4.7 Parameter request
13.4.3 Parameter request basic format (02R96-specific)
F0
43
3n
3E
0B
tt
ee
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
:
:
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001011
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size
will be transmitted.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
01
ee
System exclusive message
Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
DATA *)
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00000001
0eeeeeee
Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
DATA
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
0ttttttt
0eeeeeee
(Edit buffer)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.
*) For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size
will be transmitted.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
329
EOX
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
:
:
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
330
Appendix C: MIDI
13.4.9 Parameter request
(Patch data)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001011
00000010
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
0B
02
ee
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Patch data
Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
EOX
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.4.10 Parameter change
(Setup memory)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001011
00000011
0eeeeeee
F0
43
1n
3E
0B
03
ee
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Setup data
Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
DATA
EOX
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
0ddddddd dd data
:
:
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.4.11 Parameter request
(Setup memory)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001011
00000011
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
0B
03
ee
System exclusive message
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
Setup data
13.4.12 Parameter change
F0
43
1n
3E
0B
04
EOX
pp Parameter no.
cc Channel no.
dd data
F7 End of exclusive
13.4.13 Parameter request
(Backup memory)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001011
00000100
0eeeeeee
F0
43
3n
3E
0B
04
ee
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Backup data
Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
EOX
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.4.14 Parameter change
(Function call Library: store / recall)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the specified memory/library will be stored/recalled.
Transmission
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
00ffffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
ff
mh
ml
ch
cl
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
function
number High
number Low
channel High
channel Low
End of exclusive
02R96
0ccccccc cc Channel no.
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001011
00000100
DATA
0ppppppp
0ccccccc
0ddddddd
:
:
11110111
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
(Backup memory)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
to two bytes)
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
to two bytes)
0ppppppp pp Parameter no.
EOX
0eeeeeee ee Element no. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Backup data
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
function
SCENE RECALL
EQ LIB RECALL
GATE LIB RECALL
COMP LIB RECALL
EFF LIB RECALL
CHANNEL LIB RECALL
INPATCH LIB RECALL
OUTPATCH LIB RECALL
Bus to Stereo LIB RECALL
Surround Monitor LIB RECALL
AUTOMIX LIB RECALL
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0A
0x0B
number
0-99, 8192
1-200, 8192
1-128, 8192
1-128, 8192
1-128, 8192
0-128, 8192
0-32, 8192
0-32, 8192
0-32, 8192
0-32, 8192
1-16
channel*1)
256
0-513
0-95
0-513
0-3
0-513
256
256
256
256
256
rx/tx
rx/tx*2)
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
SCENE STORE
EQ LIB STORE
GATE LIB STORE
COMP LIB STORE
EFF LIB STORE
CHANNEL LIB STORE
INPATCH LIB STORE
OUTPATCH LIB STORE
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x26
0x27
0x28
1-99
41-200
5-128
37-128
xx*3)-128
2-128
1-32
1-32
256, 16383
0-513, 16383
0-95, 16383
0-513, 16383
0-3, 16383
0-513, 16383
256, 16383
256, 16383
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
Format Details
function
Bus to Stereo LIB STORE
Surround Monitor LIB STORE
AUTOMIX LIB STORE
0x29
0x2A
0x2B
number
1-32
1-32
1-16
channel*1)
256, 16383
256, 16383
256, 16383
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
rx/tx
*1) 0:CH1 - 55:CH56, 128:BUS1 - 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 263:AUX8, 512:STEREO L - 513:STEREO R
Use 256 if the recall destination or store source is a single data
item.
Effect is 0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4
If the store destination is 16383 (0x3FFF), this indicates that the
library data has been changed by a external cause (such as bulk
reception) (only transmitted by the 02R96)
*2) This is also transmitted when a program that is not assigned in
the [Program Change Table] is recalled. (Normally, it is transmitted by Program Change messages.)
*3) Varies with the firmware version.
13.4.15 Parameter change
(Function call: title)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be
changed.
Transmission
In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted
on the [Rx CH].
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
0100ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ddddddd
:
:
:
0ddddddd
11110111
function
SCENE LIB TITLE
EQ LIB TITLE
GATE LIB TITLE
COMP LIB TITLE
EFF LIB TITLE
CHANNEL LIB TITLE
INPATCH LIB TITLE
OUTPATCH LIB TITLE
Bus to Stereo LIB TITLE
Surround Monitor LIB TITLE
AUTOMIX LIB TITLE
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
4f
mh
ml
dd
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
title
number High
number Low
title 1
TITLE
EOX
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the specified memory/library will be cleared.
Transmission
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
0110ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
10
6f
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
clear function
number High
number Low
End of exclusive
function
SCENE LIB CLEAR
EQ LIB CLEAR
GATE LIB CLEAR
COMP LIB CLEAR
EFF LIB CLEAR
0x60
0x61
0x62
0x63
0x64
number
1-99
41-200
5-128
37-128
xx(*)-128
CHANNEL LIB CLEAR
INPATCH LIB CLEAR
OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR
Bus to Stereo LIB CLEAR
Surround Monitor LIB CLEAR
AUTOMIX LIB CLEAR
0x66
0x67
0x68
0x69
0x6A
0x6B
2-128
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-32
1-16
* Varies with the firmware version.
dd title x (depend on the library)
F7 End of exclusive
0x40
0x41
0x42
0x43
0x44
0x46
0x47
0x48
0x49
0x4A
0x4B
number
0-99,256 (0:response only)
1-200 (1-40:response only)
1-128 (1-4:response only)
1-128 (1-36:response only)
1-128 (1-xx(*):response only)
0-128 (0-1:response only)
0-32 (0:response only)
0-32 (0:response only)
0-32 (0:response only)
0-32 (0:response only)
1-16
13.4.16 Parameter request
13.4.18 Parameter change
size
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
(Function call: title)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on
the [Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010000
4f
mh number High
ml number Low
F7 End of exclusive
13.4.17 Parameter change
(Function call: scene/library clear)
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
10
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
(Function call: pair)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, pairing will be enabled/disabled for the specified
channel. (Otherwise, these messages are reserved for future use.)
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
* Varies with the firmware version.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
0100ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
331
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010001
0000ffff
0sssssss
0sssssss
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
11110111
function
PAIR ON with COPY
PAIR ON with RESET BOTH
PAIR OFF
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
11
0f
sh
sl
dh
dl
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call Pair
function
Source channel H
Source channel L
Destination channel H
Destination channel L
End of exclusive
0x00
0x01
0x02
channel
*1)
*1)
*1)
*1) 0:CH1 - 95:CH96, 128:BUS1 - 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 267:AUX12
• In the case of PAIR, you must specify channels for which pairing
is possible.
• In the case of PAIR ON with COPY, you must specify Source
Channel as the copy source, and Destination Channel as the
copy destination.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
332
Appendix C: MIDI
13.4.19 Parameter change (Function call: effect)
13.4.22 Parameter change (Function call: attribute)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the corresponding effect’s function activates (depending on the effect type).
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches
the device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the attribute of the specified memory/library will be
changed.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010010
0000ffff
00000000
0ppppppp
00000000
0eeeeeee
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
12
0f
00
pp
00
ee
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call Effect Event
function
Release:0, Press:1
Effect number (0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4)
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x03
channel
0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4
0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4
0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4
0:Effect1 - 3:Effect4
• This does not activate when the effect type is different.
13.4.20 Parameter Change
(Sort table data)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
The Scene memory Sort table is updated as soon as the messages are received.
If Studio Manager performs a scene memory sort, it will transmit this data
to the 02R96.
Transmission
When scene memory sort is executed on the 02R96, the memory sort table
will be transmitted to Studio Manager.
Studio Manager will sort the memories according to this data.
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001011
00010011
0000ffff
0ddddddd
:
:
0ddddddd
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
0B
13
0f
ds
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Library sort table
0ttttttt tl
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
function
SCENE LIB ATTRIBUTE
AUTOMIX LIB ATTRIBUTE
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
attribute
number High
number Low
attribute (protect:0x0001,
normal:0x0000)
0x00
0x0B
number
0-99 (0:response only)
1-16
13.4.23 Parameter request (Function call: attribute)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches
the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on
the [Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
ATTRIBUTE
EOX
de Data
F7 End of exclusive
(Sort table data)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches
the device number included in the SUB STATUS.
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Sort table data is transmitted as Parameter Change messages on the [Rx
CH] channel.
EOX
EOX
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0000ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
14
0f
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
number High
number Low
End of exclusive
13.4.24 Parameter change
13.4.21 Parameter Request
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001011
00010011
0000ffff
11110111
DATA
Library type
Data
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
14
0f
mh
ml
th
System exclusive message
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0000ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ttttttt
02R96
8-7 conversion is performed on the data area in the same way as for bulk.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
End of exclusive
function
Freeze Play button
Freeze Record button
Auto Pan 5.1 Trigger Button
Auto Pan 5.1 Reset Button
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
Transmission
In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted
on the [Rx CH].
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
F0
43
3n
3E
0B
13
0f
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Library sort table
Library type
End of exclusive
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
(Function call: link)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches
the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, the patch link data of the specified scene will be
modified.
Transmission
In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted
on the [Rx CH].
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0010ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
F0
43
1n
3E
7F
14
2f
mh
ml
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
link
number High
number Low
Format Details
DATA
EOX
0iiiiiii
0iiiiiii
0ooooooo
0ooooooo
11110111
ih inpatch
il
oh outpatch
ol
F7 End of exclusive
function
SCENE LIB LINK
0x20
ADDRESS
DATA
number
0-99 (0:response only)
EOX
13.4.25 Parameter request
(Function call: link)
Reception
This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches
the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on
the [Rx CH].
Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
01111111
00010100
0010ffff
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
7F
14
2f
mh
ml
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
Universal
Function call
link
number High
number Low
End of exclusive
13.4.26 Parameter change
Transmission
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001011
00100000
0kkkkkkk
0kkkkkkk
0kkkkkkk
0ppppppp
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
0B
20
kk
kk
kk
pp
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Key remote
Key address H
Key address M
Key address L
Release:0, Press:1
End of exclusive
13.4.27 Parameter change
(Remote meter)
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter, the
specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds.
When you want to transmit meter information continuously, a Request
must be transmitted continuously within every 10 seconds.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001011
F0
43
1n
3E
0B
Remote meter
ADDRESS UL
ADDRESS LU
ADDRESS LL
data1 H
Data1 L
F7 End of exclusive
(Remote meter)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, data of the specified address is transmitted on the
[Rx CH] at intervals of 50 msec as a rule, for a period of 10 seconds.
If Address UL= 0x7F is received, transmission of all meter data will be halted immediately. (disable)
Transmission
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001011
00100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
mmmmmmm
0ccccccc
0ccccccc
11110111
F0
43
3n
3E
0B
21
mm
mm
mm
ch
cl
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Remote meter
ADDRESS UL
ADDRESS LU
ADDRESS LL
Count H
Count L
End of exclusive
13.4.29 Parameter change (Remote time counter)
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time
Counter, the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When you want to transmit Counter information continuously, a
Request must be transmitted within every 10 seconds.
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Transmission
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request, the Time Counter
information is transmitted on [RxCH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if
the PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Transmission
When transmission has been enabled by a Request, the parameter specified
by Address will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at 50 msec intervals
for a duration of 10 seconds.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if
the PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
21
mm
mm
mm
dd
dd
13.4.28 Parameter request
(Key remote)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the same processing that is executed when the key
specified by Address is pressed (released).
00100001
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0mmmmmmm
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
:
:
11110111
333
DATA
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001011
00100010
0000tttt
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
0ddddddd
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
0B
22
0t
dd
dd
dd
dd
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Remote Time counter
0:Time code, 1:Measure.Beat.Clock
Hour / Measure H
Minute / Measure L
Second / Beat
Frame / Clock
End of exclusive
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
334
Appendix C: MIDI
13.4.30 Parameter request (Remote time counter)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When this is received, the Time Counter information is transmitted on the
[Rx CH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.
When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission
will be halted immediately. (disable)
Transmission
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001011
00100010
0ddddddd
F0
43
3n
3E
0B
22
dd
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Remote Time counter
0:Transmission request,
0x7F:Transmission stop request
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
13.4.31 Parameter change
(Automix status)
When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Automix status,
the Automix Status data is transmitted every second for 10 seconds. When
you want to transmit the Automix Status information continuously, the
Request must be transmitted continuously minimum within 10 seconds
interval. The data is transmitted continuously while the transmission is enabled, even when the Automix Status on the 02R96 has been changed.
Reception
This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.
Transmission
When the transmission is set to enable by receiving a Request. The Automix Status data is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel every second for 10
seconds. The data is transmitted continuously while the transmission is
enabled, even when the Automix Status on the 02R96 has been changed.
Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if
the PORT setting is changed.
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00111110
00001011
00100011
00000000
0000dddd
0000dddd
11110111
F0
43
1n
3E
0B
23
00
0d
0d
F7
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Automix status
Automix status H
Automix status L
End of exclusive
13.4.32 Parameter request
(Automix status)
Reception
If [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the Device
Number included in the SUB STATUS, these messages are received. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed.
When the data is received, the Automix Status data is transmitted on the
[Rx CH] every second for 10 seconds.
When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission
will be halted immediately (disable).
Transmission
If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted
without change.
STATUS
ID No.
SUB STATUS
GROUP ID
MODEL ID
ADDRESS
EOX
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
00111110
00001011
00100011
0ddddddd
F0
43
3n
3E
0B
23
dd
System exclusive message
Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)
n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)
MODEL ID (digital mixer)
02R96
Automix status
0:Transmission request,
0x7F:Transmission stop request
11110111 F7 End of exclusive
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
MB02R96 Peak Meter Bridge
335
Appendix D: Options
MB02R96 Peak Meter Bridge
Installation
1
Unscrew the four fixing screws 1 on the 02R96 rear panel to which the
meter bridge will be attached.
1
1
2
Using the four supplied 8 mm screws B, attach the brackets to the meter
bridge, as shown below.
3
Align the meter bridge with the 02R96, and, using two of the supplied
12 mm screws C, screw in the top two fixing screws, but don’t tighten them
fully.
4
Screw in the bottom two screws C and tighten them fully.
5
Fully tighten the top two screws C.
6
Connect the meter bridge cable to the 02R96’s METER port.
3
2
3
2
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
336
Appendix D: Options
Meter Bridge Controls
A Channel indicators
These indicators show which channels are currently being
metered: Input Channels 1–24, 25–48, or 49–56 and Aux
Sends 1–8 and Bus Outs 1–8.
9
5
B INPUT METERING POSITION button & indicators
This button is used to set the metering position for Input
Channels to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. It works in
unison with the PRE EQ, PRE FADER, and POST FADER
buttons for Input Channels on the Meter pages. The indicators show the current setting.
C PEAK HOLD button
56
OVER
8
7
This button is used to turn the Peak Hold function on and
off. Its indicator lights up when Peak Hold is on. It works in
unison with the PEAK HOLD buttons on the Meter pages.
D LAYER buttons
4
These button are used to select Layers for metering. The
button indicator for the currently selected Layer lights up. If
the Meter Follow Layer preference is on (see page 231),
these Layers are selected automatically when the LAYER
buttons on the 02R96 are pressed.
3
E OUTPUT METERING POSITION button &
indicators
This button is used to set the metering position for Output
Channels to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. It works in
unison with the PRE EQ, PRE FADER, and POST FADER
buttons for Output Channels on the Meter pages. The indicators show the current setting.
2
6
F Meters
These 12-segment LED meters display the signals levels of
the channels on the currently selected Layer.
G STEREO meters
These 32-segment meters display the signal levels of the Stereo Out.
1
H CONTROL ROOM button
This button is used to display the level of the Control Room
signal on the STEREO meters. Its indicator lights up when
the STEREO meters are displaying Control Room levels.
I BUS meters
These 12-segment LED meters display Bus Out signal levels.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
SP02R96 Wooden Side Panels
337
SP02R96 Wooden Side Panels
Attach the side panels as shown below.
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
338
Index
Index
Symbols
+48V ON/OFF switches 20
Numerics
1–24 button 30
25–48 button 30
2TR I/O
channel status 62
dithering outputs 62
patching digital outputs 70
patching direct outs 70
patching inputs 66
sampling rate conversion 58
2TR IN ANALOG 1 +4 dB (BAL) 39
2TR IN ANALOG 2 –10 dBV (UNBAL)
39
2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 41
2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 & 3 41
2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 40
2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 2 & 3 40
2TR OUT DIGITAL OUT PATCH page
70
3-1 surround mode 85
5.1 surround mode 85
6.1 surround mode 85
96 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
selecting 56
A
Absolute mode, automix 173
AC IN connector 42
AD inputs
connectors 38
in detail 53
patching 66
patching output channel insert ins
69
summary 20
talkback 142
Adat I/O card 59
Add-On Effects 157
AES/EBU I/O card 59
ALT LAYER 52
AMP SIMULATE 267
Analog I/O & the AD input section
chapter 53
Architecture
channels 16
I/O 16
ASSIGN 1 & 2 buttons, control room 36
ASSIGN 1 & 2 buttons, encoder mode 22
Assigning
control changes 194
parameters to encoders 51
program changes 193
see also Routing
targets to the remote layer 219
user defined keys 229
ATTACK control 27
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Attenuating
cascade inputs 65
channel signals 110
AUTO buttons
about 20
in detail 174
Pro Tools 201
STEREO 30
using 179
Auto channel select 49
Auto Channel Select preference 230
Auto Direct Out On preference 231
Auto DYNAMICS Display preference
230
Auto EQ Edit In preference 233
Auto EQUALIZER Display preference
230
Auto Inc TC Capture preference 233
AUTO PAN 5.1 277
Auto PAN/SURROUND Display
preference 230
Auto ROUTING Display preference 230
Auto scene memory update 163
Auto SOLO Display preference 230
Auto WORD CLOCK Display
preference 230
Automix
about 170
absolute mode 173
AUTO buttons 174
cascading consoles 63
copying events 185
deleting events 188
duplicating events 188
erasing events 185
EVENT EDIT page 188
EVENT JOB page 185
event list 188
FADER EDIT pages 175
features 17
inserting events 188
library 151
MAIN page 171
MEMORY page 175
merging events 185
motors on/off 176
moving events 185
offline editing 185
overwrite parameters 173
parameter recording 182
playback 184
protecting memories 151
punching individual parameters 183
recording 179
relative mode 173
rerecording 181
return mode 172
storing via bulk dump 195
takeover mode 172
time signature map 178
timecode offset 171
timecode source 177
touch sense in/out 176
undo 174
update to end 171
what’s recorded 170
AUTOMIX button 23
Automix chapter 170
AUTOMIX MAIN page 171
AUTOMIX MEMORY page 175
AUTOMIX page 151
Automix Store Undo preference 233
AUTOPAN 264
AUX 1–8 buttons 21
AUX 7 button, studio 35
AUX 8 button, studio 35
AUX button, encoder mode 22
AUX FADER VIEW page 132
AUX PAN CH pages 103
AUX SELECT section
about 21
Pro Tools 202
using 98
AUX SEND CH pages 99
Aux sends
attenuating 110
automix 170
channel library 144
compressors 116
Copying channel fader positions 104
delay 120
EQ 111
Excluding certain channels 104
fixed mode 98
follow surround pan 124
grouping faders 126
grouping mutes 128
inserts 115
link pan to input channels 103
master level setting 106
metering 109
Mix minus 104
muting 105
naming 134
pairing 123
pan modes 103
panning 103
patching to 2TR digital outputs 70
patching to effects 67
patching to input channels 66
patching to omni outs 69
patching to slot outputs 68
pre/post fader 98
scene recall safe 167
setting levels 99
soloing 121
variable mode 98
viewing fader settings 130
viewing parameter settings 129
viewing settings 101
Aux sends chapter 98
AUX, fader mode 22
Index
B
Balance, stereo out 94
Bars, time signature map 178
BASS MANAGEMENT 140
Battery check 237
BATTERY CHECK page 237
BI-DIRECTIONAL, cascade setting 65
Bulk dump 195
BULK DUMP page 195
BUS button 36
BUS FADER VIEW page 132
Bus outs
attenuating 110
automix 170
bus to stereo library 147
channel library 144
compressors 116
delay 120
EQ 111
grouping faders 126
grouping mutes 128
inserts 115
level setting 96
metering 109
muting 96
naming 134
pairing 123
patching to 2TR digital outputs 70
patching to input channels 66
patching to omni outs 69
patching to slot outputs 68
routing to 82
routing to stereo out 97
scene recall safe 167
soloing 121
viewing fader settings 130
viewing parameter settings 129
Bus outs chapter 95
BUS TO STEREO LIBRARY page 147
BUS TO STEREO page 97
Bypassing effects 156
C
Cascade COMM Link preference 231
CASCADE IN page 65
CASCADE IN port 41
CASCADE IN port pin assignments 300
CASCADE OUT page 65
CASCADE OUT port 41
CASCADE OUT port pin assignments
300
Cascading consoles
about 63
attenuating cascade inputs 65
hookup examples 64
linked functions 63
master setting 65
turning off cascade outputs 65
Category, channel status 62
CH DIRECT OUT DESTINATION
pages 70
CH EQUALIZER LIBRARY page 150
CH FADER EDIT pages 175
CH FADER VIEW page 131
CH GATE EDIT page 74
CH PARAMETER VIEW page 129
CH SURROUND EDIT page 88
Channel Copy Parameter preference 232
Channel display mode, Pro Tools 200
Channel ID preference 232
CHANNEL INSERTS button 24
CHANNEL LIBRARY page 144
Channel names, assigning 134
Channel Short Name preference 232
Channel status monitor 62
CHANNEL STATUS MONITOR page
62
Channel strips
about 20
Pro Tools 201
selecting layers 47
user defined remote layer 220
CHORUS 262
CHORUS 5.1 277
CLEAR button 35
Clear Edit Channel after REC preference
233
Clearing library memories 143
Clearing scene memories 165
Combination effects 154
Common channel functions chapter 107
COMP 5.1 280
COMP EDIT page 118
COMP indicator 27
COMP LIBRARY page 149
COMP ON button 27
COMPAND 5.1 280
Compander 116
Compressors
grouping input channels 77
grouping output channels 119
library 149
order 116
parameter table 295
presets 116
using 116
Confirmation messages 46
Contrast control 25
CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN TABLE
page 194
Control changes
assignments 194
echoing 192
omni 192
receive enable 192
storing assignments via bulk dump
195
transmit enable 192
CONTROL port 41
CONTROL port pin assignments 300
Control room
dimmer level 137
monitoring 136
patching to 2TR digital outputs 70
setup 137
CONTROL ROOM button 34
339
CONTROL ROOM LEVEL control 36
CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT
+4 dB (BAL) 39
CONTROL ROOM SETUP page 137
Control surface
features 18
illustration 19
Control surface & rear panel chapter 19
Cooling fan 42
Copy Initial Fader preference 233
Copy, channel status 62
Copying automix events 185
Cubase SX 219
Current scene display 44
Currently selected channel
display 44
name display 44
selecting 48
Currently selected page
page number display 44
selecting 45
title display 44
Cursor buttons 33
D
Data entry section
about 33
Pro Tools 208
DAW
MIDI port setup 191
see alsoPro Tools
DAW CONTROL 224
DEC button 33
DECAY control 27
DEL, title edit window 46
DELAY button 27
Delay effects 153
DELAY LCR 261
DELAY SCALE 120
DELAY+ER. 272
DELAY+REV 273
DELAY->ER. 273
DELAY->REV 274
Delaying channel signals 120
Deleting automix events 188
Digital I/O & cascading chapter 55
Dimensions 301
DIMMER button 36
Dimmer level, control room 137
Dimmer level, talkback 142
DIO button 23
DIO Warning preference 231
DIRECT button 26
Direct outs
patching 70
routing to 82
Display
about 25
confirmation messages 46
in detail 44
parameter boxes 45
parameter windows 46
Pro Tools 199
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
340
Index
DISPLAY ACCESS section 23
DISPLAY ACCESS section, SELECTED
CHANNEL section 27
Display Brightness preference 232
DISPLAY buttons
AUX SELECT 21
DYNAMICS 27
EFFECTS/PLUG-INS 24
ENCODER MODE 22
EQUALIZER 29
MACHINE CONTROL 32
MONITOR 34
PAN/SURROUND 28
ROUTING 26
SCENE MEMORY 31
USER DEFINED KEYS 31
DIST->DELAY 274
DISTORTION 267
DITHER page 62
Dithering digital outputs 62
DIV (divergence) 89
Double channel 61
Double speed 61
Drop Out Time preference 234
DUAL PITCH 266
Ducking, input channels 74
Duplicating automix events 188
DYNA. FILTER 268
DYNA. FLANGE 268
DYNA. PHASER 268
Dynamic effects 154
DYNAMICS section
about 27
compressors 118
gates 74
Dynamics. See Gates and Compressors
E
EARLY REF. 259
ECHO 262
Edit buffer 162
Edit indicators
display 44
SCENE MEMORY section 162
Editing
automix events 185
compressors 116
effects 156
gates 74
library memory titles 143
plug-ins 160
scene memory titles 165
EFFECT 1–4 INPUT/OUTPUT METER
page 109
EFFECT button 28
EFFECT EDIT page 156
EFFECT INPUT PATCH pages 67
EFFECT LIBRARY page 146
Effects
about 153
automix 170
bypassing 156
editing 156
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
features 17
library 146
metering 109
parameter tables 259
patching inputs 67
patching output channel insert ins
69
patching outputs 66
presets 153
tempo 156
EFFECTS/PLUG-INS 1–4 buttons 24
EFFECTS/PLUG-INS section
about 24
editing effects 156
editing plug-ins 160
Pro Tools 203
ÉIÅ 185
Emphasis, channel status 62
ENCODER MODE ASSIGN page 51
ENCODER MODE section
about 22
Pro Tools 202
using 50
Encoder modes, selecting 50
Encoders
about 20
assignable parameter list 52
assigning parameters 51
automix punch in/out 183
panning input channels 83
patching inputs & outputs 72
Pro Tools 201
selecting encoder modes 50
setting aux send levels 99
user defined remote layer 220
ENTER button 33
EQ
automix 170
EQUALIZER EDIT page 113
features 17
frequency 112
gain 112
grouping input channels 76
grouping output channels 114
library 150
presets 111
Q 112
using 111
EQ displays 29
EQ GAIN controls 29
EQ ON button 29
EQUALIZER EDIT page 113
EQUALIZER section
about 29
using 112
Erasing automix events 185
EVENT EDIT page 188
Event editing 185
EVENT JOB page 185
Event list, automix 188
Expander 116
F
F1–F4 buttons
about 25
editing effects 157
editing plug-ins 161
Pro Tools 199
FADER button 22
Fader edit mode 173
FADER MODE section
about 22
Pro Tools 202
using 49
Fader REC Accuracy preference 234
Fader Touch Sense preference 232
Faders
about 21
auto channel select 49
automix punch in/out 183
aux send master levels 106
bus out levels 96
fader edit mode 173
Group Master 80, 127
grouping input channels 79
grouping output channels 126
input channel levels 79
motors on/off 176
Pro Tools 202
selecting fader modes 49
setting aux send levels 99
STEREO 30
stereo out level 93
touch sense in/out, automix 176
touch sense select 49
user defined remote layer 220
Fading scenes 166
Fast Meter Fall Time preference 231
Features 16
FF button 32
Fixed mode, aux sends 98
FLANGE 263
FLANGE 5.1 278
FOLLOW PAN button 26
FOLLOW SURROUND 67
Follow surround pan, aux sends 124
Frame Jump Error preference 234
Frame rate, automix 177
FREQUENCY controls 29
FREQUENCY indicators 29
FX 153
G
GAIN control, dynamics 27
GAIN controls, AD inputs 20
Gang mode
aux send pan 103
input channel pan 84
GATE indicator 27
GATE LIBRARY page 148
GATE ON button 27
GATE REVERB 260
GATE/COMP button 27
Index
Gates
library 148
parameter table 294
presets 74
using 74
General DAW 219
Global Fade Time 167
Global Paste 168
GLOBAL PASTE DESTINATION
SCENE page 169
GLOBAL PASTE SOURCE CH SELECT
page 168
GLOBAL RECALL SAFE 167
GPI 225
REC LAMP 227
GPI SETUP page 225
GR meters
compressors 119
gates 75
GRAB button 28
Grounding screw 42
GROUP button 23
Group Master 79, 80, 127, 129
Grouping
features 17
input channel compressors 77
input channel EQs 76
input channel faders 79
input channel mutes 78
output channel compressors 119
output channel EQs 114
output channel faders 126
output channel mutes 128
Guitar effects 154
H
HIGH EQ 111
HIGHER SAMPLE RATE DATA
TRANSFER FORMAT page 61
HIGH-MID EQ 111
HOLD control 27
Horizontal pairing 123
HQ. PITCH 265
I
IEEE1394 59
INC button 33
Individual mode
aux send pan 103
input channel pan 84
Initial Data Nominal preference 231
Initializing the 02R96 237
Input & output patching chapter 66
INPUT A & B (BAL) connectors 38
INPUT CH AUX VIEW pages 101
INPUT CH DELAY pages 120
INPUT CH FADE TIME pages 166
INPUT CH FADER GROUP page 79
INPUT CH INSERT IN PATCH pages
67
INPUT CH METER page 108
INPUT CH MUTE GROUP page 78
INPUT CH PAIR pages 124
INPUT CH PAN pages 84
INPUT CH ROUTING pages 82
INPUT CH SURROUND pages 89
INPUT CHANNEL NAME page 134
Input channels
attenuating 110
automix 170
channel library 144
compressors 116
delay 120
EQ 111
gating 74
grouping compressors 77
grouping EQs 76
grouping faders 79
grouping mutes 78
inserts 115
level setting 79
metering 108
muting 77
naming 134
pairing 123
panning 83
patching 66
reversing phase 73
selecting layers 47
soloing 121
viewing fader settings 130
viewing parameter settings 129
Input channels chapter 73
INPUT COMP LINK page 77
INPUT EQUALIZER LINK page 76
INPUT FADER GROUP MASTER page
79, 81
INPUT FADER MASTER 80
INPUT MUTE MASTER 78
INPUT PATCH button 24
INPUT PATCH LIBRARY page 145
INPUT PATCH pages 66
Input patching 66
INPUT PORT NAME page 71
Input port naming 71
INS, title edit window 46
Insert assign/edit display mode, Pro
Tools 200
INSERT I/O +4dB (UNBAL) connectors
38
INSERT ON/OFF switches 20
Insert Time Link preference 234
Inserting automix events 188
Inserts
AD insert on/off switches 20
order 116
patching input channel insert ins 67
patching insert outs to effects inputs
67
patching insert outs to omni outs 69
patching insert outs to slot outputs
68
patching output channel insert ins
69
patching outs to 2TR digital outputs
70
341
using 115
Installing I/O cards 60
Internal effects & plug-ins chapter 153
INTERNAL EFFECTS button 24
Internal timecode source 177
Internet, yamaha web site 5
Inverse gang mode
aux send pan 103
input channel pan 84
Inverting input channel phase 73
J
Joystick
about 29
panning input channels 83
reverb 5.1 effect 276
surround pan 87
Joystick Auto Grab preference 231
K
Keyin source 75
L
L button 28
Last solo mode 122
LAYER section
about 30
selecting layers 47
Layers
encoder modes 50
fader modes 49
selecting 47
selecting channels 48
Learn function
user defined plug-ins 160
user defined remote layer 220
Left Tab Scroll button 25
LFE 88
Libraries
about 143
automix 151, 170
bus to stereo 147
channel 144
compressor 149
effects 146
EQ 150
gate 148
input patch 145
output patch 145
specifications 296
storing via bulk dump 195
surround monitor 152
using 143
Libraries chapter 143
LINK button 28
Link Capture & Locate Memory
preference 233
LISTEN, solo 122
LOCATE MEMORY 1–8 buttons 32
LOCATE MEMORY page 224
Lock Time preference 234
Long channel names, assigning 134
Long port names 71
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
342
Index
LOW EQ 111
LOW-MID EQ 111
M
M. BAND DYNA. 279
MACHINE CONFIGURATION page
222
MACHINE CONTROL 224
Machine control
about 222
locator 224
machine configuration 222
scrub & shuttle 223
setting locate memories 224
transport buttons 223
MACHINE CONTROL section
about 32
LOCATE MEMORY 224
Pro Tools 207
Macintosh
configuring for Pro Tools 196
MIDI port setup 191
USB driver 190
MASTER button 30
Master layer, selecting 47
MASTER METER page 109
MASTER PARAMETER VIEW page 130
MB02R96 peak meter bridge 335
Measures, time signature map 178
Merging automix events 185
METER button 23
Meter display mode, Pro tools 201
Meter Follow Layer preference 231
METER port 41
Meter, time signature map 178
Metering
effects 109
input channels 108
metering position 107
output channels 109
stereo out 109
METERING POSITION page 107
MIDI
bulk dump 195
control change messages 194
data format 319
features 18
I/O ports 190
MIDI SETUP page 192
parameter change messages 194
port setup 191
ports 41
program change messages 193
supported messages 190
MIDI button 23
MIDI chapter 190
MIDI clock
automix timecode source 177
Tap tempo, effects 156
MIDI SETUP page 192
MIDI Warning preference 231
MIDI/TO HOST SETUP page 191
mini YGDAI. See Slots
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Mix minus 104
Mix solo mode 122
Mix Update Confirmation preference
233
Mixdown, solo status 121
mLAN I/O card 59
MMC. See Machine control
MOD. DELAY 261
MOD. FILTER 267
Modulation-based effects 154
MONITOR ALIGNMENT 141
MONITOR MATRIX 139
MONITOR section 34
Monitoring
configuring surround monitoring
139
control room 136
control room setup 137
studio 137
surround 138
Monitoring & talkback chapter 136
MONO DELAY 260
Motors on/off 176
Moving automix events 185
MS decoding 125
MS microphone 91
MTC TIME CODE INPUT connector
40
MTC, timecode source 177
MULTI FILTER 275
Multi-effects 153
Muting
automix 170
aux sends 105
bus outs 96
Group Master 79, 129
grouping input channels 78
grouping output channels 128
input channels 77
stereo out 93
N
Name Input Auto Copy 71
Naming channels 134
Naming library memories 143
Naming scene memories 164
NEVER LATCH TALKBACK 142
Nominal Pan preference 231
O
OCTA REVERB 277
Offline editing 185
Offsetting automix timecode 171
OMNI OUT +4dB (BAL) 40
OMNI OUT PATCH page 69
Omni outs
about 54
patching 69
patching direct outs 70
Omni, MIDI 192
OMS
configuring for Pro Tools 197
installing for Pro Tools 196
ON buttons
channel strips 21
Pro Tools 201
see also Grouping
see also Muting
STEREO 30
user defined remote layer 220
Operating basics chapter 43
Operation Lock 235
OPERATION LOCK page 235
Options 5
Order, inserts/compressors 116
Oscillator 234
OSCILLATOR page 234
Other functions chapter 228
OUTPUT CHANNEL NAME page 135
Output channels
attenuating 110
compressors 116
delay 120
EQ 111
grouping compressors 119
grouping EQs 114
grouping faders 126
grouping mutes 128
inserts 115
library 144
metering 109
naming 134
pairing 123
selecting master layer 47
soloing 121
viewing fader settings 130
viewing parameter settings 129
OUTPUT COMP LINK page 119
OUTPUT DELAY page 120
OUTPUT EQUALIZER LINK page 114
OUTPUT FADE TIME page 166
OUTPUT FADER GROUP MASTER
page 127
OUTPUT FADER GROUP page 126
OUTPUT FADER MASTER 127
OUTPUT INSERT IN PATCH page 69
OUTPUT MUTE GROUP page 128
OUTPUT MUTE MASTER 128
OUTPUT PAIR page 124
OUTPUT PATCH button 24
OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY page 145
Output patching 68
OUTPUT PORT NAME page 71
Output port naming 71
Overwrite parameters 173
P
Package contents 5
PAD switches 20
Pages
page number display 44
page tab scroll arrows 45
selecting 45
tabs 45
title display 44
PAIR button 23
Index
Pair Confirmation preference 231
Pairing channels
features 17
pan modes 84
using 123
PAN button 22
PAN control 28
PAN display 28
PAN/SURROUND section
about 28
joystick and surround pan 87
panning input channels 83
Panner 217
Panning
automix 170
aux sends 103
input channels 83
modes 84
Parameter boxes 45
Parameter change messages 194
Parameter controls 1–4 25
Parameter Up/Down buttons 24
Parameter wheel 33
Parameter windows 46
Patch Confirmation preference 231
PATCH LINK 165
Patch link 165
Patch select window 71
Patching
2TR digital outputs 70
direct outs 70
effects inputs 67
features 17
input channel insert ins 67
input channels 66
input library 145
inputs 66
omni outs 69
output channel insert ins 69
output library 145
outputs 68
patch select window 71
scene memory links 165
slot outputs 68
surround monitor 141
with the encoders 72
Patterns 88
PC
configuring for Pro Tools 196
MIDI port setup 191
USB driver 190
Peak hold 107
PEAK indicators 20
Phantom power switches 20
Phase, input channel phase reverse 73
PHASE/INSERT button
about 27
reversing phase 73
PHASER 264
Phone jacks 37
PHONES jack 34
PHONES LEVEL control 34
Phono connectors 37
Picture of control surface 19
PLAY button 32
PLAY button, automix 174
Playing back an automix 184
PLUG-IN EDIT page 160
PLUG-IN SETUP page 159
Plug-ins
about 158
configuring 159
editing 160
MIDI port setup 191
storing via bulk dump 195
PLUG-INS button 24
Port ID preference 232
Port IDs 71
Port names 71
Port Short Name preference 232
Position, compressors 118
Post/pre. See Pre/post
Power cord 43
POWER switch 42
Powering up the 02R96 43
Pre/post
aux sends 98
metering 107
solo 122
PREFERENCES1 page 230
PREFERENCES2 page 232
PREFERENCES3 page 233
Presets
compressors 116
effects 153
EQ 111
gates 74
Pro Tools
Panner 217
Pro tools
arming parameters for automation
217
assigning inserts/plug-ins 212
automation 216
AUX SELECT section 202
bypassing plug-ins 214
channel display mode 200
channel strips 201
configuring 197
configuring Macintosh computers
196
configuring sends as pre or post 210
configuring the 02R96 197
configuring Windows computers
196
control surface operation 199
data entry section 208
display 199
editing plug-ins 213
EFFECTS/PLUG-INS section 203
ENCODER MODE section 202
FADER MODE section 202
flip mode 211
insert assign/edit display mode 200
MACHINE CONTROL section 207
343
making fine adjustments to the
selected region 215
meter display mode 201
muting channels 209
muting sends 210
navigating the edit window 214
OMS 196
panning channels 209
panning sends 210
resetting faders, sends, & panpots
214
scrub & shuttle 215
selecting channels 209
setting channel levels 209
setting send levels 210
setting the automation mode 216
soloing channels 210
trim mode 217
USER DEFINED KEYS section 206
viewing send destinations 210
zooming 215
Pro tools remote layer chapter 196
PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN TABLE
page 193
Program changes
assignments 193
echoing 192
omni 192
receive enable 192
storing assignments via bulk dump
195
transmit enable 192
Protecting automix memories 151
Protecting scene memories 165
Punch in/out, individual parameters 183
Q
Q controls 29
Q indicators 29
Q, EQ 112
R
R button 28
RANGE control 27
RATIO control 27
RCA connectors 37
Read-only memories 143
Rear panel 37
REC button 32
REC LAMP 227
RECALL button 31
Recall Confirmation preference 231
RECALL SAFE page 167
Recalling
library memories 143
scene memories 164
Receive channel 192
Receive Full Frame Message preference
233
Recording an automix 179
Recording, solo status 121
Relative mode, automix 173
RELEASE control 27
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
344
Index
REMOTE button, DISPLAY ACCESS 23
REMOTE button, LAYER 30
Remote control chapter 219
Remote layer
about 219
assigning targets 219
MIDI port setup 191
Pro Tools 196
selecting 47
REMOTE page 219
REMOTE page, Pro Tools 199
REMOTE page, user defined 220, 221
Requesting bulk dump 195
Rerecording an automix 181
Return mode, automix 172
REV+CHORUS 269
REV+FLANGE 270
REV+SYMPHO. 271
REV->CHORUS 269
REV->FLANGE 270
REV->PAN 272
REV->SYMPHO. 271
REVERB 5.1 276
Reverb effects 153
REVERB HALL 259
REVERB PLATE 259
REVERB ROOM 259
REVERB STAGE 259
REVERSE GATE 260
Reversing input channel phase 73
REW button 32
Right Tab Scroll button 25
RING MOD. 266
ROTARY 266
ROUTING 1–8 buttons 26
Routing input channels 82
ROUTING section
about 26
using 82
Routing ST Pair Link preference 231
S
Safe channels, automix 176
Safe channels, scene memories 167
Safe channels, solo 121
Sampling rate
2TR IN SRC 58
display 44
setting 56
slot SRC 61
SAMPLING RATE CONVERTER page
58
Scene down button 31
Scene MEM Auto Update preference 231
Scene memories
about 162
auto scene memory update 163
automix 170
cascading consoles 63
current scene display 44
edit buffer 162
edit indicator 162
fading scenes 166
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
memory #0 163
MIDI program changes 193
protecting 165
recalling 164
safe channels 167
sorting 168
storing 164
storing via bulk dump 195
undo memory 163
what’s stored 162
Scene memories chapter 162
SCENE MEMORY page 165
SCENE MEMORY section
about 31
display 31
using 164
SCENE MEMORY SORT page 168
Scene up button 31
Scroll arrows, pages 45
SCRUB button 33
SEL buttons
input channels 20
pairing channels 123
Pro Tools 201
selecting channels 48
STEREO 48
SEL MODE, solo 122
SELECTED CHANNEL section 26
Selecting
auto channel select 49
channels 48
encoder modes 50
fader modes 49
layers 47
pages 45
touch sense select 49
SERIAL TO HOST port 40
MIDI 190
timecode source 177
SET button 32
SET SPL85 139
Setting levels
aux send masters 106
aux sends 99
bus outs 96
input channels 79
stereo out 93
SETUP button 23
Shadow memories 163
SHIFT LOCK, title edit window 46
Short channel names 134
Short port names 71
Show Compact Size preference 233
SHUTTLE button 33
SIGNAL indicators 20
SLOT button 36
SLOT OUTPUT PATCH pages 68
Slots
about 42, 59
available cards 59
channel status 62
dithering outputs 62
double channel 61
double speed 61
installing cards 60
MIDI 190
patching direct outs 70
patching inputs 66
patching output channel insert ins
69
patching outputs 68
timecode source 177
SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT connector
40
Solo
cascading consoles 63
configuring 121
safe channels 122
sel mode 122
status 121
trim 122
using 121
Solo Bus to Studio Out preference 231
SOLO buttons
about 21
Pro Tools 201
using 121
SOLO indicator 35
SOLO SETUP page 121
SOLO TRIM 122
Soloing channels 121
Sonic Spec 16
Sorting scene memories 168
SP02R96 wooden side panels 337
SPEAKER SETUP 139
Specifications 291
SRC. See Sampling rate
STATUS, solo 121
STEREO 2TR A1 button 35
STEREO 2TR A2 button 35
STEREO 2TR D1 button 35
STEREO 2TR D2 button 35
STEREO 2TR D3 button 35
STEREO button, control room 35
STEREO button, routing 26
STEREO button, studio 35
STEREO DELAY 260
STEREO fader 30
STEREO FADER VIEW page 133
Stereo link, compressors 118
Stereo link, gates 75
Stereo link, surround pan 89
STEREO METER page 109
Stereo out
attenuating 110
automix 170
balance 94
channel library 144
compressors 116
delay 120
EQ 111
grouping faders 126
grouping mutes 128
inserts 115
level setting 93
metering 109
Index
muting 93
naming 134
patching to 2TR digital outputs 70
patching to omni outs 69
patching to slot outputs 68
routing to 82
scene recall safe 167
viewing fader settings 130
viewing parameter settings 129
STEREO OUT +4 dB (BAL) 39
STEREO OUT –10 dBV (UNBAL) 39
Stereo out chapter 92
STEREO section 30
STOP button 32
STOP button, automix 174
STORE button 31
Store Confirmation preference 230
Storing
library memories 143
scene memories 164
STUDIO LEVEL control 34
Studio manager port setup 191
STUDIO MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL)
39
Studio monitoring 137
SURROUND BUS SETUP page 87
SURROUND MODE SELECT page 85
SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL
control 36
SURROUND MONITOR LIBRARY 152
SURROUND MONITOR page 138
SURROUND MONITOR PATCH page
141
SURROUND MONITOR SETUP page
139
Surround monitoring 138
configuring 139
library 152
patching slot inputs 141
patching to omni outs 69
patching to slot outputs 68
Surround pan
automix 170
aux send pan 124
channel page 89
edit page 88
features 18
joystick 87
selecting modes 85
using 85
Switching on the 02R96 43
SYMPHO 5.1 278
SYMPHONIC 263
T
Tabs, pages 45
Takeover mode, automix 172
Talkback
AD inputs 142
dimmer level 142
mic 34
setup 142
using 142
TALKBACK button 36
TALKBACK LEVEL control 34
TALKBACK SETUP page 142
Tascam I/O card 59
TC Drop Warning preference 231
Tempo, effects 156
Terminating wordclocks 57
THRESHOLD control 27
TIME REFERENCE page 177
Time signature map, automix 178
TIME SIGNATURE page 178
Timecode
automix source 177
capturing, automix 188
capturing, locate memories 224
capturing, setting memories 224
display 171
offset 171
Title edit window 46
Titling library memories 143
Titling scene memories 164
TO END 171
Touch Sense Edit In All preference 233
Touch sense in/out, automix 176
Touch sense select 49
Transmit channel 192
Transmitting bulk dump 195
Transport. See Data entry section
TREMOLO 265
Turning channels on or off. See Muting
Turning on the 02R96 43
Type I/II EQ 113
U
Undo automix 174
Undo scene memory 163
UPDATE 171
USB TO HOST port 40
drivers 190
MIDI 190
timecode source 177
USER ASSIGNABLE LAYER 228
USER DEFINED KEY ASSIGN page 229
USER DEFINED KEYS 1–16 31
USER DEFINED KEYS section
about 31
Pro Tools 206
using 229
User defined layer
automix 170
configuring 220
storing via bulk dump 195
using 221
User defined plug-ins
about 158
automix 170
configuring 159
editing 160
storing via bulk dump 195
UTILITY button 23
345
V
Variable mode, aux sends 98
Vertical pairing 123
VIEW button 23
Viewing channel fader settings
input channels 130
output channels 130
Viewing channel parameter settings
input channels 129
output channels 129
W
Waves Y56K plug-ins effects card 158
Web site 5
Welcome chapter 16
Windows
configuring for Pro Tools 196
MIDI port setup 191
USB driver 190
WORD CLOCK 75Ω ON/OFF
termination switch 41
WORD CLOCK IN connector 41
WORD CLOCK OUT connector 41
WORD CLOCK SELECT page 56
Wordclocks
about 55
connections 55
selecting the source 56
terminating 57
X
XLR connectors 37
Y
Y56K plug-ins effects card 158
Yamaha web site 5
YGDAI. See Slots
02R96 Version 2—Owner’s Manual
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol
within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert
the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The above warning is located on the top, side, or rear of the unit.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug
has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If
the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult
an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the apparatus.
11
12
13
14
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand,
tripod, bracket, or table specified
by the manufacturer, or sold with
the apparatus. When a cart is
used, use caution when moving
the cart/apparatus combination
to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during
lightning storms or when unused for long periods of
time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug
is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have
fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally,
or has been dropped.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
(UL60065_03)
02R96 Block Diagram
x 16
METER METER
COMP
INPUT 1(...56)
METER
(Gain Reduction)
AD Input
1-16
AD
PEAK
SIGNAL
GAIN
INPUT
(17-24)
ATT
4BAND
EQ
(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)
(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)
PRE/POST
COMP
ON
AUX
COMP
SLOT1
SLOT1 Input
1-16
SLOT2 Input
1-16
SLOT3 Input
1-16
SLOT4 Input
1-16
16
SLOT2
16
SLOT3
16
SLOT4
64
82
SELECT
INSERT OUT
FX2 SEND 1-2
SINE100Hz
SINE1kHz
SINE10kHz
SINE 1kHz/400Hz
PINK NOISE
BURST NOISE
FX4 SEND 1-2
2
2TR IN DIGITAL1
SRC
2
COAXIAL
To CASCADE OUTPUT
2TR OUT DIGITAL PATCH
STEREO
BUS1-8
AUX1-8
off
CONTROL ROOM
TB
AD
TALK BACK
2TR IN DIGITAL3
COAXIAL
SOLO TRIM
2TRD3 L/R
+18dB
+4dB
for each OMNI OUT
DA
L
AD
TRS
R
L
2TR IN ANALOG2
2TRA2 L/R
AD
RCA
R
10
TO MONITOR SELECT
AUX1-8
8
AUX1-8
SURROUND MONITOR
8
STEREO
BUS1-8
AUX1-8
2
DIRECT OUT 1-56
INSERT OUT
8
8
DA
BUS1-8
DITHER
2
COAXIAL
2
2TR OUT DIGITAL3
DA
L
STUDIO
LEVEL
STUDIO MONITOR OUT
DA
R
DA
SOLO LOGIC
DA
PHONES
LEVEL
PHONES
2
2
2
8
ASSIGN1
L
DA
CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT
DA
8
OUTPUT SOLO
ASSIGN2
R
C-R
LEVEL
BUS1-8 8
AUX1-8 8
OMNI OUT
DA
16
16
16
16
SURROUND MONITOR to C-R
6
16x8Patch
DITHER
DITHER
DITHER
DITHER
SLOT1 Input 1-16
SLOT2 Input 1-16
SLOT3 Input 1-16
SLOT4 Input 1-16
7
82
INPUT PATCH
2TR OUT DIGITAL2
AES/EBU
5
DA
SLOT1
SLOT2
SLOT3
SLOT4
2
4
DA
56
BUS1-8
2
8
3
DA
L
R
DITHER
CONTROL ROOM
STEREO L
STEREO R
MONITOR SELECT
2
8
OUTPUT PATCH
OMNI 1
OMNI 2
OMNI 3
OMNI 4
OMNI 5
OMNI 6
OMNI 7
OMNI 8
DA
8
BUS1-8
AUX1-8
2
2TRA1 L/R
TALKBACK DIMM
2TR IN ANALOG1
1
DA
2
STEREO
2TR D1
2TR D2
2TR D3
2TR A1
2TR A2
2TR OUT DIGITAL1
COAXIAL
AUX8
STEREO
SOLO R
2
DITHER
AUX7
AUX7
AUX8
SOLO L
2TRD2 L/R
SRC
2
8
8
DIRECT OUT1-56 56
INSERT OUT 74
USE AD IN (1-16)
AS TALKBACK
AD IN 1-16
2
TO INPUT PATCH
isolate
2TRD1 L/R
SRC
AUX1(...8)
CASCADE OUT
AES/EBU
2TR IN DIGITAL2
AUX1(...8)
ON
CASCADE IN
FX2 Return 1-2
FX3Return 1-2
FX4 Return 1-2
Sur1
BUS 1(...8)
BUS to STEREO
Same Above
LEVEL
FX1 Return 1-2
FX3 SEND 1-2
16
LEVEL
OSCILLATOR
EFFECT
FX1-4
BUS 1(...8)
TO INPUT PATCH
Sur1 Return 1-8
AUX1-8
OUTPUT
DELAY
4BAND
EQ
ON
FX1 SEND 1-8
8
METER
INSERT
ON LEVEL
PAN
TO SURROUND MONITOR
METER
ATT
DIRECT OUT 1(...56)
INSERT
METER
INSERT
Keyin
Self or Stereo Link
16
STEREO R
Same as stereo master L
LFE
METER METER
AD Input
17-24
AD
PAN
STEREO L
METER METER
Mono in x 56
AD IN 17(...24)
INPUT
DELAY
PAN
Keyin
12ch Group(1-12,13-24....)
AUX 1-8
TO TALKBACK SELECT
x8
GATE
INSERT
ON LEVEL
8
SLOT1
SLOT2
SLOT3
SLOT4
SLOT
16
8
PINK NOISE
16
8
16
8
500-2kHz
BPF
16
BUS1-8 or STEREO(Surr.Mode:ST)
8
8
SURROUND MONITOR
LEVEL
1kHz,50Hz
BUS
8
MONITOR
MATRIX
BASS
MANAGEMENT
MONITOR
ALLIGNMENT
DIMM
AD IN 1(...16)
INSERT
OUTPUT
DELAY
4BAND
EQ
ATT
TB
DIMM
INSERT
OFF
ON
SOLO
PAN
METER
MONO
INSERT I/O
(1-16)
METER (Out Meter)
METER
METER
INSERT
ON LEVEL
BAL
INSERT
METER
INSERT
DIMM
0
26
AUX 8
BUS1
BUS2
BUS3
BUS4
BUS5
BUS6
BUS7
BUS8
GAIN
PAD
B
AUX 1
PEAK
SIGNAL
A
SOLO L
SOLO R
ON
INPUT
(1-16)
(Gain Reduction) (Out Meter)
48V
PHANTOM
STEREO L
STEREO R
OFF
L
R
STEREO OUT
STEREO L
STEREO R
DA
DA
L
R
TO OUTPUT PATCH
02R96 Level Diagram
Analog
Analog
dBu
+24
+20
Digital
dBFS
0
INSERT
–20
–30
INPUT
PATCH
PHASE
GATE
INSERT
ATT.
EQ
INSERT
COMP
DELAY
ON
LEVEL
INSERT
PAN
BUS
Adder
INSERT
ATT.
EQ
INSERT
COMP
MASTER
ON
MASTER
LEVEL
INSERT
BAL
DELAY
OUTPUT
PATCH
Analog
Analog
DA
dBu
0
[+10dBu]
3
Nominal
Input
5
CASCADE IN
CASCADE OUT
Digital Clipping Level
[+18dBu]
2
4
–10
AD
Digital
Bit
1
+10
Max. Output
[+18dBu]
Nominal Output
[+4dBu]
[+4dBu]
GAIN MIN.,
PAD ON
–40
–50
7
–60
–40
–70
–80
–90
–70
Max.
Input [–46dBu]
CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT
STEREO OUT
STUDIO MONITOR OUT
OMNI OUT (default setting:18dB)
12
13
14
–60
15
–100
–110
–120
–100
–70
17
–80
18
–90
20
–100
21
–130
–110
–140
22
–110
23
–120
24
–120
–150
–130
25
–130
26
–160
–140
–170
27
–140
28
–150
29
–150
–180
–160
30
–160
31
–190
–170
–200
32
–210
DSP Noise Floor
–170
33
34
–180
–40
–60
GAIN MAX.,
PAD OFF
19
–90
–30
–50
Nominal
Input [–60dBu]
16
–80
+4
0
–20
OMNI OUT (4dB)
10
11
–50
+10
8
9
–30
+24
+20
–10
6
–20
–190
GAIN
Max.
Input [+24dBu]
–10
+4
0
PAD
Digital
–180
35
36
[0dBu = 0.775Vrms]
[0dBFS = Full Scale]
–190
YAMAHA [Digital Mixing Console-Internal Parameters]
Model: 02R96
Function...
Date: 20 Mar. 2002
MIDI Implementation Chart
Version: 1.0
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
1–16
1–16
1–16
1–16
Memorized
Memorized
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
X
X
**************
OMNI off/OMNI on
X
X
Note
Number
True Voice
X
**************
0–127
X
Velocity
Note On
Note Off
X
X
O
O
After
Key’s
Ch’s
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
Assignable
0–127
**************
0–127
0–99
Assignable
O
O
*1
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Prog
Change
0-95,102-119
:True#
System Exclusive
Effect Control
System
Common
:Song Pos
:Song Sel
:Tune
X
X
X
O
X
X
Automix
System
Real Time
:Clock
:Commands
X
X
O
O
Automix,
Effect Control
Aux
Messages
:Local ON/OFF
:All Notes OFF
:Active Sense
:Reset
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
Notes
MTC quarter frame message is recognized (MTC IN & MIDI IN).
*1: Bulk Dump/Request, Parameter Change/Request, and MMC.
For MIDI Remote, ALL messages can be transmitted.
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
O: Yes
X: No
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha
representative or the authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou
au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.
Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,
Col. Guadalupe del Moral
C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México
Tel: 55-5804-0600
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten
Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
ASIA
POLAND
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce
ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland
Tel: 022-868-07-57
THE NETHERLANDS/
BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG
Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux
Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands
Tel: 0347-358 040
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN/PORTUGAL
BRAZIL
Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.
Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,
CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL
Tel: 011-3704-1377
Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.
Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230
Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain
Tel: 91-639-8888
SWEDEN
ARGENTINA
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Sucursal de Argentina
Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte
Madero Este-C1107CEK
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Tel: 011-4119-7000
PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN
AMERICAN COUNTRIES/
CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.
Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,
Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,
Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá
Tel: +507-269-5311
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
NORWAY
Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB
Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 16 77 70
SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Branch Switzerland in Zürich
Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland
Tel: 01-383 3990
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-60203900
CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/
HUNGARY/SLOVENIA
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria
Tel: 01-602039025
Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.
2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,
Shanghai, China
Tel: 021-6247-2211
INDIA
Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.
5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex
Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India
Tel: 0124-466-5551
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 021-520-2577
KOREA
Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.
8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,
Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea
Tel: 02-3467-3300
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.
Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,
Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia
Tel: 03-78030900
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd.
#03-11 A-Z Building
140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015
Tel: 6747-4374
TAIWAN
Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.
3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.
Taiwan 104, R.O.C.
Tel: 02-2511-8688
THAILAND
RUSSIA
Yamaha Music (Russia)
Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,
121059, Russia
Tel: 495 626 5005
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: +49-4101-3030
GERMANY
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2303
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Music Europe GmbH
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Gulf FZE
LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel: +971-4-881-5868
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,
891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,
Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 02-215-2622
OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2303
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,
Victoria 3006, Australia
Tel: 3-9693-5111
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,
Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2303
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650
Tel: +81-53-460-2441
PA27
Yamaha Pro Audio Global Web Site
http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/
Yamaha Manual Library
http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/
U.R.G., Pro Audio Division
© 2004-2010 Yamaha Corporation
010IPTO-G0
Printed in Japan
WC42330